JP7633909B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that variably displays first identification information or second identification information based on the establishment of a start condition, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result.

A gaming machine has been proposed that displays a title to inform the user of the type of reach effect when the reach effect begins (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Also, a gaming machine has been disclosed that is equipped with a time-saving mode that selects a variation pattern with a short variation time. (Patent Document 2)

JP 2019-118411 A JP 2019-217007 A

However, there was room to improve the marketability of gaming machines with the functions and configurations described in Patent Documents 1 and 2.

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

The gaming machine of claim 1 comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position,
The game control means includes:
It is possible to determine whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state based on the entry of the game medium into the starting area,
A variable display of the specific identification information is possible,
Based on the result of the judgment, it is possible to determine one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command can be transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command can be transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command can be transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command can be transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means includes:
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state will be controlled in a first reach,
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state will be controlled in a second reach,
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The execution time of the title display corresponding to the first reach is different from the execution time of the title display corresponding to the second reach,
The title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach are
A first part from when a title display corresponding to the first reach or a title display corresponding to the second reach starts to when the title display is displayed in a specific area;
A second part in which a title display corresponding to the first reach or a title display corresponding to the second reach is displayed in the specific area;
and a third part that ends the display of a title display corresponding to the first reach or a title display corresponding to the second reach,
The display means is
displaying a title display corresponding to the first reach such that the second part is longer than the first part and the third part, and the first part is longer than the third part;
displaying a title display corresponding to the second reach such that the second part is longer than the first part and the third part, and the first part is longer than the third part,
The development pattern to the first reach includes a first pattern in which the movable body develops by moving, and a second pattern in which the movable body develops without moving,
The development pattern to the second reach includes the first pattern and the second pattern,
In the first reach of the first pattern, the movable body moves from the first position to the second position before a title display corresponding to the first reach starts, and after the movable body located at the second position moves to the first position, the title display corresponding to the first reach is displayed;
In the second reach of the first pattern, the movable body moves from the first position to the second position before a title display corresponding to the second reach starts, and after the movable body located at the second position moves to the first position, a title display corresponding to the second reach is displayed;
The second reach has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach,
the display means displays the title display corresponding to the second reach in a larger font size than the title display corresponding to the first reach,
In the first reach and the second reach, a light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table configured with brightness data,
When the title display corresponding to the first reach is executed, a title display brightness data table corresponding to the first reach is used;
In the introductory part after the title display corresponding to the first reach, a brightness data table for the first reach introductory part is used,
When the title display corresponding to the second reach is executed, a title display brightness data table corresponding to the second reach is used;
In the introductory part after the title display corresponding to the second reach, a luminance data table for the second reach introductory part is used,
a state control means for controlling a normal state and a special state which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to a player than the normal state;
The special states include a first special state and a second special state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special state;
The performance control means includes:
When the vehicle is controlled to the first special state, a first special display indicating the name of the first special state can be displayed on the display means,
A first specific change performance that changes the mode of the first special display can be executed,
When the vehicle is controlled to the second special state, a second special display indicating the name of the second special state can be displayed on the display means.
A second specific change performance that changes the mode of the second special display can be executed,
The period during which the state of the second special display in the second specific change performance changes is shorter than the period during which the state of the first special display in the first specific change performance changes;
It is characterized by the following.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific features described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific features described in the claims of the present invention as well as features other than the invention-specific features.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. A diagram showing the numerical range of a jackpot and the numerical range of a miss with time-saving in the variable display of the first special chart in normal state or time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A front view showing a pachinko gaming machine in characteristic section 131SG. This is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine in characteristic section 131SG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table, (C1) and (C2) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table, and (D) is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. An explanatory diagram showing a time-saving count determination table for each transition trigger. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern type determination table. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram showing the expectation level of the reach performance of the super reach. An explanatory diagram showing the difference in expectation between the reach effects of super reach. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance control command. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a data retention area for game control. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance control data storage area. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number value determination process when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. FIG. 2 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. An explanatory diagram showing the execution rate of the pre-reading preview performance. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the determination ratio of the stopping symbols. An explanatory diagram showing performance control patterns for different fluctuation patterns. An explanatory diagram showing performance control patterns for different fluctuation patterns. A diagram showing the flow of presentation during variable display in the normal state. A diagram showing the flow of presentation during variable display in the time-saving state A and the special probability state. A diagram showing the flow of presentation during variable display in time-saving state B. A figure showing the progression of images when a low base weak reach A performance is executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach A performance. A figure showing the progression of images when a low base weak reach B performance is executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach B performance. A figure showing the progression of images when a low base strong reach A performance is executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A performance. A figure showing the progression of images illustrating a bad example of a low base strong reach A presentation. A figure showing the progression of images when the low base strong reach B performance is executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A performance. A figure showing the transition of images when a low-base strongest reach performance is executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low-base strongest reach presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a transition of an image in a modified example of the title display part. A figure showing the progression of images when high base super reach A to D effects are executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of high base super reach A to D performances. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a position where title characters are displayed in a display area of an image display device. An explanatory diagram showing the presentation time of the super reach presentation. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the performance times of super reach performances. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title characters and decorative patterns of the Super Reach performance. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution status of the expectation degree suggestion display. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the transition of images when a selection effect is executed. An explanatory diagram showing the number of operations required until the selection effect switches to the next title and the execution rate of the super reach effect when the selection effect is executed. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of effects that can be executed during variable display. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of the execution ratio of effects that can be executed during variable display. A figure showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display performance. This is a timing chart showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display performance. A diagram showing the execution status of the title color change effect. A diagram showing the timing at which the color of the title characters changes in a title color change presentation. A diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion presentation A. A diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion presentation B. A diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion presentation C. A figure showing the execution status of operation promotion presentation D. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing a display mode of an operation prompting image. A diagram showing the execution status of the jackpot start performance. A diagram showing the display status of the remaining number of times until Yu-time. A diagram showing the execution status of the Yu-time start performance. There is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title text of the super reach performance, the explanatory text, the title text of the jackpot start performance, and the operation prompt text. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title characters of the Super Reach performance and the title characters of the Yu-Time start performance. A diagram showing the arrangement of game effect lamps. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a mechanism for outputting to an LED driver. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table; FIG. A figure showing a brightness data table used in super reach performance. A diagram showing the settings of the parent table of weak reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the child table of the weak reach common title. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of weak reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of weak reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of weak reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the parent table for the title Common Chance Up Red. A diagram showing the settings of the title common chance up red child table. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the Title Common Chance Up Red. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the Title Common Chance Up Red. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the Title Common Chance Up Red. A diagram showing the settings of the parent table for title common chance up money. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the settings of a title common chance up golden child table. A diagram showing the settings of the title common chance up money grandchild table. A diagram showing the settings of the title common chance up money grandchild table. A diagram showing the settings of the title common chance up money grandchild table. A diagram showing the settings of the parent table for the weak reach system weak reach A introduction. A diagram showing the settings of a child table for the weak reach system weak reach A introduction. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach A is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach A is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach A is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach A is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach A is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the parent table for the weak reach system weak reach B introduction. A diagram showing the settings of a child table for the weak reach system weak reach B introduction. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the parent table of strong reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the child table of the strong reach common title. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of strong reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of strong reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of strong reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of strong reach common titles. A diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table for the strong reach system strong reach A introduction. A diagram showing the setting contents of a child table for the strong reach system strong reach A introduction. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach A is introduced. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach A is introduced. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach A is introduced. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach A is introduced. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach A is introduced. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach A is introduced. This figure shows the setting contents of the parent table for the strong reach system strong reach B introduction. A diagram showing the settings of a child table for the strong reach system strong reach B introduction. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when strong reach B is introduced in the strong reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach B is introduced. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach B is introduced. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when strong reach B is introduced in the strong reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when strong reach B is introduced in the strong reach system. This figure shows the settings of the parent table for the introduction of the strongest reach title in the strongest reach series. A diagram showing the settings of a child table for the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. A diagram showing the settings of the parent table of high base reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the child table of the high base reach common title. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of high base reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of high base reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of high base reach common titles. This figure shows the settings of the parent table for the introduction of high base reach system Reach A. A diagram showing the settings of the child table for the introduction of high base reach system reach A. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when high base reach system reach A is introduced. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when high base reach system reach A is introduced. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when high base reach system reach A is introduced. This figure shows the settings of the parent table for the introduction of high base reach system Reach B. A diagram showing the settings of the child table for the introduction of high base reach system reach B. A diagram showing the settings of the parent table for the introduction of high base reach system Reach C. A diagram showing the settings of the child table for the introduction of high base reach system reach C. A diagram showing the settings of the parent table for the introduction of high base reach system reach D. A diagram showing the settings of the child table for the introduction of high base reach system reach D. This figure shows the relationship between the timing and brightness data that make up the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A front view of the pachinko game machine 1 at characteristic portion 152F. FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. An explanatory diagram showing a hit determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. 13 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols. This is a flowchart showing the processing before the small win is released. This is a flowchart showing the processing during small win release. This is a flowchart showing the small hit end processing. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a winning type table. 13A is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. An explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for normal conditions. An explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for the time-saving state. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation pattern related to a high-speed time-saving small win. This is a time chart showing the timing of execution of effects related to missed entry fluctuations. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to a missed entry variation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to a missed entry variation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to a missed entry variation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to a missed entry variation. This is a time chart showing the timing of execution of the effects related to pseudo-fluctuation misses. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to a pseudo-variation miss. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to a pseudo-variation miss. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation style related to a direct jackpot. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state (Dream RUSH). FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state (Dream RUSH). FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for a time-saving state (ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH). FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for a time-saving state (ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH). FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for a time-saving state (ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH). An explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for the b time-saving state (invincible RUSH). An explanatory diagram showing a control table after a win for each game state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. A flowchart showing an example of a small hit end processing. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a game flow. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode regarding the varying display of decorative symbols in Dream Rush. FIG. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect relating to a first logo periodic change presentation, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect relating to a second logo periodic change presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode regarding the variable display of decorative symbols in ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH. FIG. 2 is a front view of the movable body, the logo panel, and the image display device. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the first change presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the first change presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the second change presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the second change presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the first pre-reading presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the first pre-reading presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the second pre-reading presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to the second pre-reading presentation. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining the presentation at the time of starting winning. FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram showing a final display mode determination table for active display, and FIGS. 13B1 and 13B2 are explanatory diagrams showing change pattern determination tables. 13(B3) and (B4) are explanatory diagrams showing a change pattern determination table. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a presentation mode determination table for change presentations. FIG. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a decision table for determining whether or not to execute the first pre-reading performance, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing a decision table for determining whether or not to execute the second pre-reading performance. A flowchart showing an example of a process for determining the performance during a jackpot. This is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining the performance during a small win. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining a presentation when waiting for the start of a fluctuation. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance determination process at the start of fluctuation. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining a performance during fluctuation. This is a time chart showing the timing of the execution of the effects when a normal jackpot of pattern 3R occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a normal jackpot of pattern 3R occurs. This is a time chart showing the timing of the execution of the effects when a time-saving jackpot of pattern 10Ra occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a time-saving jackpot of pattern 10Ra occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a time-saving jackpot of pattern 10Ra occurs. This is a time chart showing the timing of the execution of the effects when a 10Rb time-saving jackpot occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a 10Rb time-saving jackpot occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a 10Rb time-saving jackpot occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a 10Rb time-saving jackpot occurs. This is a time chart showing the timing of the execution of effects when a jackpot occurs, with the jackpot occurrence count value = 3. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a jackpot occurs, with the jackpot occurrence count value = 3. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a jackpot occurs, with the jackpot occurrence count value = 3. This is a time chart showing the timing of the execution of the effects when a normal small win occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a normal small hit occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a normal small hit occurs. An explanatory diagram showing a relationship table between firing intervals and reserved consumption periods. This is a time chart showing the relationship between winning intervals, reserved consumption period, and second reserved memory number. This is a time chart showing the relationship between winning intervals, reserved consumption period, and second reserved memory number. This is a time chart showing the relationship between winning intervals, reserved consumption period, and second reserved memory number.

[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special pattern, second special pattern),
The feature of this invention is that decorative identification information (decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach performance), and in the title display part in the specific reach, a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed using the display position of the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) that has become the reach state.
According to this feature, when decorative identification information is displayed in a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative identification information has reached the reach state. Therefore, by displaying the title display corresponding to the specific reach using the display position of the decorative identification information that has reached the reach state in the title display part in the specific reach, the player can naturally pay attention to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed preferably.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 1-1,
The decorative identification information is displayed in a reach state of a first size (decorative pattern (large)) before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach performance), and then the decorative identification information (decorative pattern (large)) displayed in the reach state is displayed in a second size (decorative pattern (small)) smaller than the first size, and the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach performance) is displayed using the display position of the decorative identification information (decorative pattern (small)) displayed in the second size.
According to this feature, the decorative identification information displayed in a first size becomes a second size, thereby attracting the player's attention, and by using the display position of the decorative identification information of the second size to display a title display corresponding to a specific reach, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 1-1 or 1-2,
In the title display part in the specific reach, at the timing when the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) which has become the reach state is displayed, a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) which has become the reach state.
According to this feature, at the timing when decorative identification information that has become a reach state is displayed in the title display part in a specific reach, the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative identification information that has become the reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-3,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) and a second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach,
The title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach are characterized in that they appear overlapping with one of the decorative identification information (the decorative pattern on the left) of the decorative identification information that has reached the reach state.
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach appear overlapping with one of the decorative identification information of the decorative identification information that has reached the reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title displays.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-5 is the gaming machine according to aspect 1-4,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a third reach (low base strongest reach effect) having a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect),
The title display corresponding to the third reach is characterized in that it appears overlapping both decoration identification information (decorative patterns on both sides) that have entered the reach state.
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the third reach, which has a higher expectation of being controlled to a more favorable state than the first reach and the second reach, appears overlapping with both decorative identification information that have reached the reach state, so that the title display corresponding to the third reach can be displayed in a more impactful manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-6 is the gaming machine according to aspect 1-5,
The title display corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the title display corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), and the title display corresponding to the third reach (low base strongest reach performance) are characterized in that they appear overlapping with one of the decorative identification information (decorative pattern on the left) or both of the decorative identification information (decorative patterns on both sides) of the decorative identification information that has reached the reach state, and are then displayed in a fixed position and are displayed overlapping with part of the decorative identification information (decorative patterns on both sides) that has reached the reach state even during the period in which they are displayed in the fixed position.
According to this feature, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display even after the title display has been displayed in its fixed position.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means,
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not the game medium (game ball) is controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA and PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special pattern, second special pattern),
A first decoration identification information (an odd-numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before a title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), and a title display (title characters) is displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (an odd-numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state;
In the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the second decoration identification information (even numbered decoration pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part, and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even numbered decoration pattern) that has become the reach state,
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
The present invention is characterized in that the second decorative identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), and in the title display part, the title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the second decorative identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state.
According to this feature, when decorative identification information is displayed in a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative identification information has reached the reach state. Therefore, by displaying the title display corresponding to the first reach and the second reach using the display position of the decorative identification information that has reached the reach state in the title display part in the first reach and the second reach, the player can naturally pay attention to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed preferably.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 2-1,
A feature of this invention is that the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) differs between when the first decorative identification information (odd-numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state and when the second decorative identification information (even-numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state.
According to this feature, when decorative identification information is displayed in a reach state, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on which decorative identification information has reached the reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title display.

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means,
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not the game medium (game ball) is controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to PB2-12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to PB1-13) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-13 to PB2-15) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected as one of the fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA and PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-11 to PB1-13) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-13 to PA2-15) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strongest reach presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strongest reach presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The third reach (low-base strongest reach presentation) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special pattern, second special pattern),
A first decoration identification information (an odd-numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before a title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), and a title display (title characters) is displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (an odd-numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state;
In the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the second decoration identification information (even numbered decoration pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part, and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even numbered decoration pattern) that has become the reach state,
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
The second decoration identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach performance), and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
The present invention is characterized in that the second decorative identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach performance), and in the title display part, the title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the second decorative identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state.
According to this feature, when decorative identification information is displayed in a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative identification information has reached the reach state. Therefore, by displaying the title displays corresponding to the first reach, second reach, and third reach using the display position of the decorative identification information that has reached the reach state in the title display part in the first reach, second reach, and third reach, the player can naturally pay attention to the title displays, and as a result, the title display can be performed preferably.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special pattern, second special pattern),
A decoration identification information (decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before a title display part in the specific reach (super reach performance), and a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the title display part in the specific reach so as to use the display position of the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of reach A of high base reach system, introduction of reach B of high base reach system, introduction of reach C of high base reach system, introduction of reach D of high base reach system).
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is displayed in a reach state, the player pays attention to which decoration identification information has become the reach state, so by displaying the title display corresponding to the specific reach using the display position of the decoration identification information that has become the reach state in the title display part in the specific reach, the player can naturally pay attention to the title display as well. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not the game medium (game ball) is controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to PB1-7) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected as one of the fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern (the variation pattern designation command designating PA2-3) is determined, a second command is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-5 to PB7) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-7 to PA2-9) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the first reach (low base weak reach B presentation),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach B effect),
The first reach (low base weak reach B effect) and the second reach (low base strong reach B effect) are reaches in which a plurality of characters are used,
The first reach (low base weak reach B performance) is a reach in which a first character in the first reach (ally character "Yume Yume") and a second character in the first reach (enemy character "Boingo") are used, and it is notified that the first character (ally character "Yume Yume") will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The second reach (low base strong reach B performance) is a reach in which a first character in the second reach (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") and a second character in the second reach (enemy character "Robo") are used, and it is notified that the first character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") will be controlled to the advantageous state.
The display means (image display device 5)
The introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach B performance) starts with a display in which the first character in the second reach (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") is arranged in the foreground and the second character in the second reach (enemy character "Robo") is arranged in the background,
The introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach B presentation) is characterized in that it starts with a display in which the first character in the first reach (ally character "Yume Yume") is not in the foreground and the second character in the second reach (enemy character "Boingo") is not in the background.
According to this feature, for the second reach, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, the first character, which is notified that the situation will be controlled to an advantageous state, starts from an arrangement in which the first character is at the front and the second character is at the back, allowing the player to empathize and making it easier for the player to intuitively recognize that the degree of expectation is high, resulting in an optimal title display.

The gaming machine of aspect 5-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 5-1,
The first characters are characters who receive benefits if they win a battle (ally characters “Jam” and “Nana”),
The second character is a character (enemy character "robot") to which no benefit is given if the second character wins a battle,
At the start of the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation), the first characters (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") are displayed in a position in front with their backs to you, and the second character (enemy character "Robo") is displayed in a position in the back facing you, with the first character and the second character facing each other.
According to this feature, for the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation, the player's direction and the first character's direction are the same, making it easier for the player to empathize with the character and for the player to recognize that the expectation is high.

The gaming machine of aspect 5-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 5-1 or 5-2,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation), the first character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") and the second character (enemy character "Robo") are displayed at a position including the display area in which the title display (title characters) was displayed in the title display part.
According to this feature, when a player who has been paying attention to the title display disappears, his or her gaze is naturally drawn to the first and second characters.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not the game medium (game ball) is controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA and PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is determined, a second command is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) has a higher expectation of being controlled into the advantageous state (jackpot game state) than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) has a longer execution time than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The first reach and the second reach are reaches in which dialogue subtitles are used,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), a title display (title text) and dialogue subtitles are displayed,
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the dialogue subtitles that were displayed in the title display part in the first reach are continuously displayed,
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), dialogue subtitles are not displayed, but the title display (title text) is displayed.
According to this feature, during the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation and a long execution time, the title display and dialogue subtitles are displayed so as not to overlap as much as possible, while during the first reach, which has a relatively low expectation and a short execution time, even if the dialogue subtitles and title display overlap, the title display is ended first so that the player can also focus on the dialogue subtitles. This makes it possible to provide the title display and dialogue subtitles to the player in an optimal manner, and as a result, the title display can be performed in an optimal manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 6-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 6-1,
When a title display (title characters) and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) are displayed in the title display part, in the subsequent introductory part, the performance scene is not switched until the display of the dialogue subtitles that were displayed simultaneously with the title display (title characters) ends.
According to this feature, when a title display corresponding to the first reach and a dialogue subtitle are displayed in the title display part in the first reach, in the subsequent introductory part, the scene of the performance does not change until the display of the dialogue subtitle that was displayed simultaneously with the title display ends, so that attention can be drawn to the title display and then to the dialogue subtitle.

The gaming machine of aspect 6-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 6-1 or 6-2,
This is characterized in that when a title display (title characters) and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) are displayed in the title display part in the first reach, audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output, while audio corresponding to the title display (title characters) is not output.
According to this feature, when a title display and dialogue subtitles are displayed simultaneously, audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output while audio corresponding to the title display is not output, making it easier to hear the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that a specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The title display of the specific reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is composed of multiple characters ("Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!", "Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B to D)"),
The display means (image display device 5) starts displaying the title display (title characters) of the specific reach in a first size (enlarged size) in which only a part of the multiple characters is visible in the title display part in the specific reach, and displays the title display (title characters) of the specific reach so that the display size is gradually reduced from the first size to a second size (reduced size) in which all of the multiple characters are visible,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (strongest reach title of the strongest reach type, high base reach common title of the high base reach type);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of strongest reach system strongest reach, introduction of high base reach system reach A (introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D)).
According to this feature, in the title display part in the specific reach, the display is performed in a first size in which only some of the characters are visible, and then the size gradually decreases until all the characters are visible, so that the player can focus on the title display. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 7-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 7-1,
Before the title display part of the specific reach (low-base strongest reach performance) starts, a movable object (movable body 32) is moved so as to overlap with the front side of the display means (image display device 5),
During the period from when the movable object moves to when it returns to its initial position (falling effect), a background corresponding to the movement of the movable object (background dedicated to the falling effect) is displayed, and when the movable object returns to its initial position, a title display (title characters) is displayed at a first size (enlarged size) in which not all of the multiple characters are visible and the display area of the display means is filled so that the background becomes unvisible, and then a title display at a second size (reduced size) and a background corresponding to the title display (background dedicated to the title display) are displayed.
According to this feature, the reach title display method creates an impact while at the same time switching the background without creating an awkward feeling, allowing the title display to be viewed favorably by the player.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that a specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The title display of the specific reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is composed of multiple characters ("Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!", "Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B to D)"),
The display means (image display device 5) displays, in the title display part in the specific reach, a plurality of characters from a state where the plurality of characters are displayed (a state where the plurality of characters are displayed in a fixed position at a reduced size) in an enlarged manner (enlarged until the entire display area is filled with a portion of the title characters), thereby ending the title display part, and displays a display corresponding to the introduction part in the specific reach (the background at the start of the introduction part) so as to be visible;
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (strongest reach title of the strongest reach type, high base reach common title of the high base reach type);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of strongest reach system strongest reach, introduction of high base reach system reach A (introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D)).
According to this feature, the player pays attention to the title display during the title display part, and the title display can be used appropriately to seamlessly switch to the display corresponding to the next introduction part. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

[Mode 9]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not the game medium (game ball) is controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA and PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The execution time (T1-1 to T2) of the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is different from the execution time (T2-1 to T2-3) of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
The title display part is composed of a first part (title start period) from when the title display starts to when it is displayed at a fixed position, a second part (title display period) that is displayed at the fixed position, and a third part (title end period) from when the title display starts to when it is displayed at the fixed position to when it is ended,
The display means (image display device 5)
In a title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), a title display (title characters) is displayed so that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period);
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the title display (title characters) is displayed so that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period).
According to this feature, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach and the second reach, the second part displayed at the fixed position is made the longest, so that attention can be drawn to the type of title display. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach and the second reach, the first part until it is displayed at the fixed position is made longer than the third part from the display at the fixed position until the display ends, so that it is possible to incite which title display will be displayed. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach and the second reach, the title display part can be made easier to understand by making the relationship of the execution times of the first part, second part, and third part the same.

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not the game medium (game ball) is controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a normal state) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (a miss fluctuation pattern in a normal state) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a high probability state) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (a miss fluctuation pattern in a high probability state) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a normal state) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a deviation variation pattern in a normal state) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern in a probability variation state) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern in a probability variation state) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the first reach (super reach presentation in the normal state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach presentation in a normal state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state will be controlled in the second reach (super reach performance in the probability change state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach presentation in a probability variable state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (super reach effect in a normal state) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The execution time (T1-1 to T2-1 to T3, T3) of the title display part in the first reach (super reach performance in normal state) is different from the execution time (T4) of the title display part in the second reach (super reach performance in the probability change state),
The first reach (super reach effect in a normal state) is a reach executed in a normal state, and the second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is a reach executed in a special state (probability variable state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The title display part is composed of a first part (title start period) from when the title display starts to when it is displayed at a fixed position, a second part (title display period) that is displayed at the fixed position, and a third part (title end period) from when the title display starts to when it is displayed at the fixed position to when it is ended,
The display means (image display device 5)
displaying a title display (title characters) in a title display part in the first reach (super reach effect in a normal state) such that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period);
In the title display part in the second reach (super reach performance in a probability variable state), the title display (title characters) is displayed so that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period).
According to this feature, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the second part displayed in the fixed position is made the longest, so that the type of title display can be drawn to. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the first part until it is displayed in the fixed position is made longer than the third part until it is displayed in the fixed position and ends, so that it is possible to inspire which title display will be displayed. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the title display part can be made easier to understand by making the relationship between the execution times of the first part, the second part, and the third part common.

The gaming machine of aspect 10-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 10-1,
The execution time (T4) of the title display part in the second reach (super reach performance in a special probability state) is shorter than the execution time (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) of the title display part in the first reach (super reach performance in a normal state).
According to this feature, the execution time of the title display part in the second reach executed in the special state is relatively short, allowing the special state to progress at a good pace, while the execution time of the title display part in the first reach executed in the normal state is relatively long, allowing for strong excitement.

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The title display part is composed of a first part (title start period) from when the title display starts to when it is displayed at a fixed position, a second part (title display period) that is displayed at the fixed position, and a third part (title end period) from when the title display starts to when it is displayed at the fixed position to when it is ended,
the display means (image display device 5) displays a title display (title characters) in a title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect) such that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period);
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of reach A of high base reach system, introduction of reach B of high base reach system, introduction of reach C of high base reach system, introduction of reach D of high base reach system).
According to this feature, the second part displayed at the fixed position is made the longest, thereby drawing attention to the type of title display. Also, the first part until it is displayed at the fixed position is made longer than the third part from the display at the fixed position until the display ends, thereby making it possible to arouse interest in which title display is to be displayed. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the title display that is different from the luminance data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means includes:
It is possible to display the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects) in a first mode (white mode) and the title display corresponding to the specific reach in a second mode (red mode) having a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than in the first mode,
In the title display part (title display part shown in FIG. 11-43) in the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance), an expectation indication corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in a first size, and then a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in a second size larger than the first size,
In both cases of displaying the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach in the first mode (white mode) and displaying the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach in the second mode (red mode), the expectation degree suggestion display is displayed in a common mode;
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (strongest reach title of the strongest reach type, strong reach common title of the strong reach type),
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (strong reach system strong reach C introduction, strongest reach system strongest reach introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the specific reach is larger in size than the expectation suggestion display, and since the expectation is suggested by its appearance, it attracts the player's attention, but by displaying the expectation suggestion display before the title display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the expectation suggestion first. Also, since the expectation suggestion display is performed in a common manner whether the title display is displayed in the first manner or the second manner, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the appearance of the subsequent title display.

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to PB1-7) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to PB2-9) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-8 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-10 to PB2-12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected as one of the fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-5 to PB7) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-7 to PA2-9) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-8 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-10 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the first reach (low base strong reach B presentation),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach C presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach C presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base strong reach B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach C performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach C effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base strong reach B effect),
The display means is
In the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach B performance), an expectation indication is displayed in the first mode (3.5 stars),
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach C performance), the expectation indication display is displayed in the second mode (four stars),
A highlight display is displayed so as to be common between the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach B performance) and the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach C performance),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach B title) for the title display part of the first reach,
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach C title) for the title display part of the second reach,
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base strong reach B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach B introduction) for the introduction part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach C presentation), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach C introduction) for the introductory part of the second reach.
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by using the same highlighting whether the expectation level indication is displayed in the first mode in the title display part in the first reach or the second mode in the title display part in the second reach. Also, in the title display parts in the first reach and the second reach, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display of the first reach and the second reach that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part of the first reach and the second reach, so that the light emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light emitting mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be made to be suitable.

The gaming machine of aspect 13-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 13-1,
The expectation indication display is composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects),
The first reach (low base strong reach B performance) is indicated by N (N is an integer) + 0.5 (3.5) objects,
The second reach (low base strong reach C performance) is indicated by N+1 (4) objects.
The expectation indication is characterized in that each object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, and the highlighting is performed in a common manner whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 object is highlighted.
According to this feature, whether highlighting one object or 0.5 objects, the highlighting is performed in a common manner, thereby reducing development costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 13-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 13-2,
The expectation degree suggestion display is characterized in that the time during which one object (star-shaped object) is highlighted and the time during which 0.5 object (star-shaped object) is highlighted are the same.
According to this feature, the time during which one object is highlighted and the time during which 0.5 objects are highlighted are made common, thereby making it possible to reduce development costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 13-4 is the gaming machine according to aspect 13-2 or 13-3,
The expectation level indication display is characterized in that a common emphasis sound (expectation level indication sound) is output whether one object (star-shaped object) is highlighted or 0.5 object (star-shaped object) is highlighted.
According to this feature, the same sound is output whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted, thereby reducing development costs.

[Form 14]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) can be displayed,
In the expectation indication display in the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect), the first object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, then, while continuing the highlighting of the first object (star-shaped object), the second object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, and then, the highlighting of the first object (star-shaped object) is ended and the third object (star-shaped object) is highlighted.
According to this feature, in the title display part in a specific reach, an expectation suggestion display consisting of a plurality of objects can be displayed, and in the expectation suggestion display, highlighting of the second object begins before highlighting of the first object ends, but highlighting of the third object does not begin until highlighting of the first object ends, making it easier to recognize the number of objects suggesting expectation.

The gaming machine of aspect 14-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 14-1,
The expectation level indication display is characterized in that an emphasis sound (expectation level indication sound) is output each time an object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, and after the output of the emphasis sound (expectation level indication sound) for the highlighting of one object (star-shaped object) has been completed, an emphasis sound (expectation level indication sound) for the highlighting of the next object is output.
According to this feature, the emphasis sound for highlighting one object and the emphasis sound for highlighting the next object do not overlap, making it easier to recognize the number of objects suggesting the degree of expectation.

The gaming machine of aspect 14-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 14-1 or 14-2,
The expectation indication is composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) and characters (characters "expectation");
The object (star-shaped object) is highlighted in a size that overlaps with the text (text "Expectation").
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to both the multiple objects and characters that make up the expectation level suggestion display by highlighting the objects.

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
A plurality of pending displays corresponding to variable displays that have not yet started can be displayed;
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) can be displayed,
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance), the hold display is not displayed at the same time as the expectation suggestion display,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a strong reach type common title, a strongest reach type strongest reach title, and a high base reach type common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of strongest reach system strongest reach, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D).
According to this feature, in the title display part in a specific reach, an expectation indication consisting of a plurality of objects is displayed, while by not displaying the hold indication at the same time as the expectation indication, it is possible to prevent the hold indication from being mistakenly recognized as an expectation indication. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 15-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 15-1,
The maximum number of active displays corresponding to the pending displays and the started variable displays is characterized by being equal to the maximum number (five) of objects (star-shaped objects) constituting the expectation indication display.
According to this feature, even if a specific reach occurs when the maximum number of pending and active displays are displayed, it is possible to prevent the pending and active displays from being mistakenly recognized as the maximum number of objects that make up the expectation indication display.

The gaming machine of aspect 15-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 15-1 or 15-2,
The hold display is terminated when the display means (image display device 5) displays in monochrome before the title display part starts.
This feature allows the hold display to end without any awkwardness.

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not the game medium (game ball) is controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to 4/PB1-14) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 6/PA2-16) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to 7/PB1-15) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-17) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-8 to 10/PB1-16) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-10 to 12/PA2-18) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-4/PB1-14) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-6/PA2-16) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-5 to PB1-7/PB1-15) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-7 to PA2-9/PA2-17) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-8 to PB1-10/PB1-16) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-10 to 12/PA2-18) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A presentation/high base reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation/high base reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach C presentation/high base reach C presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part in the first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a first number (3) of objects (star-shaped objects) can be displayed,
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a second number (3.5) of objects (star-shaped objects) that is greater than the first number can be displayed,
In the title display part in the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a third number (4) of objects (star-shaped objects) greater than the second number can be displayed,
the difference between the first number and the second number is the same as the difference between the second number and the third number (0.5);
The difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) is executed and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) is executed is greater than the difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) is executed and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance) is executed.
According to this feature, when the number of objects displayed as an expectation level indication display in the title display part increases from a first number to a second number, the increase in the number of objects is the same as when the number of objects increases from the second number to a third number, but the increase in the expectation level of being controlled to an advantageous state is greater when the number of objects increases from the second number to the third number than when the number of objects increases from the first number to the second number. Therefore, as the number of objects increases, the player can expect that the number of objects will be controlled to an advantageous state relative to the increased number of objects, while not being overly hopeful that the number of objects will be controlled to an advantageous state when the number of objects is small.

The gaming machine of aspect 16-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 16-1,
The plurality of fluctuation patterns include a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to 13/PB1-17) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-13 to 15/PA2-19) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-11 to PB1-13/PB1-17) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-13 to 15/PA2-19) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strongest reach effect/high base reach D effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The fourth reach (low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means is capable of displaying an expectation indication display consisting of a fourth number (4.5) object (star-shaped object) that is greater than the third number in a title display part in the fourth reach (low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance),
the difference between the third number and the fourth number (0.5) is smaller than the difference between the first number and the third number (1);
The difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the fourth reach (low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance) is executed and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) is executed is greater than the difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) is executed and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance) is executed.
According to this feature, the increase in the number of objects displayed as an expectation level indication display in the title display part is smaller when the number of objects increases from the third number to the fourth number than when it increases from the first number to the third number, but the increase in the expectation level that will be controlled to an advantageous state is greater when the number increases from the third number to the fourth number than when it increases from the first number to the third number. Therefore, the more the number of objects increases, the more it can be expected that the object will be controlled to an advantageous state even if the number of increased objects is small.

The gaming machine of aspect 16-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 16-2,
The difference between the third number and the fourth number is 0.5, and the difference between the first number and the third number is 1.
According to this feature, it can be expected that the number of objects displayed as an expectation level indication in the title display part will be controlled in a more favorable state when it increases by 0.5 from the third number to the fourth number, rather than when it increases by 1 from the first number to the third number.
The gaming machine of aspect 16-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 16-1 to 16-3,
The difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (high base reach C performance) is executed in a special state (probable change state) which is more advantageous than the normal state and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (high base reach B performance) is executed is greater than the difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C performance) is executed in the normal state and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B performance) is executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to expect that a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state will be controlled to be an advantageous state when the number of objects displayed as an expectation level indication in the title display part increases.

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to PB2-12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA and PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) are both reaches executed in a normal state, and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is longer than the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), an expectation indication is displayed,
The expectation indication is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach common title) for the title display part of the first reach,
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (common title for strong reach) for the title display part of the second reach,
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introduction part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction) for the introductory part of the second reach.
According to this feature, the title display part in the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation, is longer than the title display part in the first reach, which has a relatively low expectation, and while an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the second reach, an expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach, so that the player can physically recognize that the expectation of the second reach is higher than that of the first reach. Also, in the title display parts in the first reach and the second reach, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display of the first reach and the second reach, which is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach and the second reach, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

The gaming machine of aspect 17-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 17-1,
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is composed of a prologue part (prologue display period) and a character display part (title start period, title display period, title end period),
The title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) does not have a prologue part (prologue display period) and is composed only of character display parts (title start period, title display period, title end period),
The character display part of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance).
According to this feature, since the character display part of the title display part in the second reach is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the first reach, the player can intuitively recognize that the second reach has a higher expectation than the first reach.

The gaming machine of aspect 17-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 17-1 or 17-2,
The reach is executed in the normal state, and includes a third reach (low base strongest reach presentation) having a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second reach (low base strong reach A to C presentation),
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is composed of a prologue part (prologue display period) and a character display part (title start period, title display period, title end period),
The title display part in the third reach (low-base strongest reach performance) does not have a prologue part (prologue display period), and is composed only of text display parts (title start period, title display period, title end period),
The character display part of the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach performance) is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance).
According to this feature, since the character display part of the title display part in the third reach is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the second reach, the player can intuitively recognize that the third reach has a higher expectation than the second reach.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-2, 5, 8) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2 to 3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2, 5, 8) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 to PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) can be executed,
When the second command is received, the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) can be executed,
When the third command is received, the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) can be executed,
When the fourth command is received, the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) can be executed,
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) are both reaches executed in a normal state,
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is a reach that does not notify the fact that it will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) as a performance result, and may be a reach that notifies the fact that it will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) as a performance result, or may be a reach that executes another reach (super reach performance).
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is a reach that has a performance result in which it is notified that the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) will be controlled, and in which it is notified that the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) will not be controlled,
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until it is notified whether the other reach is executed,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), an expectation indication is displayed,
The expectation indication is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach common title) for the title display part of the first reach,
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (common title for strong reach) for the title display part of the second reach,
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introduction part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction) for the introductory part of the second reach.
According to this feature, while an expectation indication is displayed in the title display part in the second reach where it may be directly notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, an expectation indication is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach where it is not directly notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, so that it is possible to prevent the first reach from causing an excessive sense of expectation. Also, in the title display parts in the first reach and the second reach, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display of the first reach and the second reach that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part of the first reach and the second reach, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 18-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 18-1,
The title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is characterized in that it is possible to display a title display (title characters) in a confirmed state (gold) that confirms that another reach (super reach performance) will be executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention even to the title display part in the first reach where the expectation indication display is not displayed.

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach) may be executed via a selection effect using a title display (title characters) corresponding to a plurality of reaches (super reach effects) including the specific reach,
The display means includes:
It is possible to display an expectation indication together with the title indication (title characters) in the title display part and the selection effect of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach),
When displaying the expectation indication in the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach), a expectation indication consisting of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) is displayed in stages,
When the expectation indication display is displayed in the selection performance, the expectation indication display consisting of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) is not displayed in stages.
According to this feature, when an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part of a specific reach, the expectation suggestion display made up of a plurality of objects is displayed in stages, whereas when an expectation suggestion display is displayed in a selection performance, the expectation suggestion display made up of a plurality of objects is not displayed in stages, thereby eliminating the annoyance of the expectation suggestion display being displayed in stages not only in the title display part but also in the selection performance preceding it.

The gaming machine of aspect 19-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 19-1,
The selection effect is an effect that changes stepwise from a reach with low expectation (super reach effect) to a reach with high expectation (super reach effect) by operating the effect operation means (push button 31B),
The time required for the selection effect to change by one step (the minimum time required to switch to the title image of the next super reach effect) may be shorter than the time required for the expectation indication display of the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach) to display by one step (the time it takes for a star-shaped object to change from black to highlighted and then to gold).
This characteristic makes it possible to impart a sense of speed to the gradual changes in the selection presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect 19-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 19-2,
The selection presentation is a presentation that changes step by step from the current reach (super reach presentation) to a reach (super reach presentation) with one step higher expectation, and is characterized in that the number of operations of the presentation operation means (push button 31B) required to change to the next stage increases with each step change.
According to this feature, the higher the expectation of a reach, the more impatient the player can be.

The gaming machine of aspect 19-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 19-1 to 19-3,
When the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach) is selected by the selection effect, the game starts from the title display part.
According to this feature, even when a specific reach is executed via a selection performance, the game starts from the title display part, so that it is easy for the player to determine which reach has ultimately been executed.

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the game to the advantageous state, a name display of the advantageous state (title character of the big win start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed.
The advantageous state name display (title character of the big win start performance) is displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title display corresponding to the specific reach (title character of the super reach performance),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of reach A of high base reach system, introduction of reach B of high base reach system, introduction of reach C of high base reach system, introduction of reach D of high base reach system).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the title display is performed is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and the game can be celebrated by moving the advantageous state name display more greatly. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 20-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 20-1,
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach B, C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D), when the title display (title character) is displayed, a background dedicated to the title display is displayed,
The background of the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is characterized by being displayed in a manner with greater movement than the background dedicated to the title display.
According to this feature, the background of the advantageous state name display can be moved more dramatically to celebrate being in an advantageous state.

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introductory part (operation prompting performance B, D) of the specific reach (super reach performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) for prompting the player to take an action can be displayed.
The promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is displayed in a manner in which the movement is larger than that of the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of reach A of high base reach system, introduction of reach B of high base reach system, introduction of reach C of high base reach system, introduction of reach D of high base reach system).
According to this feature, the prompting character display displayed in the introduction part prompts the player to take an action, and by moving it more than the title display displayed in the title display part, the player can be intuitively prompted to take an action. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed suitably.

The gaming machine of aspect 21-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 21-1,
In the introductory part of the specific reach (super reach effect), a special prompting character display (operation prompting character (large)) that prompts the player to take an action and suggests a more advantageous situation than the prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) can be displayed;
The feature of this invention is that both the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) and the special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) are displayed in a manner that shows greater movement than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, whether the promotion character display or the special promotion character display is moved more than the title display displayed in the title display part, the player can be intuitively prompted to take an action.

The gaming machine of aspect 21-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 21-1 or 21-2,
The number of characters (3) of the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is less than the number of characters (7 to 13) of the title display (title characters).
According to this feature, since the number of characters in the promotional text display is smaller than the number of characters in the title display, the content of the text can be recognized even if the text is moved widely.

[Mode 22]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display an explanatory character display (explanatory character) that is different from the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) and explains the content of the specific reach,
The explanatory character display (explanatory character) is displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of reach A of high base reach system, introduction of reach B of high base reach system, introduction of reach C of high base reach system, introduction of reach D of high base reach system).
According to this feature, the explanatory text display that is additionally displayed is displayed in a manner that has greater movement than the title display, so that the fact that the explanatory text display is added in addition to the title display can be drawn to. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the title display that is different from the luminance data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 22-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 22-1,
The explanatory text display (explanatory text) is characterized in that it contains content that suggests that the specific reach (super reach effect) is advantageous.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw more attention to the fact that the explanatory text display has been added.

[Mode 23]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA and PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is displayed in a larger font size than the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance);
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach common title) for the title display part of the first reach,
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (common title for strong reach) for the title display part of the second reach,
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introduction part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction) for the introductory part of the second reach.
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation, is displayed in a larger font size than the title display corresponding to the first reach, which has a relatively low expectation, so that the title display alone can make the player intuitively recognize that the second reach has a higher expectation than the first reach. Also, in the title display part in the first reach and the second reach, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display of the first reach and the second reach, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part of the first reach and the second reach, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 23-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 23-1,
The number of characters (10) constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is greater than the number of characters (7, 8) constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach B, C effect), but the display area (display area size) of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach B, C effect) is larger than the display area (display area size) of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect).
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the second reach occupies a larger display area per character, so that the player can intuitively recognize that the second reach has a higher expectation than the first reach.

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is composed of multiple characters,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special pattern, second special pattern),
The decoration identification information (decorative pattern (large)) of a first size is displayed in a reach state before a title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), and then the decoration identification information (decorative pattern (small)) of a second size smaller than the first size is displayed in a reach state;
At least one character of the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is displayed in a size larger than the second size (decorative pattern (small));
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of reach A of high base reach system, introduction of reach B of high base reach system, introduction of reach C of high base reach system, introduction of reach D of high base reach system).
According to this feature, at least one character of the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in a size larger than the decoration identification information reduced to the second size, so that the title display can be focused on in the title display part. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 24-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 24-1,
The present invention is characterized in that all characters of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach performance) are displayed in a size smaller than the first size (decorative pattern (large)) and larger than the second size (decorative pattern (small)).
According to this feature, the decorative identification information can be reliably recognized when a reach state is reached, and thereafter, the decorative identification information is reduced in size and each character that makes up the title display is displayed at a size larger than the decorative identification information, thereby drawing attention to the title display in the title display part.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introductory part (operation prompting performance B, D) of the specific reach (super reach performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) for prompting the player to take an action can be displayed.
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the game to the advantageous state, a name display of the advantageous state (title character of the big win start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed.
The advantageous state name display (title character of the big win start performance) is displayed larger than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of reach A of high base reach system, introduction of reach B of high base reach system, introduction of reach C of high base reach system, introduction of reach D of high base reach system).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the promotion character display is performed is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is a situation in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the promotion character display to congratulate the game being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed suitably.

The gaming machine of aspect 25-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 25-1,
The advantageous state name display (title character of the big win start performance) is composed of a first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") and a second character string ("BONUS");
The first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") is displayed in the first position (the upper fixed position), and then the second character string ("BONUS") is displayed in the second position (the lower fixed position);
After the second character string ("BONUS") is displayed at the second position (lower fixed position), the first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") displayed at the first position (upper fixed position) and the second character string ("BONUS") displayed at the second position (lower fixed position) are gradually enlarged and displayed.
The first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") and the second character string ("BONUS") are displayed in the smallest character size when displayed at the first position (top of the fixed position) and the second position (bottom of the fixed position),
The size of the characters when the first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") and the second character string ("BONUS") are displayed in the first position (upper fixed position) and the second position (lower fixed position) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)).
According to this feature, the characters constituting the advantageous state name display are always displayed larger than the characters constituting the promotion character display, so that being controlled in an advantageous state can be more congratulated.

The gaming machine of aspect 25-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 25-1 or 25-2,
The smallest character among the characters constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is larger than the largest character among the characters constituting the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the characters constituting the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the largest character among the characters constituting the promotion character display, so that no matter which character you focus on, the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the promotion character display, making it possible to more congratulate yourself on being controlled into the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of aspect 25-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 25-1 to 25-3,
A special prompting character display (operation prompting character (large)) that suggests a more favorable situation than the prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) can be displayed;
The special prompt character display (operation prompt character (large)) is characterized by being displayed larger than the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start performance).
According to this feature, the special promotion character display, which suggests a more advantageous situation than the promotion character display, is displayed larger than the advantageous state name display, thereby allowing the player to sense the advantageous situation.

The gaming machine of aspect 25-5 is the gaming machine according to aspect 25-4,
The smallest character among the character strings constituting the special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) is characterized in that it is larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start performance).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the characters constituting the special promotion character display is displayed larger than the largest character among the characters constituting the advantageous state name display, so that no matter which character the player focuses on, the special promotion character display is displayed larger than the advantageous state name display, allowing the player to sense the advantageous situation.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the game to the advantageous state, a name display of the advantageous state (title character of the big win start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed.
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the big win start performance) is displayed larger than the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach performance),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of reach A of high base reach system, introduction of reach B of high base reach system, introduction of reach C of high base reach system, introduction of reach D of high base reach system).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the title display is performed is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the title display to congratulate the game being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 26-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 26-1,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a plurality of types of specific reaches having different title displays (title characters),
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the big win start performance) is characterized by being displayed larger than the title display (title characters) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach performance).
According to this feature, the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach, thereby making it possible to celebrate being controlled into an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of aspect 26-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 26-2,
The smallest character among the character strings constituting the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start performance) is characterized in that it is larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the title display (title character) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach performance).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the characters constituting the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the largest character among the characters constituting the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach, so that no matter which character you focus on, the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, making it possible to more fully celebrate being controlled into an advantageous state.

[Mode 27]
The gaming machine of form 27-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), before the title display part (operation prompt performance A), a prompting character display (operation prompt character (small)) to prompt the player to take an action can be displayed.
A title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is displayed larger than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common titles);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the promotional text display is displayed before the title display part, and the title display to be displayed thereafter is displayed larger than the promotional text display, thereby drawing attention to the title display. In addition, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the title display, which is different from the luminance data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 27-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 27-1,
After the prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) is displayed, the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) develops and the title display part in the specific reach starts.
According to this feature, the promotional text display is displayed before the title display part in a series of flows, and the title display to be displayed thereafter is displayed larger than the promotional text display, thereby drawing attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of aspect 27-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 27-1 or 27-2,
The smallest character among the character strings constituting the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the characters constituting the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed larger than the largest character among the characters constituting the promotion character display, so that the title display can be focused on regardless of which character is focused on.

[Mode 28]
The gaming machine of form 28-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), before the title display part (operation prompt performance A), a prompting character display (operation prompt character (small)) to prompt the player to take an action can be displayed.
After it is notified that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will control the game to the advantageous state, a display of the advantageous state name (title character of the big win start performance) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed.
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the big win start performance) is displayed larger than the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
A title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is displayed larger than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common titles);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the title display is performed is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is a situation after it has already been notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the title display, so that the game can be celebrated for being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, a promotional character display is displayed before the title display part, and the title display that is displayed thereafter is displayed larger than the promotional character display, so that the title display can be drawn to attention. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be illuminated in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be displayed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 28-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 28-1,
After the prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) is displayed, the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is developed, the title display part in the specific reach starts, and after it is notified that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will control the advantageous state, the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start performance) is displayed.
According to this feature, a promotional text display is displayed before the title display part in a series of events, and the title display that is displayed afterwards is displayed larger than the promotional text display, thereby drawing attention to the title display, and then, after it is announced that a specific reach has resulted in control into an advantageous state, a display of the advantageous state name is displayed larger than the title display, allowing the player to celebrate being controlled into the advantageous state.

[Mode 29]
The gaming machine of form 29-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the game to the advantageous state, a name display of the advantageous state (title character of the big win start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed.
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the big win start performance) is displayed for a longer time than the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach performance),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of reach A of high base reach system, introduction of reach B of high base reach system, introduction of reach C of high base reach system, introduction of reach D of high base reach system).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the title display is performed is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display for a longer period of time than the title display, it is possible to celebrate the game being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 29-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 29-1,
The time from when the character string constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is all displayed to when at least a part of the character string is no longer displayed is longer than the time from when a part of the character string constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach performance) is displayed to when the whole of the character string is no longer displayed.
According to this feature, the time during which the congratulatory advantageous state name display is clearly visible is made longer than the time during which the title display, the purpose of which is to encourage the possibility of control over the advantageous state, is displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

The gaming machine of aspect 29-3 is the gaming machine of aspect 29-1 or 28-2,
After the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is displayed, the advantageous state name display is switched to an operation suggestion display (right hit promotion image (small) and right hit promotion image (large)) suggesting an operation method during the advantageous state, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the switch to the operation suggestion display, control is performed to gain an advantage by operating the operation method suggested by the operation suggestion display (operation method for shooting the game ball toward the right game area 2R),
The time required to switch from the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) to the operation suggestion display (right hit promotion image (small) and right hit promotion image (large)) is shorter than the time required to end the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, the advantageous state name display is switched to the operation suggestion display in a short time, and then after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, control is performed to give an advantage by operating in the operation method suggested by the operation suggestion display, thereby preventing the player from being disadvantaged by changing the operation method during the period when the advantageous state name display is ended.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of form 30-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introductory part (operation prompting performance B, D) of the specific reach (super reach performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) for prompting the player to take an action can be displayed.
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the game to the advantageous state, a name display of the advantageous state (title character of the big win start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed.
The advantageous state name display (title character of the big win start performance) is displayed for a longer time than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of reach A of high base reach system, introduction of reach B of high base reach system, introduction of reach C of high base reach system, introduction of reach D of high base reach system).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the promotion character display is performed is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is a situation after it has already been notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display for a longer period of time than the promotion character display, it is possible to celebrate the game being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed suitably.

The gaming machine of aspect 30-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 30-1,
The prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) is displayed until the prompted action is performed or until the effective time for the prompted action has elapsed;
The time for which the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is displayed is characterized by being longer than the time from when the prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) is displayed until the time during which the prompted action is not taken and the time during which the prompted action is valid has elapsed.
According to this feature, after the prompting character display is displayed, the advantageous state name display is displayed for a longer period of time than the period of time that would be displayed if the prompted action was not taken, thereby allowing the player to be congratulated for being controlled into the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of aspect 30-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 30-1 or 30-2,
The time from when the character string constituting the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start performance) is all displayed to when at least a part of the character string disappears is longer than the time when the prompt character display (operation prompt character (small)) is displayed.
According to this feature, the time for which the congratulatory advantageous state name display is clearly visible is made longer than the time for which the promotional text display intended to encourage the player to take action is displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

The gaming machine of aspect 30-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 30-1 to 30-3,
A special prompting character display (operation prompting character (large)) that suggests a more favorable situation than the prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) can be displayed;
The promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is a promotion character (character that encourages an operation) that is displayed without accompanying a promotion introduction display (promotion introduction performance),
The special operation prompting display (operation prompting character (large)) is a prompting introduction display (promotion introduction performance) followed by a prompting character (character encouraging an operation),
The time during which the advantageous state name display (title characters of the big win start performance) is displayed is longer than the time during which the special prompt character display (operation prompt character (large)) is displayed.
According to this feature, the time for which the advantageous state name display, which has a congratulatory meaning, is displayed is longer than the time for which the special promotion character display accompanied by the promotion introduction display is displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

[Mode 31]
The gaming machine of form 31-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
Before the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) (operation prompt performance A), a prompting character display (operation prompt character (small)) to prompt the player to take an action can be displayed.
A title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is displayed for a longer time than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common titles);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the promotional text display is displayed before the title display part, and the title display that is displayed thereafter is displayed for a longer time than the promotional text display, thereby drawing attention to the title display. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the title display that is different from the luminance data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 31-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 31-1,
The time from when the character string constituting the title display (title characters) is entirely displayed until at least a part of the character string disappears is longer than the time when the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is displayed.
According to this feature, the time during which the title display is clearly visible is set to be longer than the time during which the promotion text display, the purpose of which is to encourage the player to take an action, is displayed, thereby drawing attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of aspect 31-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 31-1 or 31-2,
A special prompting character display (operation prompting character (large)) that suggests a more favorable situation than the prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) can be displayed;
The promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is a promotion character (character that encourages an operation) that is displayed without accompanying a promotion introduction display (promotion introduction performance),
The special operation prompting display (operation prompting character (large)) is a prompting introduction display (promotion introduction performance) followed by a prompting character (character encouraging an operation),
The time period during which the title display (title characters) is displayed is longer than the time period during which the special prompting character display (operation prompting character (large)) is displayed.
According to this feature, the time for which the title display is displayed is made longer than the time for which the special promotion character display accompanying the promotion introduction display is displayed, so that attention can be drawn to the title display.

[Mode 32]
The gaming machine of form 32-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), before the title display part (operation prompt performance A), a prompting character display (operation prompt character (small)) to prompt the player to take an action can be displayed.
After it is notified that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will control the game to the advantageous state, a display of the advantageous state name (title character of the jackpot start performance) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed.
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is displayed for a longer time than the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
A title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is displayed for a longer time than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common titles);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the title display is performed is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is a situation after it has already been notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and the advantageous state name display is displayed for a longer period of time than the title display, so that the game can be celebrated for being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, by displaying the promotion character display before the title display part and displaying the title display that is displayed thereafter for a longer period of time than the promotion character display, it is possible to draw attention to the title display. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

[Mode 33]
The gaming machine of form 33-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to PB1-12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-14) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-16) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-15 to PB1-17) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-17 to PB1-19) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected as one of the fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA and PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-14) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-16) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-15 to PB1-17) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-17 to PA2-19) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means includes:
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (high base reach A presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (high base reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (high base reach B to D performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (high base reach B to D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The third reach (high base reach A performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The fourth reach (high base reach B to D performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the fourth reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) are reaches executed in a normal state,
The third reach (high base reach A performance) and the fourth reach (high base reach B to D performance) are reaches executed in a special state (probable change state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The fourth reach (high base reach B to D performance) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the third reach (high base reach A performance),
The third reach (high base reach A performance) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The display means includes:
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) can be displayed,
The expectation indication can be displayed in the title display part in the third reach (high base reach A performance),
The expectation indication can be displayed in the title display part in the fourth reach (high base reach A performance),
This is characterized in that the expectation indication display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance).
According to this feature, since the first reach in the normal state has a lower expectation than the second reach in the normal state, the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the second reach, but the expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the first reach, thereby preventing excessive expectation that the first reach will control the game to an advantageous state. On the other hand, since the third reach in the special state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, has a lower expectation than the fourth reach in the special state, but is higher expectation than the first reach in the normal state, the expectation suggestion display is displayed in both the third reach and the fourth reach, thereby allowing expectation that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state in both the third reach and the fourth reach.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a normal state) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (a miss fluctuation pattern in a normal state) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a high probability state) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (a miss fluctuation pattern in a high probability state) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a normal state) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a deviation variation pattern in a normal state) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern in a probability variation state) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern in a probability variation state) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the first reach (super reach presentation in the normal state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach presentation in a normal state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state will be controlled in the second reach (super reach performance in the probability variable state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach presentation in a probability variable state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (super reach effect in a normal state) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) is a reach executed in the normal state,
The second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is a reach executed in a special state (probability variable state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The title display part in the second reach (super reach performance in a probability variable state) is shorter than the title display part in the first reach (super reach performance in a normal state),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part in the first reach (the super reach performance in the normal state), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title) for the title display part of the first reach,
In the title display part in the second reach (super reach performance in a probability variable state), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (high base reach common title) for the title display part of the second reach,
In the introduction part of the first reach (super reach performance in a normal state), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction) for the introduction part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (super reach performance in a special probability state), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D) for the introductory part of the second reach.
According to this feature, the title display part of the second reach in the special state is shorter than the title display part of the first reach in the normal state, so that the special state can be advanced at a good tempo. Also, in the title display part of the first reach and the second reach, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display of the first reach and the second reach, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part of the first reach and the second reach, so that the light emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light emitting mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 34-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 34-1,
The frequency with which the second reach (super reach performance in the special state) occurs in the special state (probability change state) is higher than the frequency with which the first reach (super reach performance in the normal state) occurs in the normal state.
According to this feature, even if the frequency of the second reach occurring in the special state increases, the special state can be progressed at a good pace.

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of form 35-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not the game medium (game ball) is controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to PB2-12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to PB1-13) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-13 to PB2-15) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected as one of the fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-11 to PB1-13) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-13 to PA2-15) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The game can be controlled to a plurality of states, including a normal state, a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)), which is a state in which the start condition is more easily established than in the normal state and in which the result of the variable display is not a specific display result (the special display result of a "jackpot"), and is controlled based on the execution of the variable display a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strongest reach presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is not controlled in the second reach (low base strongest reach presentation),
The first reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low-base strongest reach presentation) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strongest reach effect) has a higher expectation of becoming the advantageous state than the first reach (low base strong reach A to C effect),
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part in the first reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach is displayed in a first display operation mode (a display mode in which the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side to the center of the display area),
In a title display part in the second reach (low-base strongest reach presentation), a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach is displayed in a second display operation mode (a display mode in which the title characters are displayed reduced from an enlarged display) different from the first display operation mode,
When the special state (time-saving state B (Yu-Time)) is entered after the specific number of times has been reached, a display indicating that the special state will be entered after the specific number of times has been reached (title characters of the Yu-Time start presentation) is displayed in the second display operation mode (a display mode in which the title characters are displayed reduced from an enlarged display).
According to this feature, when the special state is controlled after the specific number of times is reached, the display indicating that the special state will be controlled after the specific number of times is reached is displayed in the same second display operation mode as the title display of the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation, so that the special state after the specific number of times is recognized as being highly advantageous.

The gaming machine of aspect 35-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 35-1,
When terminating the display (title characters of the Yu-Time start presentation) indicating that control will be made to a special state (time-saving state B (Yu-Time)) after the specific number of times has been reached, the display is terminated in the same display operation mode as the display operation mode (display mode in which the title characters are erased while expanding) when terminating the title display (title characters) of the title display part in the second reach (low-base strongest reach presentation).
According to this feature, even when the display indicating that the special state will be entered after a specific number of times is reached is terminated, it is terminated in the same display operation mode as when terminating the title display of the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation, so that it can be recognized that the special state after a specific number of times is highly advantageous.

[Mode 36]
The gaming machine of form 36-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The game can be controlled to a plurality of states, including a normal state, a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)), which is a state in which the start condition is more easily established than in the normal state and in which the result of the variable display is not a specific display result (the special display result of a "jackpot"), and is controlled based on the execution of the variable display a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
When the special state (time-saving state B (play time)) is controlled after the specific number of times is reached, a display (title character of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state will be controlled after the specific number of times is reached can be displayed,
The size of the characters constituting the display (title characters of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the special state will be entered after the specific number of times has been reached is larger than the size of the characters constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect);
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of reach A of high base reach system, introduction of reach B of high base reach system, introduction of reach C of high base reach system, introduction of reach D of high base reach system).
According to this feature, the situation in which the title display is performed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the display indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state after the specific number of times is a situation in which the game will be controlled to a special state after the specific number of times is reached, and by making the size of the characters constituting the display indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state after the specific number of times is larger than the size of the characters constituting the title display corresponding to the specific reach, the game can be celebrated for being controlled to a special state after the specific number of times is reached. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 36-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 36-1,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a plurality of types of specific reaches having different title displays (title characters),
The characters constituting the display (title characters of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the special state will be entered after the specific number of times has been reached are characterized by being larger than the characters constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, the characters constituting the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after the specific number of times is reached are displayed larger than the characters constituting the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach, thereby allowing the player to celebrate the player being controlled to a special state after the specific number of times is reached.

The gaming machine of aspect 36-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 36-2,
The smallest character among the character strings constituting the display (title character of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the special state will be entered after the specific number of times has been reached is larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the title display (title character) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the characters constituting the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after a specific number of times is reached is displayed larger than the largest character among the characters constituting the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach, so that no matter which character you focus on, the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after a specific number of times is reached is displayed larger than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, making it even more congratulatory that the player will be controlled to a special state after a specific number of times is reached.

[Mode 37]
The gaming machine of form 37-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The game can be controlled to a plurality of states, including a normal state, a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)), which is a state in which the start condition is more easily established than in the normal state and in which the result of the variable display is not a specific display result (the special display result of a "jackpot"), and is controlled based on the execution of the variable display a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
When the special state (time-saving state B (play time)) is controlled after the specific number of times is reached, a display (title character of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state will be controlled after the specific number of times is reached can be displayed,
The display time of the display (title characters of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the special state will be entered after the specific number of times is reached is longer than the display time of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of reach A of high base reach system, introduction of reach B of high base reach system, introduction of reach C of high base reach system, introduction of reach D of high base reach system).
According to this feature, the situation in which the title display is performed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the display indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state after the specific number of times is reached is a situation in which the game will be controlled to a special state after the specific number of times is reached, and by displaying the display indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state after the specific number of times is reached longer than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, the game can be celebrated for being controlled to a special state after the specific number of times is reached. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed suitably.

The gaming machine of aspect 37-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 37-1,
The time from when all of the characters constituting the display (title characters of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the special state will be entered after the specific number of times has been reached to when at least a part of the characters are no longer displayed is longer than the time from when a part of the characters constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is displayed to when all of the characters are no longer displayed.
According to this feature, the time during which the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after a certain number of congratulatory counts is reached is clearly visible is made longer than the time during which the title display intended to encourage the player to have the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state is displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

[Mode 38]
The gaming machine of form 38-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The game can be controlled to a plurality of states, including a normal state, a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)), which is a state in which the start condition is more easily established than in the normal state and in which the result of the variable display is not a specific display result (the special display result of a "jackpot"), and is controlled based on the execution of the variable display a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the normal state, a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached (characters indicating the number of times remaining until the play time) can be displayed;
The size of the characters constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach performance) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the display (remaining number of times until Yu-time) indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of reach A of high base reach system, introduction of reach B of high base reach system, introduction of reach C of high base reach system, introduction of reach D of high base reach system).
According to this feature, the size of the characters constituting the title display corresponding to the specific reach is made larger than the size of the characters constituting the display showing the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached, so that attention can be drawn to the title display corresponding to the specific reach. Also, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light emitting mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 38-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 38-1,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) and a second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach,
The display showing the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times has been reached (characters indicating the remaining number of times until Yu-time) is displayed during the execution of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), but is not displayed during the execution of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance).
According to this feature, in the first reach, which has a low expectation, the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times is reached is displayed, making it possible to make the player aware of the number of times until the special state is reached after the specific number of times is reached, whereas in the second reach, which has a high expectation, the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times is not displayed, making it possible to draw attention to the presentation and also to reduce the player's disappointment when there are only a few times until the special state is reached after the specific number of times is reached.

The gaming machine of aspect 38-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 38-2,
When it is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) without displaying again the display (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time) indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached,
When it is notified that the advantageous state will not be achieved in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), a display showing the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached (characters showing the remaining number of times until the Yu-time) is displayed again after the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) ends.
According to this feature, when it is notified that the advantageous state will be controlled in the second reach, by not displaying again the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached, it is possible to alleviate the disappointment of the player when there are only a few times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached. Also, when it is notified that the advantageous state will not be controlled in the second reach, the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached is displayed again after the end of the second reach, so that the player can feel relieved as soon as possible when there are only a few times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached.

[Mode 39]
The gaming machine of embodiment 39-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The game can be controlled to a plurality of states, including a normal state, a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)), which is a state in which the start condition is more easily established than in the normal state and in which the result of the variable display is not a specific display result (the special display result of a "jackpot"), and is controlled based on the execution of the variable display a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
At the timing (operation prompting performances A to D) related to the specific reach (super reach performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) for prompting the player to take an action can be displayed.
In the normal state, a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached (characters indicating the number of times remaining until the play time) can be displayed;
The size of the characters constituting the prompt character display (operation prompt character (small)) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the display (remaining number of times until the play time) indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, by making the size of the characters constituting the prompting character display that prompts the player to take an action at a timing related to a specific reach larger than the size of the characters constituting the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached, it is possible to draw attention to the prompting character display and effectively prompt the player to take an action. Also, in the title display part, since the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, it is possible to make the light emitting means emit light in a suitable light emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 39-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 39-1,
When the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is displayed before the title display part (operation promotion performance A) in the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), a display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached (remaining number of times until Yu-time character) is displayed at the same time,
When the prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) is displayed in the introductory part (operation prompting performance D) of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached (number of times remaining until Yu-time) is not displayed.
According to this feature, before the development into the specific reach, the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached is displayed at the same time as the promotion character display, so that the player can be made aware of the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached, and the operation promotion display in the introduction part does not display the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached, so that the player is informed of whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of form 40-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The game can be controlled to a plurality of states, including a normal state, a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)), which is a state in which the start condition is more easily established than in the normal state and in which the result of the variable display is not a specific display result (the special display result of a "jackpot"), and is controlled based on the execution of the variable display a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the game to the advantageous state, a name display of the advantageous state (title character of the big win start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed.
In the normal state, a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached (characters indicating the number of times remaining until the play time) can be displayed;
Before displaying the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start performance), the display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after reaching the specific number of times (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time) is ended,
The size of the characters constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is a situation after the fact that it has already been notified that it will be controlled to the advantageous state, and there is no need for a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached, so that the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached is terminated before the advantageous state name display is displayed, and the size of the characters constituting the advantageous state name display is made larger than the size of the characters constituting the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached, thereby making it possible to celebrate the control to the advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the title display that is different from the luminance data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed suitably.

The gaming machine of aspect 40-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 40-1,
Regardless of the number of times remaining until the special state (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) after the specific number of times is reached, the size of the characters constituting the display (characters of the remaining number of times until Yu-time) indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached is the same,
The size of the characters constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the display showing the number of times remaining until the special state occurs after the specific number of times is reached (characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time).
According to this feature, regardless of the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times has been reached, the size of the characters constituting the advantageous state name display can be made larger than the size of the characters constituting the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times has been reached, thereby allowing the player to celebrate being controlled into the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of aspect 40-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 40-1 or 40-2,
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is characterized in that it determines a special fluctuation pattern (time-saving B start fluctuation pattern) when the game medium (game ball) first enters the start area (first start winning port, second start winning port) in a special state (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) after a specific number of times has been reached.
According to this feature, when the game medium first enters the starting area in the special state after the specific number of times is reached, a presentation according to the special variation pattern can be executed.

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) can be changed from a first state (white state) to a second state (red or gold state) and displayed.
In a title display part that displays a title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), when the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is changed from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red or gold aspect), the time during which the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is displayed in the second aspect (red or gold aspect) is longer than the time during which the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is displayed in the first aspect (white aspect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common titles);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, when the title display corresponding to a specific reach is changed from the first state to the second state in the title display part that displays the title display corresponding to the specific reach, the time during which the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the second state is made longer than the time during which the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the first state, so that the change to the second state can be reliably recognized. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting state according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 41-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 41-1,
In the title display part that displays the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) may be changed from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red or gold aspect) or may remain unchanged in the first aspect (white aspect),
When changing the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red or gold aspect), at a specific timing (when a time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period), the title display (title characters) is changed from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red or gold aspect) and a specific sound effect (specific sound) is output.
In the case where the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not changed from the first state (white state), when the specific timing is reached (when a time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period), the display is not changed from the first state (white state) and the specific sound effect (specific sound) is output.
According to this feature, a specific sound effect is output when the title display corresponding to a specific reach changes from a first state to a second state at a specific timing, and also when the title display does not change from the first state at the specific timing, so that the output of the specific sound effect can create anticipation of a change to the second state.

The gaming machine of aspect 41-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 41-1 or 41-2,
The second aspect includes a plurality of aspects (red, gold),
When the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is changed from the first state (white state) to the second state (red, gold state), a specific sound effect (specific sound) is output regardless of the type of second state (red, gold state) to which it is changed.
According to this feature, when the title display corresponding to a specific reach changes from a first state to a second state at a specific timing, a specific sound effect is output regardless of the type of second state to which it is changed, so that the output of the specific sound effect draws attention to the type of second state to which it is changed.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) can be changed from a first state (white state) to a second state (red state) and displayed.
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) can be changed from the first mode (white mode) to a third mode (gold mode) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to a favorable state than the second mode (red mode), and displayed.
In the title display part that displays the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), in either case where the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is changed from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red aspect) or the third aspect (gold aspect), the display is characterized in that it is displayed so as to change from the first aspect (white aspect) to a common display aspect (an aspect that appears to glow) and then to the second aspect (red aspect) or the third aspect (gold aspect).
According to this feature, in the title display part that displays the title display corresponding to a specific reach, whether the title display corresponding to the specific reach is changed from the first mode to the second mode or from the first mode to the third mode, the display is changed to a common display mode and then changed to the second mode or the third mode. Therefore, by changing from the first mode to the common display mode, the player can expect until the end that the display will change to the third mode, which has a higher expectation than the second mode, until the display changes from the common display mode to the second mode or the third mode.

The gaming machine of aspect 42-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 42-1,
The common display mode is a mode in which the characters constituting the title display (title characters) are illuminated, and is characterized in that when the light clears, it changes to the second mode (red mode) or the third mode (gold mode).
According to this feature, the characters constituting the title display light up, thereby encouraging the change to the second or third mode.

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected as one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base weak reach B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) and the title display part in the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), a brightness data table (weak reach common title) for a common title display part is used to control the light emitting means;
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction) for the introduction part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introductory part of the second reach.
According to this feature, by making the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part common for two different reaches, an increase in cost and capacity can be prevented, and by using the brightness data table corresponding to each of the introductory parts, it is possible to appropriately stimulate the period until notification of whether or not an advantageous state is achieved, and as a result, it is possible to perform an appropriate title display.

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to 4) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 6) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to 7/PB1-8 to 10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are determined;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-4) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-6) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-5 to PB1-7/PB1-8 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-7 to PA2-9/PA2-10 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The third reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach (low base strong reach A performance), and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The fourth reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified.
The third reach (low base strong reach A performance) and the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) have a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) and the second reach (low base weak reach B performance),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) and the title display part in the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), a brightness data table (weak reach common title) for the first title display part which is common to the first reach is used to control the light emitting means;
In the title display part in the third reach (low base strong reach A performance) and the title display part in the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a common brightness data table (strong reach common title) for the second title display part,
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction) for the introduction part of the first reach,
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introduction part of the second reach,
In the introduction part of the third reach (low base strong reach A performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach A introduction) for the introduction part of the third reach,
In the introductory part of the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part of the fourth reach (strong reach system strong reach B introduction/strong reach system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, by making the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part common for the high expectation reach 2 and the low expectation reach 2, an increase in cost and capacity is prevented, and by using the corresponding brightness data table for each of the introductory parts, it is possible to appropriately stimulate the period until notification of whether or not an advantageous state will be achieved, and as a result, an appropriate title display can be performed.

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of form 45-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-4) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a sixth fluctuation pattern (PB1-J) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. determining a fluctuation pattern from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 6), a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to 7/PB1-8 to 10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a ninth fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to 13) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a tenth fluctuation pattern (PA2-13 to 15) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-4) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-6) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-5 to PB1-7/PB1-8 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-7 to PA2-9/PA2-10 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the ninth variation pattern is determined, a ninth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-11 to PB1-13) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the tenth variation pattern is determined, a tenth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-13 to PA2-15) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the ninth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fifth reach (low base strongest reach presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the tenth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fifth reach (low base strongest reach presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The third reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach (low base strong reach A performance), and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The fourth reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified.
The fifth reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fifth reach (low-base strongest reach presentation), and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified.
The third reach (low base strong reach A performance) and the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) have a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) and the second reach (low base weak reach B performance),
The fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than any of the first reach (low base weak reach A effect), the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), the third reach (low base strong reach A effect), and the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) and the title display part in the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), a brightness data table (weak reach common title) for the first title display part which is common to the first reach is used to control the light emitting means;
In the title display part in the third reach (low base strong reach A performance) and the title display part in the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a common brightness data table (strong reach common title) for the second title display part,
In the title display part in the fifth reach (low base strongest reach performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strongest reach series strongest reach title) for the third title display part for the fifth reach,
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction) for the introductory part of the first reach,
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introduction part of the second reach,
In the introduction part of the third reach (low base strong reach A performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach A introduction) for the introduction part of the third reach,
In an introduction part of the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach B introduction/strong reach system strong reach C introduction) for the introduction part of the fourth reach,
In the introductory part of the fifth reach (low base strongest reach presentation), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction) for the introductory part of the fifth reach.
According to this feature, by making the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part common for the high expectation 2 reach and the low expectation 2 reach, an increase in costs and capacity can be prevented, and by using the corresponding brightness data table for each of the introduction parts, it is possible to appropriately stimulate the period until notification of whether or not an advantageous state will be achieved, and further, by providing a dedicated brightness data table for the title display part and introduction part for the reach with the highest expectation, interest is heightened, and as a result, an ideal title display can be achieved.

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of form 46-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) can be changed from a first state (white) to a second state (red or gold) and displayed.
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), when the title display (title characters) is not changed to the second mode (red or gold), a first brightness data table (weak reach common title (white)) is used to control the light emitting means,
In the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), when the title display (title characters) is changed to a second mode (red or gold), the light emitting means is controlled using a second brightness data table (weak reach common title (red) or weak reach common title (gold));
In the introductory part of the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), regardless of whether the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach has changed to the second form (red or gold) or not, the light-emitting means is controlled using a common brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, by using a common brightness data table corresponding to each introduction part whether the title display is not changed to the second mode in the title display part of a specific reach or is changed to the second mode, an increase in cost and capacity is prevented, and by using a corresponding brightness data table for each title display part, it is possible to appropriately present the title display whether the title display is not changed to the second mode or is changed to the second mode, resulting in an appropriate title display.

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of form 47-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is,
A first part (title start period) from when the title display corresponding to the specific reach starts to when the title display is displayed at a fixed position;
A second part (title display period, title end period) after the title display corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is displayed at the fixed position,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the first part (title start period) of the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach title start) for the first part,
In the second part (title display period, title end period) of the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach title display) for the second part,
In the introductory part of the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, by using a brightness data table corresponding to the first part from when the title display starts to be displayed in the fixed position in a specific reach until the title display is displayed in the fixed position, a brightness data table corresponding to the second part after the title display is displayed in the fixed position, and a brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part, it is possible to suitably stimulate the period during which the title display is performed and the period until notification of whether or not an advantageous state will be achieved, and as a result, it is possible to perform an appropriate title display.

[Example]
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described below.

[Basic explanation]
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

[Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1]
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). The variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Note that the special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B, for example, has an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable pieces approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also referred to as a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also referred to as a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 (described later) that operates according to the performance is provided. The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the above-mentioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the ball payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning combination ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning combination ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

[Outline of game progress]
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special game is started by the second special pattern display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In the special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot", and if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a stopped symbol, it is a "miss". Note that "misses" in this pachinko game machine 1 include "misses with time reduction" that are controlled to a high base state (time reduction state) from the next variable display without going through a jackpot game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for a "jackpot." For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability/high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability/high base state, and the normal state is a low probability/low base state. A high probability state and a low base state is also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a high probability state after the big win game state.

[Progress of the production, etc.]
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on and off the game effect lamp 9, operation of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these may be used.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed, which have different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, the image display device 5 may temporarily stop the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo consecutive performance in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may be a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds or a promotion performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

[Board configuration]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power supply switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. It is also possible to deploy all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 to the RAM 102 and execute them on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

In addition, the control of sound output, turning on/off of the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and control of the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32) may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

[Action]
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

[Major operations of main board 11]
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is sufficient to determine in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be able to be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is sufficient to check or inspect the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors to determine whether the recovery condition can be met.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute the timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output processing, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the game has entered a probability variable state) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special symbol processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special symbol processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "jackpot" and, if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special symbol processing, a determined special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In addition, the special symbol game using the second special symbol may be executed in preference to the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also called special symbol 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability bonus state is controlled and the end of the number-cutting is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball output rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball output rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball output rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

As shown in FIG. 7(A), when the variable special chart is the first special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the first special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 7(A).

As shown in FIG. 7(B), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the aforementioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the second special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 7(B).

Now, looking at the numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "jackpot" and "miss with time-saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 8, in the display result determination table for the first special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65535 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65535 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In addition, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in a special probability state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1347 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in the high probability state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the set value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the second special display result judgment table when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65425 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a special probability state, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range for determining a big hit regardless of the set value. The other features of the second special symbol display result determination table are the same as those of the first special symbol display result determination table.

As described above, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range for time-saving misses regardless of the setting value when the game state is normal and when the time-saving state, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as the common numerical range for time-saving misses regardless of the setting value when the game state is normal and when the time-saving state. In other words, when the game state is normal and when the time-saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is a time-saving miss is the same rate for all setting values, so it is possible to prevent the setting value from excessively increasing gambling nature. Furthermore, for the time-saving misses to which a common judgment value number is assigned for each setting value, it is set to a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving miss reference value, for all setting values, so that it is possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 regarding the judgment of the variable display result being a time-saving miss.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, six setting values can be set, from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. Also, the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

[Major operations of the performance control board 12]
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 9. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 9 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to the origin position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 10 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 9 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 10, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories specified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

[Variations of the basic description]
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a win is made, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a win is made.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly turning on and off the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a percentage of "0%". For example, it also includes one being a percentage of "0%" and the other being a percentage of "100%" or a percentage less than "100%".

[Explanation regarding characteristic portion 131SG]
Next, the pachinko game machine 1 with respect to the characteristic part 131SG will be described. In the description of each step of the flowchart in the characteristic part 131SG, for example, the part described as "step S1" may be abbreviated to "S1" or "131SGS1", and "normal reach" may be abbreviated to "N reach" and "super reach" to "SP reach". In addition, in the characteristic part 131SG, "variable" may be referred to as "variable display". In addition, detailed description will be omitted for configurations similar to those of the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description or configurations having similar functions but different forms or positions, etc., by assigning the same reference numerals. In addition, in the following, the front side of FIG. 11-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear) side, and the description will be based on the up, down, left and right directions when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side. In this embodiment, the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the surface facing the player playing the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment differs from the description in FIG. 7 in that it is not possible to set one of a number of setting values (e.g., 1 to 6) that have different rates at which the jackpot display result is displayed, and is described as a gaming machine in which a "miss with time reduction" is not provided as a variable display result, and the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/319.

In addition, after the gaming machine is powered on (when RAM clear processing is executed) or after a jackpot occurs, if the next jackpot does not occur even though the variable display is executed a certain number of times (900 times in this embodiment) in succession in a low probability state, the machine may be controlled to time-saving state B (also called rescue time-saving state or rescue time-saving) out of the multiple types of time-saving states. This rescue time-saving state is provided to rescue players who have played for a long period of time but have not yet won a jackpot (for example, to reduce the amount of money invested in playing), and in this embodiment, it is a playing state also called "play time".

In this embodiment, when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state of jackpot A among the multiple types of jackpots, 110 variable displays are performed in the time-saving state A (low probability/high base state) among the multiple types of time-saving states, so the number of variable displays remaining from the end of the time-saving state A to the arrival of the rescue time-saving state is 790, while when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state of either jackpot B or jackpot C among the multiple types of jackpots, 110 variable displays are performed in the probability variable state (high probability/high base state), so the number of variable displays remaining from the end of the probability variable state to the arrival of the rescue time-saving state is 900. Also, in this embodiment, the number of variable displays in the time-saving state B (low probability/high base state) based on the value of the rescue time-saving count counter becoming "0" is 1100.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-1, a first special chart reserved memory display area 130SG005D is provided at the bottom left of the image display device 5, capable of displaying a reserved display corresponding to a first special chart reserved memory that has been started but for which variable display has not yet been executed, and a second special chart reserved memory display area 130SG005U is provided at the bottom right of the image display device 5, capable of displaying a reserved display corresponding to a second special chart reserved memory that has been started but for which variable display has not yet been executed. And an active display area 130SG005F is provided at the bottom center of the image display device 5 for displaying a reserved display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed as an active display.

The right part of the image display device 5 can display a fourth symbol 131SG005J to notify the player that a variable display is being performed, and a small symbol 131SG005M, which is variable displayed in the same manner as the variable display of the decorative symbol in the center of the image display device 5, and the top right part of the image display device 5 can display a remaining number of times to reach the rescue time reduction display 131SG005Z, which shows the remaining number of times to reach the rescue time reduction, which is the number of remaining variable displays until the game is controlled to the time reduction state B (rescue time reduction state) described below.

The left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 is formed as a left game area 2L where game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed as a right game area 2R where game balls can flow down. Game balls that are weakly shot out by the launching device flow down a first path as the left game area 2L, and game balls that are strongly shot out by the launching device flow down a second path as the right game area 2R.

Furthermore, a first reserved memory display area 131SG005D is provided at the bottom left of the image display device 5, which indicates the number of reserved memories of the first special chart by the number displayed on the reserved display, and a second reserved memory display area 131SG005U is provided at the bottom right of the image display device 5, which indicates the number of reserved memories of the second special chart by the number displayed on the reserved display. Furthermore, an active display area 131SG005F is provided at the bottom center of the image display device 5, which displays the reserved display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed as an active display.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 has a first large winning opening and a second large winning opening formed along the flow direction of the game balls. The first large winning opening can be changed between an open state where game balls can enter and a closed state where game balls cannot enter by driving a large winning opening door (not shown) to open and close by driving a solenoid 131SG082A (see FIG. 11-2). The second large winning opening can be changed between an open state where game balls can enter and a closed state where game balls cannot enter by driving a large winning opening door (not shown) to open and close by driving a solenoid 131SG082B (see FIG. 11-2).

Furthermore, a first count switch 131SG023A capable of detecting a gaming ball is provided in the first large prize opening, and a second count switch 131SG023B capable of detecting a gaming ball is provided in the second large prize opening.

In other words, game balls flowing down the left game area 2L (first path) can win in the general winning port 10 and the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A, and game balls flowing down the right game area 2R (second path) can win in the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the general winning port 10, and the first or second large winning port formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and can also pass through the passing gate 41.

In addition, in this embodiment, the switch circuit 110 is connected to the first count switch 131SG023A, the second count switch 131SG023B, and the jackpot start switch 131SG024 built into the jackpot start gate 131SG042.

A number of obstacle nails are arranged between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7. For this reason, game balls flowing down the left game area 2L cannot win in the second start winning hole or the large winning hole, and game balls flowing down the right game area 2R cannot win in the first start winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, at a predetermined position on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment (for example, the lower left position of the game area), there are a first special pattern display device 131SG004A capable of variable display of the first special pattern, a second special pattern display device 131SG004B capable of variable display of the second special pattern, a first reserved indicator 131SG025A capable of displaying the first reserved memory number, a second reserved indicator 131SG025B capable of displaying the second reserved memory number, a normal pattern display device 131SG020 capable of variable display of normal patterns, a normal reserved indicator 131SG025C capable of displaying the normal reserved memory number, a jackpot The game information display section includes a round indicator 131SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during play, a right-hit lamp 131SG132 that lights up in a game state in which a game ball is shot toward the right game area 2R, such as a jackpot game state, a high probability/high base state (high probability state), or a low probability/high base state (time-saving state), a high probability/high base state (high probability state), a high probability lamp 131SG133 that lights up when the game is in a high probability/high base state (high probability state), and a time-saving lamp 131SG134 that lights up in a high probability/high base state (high probability state) and a low probability/high base state (time-saving state). Note that, when the game state is normal, the right-hit lamp 131SG132 exceptionally lights up from the timing when the variable display stops if the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the main board 11 is equipped with an information output circuit for outputting game information (signals) to an external device such as a management computer of the gaming center where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, via a terminal board (not shown).

In this embodiment, the second large prize opening has a V prize opening and a discharge outlet downstream of the V prize opening. In addition, a variable V prize opening device (V lid) is provided upstream of the V prize opening. The variable V prize opening device changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid. In other words, the game balls flowing down the second large prize opening can pass through the V prize opening when the variable V prize opening device is in the open state, and cannot pass through the V prize opening and instead flow down to the discharge outlet when the variable V prize opening device is in the closed state.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the main board 11 is provided with a V switch 131SG023B1 that can detect, via the switch circuit 110, that the gaming ball has passed through the V entry port located downstream of the second large entry port, and an ejection switch 131SG023B2 that can detect that the gaming ball has passed through the ejection port.

The performance control board 12 is also connected to a vibration motor 61 built into the push button 31B and a movable body motor 207 for operating the movable body 32. The lamp control board 14 is also connected to a right-hit LED 131SG031 for encouraging a right-hit operation, a first special symbol LED 131SG032 that lights up during the variable display of the first special symbol, a second special symbol LED 131SG033 that lights up during the variable display of the second special symbol, a first hold LED 131SG034A that lights up when the first hold memory number is 1 to 2, and a first hold LED 131SG035A that lights up when the first hold memory number is 3 to 4. 31SG034B, a second pending LED 131SG035A that lights up when the second pending memory number is 1 to 2, a second pending LED 131SG035B that lights up when the second pending memory number is 3 to 4, a button LED 62 built into the push button 31B, a movable body LED 208 built into the movable body 32, and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 are connected.

Figure 11-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 11-3 (A), in this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern, the random number value MR5 for determining the normal chart display result, and the random number value MR6 for determining the initial value of MR5 are controlled to be countable. In addition, random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random number values MR1 to MR6 may be counted by updating by software using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built into the gaming control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the gaming control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called gaming random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR6 are set to the ranges shown in FIG. 11-3(A), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ranges of the random numbers MR1 to MR6 may be different depending on the settings set in the pachinko game machine 1.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The CPU 103 also executes a random number generation program to generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used to control the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various judgments and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation pattern judgment table that stores a plurality of variation patterns that become the variable display mode of each pattern in the variable display of special patterns, normal patterns, etc.

Figure 11-3 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a special chart display result judgment table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special symbol display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table in this embodiment, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table in this embodiment, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of a "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/80.02 in this embodiment) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/319.68 in this embodiment). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

The judgment tables stored in ROM 101 include the first special symbol display result judgment table and the second special symbol display result judgment table shown in FIG. 7, as well as the jackpot type judgment table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 11-3 (C1) and the jackpot type judgment table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 11-3 (C2), as well as a fluctuation pattern type judgment table, a fluctuation pattern judgment table, a normal symbol display result judgment table (not shown), and a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown).

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) does not change depending on the set value, but it may also be configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) changes depending on the set value.

[Big hit type determination table]
11-3(C1) and 11-3(C2) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 11-3(C1) is a table for determining the jackpot type using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning slot (i.e., when the first special symbol is variably displayed). Also, FIG. 11-3(C1) is a table for determining the jackpot type using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning slot (i.e., when the second special symbol is variably displayed).

The jackpot type determination table is a table that is referenced when a decision is made to make the variable display result a jackpot pattern, to determine the type of jackpot as one of jackpots A to C, based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type.

Now, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 11-3 (D). In this embodiment, the jackpot types provided are jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, for which time-saving control is executed for a maximum of 110 variable displays after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, these jackpots A, B, and C are also jackpots for which special control is executed for a maximum of 110 variable displays after the end of the jackpot game by the game ball entering the V winning port after entering the second large winning port in the first round of the jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, the open state of the variable V winning ball device (V lid) includes a short open state (e.g., 0.1 seconds) in which the open state lasts for a short period of time, and a long open state (e.g., 15 seconds) in which the open state lasts for a long period of time. In the first round of the jackpot game state, jackpot A causes the variable V winning ball device to be in a short open state, and in the first round of the jackpot game state, jackpot B and jackpot C cause the variable V winning ball device to be in a long open state.

The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. In addition, with "jackpot A", the variable V prize entry device is in a short open state in the first round, making it extremely difficult to get the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is not expected that the special bonus control will be executed, so it is essentially a normal jackpot.

The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. In addition, with "jackpot B", the variable V prize entry device is in a long open state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is expected that the special chance control will be executed, making it a virtual special chance jackpot.

The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the second to tenth rounds. In addition, with "jackpot C", the variable V prize entry ball device is in a long open state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is expected that the special chance control will be executed, making it a virtual special chance jackpot.

In this embodiment, three types of jackpots, A to C, are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or less types of jackpots, or four or more types of jackpots may be provided.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (C1), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), of the range of MR2 determination values from 0 to 299, 0 to 149 is assigned to jackpot A, and 150 to 299 is assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (C2), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), of the range of MR2 determination values from 0 to 299, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot B, and 100 to 299 is assigned to jackpot C.

In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, there is a 50% probability that the game ball will enter the V winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state, and both the special probability control and the time-saving control are implemented after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, there is a 100% probability that the game ball will enter the V winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state, and both the special probability control and the time-saving control are implemented after the jackpot game ends.

In this embodiment, even if a jackpot A occurs, it is possible but extremely rare for a V entry to occur when the V lid is in a short open state, so in the case of a jackpot A, it will be explained as not having a V entry and the special rate control not being executed. Also, even if a jackpot B or jackpot C occurs, it is possible but extremely rare for a V entry not to occur when the V lid is in a long open state, so in the case of a jackpot B or jackpot C, it will be explained as having a V entry and the special rate control being executed.

In this embodiment, the type of jackpot is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for determining the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of jackpot may be determined using MR1, which is a random number value for determining the result of the special chart display.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, as the jackpot type for the second special symbol, a form having jackpots B and C in which 110 times of probability variable control and time-saving control can be executed after the end of the jackpot game state is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a jackpot D in which time-saving control is executed 1009 times (probability variable state: 110 times + time-saving state A: 899 times) after the end of the jackpot game state may be provided. By doing so, it is almost certain that the next jackpot will be won, which increases interest, and even if a jackpot does not occur in the 110 times probability variable state after the end of jackpot D and the probability variable control ends, after 899 variable displays are executed without a jackpot occurring in time-saving state A (low probability/high base state), simply executing one variable display in the normal state will further control to time-saving state B (rescue time-saving state) described later, which increases interest.

[Time-saving count]
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the number of time-saving times for each transition trigger. As shown in FIG. 11-4, in this embodiment, if a jackpot A occurs and the game ball does not enter the probability variable area, (1) the time-saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) the low probability control is performed 110 times, and the game enters the probability variable area (in this embodiment, the game enters the time-saving state A, which is a battle rush (BATTLE RUSH) in which the time-saving number of times is 110 times). Also, if either a jackpot B or a jackpot C occurs and the game ball enters the probability variable area, (1) the time-saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) the probability variable state is a very battle rush (KIWAMI BATTLE RUSH) in which the time-saving number of times is 110 times. In addition, when 900 variable displays are performed in a low probability state without being controlled to a jackpot, (1) time-saving control is performed 1100 times, and (2) the game is controlled to a time-saving state B (in this embodiment, a play time with 1100 time-saving times) in which low probability control is performed 1100 times. However, even if 900 fluctuations are performed again in a low probability state without being controlled to a jackpot after the end of the time-saving state B, the game is not controlled to the time-saving state B again based on this.

The rescue time-saving achievement rate is the rate at which the game is controlled to a time-saving state via rescue time-saving. The time-saving state via rescue time-saving is controlled by performing variable display n times (900 times in this embodiment) without being controlled to a jackpot game state, so the rescue time-saving achievement rate K can be calculated as follows.

K={(1-ML)^n}×100
(K = rescue time reduction achievement rate, ML = jackpot probability, n = variable display number)

Specifically, for example, if the jackpot probability ML in this embodiment is approximately 1/319, the rescue time reduction achievement rate K will be 5.9%. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that allows the setting value to be set, if the rescue time reduction achievement rate is set to be higher as the jackpot probability is set to a lower value, the player can be rescued even if the jackpot probability is set to a low value.

[Fluctuation pattern]
11-5 and 11-6 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the variation patterns in this embodiment. The variation patterns in this embodiment are roughly classified into a loss variation pattern in which the variable display result is a loss and a big win variation pattern in which the variable display result is a big win.

As shown in Figure 11-5, the miss fluctuation patterns can be broadly divided into non-reach miss fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern type: non-reach fluctuation pattern) in which no reach performance is executed and a miss occurs, normal reach fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern type: normal reach fluctuation pattern) in which a normal reach reach performance is executed and a miss occurs, low base weak super reach fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern type: low base weak super reach fluctuation pattern) in which a low base weak super reach A reach performance or a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed in a normal state (low base state) and a miss occurs, and normal state (low base state) The fluctuation pattern of low base strong Super Reach A (fluctuation pattern type: low base strong Super Reach A fluctuation pattern) in which a reach performance of low base strong Super Reach A is finally executed and a miss is obtained in a normal state (low base state), the fluctuation pattern of low base strong Super Reach B (fluctuation pattern type: low base strong Super Reach B fluctuation pattern) in which a reach performance of low base strong Super Reach B is finally executed and a miss is obtained in a normal state (low base state), the fluctuation pattern of low base strong Super Reach C (fluctuation pattern type: low base strong Super Reach C fluctuation pattern) in which a reach performance of low base strong Super Reach C is finally executed and a miss is obtained in a normal state (low base state). The fluctuation pattern of the low base Strong Super Reach C in which the reach performance of the low base Strongest Super Reach is finally executed and results in a miss in the normal state (low base state) (fluctuation pattern type is the fluctuation pattern of the low base Strongest Super Reach); the fluctuation pattern of the high base Super Reach A in which the reach performance of the high base Super Reach A is finally executed and results in a miss in the time-saving state A or the probability change state (high base state) (fluctuation pattern type is the fluctuation pattern of the high base Super Reach A); the fluctuation pattern of the high base Super Reach B in which the reach performance of the high base Super Reach B is finally executed and results in a miss in the time-saving state A or the probability change state (high base state) There are fluctuation patterns for high base super reach B (fluctuation pattern type: high base super reach B fluctuation pattern) in which the reach effect of high base super reach C is finally executed and a miss in time-saving state A or high probability state (high base state), fluctuation patterns for high base super reach C (fluctuation pattern type: high base super reach C fluctuation pattern) in which the reach effect of high base super reach D is finally executed and a miss in time-saving state A or high probability state (high base state), fluctuation patterns for high base super reach D (fluctuation pattern type: high base super reach D fluctuation pattern) are provided.

Four types of non-reach fluctuation patterns are provided: PA1-1, in which the special chart fluctuation time is 12,000 ms and no reach performance is executed when the number of reserved memories of the target special chart of the variable display is two or less in the normal state; PA1-2, in which the special chart fluctuation time is 5,000 ms and no reach performance is executed when the number of reserved memories of the target special chart of the variable display is three in the normal state; PA1-3, in which the special chart fluctuation time is 2,000 ms and no reach performance is executed during time-saving control (time-saving state A or special probability state); and PA1-4, in which the special chart fluctuation time is 500 ms and no reach performance is executed during time-saving control (time-saving state B).

For the normal reach type of fluctuation pattern, there is one type of fluctuation pattern, PA2-1, in which the special chart fluctuation time is 20,000 ms and the normal reach reach performance is executed, resulting in a miss.

There are two types of fluctuation patterns for the low base weak super reach type: PA2-2, where the special chart fluctuation time is 43,000 ms and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A is executed and results in a miss, and PA2-3, where the special chart fluctuation time is 53,000 ms and the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed and results in a miss.

The three types of fluctuation patterns for the fluctuation pattern type low base strong super reach A are PA2-4, where the special chart fluctuation time is 63,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A is executed followed by the reach performance of low base strong super reach A, resulting in a miss; PA2-5, where the special chart fluctuation time is 73,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed followed by the reach performance of low base strong super reach A, resulting in a miss; and PA2-6, where the special chart fluctuation time is 40,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed, and the reach performance of low base strong super reach A is executed, resulting in a miss.

The three types of fluctuation patterns for the fluctuation pattern type low base strong super reach B are PA2-7, where the special chart fluctuation time is 78,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A is executed followed by the reach performance of low base strong super reach B, resulting in a miss; PA2-8, where the special chart fluctuation time is 83,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed followed by the reach performance of low base strong super reach B, resulting in a miss; and PA2-9, where the special chart fluctuation time is 45,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed, and the reach performance of low base strong super reach B is executed, resulting in a miss.

The three types of fluctuation patterns for the fluctuation pattern type low base strong super reach C are PA2-10, where the special chart fluctuation time is 88,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A is executed followed by the reach performance of low base strong super reach C, resulting in a miss; PA2-11, where the special chart fluctuation time is 93,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed followed by the reach performance of low base strong super reach C, resulting in a miss; and PA2-12, where the special chart fluctuation time is 50,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed, and the reach performance of low base strong super reach C is executed, resulting in a miss.

The three types of fluctuation patterns for the low base strongest super reach type are PA2-13, where the special chart fluctuation time is 98,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A is executed, followed by the reach performance of low base strongest super reach, resulting in a miss; PA2-14, where the special chart fluctuation time is 103,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed, followed by the reach performance of low base strongest super reach, resulting in a miss; and PA2-15, where the special chart fluctuation time is 60,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed, and the reach performance of low base strongest super reach is executed, resulting in a miss.

For the high base super reach A type of fluctuation pattern, there is one type of fluctuation pattern, PA2-16, where the special chart fluctuation time is 30,000 ms and the reach performance of the high base super reach A is executed and results in a miss. For the high base super reach B type of fluctuation pattern, there is one type of fluctuation pattern, PA2-17, where the special chart fluctuation time is 30,000 ms and the reach performance of the high base super reach B is executed and results in a miss. For the high base super reach C type of fluctuation pattern, there is one type of fluctuation pattern, PA2-18, where the special chart fluctuation time is 30,000 ms and the reach performance of the high base super reach C is executed and results in a miss. For the high base super reach D type of fluctuation pattern, there is one type of fluctuation pattern, PA2-19, where the special chart fluctuation time is 30,000 ms and the reach performance of the high base super reach D is executed and results in a miss.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-6, the jackpot fluctuation patterns are similar to the miss fluctuation patterns in that the following fluctuation patterns are provided: non-reach, normal reach, low base strong super reach A, low base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C, low base strongest super reach, high base super reach A, high base super reach B, high base super reach C, and high base super reach D.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-6, as a non-reach fluctuation pattern type, there is one type of fluctuation pattern PB1-18 in which the special chart fluctuation time is 500 ms + 15,000 ms and no reach performance is executed during time-saving control (time-saving state B).

For the normal reach type of fluctuation pattern, there is one type of fluctuation pattern PB1-1, where the special chart fluctuation time is 20,000 ms + 15,000 ms and the normal reach reach performance is executed to result in a jackpot.

The three types of fluctuation patterns for the low base strong super reach A fluctuation pattern type are PB1-2, where the special chart fluctuation time is 63,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A is executed, followed by the reach performance of low base strong super reach A, resulting in a jackpot; PB1-3, where the special chart fluctuation time is 73,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed, followed by the reach performance of low base strong super reach A, resulting in a jackpot; and PB-4, where the special chart fluctuation time is 40,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed, and the reach performance of low base strong super reach A is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

The three types of fluctuation patterns for the fluctuation pattern type low base strong super reach B are PB1-5, where the special chart fluctuation time is 78,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A is executed, followed by the reach performance of low base strong super reach B, resulting in a jackpot; PB1-6, where the special chart fluctuation time is 83,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed, followed by the reach performance of low base strong super reach B, resulting in a jackpot; and PB1-7, where the special chart fluctuation time is 45,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed, and the reach performance of low base strong super reach B is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

The three types of fluctuation patterns for the low base strong super reach C fluctuation pattern type are PB1-8, where the special chart fluctuation time is 88,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A is executed, followed by the reach performance of low base strong super reach C, resulting in a jackpot; PB1-9, where the special chart fluctuation time is 93,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed, followed by the reach performance of low base strong super reach C, resulting in a jackpot; and PB1-10, where the special chart fluctuation time is 50,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed, and the reach performance of low base strong super reach C is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

The three types of fluctuation patterns for the low base strongest super reach type are PB1-11, where the special chart fluctuation time is 98,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A is executed, followed by the reach performance of low base strongest super reach, resulting in a jackpot; PB1-12, where the special chart fluctuation time is 103,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed, followed by the reach performance of low base strongest super reach, resulting in a jackpot; and PB1-13, where the special chart fluctuation time is 60,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed, and the reach performance of low base strongest super reach is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

For the high base super reach A fluctuation pattern, there is one type of fluctuation pattern PB1-14, where the special chart fluctuation time is 30000ms + 15000ms, and the reach performance of the high base super reach A is executed to result in a jackpot. For the high base super reach B fluctuation pattern, there is one type of fluctuation pattern PB1-15, where the special chart fluctuation time is 30000ms + 15000ms, and the reach performance of the high base super reach B is executed to result in a jackpot. For the high base super reach C fluctuation pattern, there is one type of fluctuation pattern PB1-16, where the special chart fluctuation time is 30000ms + 15000ms, and the reach performance of the high base super reach C is executed to result in a jackpot. The variation pattern type for high base super reach D is a variation pattern of PB1-17, in which the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms + 15,000 ms and the reach performance of high base super reach D is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

[Fluctuation pattern type determination table/fluctuation pattern determination table]
The judgment table stored in ROM 101 includes a plurality of fluctuation pattern type judgment tables for determining a fluctuation pattern type according to a game state and a variable display result, and a plurality of fluctuation pattern type judgment tables for determining a fluctuation pattern according to a fluctuation pattern determined in the fluctuation pattern type judgment table, a game state, a variable display result, and the number of reserved memories of special patterns that execute a variable display (number of reserved memories subject to variable display).

In the variation pattern setting process in this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table is selected according to the game state and the variable display result. Next, the selected variation pattern type determination table is compared with the random number value MR3 read in step 131SGS55 of the normal special symbol processing to determine the variation pattern type.

For example, when the game state is normal and the variable display result is a miss, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 11-7 (A) is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is compared with the value of the random number value MR3 to determine the fluctuation pattern type. If the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 3299, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 3300 to 4053, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 4054 to 4073, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base weak super reach", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 4074 to 4081, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach A", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 4082 to 4089, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach B", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 4090 to 4094, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach C", and if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strongest super reach".

In addition, if the game state is the time-saving state A or the probability variable state and the variable display result is a miss, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 11-7 (B) is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is compared with the value of the random number value MR3 to determine the fluctuation pattern type. If the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 3849, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 3850 to 4048, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 4049 to 4066, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach A", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 4067 to 4083, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach B", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 4084 to 4094, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach C", and if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach D".

In addition, if the game state is time-saving state B and the variable display result is a miss, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 11-7 (C) is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is compared with the value of the random number value MR3 to determine the fluctuation pattern type. If the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach."

Also, if the game state is normal and the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 11-7 (D) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern type is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A with the value of the random number value MR3. If the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 1298, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 1299 to 1934, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach A", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 1935 to 2676, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach B", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 2677 to 3706, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach C", and if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 3707 to 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strongest super reach".

In addition, if the game state is the time-saving state A or the probability variable state and the variable display result is a miss, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 11-7 (E) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern type is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B with the value of the random number value MR3. If the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 25, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 26 to 975, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach A", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 976 to 2075, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach B", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 2076 to 3380, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach C", and if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 3381 to 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach D".

In addition, if the game state is the time-saving state B and the variable display result is a miss, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 11-7 (F) is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is compared with the value of the random number value MR3 to determine the fluctuation pattern type. If the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach."

After the type of variation pattern is determined as described above, one of the variation pattern determination tables shown in Figures 11-8 to 11-10 is selected according to the game state, the variable display result, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display (reserved number of objects for variable display), and the selected variation pattern determination table is compared with the random number value MR3 read in step 131SGS55 of the normal processing of the special symbols to determine the type of variation pattern.

For example, if the variable display result is a miss, the game state is normal, and the number of reserved memories for variable display is 0 to 2, the miss variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 11-8 (A) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined by comparing the miss variation pattern determination table A with the value of the random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is a non-reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-1 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is a normal reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is a low base weak super reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-2 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 199, and the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-3 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 200 to 255.

If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strong super reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-5. If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strong super reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-7, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-8, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-9.

If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strong super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-10, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-11, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-12. If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strongest super reach, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-13, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-14, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 1743 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-15.

In addition, if the variable display result is a miss, the game state is normal, and the number of reserved memories for variable display is three, the miss variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 11-8 (B) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined by comparing the miss variation pattern determination table B with the value of the random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is a non-reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-2 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is a normal reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strong super reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 173 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-5. If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strong super reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-7, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-8, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-9.

If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strong super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-10, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-11, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-12. If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strongest super reach, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-13, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-14, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-15.

In addition, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is time-saving state A or a sure-win state, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 11-9 (A) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C with the value of the random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is a non-reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA1-3 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is a normal reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-1 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is high base super reach A, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-16 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is high base super reach B, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-17 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is high base super reach C, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-18 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is high base super reach D, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-19 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

In addition, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is time-saving state B, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 11-9 (B) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D with the value of the random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is a non-reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA1-4 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is normal, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 11-10 (A) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A with the value of the random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is a normal reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-1 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strong super reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-2, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-3, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-4. If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strong super reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-5, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-6, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-7.

If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strong super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-8, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-9, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-10. If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strongest super reach, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-11, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-12, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-13.

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is time-saving state A or a sure-win state, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 11-10 (B) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B with the value of the random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is a normal reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-1 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach A, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-14 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach B, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-15 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach C, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-16 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach D, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-17 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is time-saving state B, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 11-10 (C) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C with the value of the random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is a non-reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-18 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

[Super Reach Performance Expectations]
The jackpot expectation rate when the variation pattern type and the variation pattern are determined as described above is as shown in Figures 11-11 (A) to (C). The jackpot expectation rate of the super reach performance is the rate of a jackpot when the corresponding super reach performance is executed, and is a value calculated by dividing the rate of a jackpot when the corresponding super reach performance is executed by the sum of the rate of a jackpot when the corresponding super reach performance is executed and the rate of a miss when the corresponding super reach performance is executed.

As shown in Figure 11-11 (A), of the Super Reach reach effects executed when the game state is normal, the low base weak Super Reach A and low base weak Super Reach B reach effects do not directly result in a jackpot, so the expected jackpot probability is 0% for each. However, the low base weak Super Reach A and low base weak Super Reach B reach effects can develop into other Super Reach (low base strong Super Reach A-C, low base strongest reach) reach effects, and the expected probability of development from low base weak Super Reach A to other Super Reach reach effects is approximately 44%, and the expected probability of development from low base weak Super Reach B to other Super Reach reach effects is approximately 68%. The expected rate of development of a Super Reach performance is the rate at which the corresponding Super Reach performance develops into another Super Reach performance when it is executed, and is a value calculated by dividing the rate at which the corresponding Super Reach performance develops into another Super Reach performance by the sum of the rate at which the corresponding Super Reach performance develops into another Super Reach performance and the rate at which the corresponding Super Reach performance is executed and does not develop into another Super Reach performance, but is a miss.

In addition, among the Super Reach reach effects that are executed when the game state is normal, the expected jackpot probability of the low base strong Super Reach A reach effect is approximately 20%, the expected jackpot probability of the low base strong Super Reach B reach effect is approximately 25%, the expected jackpot probability of the low base strong Super Reach C reach effect is approximately 35%, and the expected jackpot probability of the low base strongest Super Reach reach effect is approximately 55%. Furthermore, the jackpot expectancy of the reach performances of low base strong Super Reach A to C and low base strongest Super Reach differs depending on whether it develops from low base weak Super Reach A, when it develops from low base weak Super Reach B, or when it is executed directly without going through low base weak Super Reach A or B. The jackpot expectancy of the reach performance of low base strong Super Reach A developed from low base weak Super Reach A is approximately 19%, the jackpot expectancy of the reach performance of low base strong Super Reach A developed from low base weak Super Reach B is approximately 20%, the jackpot expectancy of the reach performance of low base strong Super Reach A executed directly without going through B is approximately 21%, the jackpot expectancy of the reach performance of low base strong Super Reach B developed from low base weak Super Reach A is approximately 24%, and the jackpot expectancy of the reach performance of low base strong Super Reach B developed from low base weak Super Reach B is approximately 23%. The expected jackpot probability of the reach performance is about 25%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach performance of low base strong super reach B executed directly without going through B is about 27%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach performance of low base strong super reach C developed from low base weak super reach A is about 33%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach performance of low base strong super reach C developed from low base weak super reach B is about 35%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach performance of low base strong super reach C executed directly without going through B is about 37%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach performance of low base strongest super reach developed from low base weak super reach A is about 53%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach performance of low base strongest super reach developed from low base weak super reach B is about 55%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach performance of low base strongest super reach executed directly without going through B is about 57%.

As shown in Figure 11-11 (B), when the game state is time-saving state A, the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach A is approximately 14%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach B is approximately 16%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach C is approximately 27%, and the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base super reach D is approximately 70%.

As shown in Figure 11-11 (C), when the game state is in a special probability state, the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base Super Reach A is approximately 40%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base Super Reach B is approximately 45%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base Super Reach C is approximately 60%, and the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base Super Reach D is approximately 90%.

As described below, in the Super Reach performance, it is possible to display an expectation indication display that indicates the jackpot expectation of the corresponding Super Reach performance by the number of stars. As shown in Figure 11-11 (A), among the Super Reach that are executed when the game state is in the normal state, the expectation indication display is not displayed in the reach performances of low base weak Super Reach A and B, while the expectation indication display in the reach performance of low base strong Super Reach A displays 3 stars, the expectation indication display in the reach performance of low base strong Super Reach B displays 3.5 stars, the expectation indication display in the reach performance of low base strong Super Reach C displays 4 stars, and the expectation indication display in the reach performance of low base strongest Super Reach displays 4.5 stars. As shown in Figures 11-11 (B) and (C), when the game state is in the time-saving state A and the probability bonus state, the expectation indication display for the reach performance of high base super reach A displays 3 stars, the expectation indication display for the reach performance of high base super reach B displays 3.5 stars, the expectation indication display for the reach performance of high base super reach C displays 4 stars, and the expectation indication display for the reach performance of high base super reach D displays 4.5 stars.

In the Super Reach reach performance executed when the game state is normal and in the Super Reach reach performance executed when the game state is in a special probability state, the same number of stars may be displayed in the expectation indication display, but as shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), even if the number of stars displayed in the expectation indication display is the same, the suggested jackpot expectation is not the same. In the case where the number of stars displayed in the expectation indication display is the same, the Super Reach reach performance executed when the game state is in a special probability state suggests a higher jackpot expectation than the Super Reach reach performance executed when the game state is normal.

In addition, whether it is a Super Reach reach performance that is executed when the gaming state is normal or a Super Reach reach performance that is executed when the gaming state is in a special state, the suggested probability of a jackpot increases for every 0.5 increase in the number of stars displayed in the expectation suggestion display, and as shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), in the expectation suggestion display of a Super Reach reach performance in either gaming state, the more stars there are, the greater the increase in the suggested probability of a jackpot. Also, as shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), the increase in the jackpot expectation rate when the number of stars displayed in the expectation rate suggestion display increases from 3 to 3.5 is the same for both the Super Reach reach performance executed when the game state is normal and the Super Reach reach performance executed when the game state is in a special probability state, but the increase in the jackpot expectation rate when the number of stars displayed in the expectation rate suggestion display increases from 3.5 to 4, or from 4 to 4.5, is greater for the Super Reach reach performance executed when the game state is in a special probability state than for the Super Reach reach performance executed when the game state is normal.

[Performance control command]
FIG. 11-13(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the performance control command in this embodiment. The performance control command is, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 11-13(A) is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-13(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time) of the decorative symbols etc. that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set arbitrarily according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variation pattern etc.

Command 8C00H is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (B), different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot", and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpot type should be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot".

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-13(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command in which the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C".

Command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that specifies the stopping (confirmation) of the variable display of decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

Command 9000H is an initialization specification (power-on specification) command for displaying the initial screen when power is turned on in the image display device 5. Command 9200H is a power outage recovery specification command for displaying a power outage recovery screen on the image display device 5 indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored from a power outage (power outage) state.

Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed (high base state, time-saving state).

Command A0XXH is a jackpot start command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game state. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game state. Command A3XXH is a jackpot end command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game state.

In the jackpot start designation command and jackpot end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result, for example by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. Alternatively, in the jackpot start designation command and jackpot end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. In the jackpot opening notification command and the jackpot opening after notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state (for example, "1" to "10").

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number in order to display the reserved memory number of special figures in an identifiable manner in the first reserved memory display area 132SG005D, etc. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number in order to display the reserved memory number of special figures in an identifiable manner in the second reserved memory display area 132SG005U, etc. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the first start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the first start entry port. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the second start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second start entry port. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Command C4XXH is a pattern designation command that specifies the winning result at the time of the initial winning. Command C6XXH is a variable category designation command that specifies the variable category of the winning result at the time of the initial winning.

Command D100H is a jackpot start switch passing notification command that notifies the player that the game ball has passed the jackpot start switch 131SG024 when the variable display result is a jackpot, i.e., that the jackpot game has started. Command D200H is a V win notification command that notifies the player that the game ball has passed the V switch 131SG023B1 during a jackpot game, i.e., that the game state will be controlled to a high probability state after the jackpot game ends.

Command E1XXH is a remaining time-saving count notification command that notifies the number of remaining time-saving control times in the time-saving state excluding rescue time-saving (time-saving state A). Command E2XXH is a remaining chance-change count notification command that notifies the number of remaining chance-change control times in the chance-change state.

Command F100H is a right-hit LED on notification command that notifies the right-hit LED131SG031 to light up. Command F101H is a right-hit LED off notification command that notifies the right-hit LED131SG031 to light up.

Command 91XXH is a command to specify the number of times rescue time-saving is performed upon recovery, and is a performance control command that converts the value of the rescue time-saving counter to a hexadecimal number and specifies it when the power is restored. With the command to specify the number of times rescue time-saving is performed upon recovery, different EXT data is set according to each digit (first, second, third, fourth digit) of the value of the rescue time-saving counter when the power is restored (a four-digit value), as shown in FIG. 11-13 (C), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (C), commands 9100H to 910FH are recovery time reduction number specification 1 commands that specify the first digit of the value of the recovery time reduction number. Commands 9110H to 911FH are recovery time reduction number specification 2 commands that specify the second digit of the value of the recovery time reduction number. Commands 9130H to 913FH are recovery time reduction number specification 3 commands that specify the third digit of the value of the recovery time reduction number. Commands 9140H to 914FH are recovery time reduction number specification 4 commands that specify the fourth digit of the value of the recovery time reduction number.

Command 94XXH is a rescue time reduction count designation command, which is a presentation control command that designates the remaining number of variable display times (126 times or less) until rescue time reduction occurs. With the rescue time reduction count designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (D), different EXT data is set according to the remaining number of variable display times (126 times or less) until rescue time reduction occurs.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (D), command 9400H is a rescue time reduction count A designation command that specifies that the rescue time reduction has been reached. Command 9401H is a rescue time reduction count B designation command that specifies that 1 to 125 times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached. Command 947EH is a rescue time reduction count C designation command that specifies that 126 times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached. Command 947FH is a rescue time reduction count D designation command that specifies that 127 or more times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached.

Command 96XXH is a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, which is a performance control command that designates the remaining number of variable displays (in units of 100) until the rescue time reduction occurs. In the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, for example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of variable displays (in units of 100) until the rescue time reduction occurs is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of variable displays until the rescue time reduction occurs is 100, command 9601H is sent as the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, and if the remaining number of variable displays is 700, command 9607H is sent as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. Command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration display designation command that designates a customer waiting demonstration.

[Game control data storage area]
The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 11-2 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created in a predetermined power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source discharges and the backup power source is unable to supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, i.e., the control state of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state to the state before the occurrence of a power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. In addition, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

In this RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 131SG150 as shown in FIG. 11-14 is provided as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 131SG150 shown in FIG. 11-14 includes a first special chart reserve memory unit 131SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory unit 131SG151B, a regular chart reserve memory unit 131SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 131SG152, a game control timer setting unit 131SG153, a game control counter setting unit 131SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 131SG155.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit 131SG151A stores reservation data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that has not yet started, but in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit 131SG151A associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The upper limit of reserved data (reserved memory) that can be stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151B is always 4 regardless of the game state. The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the first special chart is reserved, and becomes reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be hit based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit 131SG151B stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit 131SG151B associates the reserved number with the winning order (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern type, and the random number value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The upper limit of reserved data (reserved memory) that can be stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151B is always 4, regardless of the game status. The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151B thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the second special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be hit based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

In other words, in this embodiment, a maximum of four reserved memories can be stored as the first special chart reserved memory (reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151A), and a maximum of four reserved memories can be stored as the second special chart reserved memory (reserved memories that can be stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151B).

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

When variable display is executed, first, if there is a second special symbol reserved memory in the normal special symbol processing (see FIG. 6), the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers MR1 to MR4 from the second special symbol reserved memory 131SG151B and then shifts the contents of the second special symbol reserved memory 131SG151B. In other words, if the random numbers MR1 to MR4 are stored as reserved memories for reserved number 1 in the second special symbol reserved memory 131SG151B, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers MR1 to MR4 stored as reserved memories for reserved number 1, erases the reserved memories for reserved number 1, and re-stores the reserved memories stored as reserved memories for reserved number 2 as reserved memories for reserved number 1, the reserved memories stored as reserved memories for reserved number 3 as reserved memories for reserved number 2, and the reserved memories stored as reserved memories for reserved number 4 as reserved memories for reserved number 3.

In addition, if no reserved memory is stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151B, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special chart reserved memory exists. If the first special chart reserved memory exists, the CPU 103 reads the random number values MR1 to MR4 from the first special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151A and then shifts the memory contents of the first special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151A. In other words, when the random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as the reserved memory of reserved number 1 in the first special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151A, the CPU 103 reads out the values of the random number values MR1 to MR4 stored as the reserved memory of reserved number 1, erases the reserved memory of reserved number 1, and re-stores the reserved memory stored as reserved memory of reserved number 2 as reserved memory of reserved number 1, the reserved memory stored as reserved memory of reserved number 3 as reserved memory of reserved number 2, and the reserved memory stored as reserved memory of reserved number 4 as reserved memory of reserved number 3.

Then, the CPU 103 executes a judgment of the variable display result based on the random number value MR1 read from the first special pattern reserved memory unit 131SG151A or the second special pattern reserved memory unit 131SG151B (if the variable display result is a jackpot, it also judges the type of jackpot based on the random number value MR2), and then in the variation pattern judgment process (see FIG. 6), it judges the variation pattern type using a variation pattern type judgment table that differs depending on the game state, the variable display result, and the number of reserved memories of the special pattern that executes the variable display, and then it further determines the variation pattern using a variation pattern judgment table that differs depending on the determined variation pattern type, the game state, the number of reserved memories, etc.

In other words, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 can determine the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process according to the number of reserved memories subtracted by 1 from the number of reserved memories immediately before the variable display.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they were detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating a random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 131SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 131SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 131SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 131SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 131SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 131SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 131SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 131SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR6, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

[Performance control data storage area]
The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 131SG190 as shown in Fig. 11-15(A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 131SG190 shown in Fig. 11-15(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 131SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 131SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 131SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 131SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 131SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 131SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 131SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 131SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 131SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 131SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 131SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 131SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 131SG194A as shown in FIG. 11-15(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 131SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 131SG194A is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special chart reserved memory (for example, "4"). The start winning time receiving command buffer 131SG194A is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special chart reserved memory (for example, "4"). When a start winning occurs in the first start winning port or the second start winning port, a set of four commands, namely, a start winning port winning designation command (first start winning port winning designation command or second start winning port winning designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special pattern reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special pattern reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start winning port winning designation commands, the area for storing pattern designation commands, the area for storing variable category designation commands, the area for storing reserved memory number notification commands, and the area for storing reserved display flags, in correspondence with the reserved memory number, and for storing them separately as the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory.

When the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, the contents (data) of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B in FIG. 11-15 (C), and the contents of the copied reserved memory are themselves deleted from the start winning time reception command buffer 131SG194A. The contents of the storage areas lower than the deleted reserved memory are then shifted one by one to the higher storage areas.

As described above, when the variable display of the reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") begins, the contents (data) of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B, so as shown in FIG. 11-15 (C), a storage area similar to that of the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A is provided. In other words, an area for storing the start winning designation command, an area for storing the pattern designation command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the reserved memory count notification command, and an area for storing the reserved display flag are provided.

In this embodiment, if a start win occurs when no variable display is being executed and no reserved memory exists, the start win designation command, pattern designation command, variable category command, and reserved memory number notification command based on the start win are stored in the active display buffer 131SG194B without passing through the start win reception command buffer 131SG194A. The reserved display flag is set by the performance control CPU 120 executing the advance notice setting process (S161) described below.

The contents stored in the active display buffer 131SG194B are cleared (deleted) during the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

The reserved display flag is a flag that indicates the display mode of the reserved display or the active display that corresponds to the variable display being executed. Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, the display mode of these reserved displays and active displays (the value of the reserved display flag) can suggest the proportion of times the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state.

[Start winning judgment process]
FIG. 11-16 is a flow chart showing the start winning judgment process (S101) shown in FIG. 6. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start opening switch 22A is on or not based on a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A (131SGS101). At this time, if the first start opening switch 22A is on (131SGS101; Y), it judges whether the first special chart reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special chart game using the first special chart, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) or not (131SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special chart reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 131SG154, for example. When the number of reserved first special charts in 131SGS102 is not the upper limit (131SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 is set to "1" (131SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in 131SGS101 (131SGS101; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in 131SGS102 (131SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is judged to be on or not (131SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (131SGS104; Y), it is judged to be whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (131SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special figures by reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 131SG154, for example. When the second reserved memory count in 131SGS105 is not the upper limit value (131SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 is set to "2" (131SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of 131SGS103 and 131SGS106, the number of reserved memories of the special game corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (131SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (131SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 131SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of 131SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of winning, the random number value MR3 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 131SG154 (131SGS109). The numerical data indicating each of the random number values thus extracted and the start port buffer value are stored by being set as reserve information at the top of the free entry in the special chart reserve memory unit (131SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of hit are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or a "small hit", and further to determine the type of big hit or small hit when the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The random number value MR3 for determining the type of variation pattern and the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 131SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display state including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of 131SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (131SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special pattern process is completed.

Following the processing of 131SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number value determination process (131SGS112). After that, the CPU 103 performs settings for sending a pending memory number notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (131SGS113). The pending memory number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed.

After executing the process of 131SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (131SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (Y in 131SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (131SGS115), and then the process of 2390SGS104 is advanced to. In contrast, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 131SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (131SGS116), and then the start winning process is terminated. This ensures that even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid game ball start winning, the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed.

[Random value judgment process when winning]
FIG. 11-17(A) is a flow chart showing an example of a process executed by the 131SGS112 in FIG. 11-17 as a winning random number value determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol normal process (FIG. 6) determines whether or not to control the special symbol display result (the variable display result of the special symbol) to a "jackpot" game state. In addition, in the variable pattern setting process (FIG. 6), a variable pattern that specifically specifies the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning hole (the first start winning hole or the second start winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination process of S112 to determine whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the special symbol display result. As a result, before the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns based on the detection of a gaming ball entering the starting winning hole begins, in other words, before it is determined whether or not a jackpot will be reached at the start of the variable display, it is determined that the special pattern display result will be a "jackpot," and based on this determination result, the presentation control CPU 120, etc., will execute pre-reading predictions such as panel display presentations and hold prediction presentations, as will be described later.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 11-17, the CPU 103 first identifies the game state (step 131SGS121) and selects the display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-3 (B) (step 131SGS122). Then, in step 131SGS123a, the CPU 103 compares the random number value MR1 extracted in step 131SGS109 with the display result determination table, and determines whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range.

If the random number value MR1 is outside the range for determining a big win, i.e., if the variable display result is a miss, a setting is made for sending a symbol designation command corresponding to the miss (step 131SGS126a). Then, it is determined whether the game state is normal or not (step 131SGS126b). If the game state is normal, the miss variable pattern type determination table A shown in FIG. 11-7(A) is selected and the process proceeds to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126c).

If the gaming state is not the normal state, it is further determined whether the gaming state is in the time-saving state B (step 131SGS126d). If the gaming state is not the time-saving state B, that is, if the gaming state is the time-saving state A or the guaranteed bonus state, the loss fluctuation pattern type determination table B shown in FIG. 11-7 (B) is selected and the process proceeds to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126e). If the gaming state is the time-saving state B, the loss fluctuation pattern type determination table C shown in FIG. 11-7 (C) is selected and the process proceeds to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126f).

In step 131SGS123a, if the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination value range, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a pattern designation command corresponding to the jackpot (step 131SGS129). Then, it determines whether the game state is normal or not (step 131SGS130a). If the game state is normal, it selects the jackpot variation pattern type determination table A shown in FIG. 11-7 (D). If the game state is time-saving state A or high probability state, it selects the jackpot variation pattern type determination table B shown in FIG. 11-7 (E). If the game state is time-saving state B, it selects the jackpot variation pattern type determination table C shown in FIG. 11-7 (F), and proceeds to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS130b, step 131SGS130d, step 131SGS130e).

In step 131SGS131, the CPU 103 compares the selected fluctuation pattern type determination table with the random number value MR3 extracted in step 131SGS109, and determines the fluctuation category from non-reach, super reach, or other (normal reach). For example, if the random number value MR3 is a fluctuation pattern type of non-reach, the fluctuation category is determined to be non-reach, if the random number value MR3 is a fluctuation pattern type of normal reach, the fluctuation category is determined to be other (normal reach), and if the random number value MR3 is any of low base weak super reach A/B, low base strong super reach A, low base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C, low base strongest super reach, high base super reach A, high base super reach B, high base super reach C, and high base super reach D, the fluctuation category is determined to be super reach. Then, the sending of a variable category designation command (any of those shown in FIG. 11-17 (B)) according to the judgment result is set, and the winning random number judgment process is terminated (step 131SGS132).

The commands set for transmission are sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 5.

[Game control main processing]
11-18 is a flow chart showing the game control main process in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the processes in steps S1 to S7, S8 to S9, and S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, when a performance control command instructing recovery from a power outage is sent in step S7, the CPU 103 checks the value of a rescue time reduction counter for counting the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction occurs, sets the current rescue time reduction counter value converted to a hexadecimal number, and controls the transmission of a rescue time reduction number designation command upon recovery to the performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0013).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the current value of the rescue time reduction counter and controls to send a rescue time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0014). For example, if the current value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1 to 125 times, the CPU 103 controls to send command 9401H as the rescue time reduction number designation command. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the RAM clear process is not performed when the gaming machine is turned on and the recovery process is performed, the rescue time reduction number designation command is sent and the remaining number of variable display times until the current rescue time reduction is notified.

In this embodiment, when power is restored after a power outage, a command to specify the number of times to shorten the time for recovery and a command to specify the number of times to shorten the time for recovery are sent separately from the command at the time of recovery, but this is not limited to this form. For example, the EXT data of the command at the time of recovery (e.g., a command to specify power on) sent in step S7 may be configured to be set to a value corresponding to the number of times remaining until the time for recovery is shortened, and then sent.

In addition, when a RAM clear is requested in step S3, when there is no backup data in step S4, or when an abnormality is detected in the backup RAM in step S5, a clear process is performed on the area including the area of the rescue time reduction counter in the initialization process in step S8.

Also, when the CPU 103 transmits a presentation control command instructing initialization in step S9, it sets the rescue time reduction counter to "900" (step 131SGS0015). Therefore, in this embodiment, if the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900". That is, in this embodiment, if the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on and a jackpot is not generated even after 900 variable displays are executed, rescue time reduction is performed and the time reduction state B is controlled. Note that, in this embodiment, since the presentation control command instructing initialization transmitted in step S9 corresponds to the initial value ("900") set in the rescue time reduction counter, the CPU 103 can also specify the initial value to be set in the rescue time reduction counter based on the transmission of the presentation control command instructing initialization.

Next, the CPU 103 checks the value of the rescue time reduction counter (which is set to "900" in this embodiment), converts the current value of the rescue time reduction counter into a hexadecimal number, sets the value, and transmits a recovery time reduction count designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0016).

In this way, the rescue time reduction counter is set before the timer interrupt process, which is the game progress process, is executed, so that the variable display does not start before the rescue time reduction counter is set, and the number of times until the rescue time reduction can be reliably managed.

In this embodiment, the rescue time reduction counter is initially set to "900" when the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, but this is not the only possible configuration, and the rescue time reduction counter may not be initially set when the RAM clear process is executed. If configured in this way, gameplay can be started from the continuation of the value of the rescue time reduction counter from the previous day, reducing the amount of investment required to reach the rescue time reduction, and the configuration can be made so as not to be disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, when configured as described above, the system may be configured so that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed only when the clear switch is detected to be on (step S3; Yes) and the RAM clear process is performed, and the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is performed when a RAM abnormality is detected (steps S4, S5; No) and the RAM clear process is performed.

[Time-saving flag, guaranteed win flag]
In this embodiment, when any of the conditions for controlling to the time-saving state is satisfied, the time-saving flag can be set. The time-saving flag includes a time-saving flag A and a time-saving flag B. In the following description, erasing (or clearing) the flag may be described as resetting the flag.

The time-saving flag A is set when the game is controlled to time-saving state A via jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C. This time-saving flag A is set when the jackpot game state of jackpot A ends, and is cleared when time-saving state A ends (when a jackpot occurs during time-saving state A, or when 110 times of time-saving control end and the game is controlled to the normal state).

The time-saving flag B is set when the game is in the time-saving state B controlled via the rescue time-saving function. This time-saving flag B is set when 900 variable displays that do not result in a jackpot pattern have been executed since the RAM was cleared, or when 900 variable displays that do not result in a jackpot pattern have been executed in a low probability state after the jackpot game state ends, and is cleared when the time-saving state B ends (when a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state B, when the time-saving control ends after 1100 times and the game is controlled to the normal state, etc.).

The high probability flag is set when the game is controlled to the high probability state. In this embodiment, if a V is won in the first round of a jackpot game, the game state is controlled to the high probability state when the jackpot game ends, and the high probability flag is set accordingly. This high probability flag is erased when the high probability state ends (when a jackpot occurs during the high probability state, when the 110th high probability control is executed and the game is controlled to the normal state, etc.). For example, the high probability flag is erased when step 131SGS69A in FIG. 11-20 described later is judged as YES, based on the fact that it is the 110th time since the variable display has been controlled to the high probability state.

[Special pattern normal processing]
11-19 and 11-20 are flow charts showing the normal special symbol processing (step S110) in the special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total reserved memory number (step 131SGS51). Specifically, the count value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is checked. If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second reserved memory number is 0 (step 131SGS52). Specifically, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 0. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" to the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) (step 131SGS53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (i.e., if only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special pattern pointer (step 131SGS54).

In this embodiment, the processing of steps 131SGS52 to S54 is executed, so that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied with priority over the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, the present embodiment is not limited to the above embodiment, and the display may be configured to perform variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol in the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot, for example.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the RAM 102 corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 131SGS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 131SGS56). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. When the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the combined pending memory count by 1. That is, the count value of the combined pending memory count counter is decremented by 1 (step 131 SGS57). The CPU 103 stores the value of the combined pending memory count counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a specified area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step 131SGS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 131SGS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process to compare a predetermined jackpot determination value with the random number for hit determination, and decides that a jackpot has occurred if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. In this case, if the probability variable flag indicating that the jackpot state is in a probability variable state is not set (if the state is in a low probability state), the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination using a jackpot determination value for low probability. Also, if the probability variable flag is set (if the state is in a high probability state), the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination using a jackpot determination value for high probability. When the value of the random number for determining a win matches any of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot.

If it is determined that a jackpot has been reached (step 131SGS63; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot has been reached (step 131SGS64). The CPU 103 then determines the type of jackpot to be the type (jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C) that corresponds to the value that matches the type-determining random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 131SGS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type-determining random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and determines the type of jackpot. Then, the process proceeds to step 131SGS70. On the other hand, if it is not determined that a jackpot has been reached (step 131SGS63; No), the process proceeds to step 131SGS66.

In this embodiment, by performing normal special pattern processing, a rescue time-saving condition (reducing the value of the rescue time-saving counter to "0") can occur to control to rescue time-saving regardless of the variable display result (jackpot, miss). In this embodiment, the time-saving state A is entered based on a jackpot A being reached, and the time-saving state B is entered based on the fact that no next jackpot has occurred even after a predetermined number of variable displays (900 in this embodiment) have ended. However, it is assumed that the variable display result of the variable display for which the rescue time-saving condition is met will be a jackpot. Therefore, when the variable display result of the variable display for which the rescue time-saving condition is met is a jackpot, the system is configured to control to the time-saving state A based on the jackpot being reached.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time-saving counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state is 0 (step 131SGS66). If the value of the time-saving counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving counter (step 131SGS67) and checks whether the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 131SGS68). If the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving state will end when the variable display ends (step 131SGS69).

In this embodiment, steps 131SGS66 to 131SGSS69 are executed before the counting process of the variable display number until the rescue time reduction from step 131SGS71 onwards, and the time reduction counter is decremented, but this is not the only processing mode. For example, the time reduction counter may be decremented after the counting process of the variable display number until the rescue time reduction from step 131SGS71 onwards. In this case, for example, in the case of a variable display that is a rescue time reduction, if the time reduction counter is set to "110" (see step 131SGS172) and then the decrement process is executed, the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by one extra, so in the case of a variable display that is a rescue time reduction, the time reduction counter may be configured to be incremented by one again after the decrement process. Also, the time reduction counter may be configured to be set to "111", which is one more than the time reduction counter, in advance.

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the high probability flag is set (step 131SGS69A). If the high probability flag is set (i.e., the game is in a high probability state), the process proceeds to step 131SGS84. In this embodiment, the process of step 131SGS69A is executed, and if the game is in a high probability state, the process of steps 131SGS70 and after (particularly the process of step 131SGSS71) is not executed. Therefore, even if a variable display is executed when the game state is in a high probability state (in this embodiment, during Extreme Battle Rush), the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not decremented. If the high probability flag is not set (i.e., the game is not in a high probability state), the process proceeds to step 131SGSS70.

In this embodiment, when the high probability flag is set, the process proceeds to step 131SGSS84 without executing the processes after step 131SGSS70. However, this is not limited to the above. When the high probability flag is set, the process proceeds to step 131SGSS70, but step 131SGSS71 may not be executed. In other words, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not updated, but a rescue time reduction number designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command corresponding to the value of the unupdated rescue time reduction counter may be sent.

Next, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 131SGS70; Yes). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 131SGS70; Yes), the process proceeds to step 131SGS84. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 at this point, it means that the game has already been controlled to the time reduction state (time reduction state B) via the rescue time reduction (time that is controlled to the time reduction state B, or time that is controlled to the normal state after 1100 fluctuations in the time reduction state B), and a jackpot has not occurred, which is the trigger for setting the rescue time reduction counter to 900. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0 (step 131SGS70; No), the value of the rescue time reduction counter is decremented by 1 (step 131SGS71). In addition, in this embodiment, the processing of step 131SGS71 is executed, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the variable display of the first special pattern is executed or the variable display of the second special pattern is executed.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 131SGS72). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (step 131SGS72; No), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data and controls the transmission of a rescue time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS73). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9401H as the rescue time reduction number designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 126, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 947EH as the rescue time reduction number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 131SGS74). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 131SGS84. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a rescue time reduction determination flag indicating that the rescue time reduction has occurred and that control will be made to time reduction state B at the end of the fluctuation (step 131SGS75). Then, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 131SGS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 131SGS72; Yes), the CPU 103 sets 7FH uniformly as the EXT data and controls to send the command 957FH as the rescue time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS76). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the remaining variable display number until the rescue time reduction is a number in units of 100 (in this embodiment, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800) (step 131SGS77). Note that whether the remaining variable display number until the rescue time reduction is a number in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the rescue time reduction counter. If the remaining variable display count until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter in the EXT data and controls the transmission of a rescue time reduction count 2 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS78). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 100, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9601H as the rescue time reduction count 2 designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 800, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9608H as the rescue time reduction count 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 131SGS84.

In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) counts the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction and transmits a rescue time reduction number designation command or a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction and execute the teasing presentation or countdown presentation described below.

In addition, for example, if the rescue time reduction counter is set (set to "900") at the time of the rescue time reduction so that rescue time reductions can occur consecutively, the rescue time reduction number designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command may be sent only the first time the rescue time reduction occurs, and the rescue time reduction number designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command may not be sent the second or subsequent time the rescue time reduction occurs.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stopping pattern of the special pattern according to the result of the determination of the jackpot type (step 131SGS84). In this case, for example, if it is determined to be a jackpot A, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "2", if it is determined to be a jackpot B, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "3", if it is determined to be a jackpot C, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "7", and if it is determined to be a miss, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "-". The CPU 103 also stores the determined stopping pattern of the special pattern in a stopping pattern storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 131SGS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (step S111) (step 131SGS86).

[Special symbol stop processing]
11-21 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop processing (step S113) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first judges whether or not the symbol determination period timer is operating (step 131SGS131). If the symbol determination period timer is not operating, the CPU 103 performs a derived display of the special symbol stop pattern (step 131SGS132). Then, it judges whether or not the big win flag is set (step 131SGS133).

If the jackpot flag is set, the game status flags such as the time-saving A flag, time-saving B flag, and probability bonus flag are cleared (step 131SGS134), the time-saving count counter is cleared (step 131SGS135), and the jackpot start command transmission setting corresponding to the jackpot type is performed, and the process proceeds to step 131SGS147 (step 131SGS136). The jackpot start command transmission setting is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see FIG. 5).

Also, if the jackpot flag is not set in step 131SGS133, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the rescue time-saving determination flag is set (step 131SGS140). If the rescue time-saving determination flag is not set, proceed to step 131SGS147. If the rescue time-saving determination flag is set, the rescue time-saving determination flag is cleared and the time-saving B flag indicating that the time-saving state is B is set (steps 131SGS141 and 131SGS142). Furthermore, the time-saving count counter is set to 1100 corresponding to the time-saving state B (rescue time-saving), and the time-saving state B designation command is set for transmission (steps 131SGS143 and 131SGS144). The time-saving state B designation command that has been set for transmission is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see FIG. 5).

The right hit lamp 131SG132 starts to light up, and the right hit LED lighting notification command is set for transmission (steps 131SGS145 and 131SGS146). The right hit LED lighting notification command that has been set for transmission is sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see FIG. 5).

Then, the pattern determination period timer is set to a value corresponding to the pattern determination period of 0.5 seconds, and a pattern determination command is set for transmission, and the process proceeds to step 131SGS149 (step 131SGS147, step 131SGS148). The pattern determination command set for transmission is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see FIG. 5).

In step 131SGS149, the CPU 103 sets the game state designation command to be sent according to the game state, and ends the special symbol stop process. The game state designation command that has been set to be sent is sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see FIG. 5).

If the pattern determination period timer is running in step 131SGS131, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the pattern determination period timer by 1 (step 131SGS150) and determines whether the pattern determination period timer has timed out (step 131SGS151). If the pattern determination period timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 terminates the special pattern stop process. If the pattern determination period timer has timed out, the CPU 103 determines whether the derived stopped pattern is a losing pattern (step 131SGS152). If the derived stopped pattern is a losing pattern, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern process and terminates the special pattern stop process (step 131SGS153). If the derived stopped pattern is a jackpot pattern, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing and terminates the special pattern stop process (step 131SGS154).

[state transition]
Next, the state transition in this embodiment will be described. Figure 11-22 is a state transition diagram for explaining the state transition in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 11-22, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), if a jackpot B occurs and the game ball passes through the high probability area (V switch 131SG023B1), the game is controlled to the high probability state, and if a jackpot A occurs, the game is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot (low probability/high base state)). Although not shown, even if a jackpot B occurs and the game ball does not pass through the high probability area (V switch 131SG023B1), the game is also controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Also, even if it is a miss, if the rescue time-saving state is entered (if the number of variable displays reaches 900 without the next jackpot occurring after the RAM clear process or the end of the special probability state, or if the number of variable displays reaches 790 without the next jackpot occurring after the end of 110 variable displays in time-saving state A), it will be controlled to time-saving state B (time-saving state via rescue time-saving state (low probability/high base state)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-22, in the probability variable state (high probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable area, the game will be controlled to the probability variable state again. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the game will be controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot).

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-22, in time-saving state A (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable area, the state is controlled to the probability variable state. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the state is controlled back to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Also, in time-saving state A, if 110 variable displays end without a jackpot occurring, the state is controlled to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 11-22, in time-saving state B (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable area, the state is controlled to the probability variable state. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the state is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot) again. In time-saving state B, if 1100 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring, the state is controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, even if it is a miss, if it is a rescue time-saving state (if the number of variable displays reaches 900 without the next jackpot occurring after the RAM clear process or the end of the probability variable state, or if the number of variable displays reaches 790 without the next jackpot occurring after the end of 110 variable displays in time-saving state A), the state is controlled to the time-saving state B (time-saving state via rescue time-saving).

In this embodiment, if a jackpot occurs during time-saving state B and the game ball does not enter the variable probability area, the game will always transition to time-saving state A, but this control is not limited to this. For example, the current remaining number of time-saving times may be compared with the number of time-saving times (110 times in this embodiment) that would occur if the game ball did not enter the variable probability area (V switch 131SG023B1), and if the current remaining number of time-saving times is greater, the game may be configured to continue the current time-saving state B as is.

In this embodiment, although it is possible to execute a variable display of the first special symbol during the time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state, this would be disadvantageous to the player, so the state transition is explained without assuming that the variable display of the first special symbol will be executed during the time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state.

[Direction control process/preview notice]
As shown in Figures 11-23 and 11-24, in the advance notice setting process of this embodiment, the display mode of the active display and the reserved display is determined by setting the reserved display flag to either 0 or 2 at the timing when a start winning occurs (the timing when the start winning port winning designation command, pattern designation command, variable category command, and reserved memory number notification command are newly stored as reserved memory in the start winning time received command buffer shown in Figure 11-15 (B)), and the display mode of these active display and reserved display makes it possible to suggest the proportion of times the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-24, if the variable display result indicated by the pattern designation command is "miss" and the variable category indicated by the variable category command is "non-reach," it is determined that the pre-reading preview will not be executed (the value of the pending display flag is set to "0") 95% of the time, the pre-reading preview will be executed in presentation pattern α (the value of the pending display flag is set to "1") 5% of the time, and the pre-reading preview will be executed in presentation pattern β (the value of the pending display flag is set to "2") 0% of the time.

In addition, if the variable display result indicated by the pattern designation command is "miss" and the variable category indicated by the variable category command is "other (normal reach)", it is determined that the pre-reading notice will not be executed (the value of the pending display flag is set to "0") with a probability of 90%, the pre-reading notice will be executed in presentation pattern α (the value of the pending display flag is set to "1") with a probability of 10%, and the pre-reading notice will be executed in presentation pattern β (the value of the pending display flag is set to "2") with a probability of 0%.

In addition, if the variable display result indicated by the pattern designation command is "miss" and the variable category indicated by the variable category command is "super reach," it is determined that the pre-reading prediction will not be executed (the value of the pending display flag is set to "0") with a probability of 70%, the pre-reading prediction will be executed in presentation pattern α (the value of the pending display flag is set to "1") with a probability of 20%, and the pre-reading prediction will be executed in presentation pattern β (the value of the pending display flag is set to "2") with a probability of 10%.

In addition, if the variable display result indicated by the pattern designation command is a "jackpot," then it is determined that the pre-reading prediction will not be performed (the reserved display flag value is set to "0") at a rate of 5%, the pre-reading prediction will be performed in presentation pattern α (the reserved display flag value is set to "1") at a rate of 30%, and the pre-reading prediction will be performed in presentation pattern β (the reserved display flag value is set to "2") at a rate of 65%.

After the execution of the advance notice setting process, the pending display/active display update process (131SGS162), the remaining number of times when the rescue time reduction etc. has been reached display update process (step 131SGS163), and the rescue time reduction reaching notification performance execution process (step 131SGS164) are executed. In the pending display/active display update process, a process is executed to start displaying the pending display or active display in a display mode according to the value of the pending display flag, a process is executed to erase the active display from the active display area 131SG005F at the timing of the end of the variable display, a process is executed to hide or start displaying the pending display or active display according to the progress of the performance during the variable display, and the like. In the rescue time reduction reaching remaining number of times display update process, a process is executed to reduce and update the value of the rescue time reduction reaching remaining number display 131SG005Z (see FIG. 11-1) displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the variable display, a process is executed to hide or start displaying the rescue time reduction reaching remaining number display 131SG005Z according to the progress of the performance during the variable display, and the like. In the rescue time-saving reaching notification display execution process, a process is executed to execute the rescue time-saving reaching notification display that notifies the player that the time-saving state B has been entered, from the timing when the variable display ends when the number of variable displays reaches 900.

[Variable display start setting process]
FIG. 11-25 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first judges whether the first variable display start command reception flag is set (step 131SGS601). If the first variable display start command reception flag is set, various command data stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A is copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B (131SGS602). In addition, the first special chart reserved memory (various command data stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A is shifted one by one to the upper position (step 131SGS603). At this time, the various command data stored in the buffer number "1-1" is erased because there is no destination to shift to.

Also, in step 131SGS601, if the first variable display start command reception flag is not on, it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is set (step 131SGS604). If the second variable display start command reception flag is set, the various command data stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A is copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B (131SGS605). Also, the second special chart reserved memory (various command data stored in association with buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A is shifted up one by one (step 131SGS606). At this time, the various command data stored in buffer number "2-1" is erased because there is no destination to shift to.

If the second special chart variable display start command reception flag is not on, the variable display start setting process ends.

After executing step 131SGS603 or step 131SGS6060, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 131SGS607). Furthermore, it determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the read variation pattern designation command and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (step 131SGS608).

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-26, when the variable display result is a "miss" and the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach (non-reach miss), the stopping pattern is determined to be a "non-reach" combination such as "124" or "578" (non-reach mode, non-reach miss mode) with a probability of 100%. Also, when the variable display result is a "miss" and the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach (normal reach miss), the stopping pattern is determined to be an even number "reach" combination such as "242" or "676" (even number reach mode, even number reach miss mode) with a probability of 95%, and a "reach" combination with an odd number other than 7 such as "131" or "545" (odd number reach mode, odd number reach miss mode) with a probability of 5%.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" and the fluctuation pattern is super reach (super reach miss), the stopping pattern is determined to be a "reach" combination of even numbers such as "242" or "676" (even number reach mode, even number reach miss mode) with an 80% probability, a "reach" combination of odd numbers other than 7 such as "131" or "545" (odd number reach mode, odd number reach miss mode) with a 19% probability, and a "reach" combination of 7 symbols such as "767" or "787" ("7" reach mode, "7" reach miss mode) with a 1% probability.

If the variable display result is a "jackpot," the stopping symbols are determined to be a "reach" combination of even numbers such as "222" or "666" (even reach mode, even reach jackpot mode) with a probability of 20%, a "reach" combination of odd numbers other than 7 such as "111" or "555" (odd reach mode, odd reach jackpot mode) with a probability of 50%, and a "reach" combination of the 7 symbols "777" ("7" reach mode, "7" reach jackpot mode) with a probability of 30%.

In other words, the likelihood of a jackpot is highest when the decorative symbol is a "7" symbol, followed by a decreasing likelihood of a jackpot when an odd symbol other than a "7" is in reach, an even symbol is in reach, and then a non-reach (expected likelihood of a jackpot based on decorative symbol: reach with "7" symbol > reach with odd symbol other than a "7" > reach with even symbol > non-reach). For this reason, in this embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the decorative symbol will be in reach, and which symbol will be in reach.

In this embodiment, the expected probability of a jackpot is different depending on whether the decorative symbols are an even number combination or an odd number combination, but the present invention is not limited to this. The expected probability of a jackpot may be the same regardless of the decorative symbol combination that results in a jackpot, or the expected probability of a jackpot when a jackpot is reached may differ depending on the size of the numbers indicated by the decorative symbols.

Returning to FIG. 11-25, after determining the stopping pattern of the decorative symbols, the performance control CPU 120 executes a variable display preview performance determination process (step 131SGS609) to determine whether or not to execute a variable display preview performance that suggests that the variable display result may be a jackpot during the variable display.

Then, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table (presentation control pattern) according to the variation pattern, game status, variable display result, and the result of the variable display preview presentation determination process (step 131SGS610), and starts the process timer (step 131SGS611).

In addition, each process table has a performance control pattern set. Specifically, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (131SGS612). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select a variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value equivalent to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command (131SGS613). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (131SGS614). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (S172) (131SGS615).

In addition, in the variable display performance processing, the values of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are each set to -1. Then, control of the performance device is executed according to the value of the process timer, the variable display of the decorative pattern is realized as described above according to the value of the variable display control timer, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped according to the value of the variable display time timer, and the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value according to the special pattern hit waiting processing (S173).

[About the effects during variable display]
When the performance control CPU 120 receives a first variable display start command or a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the variable display start waiting process of step S170, it determines the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (confirmed decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not to execute a reach performance, the mode thereof, the execution start timing, etc. based on the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern designation command and the variable display results such as special patterns and decorative patterns specified by the variable display result designation command in the subsequent variable display start setting process of step S171, sets a performance control pattern that reflects the determined results, etc., and controls the variable display of the decorative pattern and the reach performance, etc. based on the set performance control pattern.

[About the production control pattern]
As shown in Figures 11-27 and 11-28, the performance control patterns are set for each of the variation patterns PA1-1 to 4, PA2-1 to 19, and PB1-1 to 18.

As the presentation control patterns corresponding to the fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, non-reach patterns 1 to 4 are set in which the decorative symbols do not reach a target state and are not reached. Fluctuation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 are fluctuation patterns designated in the normal state, PA1-3 is a fluctuation pattern selected in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and PA1-4 is a fluctuation pattern selected in the time-saving state B. In the corresponding non-reach patterns 1 to 4, the time until the variable display of the decorative symbols ends is set to be different depending on the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern.

The control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-1 is a pattern in which a normal reach is performed ("normal" in the figure) in which the decorative pattern is in a reach state, and then the reach is lost. The variation pattern PA2-1 is a variation pattern specified in the normal state, the time-saving state A, and the probability change state.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-2 is set to a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance ("low base weak A" in the diagram) is executed, and then the reach is missed.The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-3 is set to a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance ("low base weak B" in the diagram) is executed, and then the reach is missed.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-4 is set to a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then a low base strong reach A reach performance ("low base strong A" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-5 is set to a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, and then a low base strong reach A reach performance is executed, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-6 is set to a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base strong reach A reach performance is executed, followed by a reach miss.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-7 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then a low base strong reach B reach performance ("low base strong B" in the diagram) is executed, after which the reach is missed.The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-8 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, and then a low base strong reach B reach performance is executed, after which the reach is missed.The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-9 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base strong reach B reach performance is executed, and then the reach is missed.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-10 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then a low base strong reach C reach performance is executed, after which the reach is missed.The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-11 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, and then a low base strong reach C reach performance is executed, after which the reach is missed.The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-12 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base strong reach C reach performance is executed, and then the reach is missed.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-13 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then a low base strongest super reach reach performance ("low base strongest" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a reach miss.The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-14 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, and then a low base strongest super reach reach performance is executed, followed by a reach miss.The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-15 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base strongest super reach reach performance is executed, followed by a reach miss.

Fluctuation patterns PA2-2 to PA2-15 are all specified in the normal state.

As a presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-16, a pattern is set in which after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a high base reach A ("high base A" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is missed. As a presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-17, a pattern is set in which after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a high base reach B ("high base B" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is missed. As a presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-18, a pattern is set in which after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a high base reach C ("high base C" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is missed. As a presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-19, a pattern is set in which after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a high base reach D ("high base D" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is missed.

Patterns PA2-16 to PA2-19 are all selected in time-saving state A and special state.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-1 is set to execute a normal reach presentation followed by a jackpot.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-2 is set to a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then a low base strong reach A reach performance is executed, followed by a jackpot.The presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-3 is set to a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, and then a low base strong reach A reach performance is executed, followed by a jackpot.The presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-4 is set to a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base strong reach A reach performance is executed, followed by a jackpot.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-5 is a pattern in which, after the normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then a low base strong reach B reach performance is executed, followed by a jackpot.The presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-6 is a pattern in which, after the normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, and then a low base strong reach B reach performance is executed, followed by a jackpot.The presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-7 is a pattern in which, after the normal reach reach performance, a low base strong reach B reach performance is executed, followed by a jackpot.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-8 is set to a pattern in which, after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a low base weak super reach A is executed, and then a reach performance of a low base strong reach C is executed, followed by a jackpot.The presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-9 is set to a pattern in which, after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a low base weak super reach B is executed, and then a reach performance of a low base strong reach C is executed, followed by a jackpot.The presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-10 is set to a pattern in which, after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a low base strong reach C is executed, followed by a jackpot.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-11 is set to execute a normal reach reach performance, followed by a low base weak super reach A reach performance, then a low base strongest super reach reach performance, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-12 is set to execute a normal reach reach performance, followed by a low base weak super reach B reach performance, then a low base strongest super reach reach performance, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-13 is set to execute a normal reach reach performance, followed by a low base strongest super reach reach performance, followed by a jackpot.

Fluctuation patterns PB1-1 to PB1-13 are all fluctuation patterns selected in normal conditions.

As a presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-14, a pattern is set in which after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a high base reach A is executed, followed by a jackpot. As a presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-15, a pattern is set in which after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a high base reach B is executed, followed by a jackpot. As a presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-16, a pattern is set in which after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a high base reach C is executed, followed by a jackpot. As a presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-17, a pattern is set in which after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a high base reach D is executed, followed by a jackpot.

Patterns PB1-14 to PB1-17 are all selected in time-saving state A and special state.

The effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern PB1-18 is set to a pattern in which a jackpot is achieved without executing the reach effect of a normal reach or super reach. The fluctuation pattern PB1-18 is the fluctuation pattern selected in the time-saving state B.

[About the flow of the presentation during variable display]
11-29 is a diagram showing the flow of the presentation during variable display in the normal state. The presentation control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variable pattern designated by the variable pattern designation command is PA1-1 or PA1-2, controls the decorative pattern to be not in a reach state but in a non-reach miss state.

The presentation control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-1 or PB1-1, executes a normal reach reach presentation in which the decorative pattern is in a reach state, and then controls so that the reach is missed if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-1, and controls so that a jackpot is reached if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-1.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-2, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, then executes the reach performance of a low base weak super reach A, and then notifies a miss as the performance result of the reach performance of a low base weak super reach A, and controls so that the reach is a miss.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-3, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, then executes the reach performance of a low base weak super reach B, and then notifies a miss as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base weak super reach B, and controls so that the reach is a miss.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-4 or PB1-2, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, then executes the reach performance of a low base weak super reach A, and then executes the reach performance of a low base strong super reach A, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-4, it controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach A, and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-2, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach A, and the jackpot is achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-5 or PB1-3, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, then executes the reach performance of a low base weak super reach B, and then executes the reach performance of a low base strong super reach A, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-5, it controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach A, and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-3, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach A, and the jackpot is achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-6 or PB1-4, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, and then executes the reach performance of a low base strong super reach A, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-6, it controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach A, and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-4, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach A, and the jackpot is achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-7 or PB1-5, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, then executes the reach performance of a low base weak super reach A, and then executes the reach performance of a low base strong super reach B, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-7, it controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach B, and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-5, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach B, and the jackpot is achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-8 or PB1-6, it executes the normal reach reach performance, then executes the low base weak super reach B reach performance, and then executes the low base strong super reach B reach performance, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-8, it controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the low base strong super reach B reach performance, and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-6, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the low base strong super reach B reach performance, and the jackpot is achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-9 or PB1-7, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, and then executes the reach performance of a low base strong super reach B, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-9, it controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach B, and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-7, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach B, and the jackpot is achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-10 or PB1-8, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, then executes the reach performance of a low base weak super reach A, and then executes the reach performance of a low base strong super reach C, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-10, it controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach C, and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-8, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach C, and the jackpot is achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-11 or PB1-9, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, then executes the reach performance of a low base weak super reach B, and then executes the reach performance of a low base strong super reach C, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-11, it controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach C, and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-9, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach C, and the jackpot is achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-12 or PB1-10, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, and then executes the reach performance of a low base strong super reach C, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-12, it controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach C, and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-10, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach C, and the jackpot is achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-13 or PB1-11, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, then executes the reach performance of a low base weak super reach A, and then executes the reach performance of a low base strongest super reach, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-13, it controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strongest super reach, and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-11, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strongest super reach, and the jackpot is achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-14 or PB1-12, it executes the normal reach reach performance, then executes the low base weak super reach B reach performance, and then executes the low base strongest super reach reach performance, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-14, it controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the low base strongest super reach reach performance, and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-12, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the low base strongest super reach reach performance, and the jackpot is achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-15 or PB1-13, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, and then executes the reach performance of a low base strongest super reach, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-15, it controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strongest super reach, and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-13, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strongest super reach, and the jackpot is achieved.

In this way, in the normal state, a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base weak super reach A and B reach performance, and is not controlled to a jackpot.Only the reach performances of low base strong super reach A-C, which are executed via the low base weak super reach A and B reach performance, low base strongest reach, and low base strong super reach A-C, which are executed without going through the low base weak super reach A and B reach performance, and low base strongest super reach, will announce a jackpot as the result of the performance and be controlled to a jackpot.

Figure 11-30 is a diagram showing the flow of presentation during variable display in time-saving state A and high probability state. The presentation control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in time-saving state A and high probability state, and when the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command is PA1-3, controls so that the decorative pattern does not become a reach state but becomes a non-reach miss.

The presentation control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and executes a normal reach presentation if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-1 or PB1-1, and then controls so that the reach is missed if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-1, and controls so that a jackpot is reached if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-1.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-16 or PB1-14, executes the reach performance of a normal reach, and then executes the reach performance of a high base super reach A, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-16, controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the high base super reach A, and controls so that the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-14, controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the high base super reach A, and controls so that a jackpot is announced.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-17 or PB1-15, executes the reach performance of a normal reach, and then executes the reach performance of a high base super reach B, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-17, controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the high base super reach B, and controls so that the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-15, controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the high base super reach B, and controls so that a jackpot is announced.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-18 or PB1-16, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, and then executes the reach performance of a high base super reach C, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-18, it controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the high base super reach C, and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-16, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the high base super reach C, and the jackpot is achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-19 or PB1-17, executes the reach performance of a normal reach, and then executes the reach performance of a high base super reach D, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-19, controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the high base super reach D, and controls so that the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-17, controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the high base super reach D, and controls so that a jackpot is announced.

In this way, in the time-saving state A and the probability variable state, the result of a big hit or a miss is announced in the normal performance or in the reach performance of the high base super reach A to D that is controlled after the normal performance, and then it is controlled to a big hit or a miss, and no other reach performance is executed from the high base super reach A to D that is controlled after the normal performance.

Figure 11-31 is a diagram showing the flow of the presentation during variable display in time-saving state B. The presentation control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in time-saving state B, and when the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command is PA1-4, controls the decorative pattern so that it does not become a reach state but becomes a non-reach miss.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state B, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-18, controls the decorative pattern so that it does not become a reach state but becomes a jackpot.

In this way, in time-saving state B, the game is controlled so that misses and big wins always result in a non-reach.

[About the Super Reach Production]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the reach performance of the super reach during the variable display. The reach performance of the super reach includes the reach performance of the low base weak super reach A, B, the low base strong super reach A to C, and the low base strongest super reach executed in the normal state as described above, and the reach performance of the high base super reach A to D executed in the time-saving state A and the probability variable state. In the following, the reach effects of normal reaches and super reaches may be simply referred to as normal reach effects and super reach effects, respectively, the reach effects of low base weak super reach A, low base weak super reach B, low base strong super reach A, low base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C and low base strongest super reach may be simply referred to as low base weak reach A effects, low base weak reach B effects, low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, low base strong reach C effects and low base strongest reach effects, respectively, and the reach effects of high base super reach A, high base super reach B, high base super reach C and high base super reach D may be simply referred to as high base reach A effects, high base reach B effects, high base reach C effects and high base reach effects, respectively.

The Super Reach effect is an effect that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, and also announces the final result of whether or not a jackpot will occur (for low base weak Super Reach A and B, the result will be whether it develops into low base strong Super Reach A-C or low base strongest Super Reach, or whether it will be a miss).

In addition, each type of super reach performance has a title set for it, and the super reach performance is made up of a title display part where the title of the super reach performance is displayed, and an introduction part that follows the title display part and ends when the performance result is announced.

[Variations of low base weak reach A and B effects]
In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern for executing a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance does not include a fluctuation pattern in which a jackpot is reached without developing into other super reach performances after the execution of a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, but it may also be a fluctuation pattern PB1-JA in which a jackpot is reached without developing into other super reach performances after the execution of a low base weak reach A performance, and a fluctuation pattern PB1-JB in which a jackpot is reached without developing into other super reach performances after the execution of a low base weak reach B performance.

In such a configuration, the presentation control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-JA, it executes a normal reach presentation, then executes a low base weak reach A presentation, and controls so that a jackpot is announced as the presentation result of the low base weak reach A presentation, resulting in a jackpot, and when it receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-JB, it executes a normal reach presentation, then executes a low base weak reach B presentation, and controls so that a jackpot is announced as the presentation result of the low base weak reach B presentation, resulting in a jackpot. Therefore, in this configuration, in the introductory part of the low base weak reach A performance, it is either announced whether or not the performance will result in a jackpot or it will develop into another super reach performance, and in the introductory part of the low base weak reach B performance, it is either announced whether or not the performance will result in a jackpot or it will develop into another super reach performance.

In addition, the configuration may not include a variation pattern that develops into another super reach performance after the execution of the low base weak reach A or B performance. In such a configuration, in the introductory part of the low base weak reach A or B performance, it will be announced whether or not the performance will result in a jackpot.

In the following examples, a configuration may also be applied that includes a variation pattern that results in a jackpot without developing into other super reach effects after the execution of low base weak reach A and B effects. In this case, the configuration is set to have a higher jackpot expectancy for low base strong reach A to C effects and low base strongest reach effects than for low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach A effects, and a determination ratio for variation patterns that result in a miss after the execution of low base weak reach A and B effects, and variation patterns that result in a jackpot without developing into other super reach effects after the execution of low base weak reach A and B effects.

[About the low base weak reach A performance]
FIG. 11-32 is a diagram showing the progression of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base weak reach A performance is executed, and FIG. 11-33 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach A performance.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state and, when a variable pattern corresponding to a low base weak super reach A is specified by the variable pattern specification command, it starts the variation of a relatively large size decorative pattern (decorative pattern (large)), and executes a normal reach performance in which the decorative pattern (large) of the type specified by the variable display result specification command at a predetermined timing stops in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R on the image display device 5 to create a reach state, as shown in FIG. 11-32 (a1). After that, it executes the operation promotion performance A described later, and executes a white flash performance in which the entire display area is displayed in white while maintaining the pending display and active display of the first pending memory display area 131SG005D, the second pending memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, as shown in FIG. 11-32 (a2), and then starts the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance.

As shown in Figures 11-32 (a1) to (a3), the background (daytime sky background) of the changing decorative pattern (large) in the normal state that was displayed before the white flash performance changes to the background (corridor background) of the low base weak reach A performance after the white flash performance, and the decorative pattern (large) that was displayed in a reach mode before the white flash performance changes to a reach mode of a decorative pattern (small) that is smaller than the decorative pattern (large) after the white flash performance.

As shown in FIG. 11-33, the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance includes a title start period from when part of the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu!" of the low base weak reach A performance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in their fixed position, a title display period during which the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu!" are displayed in their fixed position, and a title end period from when the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu!" that were displayed in their fixed position disappear and switch to the introduction part.

When the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance, it first starts displaying the title start period. During the title start period of the low base weak reach A performance, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a3) to (a4), part of the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu!" are made to appear from the left side of the display area in a manner overlapping with the left decorative pattern (small) of the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode, and then the entire title characters "Catch a Bakuchu!" are moved toward their fixed position and stopped at the fixed position. When the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu!" are stopped at their fixed position, part of the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu!" are displayed in a manner overlapping with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state will be any number between "1" and "9" ("2" in the figure), but during the title start period of the low base weak reach A performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state are any number between "1" and "9", part of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the left and right of the reach state, and when the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" are stationary in their fixed position, part of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" will be displayed overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the title characters "Catch Bakuchu!" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the low base weak reach A performance, as shown in FIG. 11-32 (a4) to (a5), the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears behind the title characters "Catch Bakuchu!" displayed in a fixed position, and a subtitle "Try and catch him if you can!", which corresponds to the scene in which the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears, is displayed below the title characters "Catch Bakuchu!", and the audio of the subtitled line is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-33, the audio of the title being read out is not output. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-33, the title display period of the low base weak reach A performance is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base weak reach A performance (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to displaying the title end period. During the title end period of the low base weak reach A performance, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a5) to (a6), the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" displayed in their fixed position are moved from their fixed position to the right side of the display area until all of the title characters disappear. As shown in Figure 11-33, the title end period of the low base weak reach A performance ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base weak reach A performance (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Also, as shown in Figure 11-33, the expectation indication display, which will be described later, is not displayed in the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance.

After the title end period ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the low base weak reach A performance. As shown in FIG. 11-32 (a6) to (a7), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A performance is the same as the background of the title display part (the background of the hallway), the video scene that started from the title display part (the scene in which the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears) also continues throughout the introductory part, the line "Try and catch him if you can!" that was displayed in the title display part also continues to be displayed, and the audio of the line output from the speakers 8L and 8R also continues to be output. After that, as shown in FIG. 11-32 (a7) to (a8), at the timing when the audio output of the line "Try and catch him if you can!" that was displayed in the title display part ends, the scene switches to the next video scene of the introductory part (a scene in which the ally character "Yume Yume" chases the enemy character "Bakuchu").

When a variation pattern is specified by the variation pattern specification command to develop into either low base strong super reach A-C or low base strongest super reach after low base weak super reach A, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance executes a drop performance in which the movable body 32 falls at the end of the introduction part, and then develops into either low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, low base strong reach C performance, or low base strongest reach performance. On the other hand, when a variation pattern is specified by the variation pattern specification command to develop into a reach miss after low base weak super reach A, the CPU 120 notifies the user that the ally character "Yume Yume" is unable to catch the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introduction part, and the low base weak reach A performance result is not a jackpot, and then displays on the image display device 5 a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating a reach miss of the type specified by the variable display result specification command.

In a configuration including a variation pattern in which a jackpot is reached without developing into other super reach effects after the execution of a low base weak reach A performance, when a variation pattern in which a jackpot is reached without developing into other super reach effects after the execution of a low base weak reach A performance after a low base weak super reach A is specified by a variation pattern specification command, the performance control CPU 120 notifies the player of the performance result that a jackpot is reached (the game is controlled to a jackpot game state) as the performance result of the low base weak reach A performance at the end of the introductory part, and then displays on the image display device 5 a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating the type of jackpot specified by the variable display result specification command.

[About the low base weak reach B performance]
FIG. 11-34 is a diagram showing the progression of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base weak reach B performance is executed, and FIG. 11-35 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach B performance.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state and a variable pattern corresponding to the low base weak super reach B is specified by the variable display result specification command, the CPU 120 starts the variation of the decorative pattern (large) and executes a normal reach performance in which the decorative pattern (large) of the type specified by the variable display result specification command is stopped at the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5 at a predetermined timing to set the reach state, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (b1). After that, the operation promotion performance A described later is executed, and as shown in FIG. 11-34 (b2), a white flash performance is executed in which the entire display area is displayed in white while maintaining the reserved display and active display of the first reserved memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, and then the title display part of the low base weak reach B performance is started.

As shown in Figures 11-34 (b1) to (b3), the background (daytime sky background) of the changing decorative pattern (large) in the normal state that was displayed before the white flash performance changes to the background of the low base weak reach B performance (a background in which the characters "Yume Yume" and "Boingo" face each other on either side of a hockey table) after the white flash performance, and the decorative pattern (large) that was displayed in a reach mode before the white flash performance changes to a reach mode of a decorative pattern (small) that is smaller in size than the decorative pattern (large) after the white flash performance.

As shown in FIG. 11-35, the title display part of the low base weak reach B effect includes a title start period from when a part of the title characters "Bilibili hockey showdown" of the low base weak reach B effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until it is displayed in the fixed position, a title display period during which the title characters "Bilibili hockey showdown" are displayed in the fixed position, and a title end period from when the title characters "Bilibili hockey showdown" that were displayed in the fixed position disappear and switch to the introductory part.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance transitions to the title display part of the low base weak reach B performance, it first starts displaying the title start period. During the title start period of the low base weak reach B performance, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (b3) to (b4), part of the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is made to appear from the left side of the display area in a manner overlapping with the left decorative pattern (small) of the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode, and then the entire title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" are moved toward the fixed position and stopped at the fixed position. When the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" are stopped at the fixed position, part of the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is displayed in a manner overlapping with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state will be any of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure), but during the title start period of the low base weak reach B performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state are any of the numbers "1" to "9", part of the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the left and right of the reach state, and when the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" are stationary in their fixed position, part of the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" will be displayed overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the low base weak reach B performance, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (b4) to (b5), a subtitle "Let's play hockey! I won't lose!" is displayed below the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown", corresponding to the scene in which the friendly character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Boingo" face each other on the left and right, and the audio of the line displayed in the subtitle is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-35, the audio of the title being read out is not output. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-35, the title display period of the low base weak reach B performance is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base weak reach B performance (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to displaying the title end period. During the title end period of the low base weak reach B performance, as shown in (b5) to (b6), the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" displayed in a fixed position are moved from their fixed position to the right side of the display area until all of the title characters disappear. As shown in Figure 11-35, the title end period of the low base weak reach B performance ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base weak reach B performance (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Also, as shown in Figure 11-35, the expectation indication display, which will be described later, is not displayed in the title display part of the low base weak reach B performance.

After the title end period ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the low base weak reach B performance. As shown in Figures 11-34 (b6) to (b7), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low base weak reach B performance is the same as the background of the title display part (the background in which the characters "Yume Yume" and "Boingo" face each other on either side of a hockey table), the video scene that started from the title display part (the scene in which the friendly character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Boingo" face each other on either side) also continues throughout the introductory part, the line that was displayed in the title display part "Let's play hockey! I won't lose!" also continues to be displayed, and the sound of the line output from speakers 8L and 8R also continues to be output. After that, as shown in Figure 11-34 (b7) to (b8), when the voice output of the line displayed in the title display part, "Let's play hockey! I won't lose!", ends, the scene switches to the next video scene in the introductory part (a scene in which the teammate character "Yume Yume" hits the puck back).

When a variation pattern is specified by the variation pattern specification command to develop into either low base strong super reach A-C or low base strongest super reach after low base weak super reach B, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance executes a drop performance in which the movable body 32 falls at the end of the introduction part, and then develops into either low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, low base strong reach C performance, or low base strongest reach performance. On the other hand, when a variation pattern is specified by the variation pattern specification command to develop into a reach miss after low base weak super reach B, the CPU 120 notifies the user that the ally character "Yume Yume" was unable to win against the enemy character "Boingo" at the end of the introduction part, and the low base weak reach B performance is not a big win as a result of the performance, and then displays on the image display device 5 a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating a reach miss of the type specified by the variable display result specification command.

In a configuration including a variation pattern in which a jackpot is reached without developing into other super reach effects after the execution of a low base weak reach B performance, when a variation pattern in which a jackpot is reached without developing into other super reach effects after the execution of a low base weak reach B performance is specified by a variation pattern specification command, the performance control CPU 120 notifies the player of the performance result that the ally character "Yume Yume" wins the game against the enemy character "Boingo" at the end of the introductory part and that the low base weak reach B performance results in a jackpot (the game is controlled to a jackpot game state), and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating the type of jackpot specified by the variable display result specification command.

[About the low base strong reach A performance]
FIG. 11-36 is a diagram showing the transition of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base strong reach A performance is executed, and FIG. 11-37 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A performance.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach A is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops from a normal reach via a low base weak super reach A or a low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach performance, it executes a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, and develops it into a low base strong reach A performance. Also, when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach A is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops directly from a normal reach, after executing the normal reach performance, it executes a selection performance described below, and develops it into a low base strong reach A performance.

When developing from a low base weak reach A or low base weak reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 executes a drop performance in which the movable body 32 drops at the end of the low base weak reach A or low base weak reach B performance, and then starts the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance. In the drop performance, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (c1), while maintaining the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach state, and the hold display and active display in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the background at the end of the low base weak reach A or low base weak reach B performance is switched to a background dedicated to the drop performance (a background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), and then the movable body 32 drops, and then the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position.

In addition, when a direct progression from a normal reach occurs, the performance control CPU 120 executes the selection performance described below, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (c1'), and then starts the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance. Details of the selection performance will be described later, but when the selection performance starts, the hold display and active display in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in FIG. 11-37, the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance includes a prologue display period before the title characters "Two people, catch a Bakuchu!" of the low base strong reach A performance are displayed, a title start period from when part of the title characters "Two people, catch a Bakuchu!" are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in their fixed position, a title display period during which the title characters "Two people, catch a Bakuchu!" are displayed in their fixed position, and a title end period until the title characters "Two people, catch a Bakuchu!" that were displayed in their fixed position disappear and switch to the introduction part.

When the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, it first starts displaying the prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low base strong reach A effect transitioned from the drop effect, the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern radiating from the center), the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach state, and the reserved and active displays of the first reserved memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are maintained, while the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern radiating from the center), the reserved and active displays, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

In addition, during the prologue display period of the low base strong reach A effect transitioned from the selection effect, the display of the selection result image of the selection effect (here, the result image of the low base strong reach A effect) and the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach state are maintained, and the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection effect, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

After the prologue display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title start period.

As shown in Figure 11-36 (c1) to (c3), during the prologue display period transitioned from the drop effect, the background dedicated to the drop effect (a background with a pattern spreading out radially from the center) that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" switches to the background of the low base strong reach A effect (a background in which the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" are displayed in the hallway) after the prologue display period ends, and the pending display and active display that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends. Note that the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends.

Also, although not shown, during the prologue display period transitioned from the selection performance, the selection result image of the selection performance that was displayed before the display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" switches to the background of the low base strong reach A performance (the background where the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" are displayed in the hallway) after the prologue display period ends. The display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach state is maintained even after the prologue display period ends, and the pending display and active display that were hidden during the selection performance are maintained as hidden.

As shown in Figure 11-36 (c3) to (c4), during the title start period of the low base strong reach A performance, part of the title characters "Two people, catch a Bakuchu!" appears from the left side of the display area, overlapping with the left decorative pattern (small) of the left and right decorative patterns in the reach mode, and then the entire title characters "Two people, catch a Bakuchu!" are moved toward their fixed position and stopped at the fixed position. When the title characters "Two people, catch a Bakuchu!" are stopped at their fixed position, part of the title characters "Two people, catch a Bakuchu!" is displayed overlapping with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) in the reach mode.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state will be any of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure), but during the title start period of the low base strong reach A performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state are any of the numbers "1" to "9", part of the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chu!" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the left and right of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state, and when the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chu!" is stationary in its fixed position, part of the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chu!" will be displayed overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the title characters "Two people, catch the explosive chu!" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the low base strong reach A performance, first, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (c4), the title characters "Two people, catch the explosive chu!" are displayed in a fixed position with the expectation indication display hidden for a predetermined time, and during that time, as shown in FIG. 11-37, a voice reading the title is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (c5) to (c6), an expectation indication display is displayed below the title characters "Two people, catch the explosive chu!" in a size smaller than the title characters "Two people, catch the explosive chu!". As shown in FIG. 11-37, the title display period of the low base strong reach A performance is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base strong reach A performance (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance transitions to the display of the title end period. In the title end period of the low base strong reach A performance, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (c6) to (c7), the title characters "Two people, catch the explosive chu!" displayed in the fixed position are moved from the fixed position to the right side of the display area until all of the title characters disappear. In addition, the expectation indication display is also moved to the right side of the display area together with the title characters until all of them disappear. As shown in FIG. 11-37, the title end period of the low base strong reach A performance ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach A performance (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48). In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-37, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the subtitles of the dialogue are not displayed as in the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and the sound of the dialogue is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

After the title end period ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the low base strong reach A performance. As shown in Figures 11-36 (c3) to (c8), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low base strong reach A performance is the same as the background after the title start period in the title display part (the background where the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" are displayed in the hallway), and the video scene that starts from the title display part (the scene where the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" are displayed in the hallway) also continues through the introduction part. Also, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c8) and 11-37, after the start of the introduction part, the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears, and a subtitle of the line "Try and catch him if you can!" corresponding to the scene in which the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears is displayed, and the sound of the line displayed in the subtitle is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach A performance, during the title display part, audio is output from speakers 8L, 8R reading the title, but subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part is not output from speakers 8L, 8R. After the introduction part starts, subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introduction part are displayed, and audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introduction part is output from speakers 8L, 8R.

When a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern resulting in a jackpot after a low base strong super reach A, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance notifies the player that the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" catch the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part, and that the low base strong reach A performance is a jackpot (the game state is controlled to be a jackpot), and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a jackpot of the type designated by the variable display result designation command. On the other hand, when a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a jackpot miss after a low base strong super reach A, the CPU 120 notifies the player that the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" cannot catch the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part, and that the low base strong reach A performance is not a jackpot, and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a jackpot miss of the type designated by the variable display result designation command.

[About the indication of the expectation of low base strong reach A performance]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the image display device 5 displays the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chu!" along with an expectation suggestion display in a size smaller than the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chu!". The expectation suggestion display displayed in the title display part is composed of five star-shaped objects and the text "Expectation" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation, as shown in Fig. 11-36 (c5), and the number of star-shaped objects whose color has changed from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects suggests the expectation.

In the normal state in which the low base strong reach A performance is executed, an object indicating the number of reserved balls and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5. On the other hand, since the expectation indication displayed in the title display part also indicates the expectation level using multiple objects, if the hold indication and active display and the expectation indication are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects constituting the hold indication and active display will be mistaken for objects in the expectation indication display. For this reason, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance in which the expectation indication is displayed, the hold indication and active display are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation indication, thereby preventing the objects constituting the hold indication and active display from being mistaken for objects in the expectation indication display.

In addition, since it is almost impossible for a game ball to enter the second start winning hole under normal circumstances, when the number of reserved balls in the first special chart is at its maximum (four) and is being displayed variably, a maximum of five objects may be displayed as reserved and active displays, which matches the number of objects indicating that the expectation level is at its maximum in the expectation level indication display. However, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the reserved and active displays are not displayed at the same time as the expectation level indication display, so even if the low base strong reach A performance is executed in a situation where a maximum of five objects are displayed as reserved and active displays, it is possible to prevent the objects displayed as reserved and active displays from being confused with the objects in the expectation level indication display, and the expectation level indication display from being mistakenly recognized as the maximum expectation level.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-36, the pending display and active display are displayed during the prologue display period before the expectation indication is displayed in the title display part. However, the pending display and active display may be hidden from the start of the prologue display period. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the objects constituting the pending display and active display from being mistaken for objects in the expectation indication display.

Furthermore, when a low base strong reach A performance is executed, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c2) to (c3), during the prologue display period, the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a background dedicated to the falling performance (a background with a pattern spreading out radially from the center) and on a layer in front of the pending display and active display, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled, and the pending display and active display that were displayed before the display area was filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends, so that the pending display and active display can be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity. In the example shown in FIG. 11-36, the characters are displayed in a layer in front of the pending and active displays, and are enlarged until the entire display area is filled, thereby hiding the pending and active displays that were displayed before the entire display area was filled. However, when a low base strong reach A performance is executed, a monochrome display performance may be executed in which the entire display area is displayed in a monochrome color such as white, except for the decorative pattern (small) of the reach mode, thereby erasing the pending and active displays that were displayed before the monochrome display performance. Even with this configuration, the pending and active displays can be hidden without any sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, as shown in FIG. 11-36(c4), the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chu!" is displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation indication hidden, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-36(c5) to (c6), the expectation indication is displayed below the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chu!". At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-36(c5), in the initial stage, the color of the five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation indication is all displayed in black, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-36(c6), the color of three of the five star-shaped objects that correspond to the low base strong reach A performance is changed from black to gold, suggesting the expectation of a jackpot in the low base strong reach A performance.

When a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance progresses to a low base strong reach A performance, as shown in Figures 11-38 (x1) to (x2), if there are any reserved numbers remaining, the reserved display and active display are displayed until the entire display area is filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" during the prologue display period, and in the subsequent title display part, without going through a stage where the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu together!" are displayed in a fixed position with the expectation indication display hidden, as shown in Figures 11-38 (x3) to (x4), five star-shaped objects that constitute the expectation indication display are displayed simultaneously with the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu together!", and then, if the color of the star-shaped objects is changed from black to gold, the objects that constitute the expectation indication display will be displayed immediately after the objects that constitute the reserved display and active display are hidden, which may cause confusion between the pending display and active display and the expectation indication display. In contrast, in the example shown in FIG. 11-36, after the expectation indication display is hidden during the prologue display period, the expectation indication display is hidden during the title display period, and the title characters "Two people, catch a Bakuchu!" are displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined time, and then the expectation indication display is displayed below the title characters "Two people, catch a Bakuchu!", preventing the pending and active displays from being confused with the expectation indication display.

[About the low base strong reach B performance]
FIG. 11-39 is a diagram showing the progression of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base strong reach B performance is executed, and FIG. 11-40 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach B performance.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach B is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops from a normal reach via a low base weak super reach A or a low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach performance, it executes a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, and develops it into a low base strong reach B performance. Also, when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach B is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops directly from a normal reach, after executing the normal reach performance, it executes a selection performance described below, and develops it into a low base strong reach B performance.

When developing from a low base weak reach A or low base weak reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 executes a drop performance in which the movable body 32 drops at the end of the low base weak reach A or low base weak reach B performance, and then starts the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance. In the drop performance, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d1), while maintaining the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach state, and the hold display and active display in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the background at the end of the low base weak reach A or low base weak reach B performance is switched to a background dedicated to the drop performance (a background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), and then the movable body 32 drops, and then the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position.

In addition, when a direct progression from a normal reach occurs, the performance control CPU 120 executes the selection performance described below, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d1'), and then starts the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance. Details of the selection performance will be described later, but when the selection performance starts, the hold display and active display in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in FIG. 11-40, the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance includes a prologue display period before the title characters "Shingeki Robo Battle" of the low base strong reach B performance are displayed, a title start period from when a part of the title characters "Shingeki Robo Battle" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in their fixed position, a title display period during which the title characters "Shingeki Robo Battle" are displayed in their fixed position, and a title end period until the display of the title characters "Shingeki Robo Battle" that were displayed in their fixed position disappears and switches to the introduction part.

When the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, it first starts displaying the prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low base strong reach B effect transitioned from the drop effect, the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern radiating from the center), the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode, and the reserved and active displays of the first reserved memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are maintained, while the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern radiating from the center), the reserved and active displays, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

In addition, during the prologue display period of the low base strong reach B effect transitioned from the selection effect, the display of the selection result image of the selection effect (here, the result image of the low base strong reach B effect) and the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach state are maintained, and the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection effect, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

After the prologue display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title start period.

As shown in Figure 11-39 (d1) to (d3), during the prologue display period transitioned from the drop effect, the background dedicated to the drop effect (a background with a pattern spreading out radially from the center) that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" switches to a background dedicated to the title display of the low base strong reach B effect (a background with the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" displayed on the left and right) after the prologue display period ends, and the pending display and active display that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends. Note that the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends.

Also, although not shown, during the prologue display period transitioned from the selection performance, the selection result image of the selection performance that was displayed before the display area was filled entirely with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" switches to a background dedicated to the title display of the low base strong reach B performance (a background in which the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are displayed on the left and right) after the prologue display period ends. The display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends, and the pending display and active display that were hidden during the selection performance are maintained as hidden.

During the title start period of the low base strong reach B performance, as shown in Figures 11-39 (d3) to (d4), part of the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" appears from the left side of the display area overlapping with the left decorative pattern (small) of the left and right decorative patterns of the reach mode, and then the entire title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" are moved toward the fixed position and stopped at the fixed position. When the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" are stopped at the fixed position, part of the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" is displayed overlapping with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state will be any number between "1" and "9" ("2" in the figure), but during the title start period of the low base strong reach B performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state are any number between "1" and "9", part of the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the left and right of the reach state, and when the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" are stationary in a fixed position, part of the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" will be displayed overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the low base strong reach B performance, first, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d4), the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" are displayed in a fixed position with the expectation indication display hidden for a predetermined time, and during that time, as shown in FIG. 11-40, audio is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to read out the title. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d5) to (d6), an expectation indication display is displayed below the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" in a size smaller than the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle". As shown in FIG. 11-40, the title display period of the low base strong reach B performance is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base strong reach B performance (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance transitions to the display of the title end period. In the title end period of the low base strong reach B performance, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d6) to (d7), the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" displayed in the fixed position are moved from the fixed position to the right side of the display area until all of the title characters disappear. In addition, the expectation indication display is also moved to the right side of the display area together with the title characters until all of them disappear. As shown in FIG. 11-40, the title end period of the low base strong reach B performance ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach B performance (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48). In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-40, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, no subtitles of the dialogue are displayed, as in the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and no sound of the dialogue is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

After the title end period ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base strong reach B performance. As shown in FIG. 11-39 (d3) to (d8), the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strong reach B performance is different from the background dedicated to title display in the title display part (the background where the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are displayed at the left and right positions), and at the start of the introduction part, it switches from the background dedicated to title display in the title display part to the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strong reach B performance (the background where the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" confront each other in the town). The introduction part of the low base strong reach B performance starts with a video scene in which the enemy character "Robo" faces forward at a position on the far side as seen from the player, and the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" face each other with their backs turned at a position on the near side as seen from the player. At this time, both the enemy character "Robo" located at the back as seen by the player, and the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" located at the front as seen by the player, are displayed in positions that overlap with the fixed positions where the title characters "Shocking Robot Battle" were displayed during the title display period of the title display part. Also, as shown in Figures 11-39 (d8) and 11-40, after the start of the introductory part, a subtitle for the line "I won't lose!" is displayed in accordance with the scene in which the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" confront the enemy character "Robo", and the sound of the line displayed in the subtitles is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach B performance, during the title display part, audio is output from speakers 8L, 8R reading the title, but subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part is not output from speakers 8L, 8R. After the introduction part starts, subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introduction part are displayed, and audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introduction part is output from speakers 8L, 8R.

When a variation pattern that results in a big win after a low base strong super reach B is specified by the variation pattern specification command, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance notifies the user that the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" win the battle against the enemy character "Robo" at the end of the introductory part, and that the low base strong reach B performance is a big win (the game state is controlled to a big win), and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a big win of the type specified by the variable display result specification command. On the other hand, when a variation pattern that results in a reach miss after a low base strong super reach B is specified by the variation pattern specification command, the CPU 120 notifies the user that the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" lose the battle against the enemy character "Robo" at the end of the introductory part, and that the low base strong reach B performance is not a big win, and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a reach miss of the type specified by the variable display result specification command.

[About the indication of the expectation of low base strong reach B performance]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, the expectation suggestion display is displayed on the image display device 5 in a size smaller than the title characters "Shattering Robot Battle" along with the title characters "Shattering Robot Battle". The expectation suggestion display displayed in the title display part is composed of five star-shaped objects and the characters "Expectation" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation, as shown in Fig. 11-39 (d5), and the expectation suggestion display is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects whose color has changed from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

In the normal state in which the low base strong reach B performance is executed, an object indicating the number of reserved balls and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5, and if the reserved display, active display, and expectation level indication display are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects constituting the reserved display and active display will be mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display. For this reason, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance in which the expectation level indication display is displayed, the reserved display and active display are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indication display, thereby preventing the objects constituting the reserved display and active display from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, the pending and active displays are not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display, so even if the low base strong reach B performance is executed in a situation where a maximum of five objects are displayed as pending and active displays, it is possible to prevent confusion between the objects displayed as pending and active displays and the objects in the expectation level suggestion display, leading to a mistaken belief that the expectation level is at its maximum in the expectation level suggestion display.

Furthermore, in the low base strong reach B performance, the pending display and active display may be hidden from the start of the prologue display period, and even in this configuration, it is possible to prevent the objects constituting the pending display and active display from being mistaken for objects indicating the expectation level.

When the low base strong reach B performance is executed, as shown in Fig. 11-39 (d2) to (d3), the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on the background dedicated to the falling performance (background with a pattern spreading out radially from the center) and on a layer in front of the reserved display and active display during the prologue display period, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the display area is completely filled, and the reserved display and active display that were displayed before the display area was completely filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends, so that the reserved display and active display can be hidden without any sense of incongruity. Note that when the low base strong reach B performance is executed, a single-color display performance in which the entire display area is displayed in a single color such as white, except for the decorative pattern (small) of the reach mode, may be executed to erase the reserved display and active display that were displayed before the single-color display performance, and even in such a configuration, the reserved display and active display can be hidden without any sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d4), the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" are displayed in a fixed position with the expectation indication hidden for a predetermined time, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d5) to (d6), the expectation indication is displayed below the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle". At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d5), in the initial stage, the color of the five star-shaped objects constituting the expectation indication is all displayed in black, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d6), the color of 3.5 star-shaped objects corresponding to the low base strong reach B performance among the five star-shaped objects is changed from black to gold to suggest the expectation of a jackpot in the low base strong reach B performance. This prevents the pending and active displays from being confused with the expectation indication.

[About the low base strong reach C performance]
As the low base strong reach C performance has many things in common with the previously described low base strong reach B performance, a drawing of the low base strong reach C performance will be omitted.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach C is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops from a normal reach via a low base weak super reach A or a low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach performance, it executes a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, and develops it into a low base strong reach C performance. Also, when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach C is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops directly from a normal reach, after executing the normal reach performance, it executes a selection performance described below, and develops it into a low base strong reach C performance.

When developing from a low base weak reach A or low base weak reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 executes a drop performance in which the movable body 32 drops at the end of the low base weak reach A or low base weak reach B performance, and then starts the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance. In the drop performance, while maintaining the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach state, and the hold display and active display in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the background at the end of the low base weak reach A or low base weak reach B performance is switched to a background dedicated to the drop performance (a background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), and then the movable body 32 drops, and then the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position.

In addition, when a direct progression from a normal reach occurs, the performance control CPU 120 executes the selection performance described below, and then starts the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance. The details of the selection performance will be described later, but when the selection performance starts, the hold display and active display in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

The title display part of the low base strong reach C performance includes a prologue display period before the title characters "Great Earthquake Robot Battle" of the low base strong reach C performance are displayed, a title start period from when part of the title characters "Great Earthquake Robot Battle" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in their fixed position, a title display period during which the title characters "Great Earthquake Robot Battle" are displayed in their fixed position, and a title end period until the title characters "Great Earthquake Robot Battle" that were displayed in their fixed position disappear and switch to the introductory part.

When the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, it first starts displaying the prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low base strong reach C effect transitioned from the drop effect, the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern radiating from the center), the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode, and the reserved and active displays of the first reserved memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are maintained, while the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern radiating from the center), the reserved and active displays, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

In addition, during the prologue display period of the low base strong reach C effect transitioned from the selection effect, the display of the selection result image of the selection effect (here, the result image of the low base strong reach C effect) and the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach state are maintained, and the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection effect, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

After the prologue display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title start period.

During the prologue display period following the fall effect, the background dedicated to the fall effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center) that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" switches to the background of the low base strong reach B effect (a background with the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Dai Robo" displayed on the left and right) after the prologue display period ends, and the pending display and active display that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends. Note that the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends.

Also, although not shown, during the prologue display period transitioned from the selection performance, the selection result image of the selection performance that was displayed before the display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" switches to a background dedicated to the title display of the low base strong reach C performance (a background in which the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Dai Robo" are displayed on the left and right) after the prologue display period ends. Note that the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends, and the pending display and active display that were hidden during the selection performance are maintained as hidden.

During the title start period of the low base strong reach C performance, part of the title characters "Daishin Robo Battle" appears from the left side of the display area, overlapping with the left decorative pattern (small) of the left and right decorative patterns of the reach mode, and then the entire title characters "Daishin Robo Battle" moves toward its fixed position and stops at the fixed position. When the title characters "Daishin Robo Battle" are stopped at the fixed position, part of the title characters "Daishin Robo Battle" is displayed overlapping with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will be any number between "1" and "9" ("2" in the figure), but during the title start period, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are any number between "1" and "9", part of the title characters "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the left and right of the reach mode, and when the title characters "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" are stationary in a fixed position, part of the title characters "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" will be displayed overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the low base strong reach C performance, first, the title characters "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" are displayed in a fixed position with the expectation indication display hidden, and this state is maintained for a predetermined time, during which time audio is output from speakers 8L and 8R reading out the title. Next, an expectation indication display is displayed below the title characters "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" in a size smaller than the title characters "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle". The title display period of the low base strong reach C performance is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base strong reach C performance (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to displaying the title end period. During the title end period of the low base strong reach C performance, the title characters "Great Shock Robot Battle" displayed in the fixed position are moved from their fixed position to the right side of the display area until all of the title characters have disappeared. In addition, the expectation indication display is also moved to the right side of the display area together with the title characters until all of them have disappeared. The title end period of the low base strong reach C performance ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach C performance (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Furthermore, during the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, no subtitles of the dialogue are displayed, as in the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and no sound of the dialogue is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

After the title end period ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base strong reach C performance. The background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strong reach C performance is different from the background dedicated to the title display in the title display part (the background where the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Dai Robo" are displayed on the left and right), and at the start of the introduction part, it switches from the background dedicated to the title display in the title display part to the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strong reach C performance (the background where the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Dai Robo" confront each other in the town). The introduction part of the low base strong reach C performance starts with a video scene in which the enemy character "Dai Robo" faces the front on the far side as seen from the player, and the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" face each other on the near side as seen from the player. At this time, both the enemy character "Big Robo", located at the back as seen by the player, and the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana", located at the front as seen by the player, are displayed in positions that overlap with the fixed positions where the title characters "Great Shock Robot Battle" were displayed during the title display period of the title display part. In addition, after the start of the introductory part, a subtitle for the line "I'll never lose!" is displayed in accordance with the scene in which the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" confront the enemy character "Big Robo", and the sound of the line displayed in the subtitles is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach C performance, during the title display part, audio is output from speakers 8L, 8R reading the title, but subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part is not output from speakers 8L, 8R. After the introduction part starts, subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introduction part are displayed, and audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introduction part is output from speakers 8L, 8R.

When a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern resulting in a jackpot after a low base strong super reach C, the CPU 120 notifies the player of the result of the low base strong reach C presentation that the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" win the battle against the enemy character "Dai Robo" at the end of the introductory part, and that the presentation result is a jackpot (the game state is controlled to be a jackpot), and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a jackpot of the type designated by the variable display result designation command. On the other hand, when a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a jackpot miss after a low base strong super reach C, the CPU 120 notifies the player of the result of the low base strong reach C presentation that the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" lose the battle against the enemy character "Dai Robo" at the end of the introductory part, and that the presentation result is not a jackpot, and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a jackpot miss of the type designated by the variable display result designation command.

[About the indication of the expectation of low base strong reach C performance]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, the expectation indication is displayed on the image display device 5 in a size smaller than the title characters "Great Earthquake Robot Battle" along with the title characters "Great Earthquake Robot Battle". The expectation indication displayed in the title display part is composed of five star-shaped objects and the characters "Expectation" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation, and the expectation is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects that have changed color from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

In the normal state when the low base strong reach C performance is executed, an object indicating the number of reserved balls and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5, and if the reserved display and active display and the expectation level indication display are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects constituting the reserved display and active display will be mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display. For this reason, in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance where the expectation level indication display is displayed, the reserved display and active display are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indication display, thereby preventing the objects constituting the reserved display and active display from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, the pending and active displays are not displayed at the same time as the expectation suggestion display, so even if the low base strong reach C performance is executed in a situation where a maximum of five objects are displayed as pending and active displays, it is possible to prevent confusion between the objects displayed as pending and active displays and the objects in the expectation suggestion display, leading to a mistaken belief that the expectation suggestion display is at its maximum.

Furthermore, in the low base strong reach C performance, the pending display and active display may be hidden from the start of the prologue display period, and even in this configuration, it is possible to prevent the objects constituting the pending display and active display from being mistaken for objects indicating the expectation level.

When the low base strong reach B performance is executed, the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a background dedicated to the falling performance (a background with a pattern spreading out radially from the center) and on a layer in front of the reserved display and active display during the prologue display period, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled, and the reserved display and active display that were displayed before the display area was filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends, so that the reserved display and active display can be hidden without any sense of incongruity. When the low base strong reach C performance is executed, a monochrome display performance can be executed in which the entire display area is displayed in a monochrome color such as white, except for the decorative pattern (small) of the reach mode, etc., to erase the reserved display and active display that were displayed before the monochrome display performance, and even in this configuration, the reserved display and active display can be hidden without any sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, the title characters "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" are displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation indication hidden, and then the expectation indication is displayed below the title characters "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle". At this time, in the initial stage, the color of the five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation indication is all displayed in black, and then the color of four of the five star-shaped objects that correspond to the low base strong reach C performance is changed from black to gold, suggesting the expectation of a jackpot in the low base strong reach C performance. This prevents the pending and active displays from being confused with the expectation indication.

[About the Low Base Strongest Reach Production]
FIG. 11-41 is a diagram showing the transition of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the low-base strongest reach presentation is executed, and FIG. 11-42 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low-base strongest reach presentation.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strongest super reach is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops from a normal reach via a low base weak super reach A or a low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach performance, it executes a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, and develops it into a low base strongest reach performance. Also, when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strongest super reach is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops directly from a normal reach, after executing the normal reach performance, it executes a selection performance described below, and develops it into a low base strongest reach performance.

When developing from a low base weak reach A or low base weak reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 executes a drop performance in which the movable body 32 drops at the end of the low base weak reach A or low base weak reach B performance, and then starts the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance. In the drop performance, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e1), while maintaining the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach state, and the hold display and active display in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the background at the end of the low base weak reach A or low base weak reach B performance is switched to a background dedicated to the drop performance (a background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), and then the movable body 32 is dropped, and then the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position.

In addition, when a direct progression from a normal reach occurs, the performance control CPU 120 executes the selection performance described below, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e1'), and then starts the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance. Details of the selection performance will be described later, but when the selection performance starts, the hold display and active display in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in FIG. 11-42, the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance includes a title start period from when part of the title characters "Six people, catch a Bakuchu!" of the low-base strongest reach performance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in their fixed position, a title display period during which the title characters "Six people, catch a Bakuchu!" are displayed in their fixed position, and a title end period from when the title characters "Six people, catch a Bakuchu!" that were displayed in their fixed position disappear and switch to the introduction part.

When the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance, it first starts displaying the title start period.

During the title start period of the low-base strongest reach performance, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e3), the display of the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode is maintained, and the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!" are displayed in an expanded size where only a part of the characters is visible in the display area. At this time, the display area is displayed in such a manner that the entire display area is filled with a part of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!". In addition, the part of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!" displayed in the display area appears in such a manner that it overlaps with both the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e4), the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!" are gradually reduced in size, and the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!", which have been reduced to such a size that all the characters of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!" are visible in the display area, are stopped in their fixed position. When the title text "Six people, catch the Bakuchu!" is reduced in size and stationary in a fixed position, a portion of the title text "Six people, catch the Bakuchu!" for the low base strongest reach effect is displayed overlapping with both of the small decorative patterns on the left and right of the reach effect.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will be any number between "1" and "9" ("2" in the figure), but during the title start period of the low base strongest reach performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are any number between "1" and "9", the enlarged title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" will appear overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode, and the reduced title text "Catch the Bakuchu with Six People!" that is stationary in the fixed position will be displayed with a portion of it overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode.

As shown in Figures 11-41 (e1) to (e4), during the title start period transitioned from the falling effect, the background dedicated to the falling effect (a background with a pattern spreading radially from the center) that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with part of the enlarged-sized title characters "Six people, catch a Bakuchu!" is switched to a background dedicated to the title display of the low-base strongest reach effect (a background in which six friendly characters and the enemy character "Bakuchu" are displayed on the left and right), while the display area is filled with part of the enlarged-sized title characters "Six people, catch a Bakuchu!", and when the title characters "Six people, catch a Bakuchu!" are reduced in size and stationary in their fixed positions, the background dedicated to the title display of the low-base strongest reach effect is displayed as its background. Also, during the title start period that transitions from the falling effect, the pending display and active display that were displayed before the display area was filled with part of the enlarged title text "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" are hidden while the display area is filled with part of the enlarged title text "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!". Note that the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode is maintained even after the title start period ends.

In addition, during the title start period transitioned from the selection performance, the selection result image (here, the title image of the low-base strongest reach performance) of the selection performance that was displayed before the display area was completely filled with part of the enlarged-sized title text "Catch a Bakuchu with six people!" is switched to a background dedicated to the title display of the low-base strongest reach performance (a background in which six friendly characters and the enemy character "Bakuchu" are displayed on the left and right) while the display area is completely filled with part of the enlarged-sized title text "Catch a Bakuchu with six people!", and when the title text "Catch a Bakuchu with six people!" is stationary in a fixed position in a reduced size, the background dedicated to the title display of the low-base strongest reach performance is displayed as its background. Note that the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode is maintained even after the end of the title start period, and the reserved display and active display that were hidden during the selection performance are maintained as hidden.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" in a reduced size at a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the low-base strongest reach performance, first, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e4), the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" are displayed at a fixed position with the expectation indication display hidden for a predetermined time, and during that time, as shown in FIG. 11-42, a voice reading the title is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e5) to (e6), an expectation indication display is displayed below the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" in a size smaller than the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!". As shown in FIG. 11-42, the title display period of the low-base strongest reach performance is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low-base strongest reach performance (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to displaying the title end period. During the title end period of the low-base strongest reach performance, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e6) to (e7), the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu with Six People!", which are displayed in a reduced size and at a fixed position, are enlarged until the entire display area is filled with parts of the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu with Six People!". At this time, the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu with Six People!" are not enlarged in a manner opposite to the manner in which the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu with Six People!" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, but are enlarged in a manner different from the manner in which the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu with Six People!" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period until the entire display area is filled with parts of the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu with Six People!". That is, the path that each part of the title character follows as the title character "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" shrinks during the title start period is different from the path that each part of the title character follows as the title character "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" expands during the title end period. Therefore, the display area is completely filled with parts of the title character "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" in a manner different from the manner in which the display area is completely filled at the start of the title start period. As shown in FIG. 11-42, the title end period of the low base strongest reach effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strongest reach effect (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48). Also, as shown in FIG. 11-42, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect, subtitles of the dialogue are not displayed like the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and the dialogue is not output from speakers 8L and 8R.

After the title end period ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the low base strongest reach performance. As shown in FIG. 11-41 (e4) to (e8), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low base strongest reach performance (a background in which six ally characters chase the enemy character "Bakuchu" in the city) is different from the background dedicated to title display in the title display part (a background in which six ally characters and the enemy character "Bakuchu" are displayed on the left and right), and after the title end period ends and the background dedicated to title display is completely filled with part of the title characters "Catch Bakuchu with six people!" during the title end period, it switches to the background at the start of the introductory part of the low base strongest reach performance. The introductory part of the low base strongest reach performance starts with a video scene in which six ally characters chase the enemy character "Bakuchu". Also, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e8) and FIG. 11-42, after the introductory part starts, a subtitle is displayed with the line "Try and catch him if you can!" in response to the scene in which six friendly characters chase the enemy character "Bakuchu", and the voice of the line displayed in the subtitles is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low base strongest reach performance, during the title display part, audio is output from speakers 8L, 8R reading the title, but subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part is not output from speakers 8L, 8R. After the introduction part starts, subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introduction part are displayed, and audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introduction part is output from speakers 8L, 8R.

When a variation pattern that results in a jackpot after a low-base strongest super reach is specified by the variation pattern specification command, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance notifies the player that the six ally characters catch the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part and that the low-base strongest reach performance is a jackpot (the game state is controlled to be a jackpot), and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a jackpot of the type specified by the variable display result specification command. On the other hand, when a variation pattern that results in a reach miss after a low-base strongest super reach is specified by the variation pattern specification command, the CPU 120 notifies the player that the six ally characters cannot catch the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part and that the low-base strongest reach performance is not a jackpot, and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a reach miss of the type specified by the variable display result specification command.

[About the indication of the expectation of the strongest low-base reach performance]
In the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance, the image display device 5 displays the title text "Catch the explosive chuu with six people!" along with an expectation suggestion display in a size smaller than the title text "Catch the explosive chuu with six people!". The expectation suggestion display displayed in the title display part is composed of five star-shaped objects and the text "Expectation" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation, as shown in Fig. 11-41 (e6), and the expectation suggestion display is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects whose color has changed from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

In the normal state in which the low-base strongest reach performance is executed, an object indicating the number of reserved balls and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5, and if the reserved display, active display, and expectation level indication display are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects constituting the reserved display and active display will be mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display. For this reason, in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance in which the expectation level indication display is displayed, the reserved display and active display are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indication display, thereby preventing the objects constituting the reserved display and active display from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display.

In addition, in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance, the pending and active displays are not displayed at the same time as the expectation indication, so even if the low-base strongest reach performance is executed in a situation where a maximum of five objects are displayed as pending and active displays, it is possible to prevent confusion between the objects displayed as pending and active displays and the objects in the expectation indication display, leading to a mistaken belief that the expectation indication display shows the highest expectation.

When the low-base strongest reach performance is executed, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e2) to (e4), the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!" is displayed in an enlarged size in which only a portion of the text is visible in the display area during the title start period, and then the size is reduced so that all the text is visible in the display area. When the background dedicated to the title display of the low-base strongest reach performance is displayed, the reserved display and active display that were displayed before the title start period are hidden, so that the reserved display and active display can be hidden without any sense of incongruity. Note that when the low-base strongest reach performance is executed, a monochrome display performance in which the entire display area is displayed in a monochrome color such as white, except for the decorative pattern (small) of the reach mode, may be executed to erase the reserved display and active display that were displayed before the monochrome display performance, and even in this configuration, the reserved display and active display can be hidden without any sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance, as shown in FIG. 11-41(e4), the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!" is displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation indication hidden, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-41(e5) to (e6), the expectation indication is displayed below the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!". At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-41(e5), in the initial stage, the color of the five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation indication is all displayed in black, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-41(e6), the color of 4.5 star-shaped objects that correspond to the low-base strongest reach performance among the five star-shaped objects is changed from black to gold, suggesting the expectation of a jackpot in the low-base strongest reach performance. This prevents the pending and active displays from being confused with the expectation indication.

[Variations of the title display part]
Figure 11-43 is a diagram showing the transition of images in modified title display parts of low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, low base strong reach C performance, and low base strongest reach performance.

When the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the corresponding Super Reach performance, it first executes a blackout performance in which the entire display area is displayed in black, except for the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the Reach state, as shown in FIG. 11-43 (f1). If the pending display and active display were displayed before the execution of the blackout performance, the pending display and active display are hidden when the blackout performance begins.

After the blackout effect continues for a predetermined period of time, the effect control CPU 120 displays an expectation indication (an expectation indication for the low-base strongest reach effect in FIG. 11-43(f2)) while maintaining the background of the entire display area in black, as shown in FIG. 11-43(f2).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 maintains the state in which the background of the entire display area is displayed in black and the expectation indication display is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and displays the title character of the corresponding super reach performance (the title character of the low-base strongest reach performance in Fig. 11-43 (f3) (f5)) in a fixed position and in a size larger than the expectation indication display, as shown in Fig. 11-43 (f3) (f5).

When the title letters of the corresponding Super Reach performance are displayed in their fixed positions, a portion of the title letters is displayed overlapping both the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the Reach mode. The left and right decorative symbols (small) of the Reach mode will be any of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure), but even if the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the Reach mode are any of the numbers "1" to "9," when the title letters of the corresponding Super Reach performance are displayed in their fixed positions, a portion of the title letters is displayed overlapping both the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the Reach mode.

In addition, the title characters are displayed in one of the two modes, a white mode (FIG. 11-43 (f3)) or a red mode (FIG. 11-43 (f5)). Whether the title characters are displayed in white mode or red mode is determined in the variable display preview performance determination process of step 131SGS609 described above. In the variable display preview performance determination process, when a variable pattern including the execution of a low base strong reach A performance, a low base strong reach B performance, a low base strong reach C performance, or a low base strongest reach performance is specified, it is determined whether the title characters are displayed in white mode or red mode with a probability according to whether or not there is a jackpot, and it is determined whether the title characters are displayed in white mode or red mode with a probability that the rate of a jackpot when the title characters are displayed in red mode is higher than the rate of a jackpot when the title characters are displayed in white mode. Therefore, when the title characters are displayed in red during the title display part of the corresponding Super Reach performance, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the title characters are displayed in white.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 displays the expectation indication display and the title characters of the corresponding Super Reach performance, and then, as shown in Figure 11-43 (f4) (f6), while maintaining the display of the expectation indication display and the title characters of the corresponding Super Reach performance, displays a background corresponding to the title display part of the corresponding Super Reach performance, and outputs audio reading the title from speakers 8L, 8R. Meanwhile, in the title display part, no subtitles of the dialogue are displayed, as in the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and no audio of the dialogue is output from speakers 8L, 8R. Also, in the title display part, the title characters are displayed for a longer period of time than the time until the title characters are displayed after the start of the blackout performance (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title end period. Note that the control of the title end period is the same as for each of the super reach performances described above, so a description of it will be omitted here.

In this modified version of the title display part, the title text of the corresponding Super Reach performance is larger than the expectation indication display, and the expectation level is indicated by whether it is white or red, which attracts the player's attention. However, by displaying the expectation indication display before the title text, the player's attention can be drawn to the expectation indication first.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-43 (f2), whether the title characters are displayed in white or red, if the type of super reach presentation is the same, the expectation level indication is displayed in the same manner. This allows the player to pay attention to whether the title characters are displayed in white or red after the expectation level indication is displayed.

[About high base reach A to D performance]
Fig. 11-44 is a diagram showing the transition of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the high base reach A to D effects are being executed, and Fig. 11-44 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the high base reach A to D effects. Note that the high base reach A to D effects are common except for the types of enemy characters that appear, the title name, and the expectation level suggested by the expectation level suggestion display, so here we will explain the high base reach A effect and omit the explanation of the high base reach B to D effects.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and when a variation pattern corresponding to a high base super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, it starts varying the decorative pattern (large), and executes a normal reach performance in which the decorative pattern (large) of the type specified by the variable display result specification command is stopped at the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5 at a predetermined timing to create a reach state, as shown in FIG. 11-44 (g2). Then, the title display part of the high base reach A performance is started.

As shown in FIG. 11-45, the title display part of the high base reach A performance includes a title start period from when a part of the title characters "Battle Reach A" of the high base reach A performance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in a fixed position, a title display period during which the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in a fixed position, and a title end period from when the title characters "Battle Reach A" that were displayed in the fixed position disappear and switch to the introduction part.

When the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the high base reach A performance, it first starts displaying the title start period.

During the title start period of the high base reach A performance, as shown in FIG. 11-44 (g2), the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach state is maintained, and the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed at an enlarged size such that only a portion of the characters is visible in the display area. At this time, the display area is displayed in such a manner that the entire display area is filled with a portion of the title characters "Battle Reach A". In addition, the portion of the title characters "Battle Reach A" that is displayed in the display area appears overlapping with both the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach state. After that, as shown in FIG. 11-44 (g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are gradually reduced in size, and the title characters "Battle Reach A", which have now been reduced to a size where all of the characters of the title characters "Battle Reach A" are visible in the display area, are stopped in a fixed position. When the title letters "Battle Reach A" are reduced in size and stationary in a fixed position, a portion of the title letters "Battle Reach A" is displayed overlapping both of the small decorative patterns on the left and right of the reach state.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state will be any number between "1" and "9" ("2" in the figure), but during the title start period of the high base reach A performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state are any number between "1" and "9", the title letters "Battle Reach A" that appear in an enlarged size will appear overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state, and the title letters "Battle Reach A" that are displayed in a reduced size while stationary in a fixed position will be displayed with part of them overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state.

As shown in Figures 11-44 (g1) to (g3), the background (night sky background) during the change of the decorative pattern (large) in the time-saving state A or the probability change state that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with a portion of the enlarged-sized title characters "Battle Reach A" is switched to a background dedicated to the title display of the high base reach A performance (a background in which the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Masked Man" are displayed on the left and right) while the entire display area is filled with a portion of the enlarged-sized title characters "Battle Reach A", and when the title characters "Battle Reach A" are stationary in a fixed position at a reduced size, a background dedicated to the title display of the high base reach A performance is displayed as its background. In addition, the pending display and active display that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with a portion of the enlarged-sized title characters "Battle Reach A" are hidden while the entire display area is filled with a portion of the enlarged-sized title characters "Battle Reach A". Furthermore, the display of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state will remain even after the title start period ends.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the title characters "Battle Reach A" in a reduced size at a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the high base reach A performance, first, as shown in FIG. 11-44 (g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed at a fixed position with the expectation indication hidden for a predetermined time, and during that time, as shown in FIG. 11-45, audio is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to read out the title. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-44 (g4) to (g5), an expectation indication is displayed below the title characters "Battle Reach A" in a size smaller than the title characters "Battle Reach A". As shown in FIG. 11-45, the title display period of the high base reach A performance is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the high base reach A performance (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the display of the title end period. In the title end period of the high base reach A performance, as shown in Figures 11-44 (g5) to (g6), the title characters "Battle Reach A", which are displayed in a reduced size at a fixed position, are enlarged until the entire display area is filled with parts of the title characters "Battle Reach A". At this time, the title characters "Battle Reach A" are not enlarged in the opposite manner to when the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, but are enlarged in a manner different from the opposite manner to when the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period until the entire display area is filled with parts of the title characters "Battle Reach A". In other words, the trajectory that each part of the title characters follows as the title characters "Battle Reach A" shrink during the title start period is different from the trajectory that each part of the title characters follows as the title characters "Battle Reach A" expand during the title end period. Therefore, the entire display area is filled with part of the title characters "Battle Reach A" in a manner different from the manner in which the entire display area is filled at the start of the title start period. As shown in FIG. 11-45, the title end period of the high base reach A effect ends in a time shorter than the title start period and title display period of the high base reach A effect (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48). Also, as shown in FIG. 11-45, in the title display part of the high base reach A effect, no subtitles of the dialogue are displayed, as in the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and no sound of the dialogue is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

After the title end period ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the high base reach A performance. As shown in FIG. 11-44 (g3) to (g7), the background at the start of the introductory part of the high base reach A performance (the background where the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Masked Man" are fighting) is different from the background dedicated to title display in the title display part (the background where the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Masked Man" are displayed on the left and right), and after the title end period ends and the background dedicated to title display is completely filled with part of the title characters "Battle Reach A" during the title end period, it switches to the background at the start of the introductory part of the high base reach A performance. The introductory part of the high base reach A performance starts with a video scene where the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Masked Man" are fighting. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-44 (g7) and FIG. 11-45, after the introductory part starts, a subtitle for the line "Fight!" is displayed in response to the scene in which the friendly character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Masked Man" are fighting, and the voice of the line displayed in the subtitles is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the high bass reach A performance, during the title display part, audio of the title being read out is output from speakers 8L, 8R, but subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and audio of the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the title display part is not output from speakers 8L, 8R. After the introduction part starts, subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the introduction part are displayed, and audio of the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the introduction part is output from speakers 8L, 8R.

When a variation pattern that results in a jackpot after a high base super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance notifies the user that the ally character "Yume Yume" wins the fight against the enemy character "Masked Man" at the end of the introductory part, and that the high base reach A performance is a jackpot (the game state is controlled to be a jackpot), and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a jackpot of the type specified by the variable display result specification command. On the other hand, when a variation pattern that results in a reach miss after a high base super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, the CPU 120 notifies the user that the ally character "Yume Yume" loses to the enemy character "Masked Man" at the end of the introductory part, and that the high base reach A performance is not a jackpot, and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a reach miss of the type specified by the variable display result specification command.

[About the indication of the expectation of high base reach A to D performance]
The expectation suggestion displays for the high base reach A to D effects are all common to all, except for the degree of expectation suggested by the expectation suggestion display. Therefore, here we will explain the expectation suggestion display for the high base reach A effect, and omit the explanation of the expectation suggestion displays for the high base reach B to D effects.

In the title display part of the high base reach A performance, the image display device 5 displays the title characters "Battle Reach A" along with an expectation indication in a smaller size than the title characters "Battle Reach A". As shown in FIG. 11-44 (g5), the expectation indication displayed in the title display part is composed of five star-shaped objects and the characters "Expectation" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation, and the expectation is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects that have changed color from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

In the time-saving state A or the probability bonus state in which the high base reach A performance is executed, an object indicating the number of reserved balls and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5, and if the reserved display and active display and the expectation level indication display are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects constituting the reserved display and active display will be mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display. For this reason, in the title display part of the high base reach A performance in which the expectation level indication display is displayed, the reserved display and active display are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indication display, thereby preventing the objects constituting the reserved display and active display from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display.

In addition, since the game ball almost never enters the first start winning hole in the time-saving state A or the probability change state, when the number of reserved balls in the second special chart is at its maximum (four) and is being displayed variably, a maximum of five objects may be displayed as reserved and active displays, which matches the number of objects indicating that the expectation level is at its maximum in the expectation level indication display. However, in the title display part of the high base reach A performance, the reserved and active displays are not displayed at the same time as the expectation level indication display, so even if the high base reach A performance is executed in a situation where a maximum of five objects are displayed as reserved and active displays, it is possible to prevent the objects displayed as reserved and active displays from being confused with the objects in the expectation level indication display, and the expectation level being mistakenly recognized as being at its maximum in the expectation level indication display.

When the high base reach A performance is executed, as shown in Figures 11-44 (g1) to (g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in an enlarged size in which only a portion of the characters are visible in the display area during the title start period, and then reduced in size so that all characters are visible in the display area. When the background dedicated to the title display of the high base reach A performance is displayed, the pending display and active display that were displayed before the title start period are hidden, so that the pending display and active display can be hidden without any sense of incongruity. When the high base reach A performance is executed, a monochrome display performance can be executed in which the entire display area is displayed in a monochrome color such as white, except for the decorative pattern (small) of the reach mode, etc., to erase the pending display and active display that were displayed before the monochrome display performance. Even in this configuration, the pending display and active display can be hidden without any sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the high base reach A performance, as shown in FIG. 11-44(g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in a fixed position with the expectation indication hidden for a predetermined time, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-44(g4) to (g5), the expectation indication is displayed below the title characters "Battle Reach A". At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-44(g4), in the initial stage, the color of the five star-shaped objects constituting the expectation indication is all displayed in black, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-44(g5), the color of three of the five star-shaped objects corresponding to the high base reach A performance (3.5 for the high base reach B performance, 4 for the high base reach C performance, and 4.5 for the high base reach D performance) is changed from black to gold, suggesting the expectation of a jackpot in the high base reach A performance. This prevents confusion between the pending and active displays and the expectation level indication.

[Title text display position]
FIG. 11-46 is a diagram showing the position where the title characters are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG.

As shown in Figures 11-46 (A) and (B), the image display device 5 has a rectangular display area 5L, but since the game board 2 is placed in front of it, the visible area in the display area 5L of the image display device 5 is the area that is visible through the opening 24 formed in the game board 2, that is, the area that is not covered by the components that make up the game board 2.

As described above, the performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" in a fixed position during the title display period of the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance. In this case, the fixed position where the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" are displayed is a position where the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" overlap with the intersection of diagonal lines of the display area 5L of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-46(A), and a position where the title characters overlap with the intersection of diagonal lines of the visible square area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area within the visible area of the image display device 5 that is not obstructed by components of the game board 2, as shown in FIG. 11-46(B).

Similarly, the title text of the low base weak reach B effect is "Electric Hockey Showdown", the title text of the low base strong reach A effect is "Two people should catch the explosive chu!," the title text of the low base strong reach B effect is "Shocking Robot Battle," the title text of the low base strong reach C effect is "Super Shocking Robot Battle," the title text of the low base strongest reach effect is "Six people should catch the explosive chu!," the title text of the high base reach A effect is "Battle Reach A," the title text of the high base reach B effect is "Battle Reach B," and the title text of the high base reach C effect is " For both the title characters of the "Battle Reach C" and the title characters of the high base reach D performance "Battle Reach D," the fixed position at which the title characters are displayed during the title display period is a position where the title characters overlap with the intersection of diagonal lines of the display area 5L of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-46(A), and a position where the title characters overlap with the intersection of diagonal lines of the visible square area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area within the visible area of the image display device 5 that is not obstructed by components of the game board 2, as shown in FIG. 11-46(B).

Design changes are often made to gaming machines during the development stage, and a change in the design of the gaming board 2 may change the area of the display area 5L of the image display device 5 that is covered by the components that make up the gaming board 2, changing the visible area of the display area 5L. Also, gaming machines installed in gaming establishments may be taken back, refurbished, and resold, and in such cases, a change in the design of the gaming board 2 may change the area of the display area 5L of the image display device 5 that is covered by the components that make up the gaming board 2, changing the visible area of the display area 5L. In such cases, if the position of the title characters in the super reach performance is determined based on the display area 5L of the image display device 5, there is a risk that the display position of the title characters may deviate significantly from the center of the visible area.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, in the title display part of any Super Reach performance, the fixed position where the title characters are displayed during the title display period is a position where the title characters overlap with the intersection of the diagonals of the display area 5L of the image display device 5, and also overlap with the intersection of the diagonals of the visible square area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area within the visible area of the image display device 5 that is not obstructed by components of the game board 2. Therefore, the title characters displayed at the fixed position during the title display period are displayed at a position where they overlap with both the intersection of the diagonals of the display area 5L and the intersection of the diagonals of the visible square area 5S. This prevents the display position of the title characters from deviating significantly from the center of the visible area even if the design of the game board 2 is changed due to design changes or when the game machine is reused.

[Super Reach performance duration]
FIG. 11-47 is a diagram showing the presentation time of each Super Reach performance, and FIG. 11-48 is a diagram showing one form of the relationship between the presentation times of each Super Reach performance.

As shown in Figure 11-47, the overall presentation time of the low base weak reach A presentation (the time from when the title display part starts to when the introductory part ends) is T1-1, the presentation time of the title display part is Tt1, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt1a, the presentation time of the title display period is Tt1b, and the presentation time of the title end period is Tt1c.

The overall presentation time of the low base weak reach B presentation is T1-2, the presentation time of the title display part is Tt1, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt1a, the presentation time of the title display period is Tt1b, and the presentation time of the title end period is Tt1c.

Note that while the overall presentation times for the low base weak reach A and low base weak reach B presentations are different, the presentation time for the title display part, the presentation time for the title start period, the presentation time for the title display period, and the presentation time for the title end period are all the same.

As shown in Figure 11-47, the overall presentation time of the low base strong reach A presentation is T2-1, the presentation time of the title display part is Tt2, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt2a, the presentation time of the title display period is Tt2b, and the presentation time of the title end period is Tt2c.

The overall presentation time of the low base strong reach B presentation is T2-2, the presentation time of the title display part is Tt2, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt2a, the presentation time of the title display period is Tt2b, and the presentation time of the title end period is Tt2c.

The overall presentation time of the low base strong reach C presentation is T2-3, the presentation time of the title display part is Tt2, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt2a, the presentation time of the title display period is Tt2b, and the presentation time of the title end period is Tt2c.

Note that the overall presentation times for the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance are different, but the presentation time for the title display part, the presentation time for the title start period, the presentation time for the title display period, and the presentation time for the title end period are all the same.

The overall presentation time of the low base strongest reach presentation is T3, the presentation time of the title display part is Tt3, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt3a, the presentation time of the title display period is Tt3b, and the presentation time of the title end period is Tt3c.

The overall presentation time for all high base reach presentations A to D is T4, the presentation time for all title display parts is Tt4, of which the presentation time for all title start periods is Tt4a, the presentation time for all title display periods is Tt4b, and the presentation time for all title end periods is Tt4c.

Comparing the overall presentation time of the super reach effects during the low base (normal state) in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-48 (A), the overall presentation time (T2-1, T2-2, T2-3) of the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, and low base strong reach C effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach B effects, is longer than the overall presentation time (T1-1, T1-2) of the low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach B effects, and the overall presentation time (T3) of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, and low base weak reach C effects, is set longer than the overall presentation time (T2-1, T2-2, T2-3) of the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, and low base weak reach C effects.

In addition, of the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, the low base weak reach B performance, which has a higher expectation of developing into other super reach performances than the low base weak reach A performance, is set to be longer than the overall performance time (T1-1) of the low base weak reach A performance. In addition, the overall presentation time (T2-3) of the low base strong reach C presentation, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A presentation and the low base strong reach B presentation, among the low base strong reach A presentation, low base strong reach B presentation, is longer than the overall presentation time (T2-1, T2-2) of the low base strong reach A presentation and the low base strong reach B presentation, and the overall presentation time (T2-2) of the low base strong reach B presentation, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A presentation, among the low base strong reach A presentation and the low base strong reach B presentation, is set longer than the overall presentation time (T2-1) of the low base strong reach A presentation.

When comparing the presentation times of the title start period, title display period, and title end period in the title display part in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-48 (B), in all super reach presentations (low base weak reach A, B presentations, low base strong reach A-C presentations, low base strongest reach presentations, high base reach A-D presentations), the presentation time of the title display period (Tt1b/Tt2b/Tt3b/Tt4b) is longer than the presentation time of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a/Tt4a) and the presentation time of the title end period (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c/Tt4c), and the presentation time of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a/Tt4a) is set longer than the presentation time of the title end period (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c/Tt4c).

When comparing the presentation time of the title display part in the super reach performance in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-48 (C), the presentation time (Tt2) of the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A performance and low base weak reach B performance, is longer than the presentation time (Tt1) of the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance and low base weak reach B performance, and the presentation time (Tt3) of the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach performance B, and low base weak reach C performance, is set longer than the presentation time (Tt2) of the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance. In addition, the presentation time (Tt4) of the title display part of the high base reach A to D effects is set shorter than the presentation time (Tt1, Tt2, Tt3) of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the low base strong reach A to C effects, and the low base strongest reach effect.

In this embodiment, when comparing the presentation time of the title start period and the title display period in the low base strongest reach presentation and the high base reach A to D presentation, as shown in Figure 11-48 (D), the presentation time (Tt3a) of the title start period in the low base strongest reach presentation is set longer than the presentation time (Tt4a) of the title start period in the high base reach A to D presentation, and as shown in Figure 11-48 (E), the presentation time (Tt3b) of the title display period in the low base strongest reach presentation is set longer than the presentation time (Tt4b) of the title display period in the high base reach A to D presentation.

In this embodiment, when comparing the presentation times of the title start periods of super reach effects (low base weak reach A, B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, low base strongest reach effect) during a low base (normal state), as shown in FIG. 11-48 (F), the presentation time (Tt2a) of the title start periods of the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, and low base strong reach C effects, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach B effects, is longer than the presentation time (Tt1a) of the title start periods of the low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach B effects, and the presentation time (Tt3a) of the title start period of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach effect B, and low base weak reach C effects, is set longer than the presentation time (Tt2a) of the title start periods of the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, and low base strong reach C effects.

In this embodiment, when comparing the presentation time of the title display period in super reach effects (low base weak reach A, B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, low base strongest reach effect) during a low base (normal state), as shown in FIG. 11-48 (G), the presentation time (Tt2b) of the title display period of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A effect and low base weak reach B effect, is longer than the presentation time (Tt1b) of the title display period of the low base weak reach A effect and low base weak reach B effect, and the presentation time (Tt3b) of the title display period of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach effect B, and low base weak reach C effect, is set longer than the presentation time (Tt2b) of the title display period of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect.

In this embodiment, when comparing the presentation time of the title end period in super reach effects (low base weak reach A, B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, low base strongest reach effect) during a low base (normal state), as shown in FIG. 11-48 (H), the presentation time (Tt2c) of the title end period of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A effect and low base weak reach B effect, is longer than the presentation time (Tt1c) of the title end period of the low base weak reach A effect and low base weak reach B effect, and the presentation time (Tt3c) of the title end period of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach effect B, and low base weak reach C effect, is set longer than the presentation time (Tt2c) of the title end period of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect.

In this form, when comparing the presentation time of the text display period of the title display part (the period in the title display part that does not include the prologue period described later, which is the period that combines the title start period, title display period, and title end period) in the super reach presentation (low base weak reach A, B presentation, low base strong reach A-C presentation, low base strongest reach presentation) during a low base (normal state), as shown in Figure 11-48 (I), the low base strong reach A presentation has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A presentation and the low base weak reach B presentation. The presentation time (Tt2d) of the text display period of the low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect is longer than the presentation time (Tt1d) of the text display period of the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and the presentation time (Tt3d) of the text display period of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect and the low base weak reach C effect, is set longer than the presentation time (Tt2d) of the text display period of the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect.

In this embodiment, when comparing the presentation time of the title start period and the title display period in the super reach performance (low base weak reach A, B performance, low base strong reach A-C performance, low base strongest reach performance) during a low base (normal state), as shown in Figure 11-48 (J) (K), in any of the super reach performances (low base weak reach A, B performance, low base strong reach A-C performance, low base strongest reach performance) during a low base (normal state), the presentation time of the title display period (Tt1b/Tt2b/Tt3b) is longer than the presentation time of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a), and the presentation time of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a) is set longer than the presentation time of the title end period (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c).

In this embodiment, when comparing the overall presentation time of the super reach effects (low base weak reach A, B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, low base strongest reach effects) during a low base (normal state) with the super reach effects (high base reach A-D effects) during a high base (time-saving state A and special probability state), as shown in Figure 11-48 (L), the overall presentation time (T4) of the super reach effects (high base reach A-D effects) during a high base (time-saving state A and special probability state) is set shorter than the overall presentation time (T1-1, T1-2, T2-1, T2-3, T3) of the super reach effects (low base weak reach A, B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, low base strongest reach effects) during a low base (normal state).

[About the title text of the Super Reach performance]
FIG. 11-49 is a diagram showing one form of the relationship between the title characters and decorative patterns in the title display part in the super reach performance.

As shown in Figure 11-49 (A), the title text of the low base weak reach A performance is "Catch the Bakuchu!", the number of characters in the title is 10, the font size of the title characters (standard size per character) is FJ, and the display area size in which the title characters are displayed (the size of the area including all the title characters) is EJA.

The title text of the low base weak reach B performance is "Bilibili Hockey Showdown", the title has 10 characters, the font size of the title text is FJ, and the size of the display area in which the title text is displayed is EJB.

The title text of the low base strong reach A performance is "Catch the Bakuchu together!", the title has 13 characters, the font size of the title text is FK, and the size of the display area in which the title text is displayed is EKA.

The title of the low base strong reach B performance is "Shocking Robot Battle", the title has 7 characters, the font size of the title is FK, and the size of the display area in which the title is displayed is EKB.

The title text of the low base strong reach C performance is "Great Shock Robot Battle", the title has 8 characters, the font size of the title text is FK, and the size of the display area in which the title text is displayed is EKC.

The title text of the low base strongest reach performance is "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!", the title has 13 characters, the font size of the title text is FSK, and the size of the display area in which the title text is displayed is ESK.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-49 (A), the font size of the decorative pattern (large) before the development into the Super Reach performance is KD, and the font size of the decorative pattern (small) after the development into the Super Reach performance is KS.

Comparing the font sizes of the title characters in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (B), the font size FK of the title characters in the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, and low base strong reach C effects, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach B effects, is larger than the font size FJ of the title characters in the low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach B effects. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters in the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, and low base strong reach C effects is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters in the low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach B effects.

In addition, the font size FSK of the title characters of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base weak reach C effect, is a larger font size than the font size FK of the title characters of the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base strong reach C effect. In addition, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the low base strongest reach effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base strong reach C effect.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-49 (B), the font size FJ of the title characters in the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, the font size FK of the title characters in the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance and the low base strong reach C performance, and the font size FSK of the title characters in the low base strongest reach performance are all font sizes smaller than the font size KD of the decorative pattern (large) before the development into a super reach performance, and are font sizes larger than the font size KS of the decorative pattern (small) after the development into a super reach performance. Furthermore, the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the low base strongest reach performance are all smaller than the size of the smallest character among the characters that can be used for the decorative pattern (large) before the performance develops into a super reach performance, and the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the low base strongest reach performance are all larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that can be used for the decorative pattern (small) after the performance develops into a super reach performance.

Comparing the display area sizes of the title characters in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (C), the display area sizes EKA, EKB, and EKC of the title characters of the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, and low base strong reach C effects, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach B effects, are larger than the display area sizes EJA and EJB of the title characters of the low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach B effects, and the display area size ESK of the title characters of the low base strongest reach effects, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, and low base weak reach C effects, is larger than the display area sizes EKA, EKB, and EKC of the title characters of the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, and low base weak reach C effects.

[About the expected level indication]
FIG. 11-50 is a diagram showing the execution status of the expectation level indication display in the title display part of the super reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 11-50(A), the expectation level indication displayed in the title display section is composed of five star-shaped objects and the word "expectation level" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation level, and the expectation level is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects that have changed color from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance performs an expectation indication display, as shown in FIG. 11-50(A), it first displays five star-shaped objects in black and displays the word "Expectation" to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation, and then causes the star-shaped objects that are to change from black to gold to change in color in stages from black to gold, starting from the left. Also, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance changes a star-shaped object from black to gold, it highlights the corresponding star-shaped object and then changes it to its normal gold display.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-50(B), the performance control CPU 120 enlarges the star-shaped object that changes color, changes its color to white so that it shines from the center toward the periphery, changes the entire enlarged object to white until the outline disappears, and then displays the star-shaped object with the entire object or half of it changed to gold. In particular, the second and third star-shaped objects are enlarged to a size where part of the enlarged star-shaped object overlaps with part of the text "Expectation" to indicate that the star-shaped object indicates the expectation. The performance control CPU 120 also highlights in a common manner whether changing the entire star-shaped object from a black star-shaped object to gold or changing half of the star-shaped object to gold.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-50(A), when changing multiple star-shaped objects to gold, the performance control CPU 120 starts highlighting the star-shaped object one spot away at the timing (t1) before the highlighting of the star-shaped object that was started to be highlighted earlier ends and the object returns to normal display. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 does not start highlighting the star-shaped object two spots away until the highlighting of the star-shaped object that was started to be highlighted earlier ends at the timing (t2), and starts highlighting the star-shaped object two spots away at the timing (t2) when the highlighting of the star-shaped object that was started to be highlighted earlier ends. In other words, the highlighting of two adjacent star-shaped objects overlaps, but three star-shaped objects are not highlighted simultaneously and overlapping each other.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-50(A), the performance control CPU 120 outputs an expectation level indication sound from speakers 8L, 8R at the timing when the highlighting of a star-shaped object begins, and when multiple star-shaped objects are changed to gold, ends the output of the expectation level indication sound associated with the highlighting of the star-shaped object that was previously started to be highlighted before the highlighting of the next star-shaped object begins, so that the sound is not output overlapping with the expectation level indication sound associated with the highlighting of the next star-shaped object.

[About selection effects]
Fig. 11-51 is a diagram showing the execution status of the selection effect. The selection effect is an effect that specifies which type of super reach effect will be executed when the low base strong reach A to C effect or the low base strongest reach effect is executed directly from the normal reach effect without going through the low base weak reach A effect or the low base weak reach B effect.

When a selection effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes a normal reach effect as shown in FIG. 11-51 (h1), and then displays a window in the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-51 (h2), and displays the title of the selection effect in the window. The title of the selection effect displays the message "Upgrade your reach!", suggesting that a selection effect will be executed.

Then, as shown in Fig. 11-51 (h2) to (h8), the performance control CPU 120 displays in the window a title image of the super reach performance, and an operation prompt image consisting of a button image imitating the push button 31B and the operation prompt text "Continuous tap!" to encourage continuous operation of the push button 31B. The title image of the super reach performance is an image with the same content as the display content during the title display period in the title display part of each super reach performance, and the title images of the low base strong reach performances A to C and the low base strongest reach performance also display an indication of the expectation level.

The performance control CPU 120 first displays, as the title image of the Super Reach performance displayed in the window, the title image of the low base weak reach A performance, which has a jackpot expectation rate of 0 and the lowest expectation rate of development into other Super Reach performances, and each time an operation of the number of times push button 31B corresponding to the title image of the displayed Super Reach performance is detected, it switches to the title image of the next Super Reach performance until it becomes the title image of the Super Reach performance corresponding to the type of fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command.

As shown in Figure 11-51 (h2) to (h8), the title images of the Super Reach effects displayed in the window are switched in the following order: a title image of the low base weak reach A effect, which has the lowest expectation of development into other Super Reach effects, followed by a title image of the low base weak reach B effect, which has a higher expectation of development into other Super Reach effects than the low base weak reach A effect, a title image of the low base strong reach A effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A and B effects, a title image of the low base strong reach B effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A effect, a title image of the low base strong reach C effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach B effect, and a title image of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach C effect.

Then, when the title image of the super reach performance that corresponds to the type of fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command appears, the performance control CPU 120 detects the operation of the number of times push button 31B that corresponds to the title image of the displayed super reach performance, and displays a confirmation image in which the operation prompt image disappears and only the title image of the super reach performance is displayed in the window, as shown in Figure 11-51 (h9), notifies the player that the super reach performance of the displayed title image will be executed, and then transitions to the title display part of that super reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 11-52, the number of times that the push button 3B is operated to switch from the title image of the low base weak reach A effect to the title image of the low base weak reach B effect is 3, the number of times that the push button 31B is operated to switch from the title image of the low base weak reach B effect to the title image of the low base strong reach A effect is 4, the number of times that the push button 31B is operated to switch from the title image of the low base strong reach A effect to the title image of the low base strong reach B effect is 8, and the number of times that the push button 31B is operated to switch from the title image of the low base strong reach B effect to the title image of the low base strong The number of times the push button 31B is operated to switch to the title image of the reach C effect is 10, and the number of times the push button 31B is operated to switch from the title image of the low base strong reach C effect to the title image of the low base strongest reach effect is 15, and the higher the developmental attitude of the super reach effect of the switching title image to other super reach effects or the higher the expectation of a jackpot, the more times the push button 31B needs to be operated to switch to the next title image, and the more times the push button 31B needs to be operated.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-52, when a selection effect is executed, the low base weak reach A and B effects will never be executed, and a super reach effect with a jackpot expectation level equal to or higher than the low base strong reach A effect will always be executed, with the rate at which the low base strong reach A effect is executed being approximately 32.18%, the rate at which the low base strong reach B effect is executed being approximately 30.16%, the rate at which the low base strong reach C effect is executed being approximately 30.30%, and the rate at which the low base strongest reach effect is executed being approximately 7.36%.

The performance control CPU 120 also displays an expectation indication in the title images of the low base strong reach A-C performances and the low base strongest reach performance in the selection performance, similar to the title display part. However, the expectation indication in the title display part displays five star-shaped objects in black, and the multiple star-shaped objects that change from black to gold change from black to gold in stages in order from the left, whereas the expectation indication displayed in the selection performance displays the number of star-shaped objects that indicate the expectation of the corresponding super reach performance out of the five star-shaped objects in gold from the start.

The minimum time required for the title image of the Super Reach effect displayed in the selection effect to switch to the title image of the next Super Reach effect is the time obtained by multiplying the number of times corresponding to the title image of the Super Reach effect by the time required for one operation of the push button 31B. The time required for one operation of the push button 31B is approximately 80 ms, and when switching from the title image of the low base weak reach A effect to the title image of the low base weak reach B effect, the push button 31B must be operated three times, and the minimum time required in this case is approximately 240 ms.

Meanwhile, the time it takes for the star-shaped object in the expectation suggestion display in the title display part to change from black to highlighted and then to gold, i.e., the time it takes for the suggested expectation level to change by one step, is approximately 300 ms, which is set longer than the minimum time it takes to switch from the title image of the low base weak reach A performance to the title image of the low base weak reach B performance. For this reason, the performance control CPU 120 is able to switch the title image of the low base weak reach A performance to the title image of the low base weak reach B performance in a selection performance in a time shorter than the time it takes for the expected level suggested in the expectation suggestion display in the title display part to change by one step.

[About effects that can be performed during variable display]
FIG. 11-53 is a diagram showing effects that can be executed during variable display. As shown in FIG. 11-53, the effects that can be executed during variable display include an explanatory text display effect, a title color change effect, and operation prompt effects A to D.

The explanatory text display effect is an effect that can be executed during the prologue display period in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, and is an effect that displays explanatory text that suggests that there is a high chance of a jackpot.

The title color change effect is an effect that can be executed during the title display period in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, and is an effect that changes the color of the title letters from the initial white to red or gold.

Operation prompting effect A is an effect that can be executed in a normal reach effect, and displays an operation prompting image that prompts the operation of push button 31B, and notifies the player whether or not the effect will progress to a low base weak reach A effect or B effect depending on the operation of push button 31B. Note that operation prompting effect A may be configured to progress not only to a low base weak reach A effect or B effect, but also to a low base strong reach A to C effect or a low base strongest reach effect depending on the operation of push button 31B.

Operation prompting effect B is an effect that can be executed at the end of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, and displays an operation prompting image (small) or an operation prompting image (large) that prompts the operation of push button 31B, and notifies the player whether or not the effect will develop into one of the low base strong reach A to C effects depending on the operation of push button 31B. Note that in a configuration in which the low base weak reach A and B effects are notified that a jackpot will be reached as a result of the effect, operation prompting effect B may be configured to notify the player of the result of the effect, whether or not a jackpot will be reached, depending on the operation of push button 31B.

Operation prompting effect C is an effect that can be executed in the middle of the introductory part of the low base strong reach A to C effects and the strongest reach effect, and displays an operation prompting image that prompts the operation of the push button 31B, and displays one of multiple types of cut-in images depending on the operation of the push button 31B.

Operation prompting effect D is an effect that can be executed at the end of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, and displays an operation prompting image (small) or operation prompting image (large) that prompts the user to operate the push button 31B, and notifies the user of the result of the effect, whether or not a jackpot has been reached, depending on the operation of the push button 31B.

The performance control CPU 120 determines in the preview performance determination process of the variable display start setting process whether or not to execute an explanatory text display performance during the variable display, whether or not to execute a title color change performance and to which color to change, whether or not to execute operation prompting performance A, whether or not to display either an operation prompting image (small) or an operation prompting image (large) in operation prompting performance B, whether or not to execute operation prompting performance C and whether or not to display either a cut-in image (A) or a cut-in image (B), and whether or not to display either an operation prompting image (small) or an operation prompting image (large) in operation prompting performance D.

As shown in FIG. 11-54(A), in the advance notice performance determination process, when a variation pattern in which the low base strong reach A to C performances are executed is identified, it is determined whether or not to execute the explanatory text display performance. At this time, when a variation pattern in which the performance result is a miss is identified, non-execution is determined 80% of the time, and execution is determined 20% of the time. Also, when a variation pattern in which the performance result is a jackpot is identified, non-execution is determined 20% of the time, and execution is determined 80% of the time. In this way, when a variation pattern in which the performance result is a jackpot is identified, execution of the explanatory text display performance is determined at a higher rate than when a variation pattern in which a miss is identified, so that the execution of the explanatory text display performance during the prologue display period in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performance suggests that there is a high possibility of a jackpot.

In this embodiment, the explanatory text display performance is executed during the prologue display period in the title display part, and the execution time of the low base strong reach A-C performance and the execution time of the title display part do not change regardless of whether the explanatory text display performance is executed in the title display part of the low base strong reach A-C performance. However, the low base strong reach A-C performance may be executed in a first fluctuation pattern and a second fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than the first fluctuation pattern as a fluctuation pattern, and when the first fluctuation pattern is specified, the explanatory text display performance is not executed, and when the second fluctuation pattern is specified, the explanatory text display performance is executed using a fluctuation time set longer than the first fluctuation pattern. In such a configuration, whether or not to execute the explanatory text display performance is not determined in the preview performance determination process, but whether or not to execute the explanatory text display performance is determined depending on whether the first fluctuation pattern or the second fluctuation pattern is specified. In this case, the first and second variation patterns are determined so that when the explanatory text display effect is executed, the likelihood of a jackpot is higher than when the explanatory text display effect is not executed, and the execution of the explanatory text display effect in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects suggests that there is a high likelihood of a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 11-54 (B), in the preview performance decision process, when a fluctuation pattern in which a low base weak reach A or B performance is executed is identified, it is decided whether or not to execute a title color change performance, and if so, what color to change to if a title color change performance is executed. At this time, when a fluctuation pattern in which the performance result is a miss is identified, non-execution (white) is decided 80% of the time, execution (red) is decided 20% of the time, and execution (gold) is not decided. Also, when a fluctuation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A to C performance or a low base strongest reach performance is identified, non-execution (white) is decided 20% of the time, execution (red) is decided 75% of the time, and execution (gold) is decided 5% of the time. In this way, when a fluctuation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A-C performance or a low base strongest reach performance is identified, the execution of the title color change performance is decided at a higher rate than when a fluctuation pattern that results in a miss is identified, so the change in color of the title letters in the title display part of the low base strong reach A and B performance suggests that there is a high possibility of development into a low base strong reach A-C performance or a low base strongest reach performance. Also, since execution (gold) is decided only when a fluctuation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A-C performance or a low base strongest reach performance is identified, the change in color of the title letters to gold in the title display part of the low base strong reach A and B performance confirms that it will develop into a low base strong reach A-C performance or a low base strongest reach performance.

In addition, in a configuration that includes a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot without developing into another super reach effect after the execution of the low base weak reach A or B effect, when a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, the execution of the title color change effect is decided at a higher rate than when a fluctuation pattern that results in a miss is identified, and the color of the title letters in the title display part of the low base strong reach A or B effect may change to indicate the high possibility of a jackpot. Also, in such a configuration, execution (gold) may be decided only when a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, and the color of the title letters in the title display part of the low base strong reach A or B effect may change to gold to confirm a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 11-54(C), in the advance notice performance determination process, if a fluctuation pattern that results in a miss from the normal reach performance or a fluctuation pattern that develops from the normal reach performance to a low base weak reach A or B performance is identified, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute operation prompt performance A. At this time, if a fluctuation pattern that results in a miss is identified, non-execution is decided 50% of the time, and execution is decided 50% of the time. Also, if a fluctuation pattern that develops into a low base weak reach A or B performance is identified, execution is decided 100% of the time. In this way, execution is always decided when a fluctuation pattern that develops into a low base weak reach A or B performance is identified, and execution may also be decided when a fluctuation pattern that results in a miss is identified, so the execution of operation prompt performance A in a normal reach performance suggests the possibility of development into a low base weak reach A or B performance.

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (D), in the preview performance determination process, if a variation pattern is identified in which the performance result of a low base weak reach A, B performance is a miss, or a variation pattern in which a low base weak reach A, B performance develops into a low base strong reach A-C performance or a low base strongest reach performance, it is determined whether to display an operation prompt image (small) or an operation prompt image (large). At this time, if a variation pattern in which the performance result is a miss is identified, an operation prompt image (small) is determined 90% of the time, and an operation prompt image (large) is determined 10% of the time. Also, if a variation pattern in which the performance develops into a low base strong reach A-C performance or a low base strongest reach performance is identified, an operation prompt image (small) is determined 10% of the time, and an operation prompt image (large) is determined 90% of the time. In this way, when a fluctuation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A-C performance or a low base strongest reach performance is identified, the operation prompting image (large) is determined out of the operation prompting image (small) and operation prompting image (large) at a higher rate than when a fluctuation pattern that results in a miss is identified, suggesting that when an operation prompting image (large) is displayed in operation prompting performance B at the end of the introductory part of a low base weak reach A, B performance, there is a higher possibility of it developing into a low base strong reach A-C performance or a low base strongest reach performance than when an operation prompting image (small) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (E), in the advance notice performance determination process, when a fluctuation pattern in which a low base strong reach A to C performance or a low base strongest reach performance is executed is identified, it is determined whether or not to execute operation prompt performance C, and if operation prompt performance C is executed, whether to display cut-in image (A) or cut-in image (B). At this time, when a fluctuation pattern in which the performance result is a miss is identified, non-execution is determined with a 50% probability, execution (cut-in image (A)) is determined with a 30% probability, and execution (cut-in image (B)) is determined with a 20% probability. Also, when a fluctuation pattern in which the performance result is a jackpot is identified, non-execution is determined with a 5% probability, execution (cut-in image (A)) is determined with a 30% probability, and execution (cut-in image (B)) is determined with a 65% probability. In this way, when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, the operation prompting performance C is executed at a higher rate than when a variation pattern that results in a miss is identified, so that the possibility of a jackpot is suggested by the execution of the operation prompting performance C at the end of the introductory part of the low base strong reach A to C performance. Also, when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, the cut-in image (B) out of the cut-in image (A) and the cut-in image (B) is displayed at a higher rate than when a variation pattern that results in a miss is identified, so that the operation prompting performance C is executed at the end of the introductory part of the low base strong reach A to C performance, so that the possibility of a jackpot is suggested to be higher when the cut-in image (B) is displayed than when the cut-in image (A) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (F), in the advance notice performance determination process, when a variation pattern in which a low base strong reach A to C performance or a low base strongest reach performance is executed is identified, it is determined whether to display an operation prompt image (small) or an operation prompt image (large). At this time, when a variation pattern in which the performance result is a miss is identified, an operation prompt image (small) is determined 90% of the time, and an operation prompt image (large) is determined 10% of the time. Also, when a variation pattern in which the performance result is a jackpot is identified, an operation prompt image (small) is determined 10% of the time, and an operation prompt image (large) is determined 90% of the time. In this way, when a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, the operation prompting image (large) is determined at a higher rate than when a fluctuation pattern that results in a miss is identified. Therefore, when an operation prompting image (large) is displayed in operation prompting image D at the end of the introductory part of the low base strong reach A-C effects and the low base strongest reach effect, it is suggested that there is a higher possibility of a jackpot than when an operation prompting image (small) is displayed.

[About the explanatory text display]
FIG. 11-55 is a diagram showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display performance, and FIG. 11-56 is a timing chart showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display performance.

During the prologue display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, the performance control CPU 120 displays the ally character "Yume Yume" as shown in Figures 11-55 (A) to (I), and then enlarges and displays the ally character "Yume Yume" until the entire display area is filled. When performing an explanatory text display performance during the prologue display period, the CPU 120 displays the explanatory text "Surprise!", "Peach tree", and "Great luck!" in order, which make up the explanatory text, on a layer in front of the background that is enlarged and displayed by the ally character "Yume Yume". At this time, the performance control CPU 120 first displays the explanatory text "Surprise!" while moving it from the right side of the display area toward the center at high speed in a leftward direction (Fig. 11-56 (t1)) as shown in Fig. 11-55 (A), and then, when it reaches the center, displays it while moving it slowly in a leftward direction (Fig. 11-56 (t2)) as shown in Fig. 11-55 (B), and then, after that, displays it while moving it again quickly in a leftward direction until it disappears from the display area as shown in Fig. 11-55 (C) (Fig. 11-56 (t3)).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 displays the explanatory text "peach tree" by moving it from the right side of the display area toward the center in a high-speed leftward direction (FIG. 11-56 (t4)), as shown in FIG. 11-55 (D), and when it reaches the center, by moving it slowly in a leftward direction (FIG. 11-56 (t5)), as shown in FIG. 11-55 (E), and then, by moving it again in a high-speed leftward direction until it disappears from the display area, as shown in FIG. 11-55 (F) (FIG. 11-56 (t6)).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 displays the explanatory text "Super Lucky!" while moving it from the right side of the display area toward the center at high speed in a leftward direction (Fig. 11-56 (t7)) as shown in Fig. 11-55 (G), and when it reaches the center, displays it while moving it slowly in a leftward direction (Fig. 11-56 (t8)) as shown in Fig. 11-55 (H), and then displays it while moving it again quickly in a leftward direction until it disappears from the display area as shown in Fig. 11-55 (I) (Fig. 11-56 (t9)).

[About the title color change effect]
FIG. 11-57 is a diagram showing the execution status of the title color change effect, and FIG. 11-58 is a diagram showing the timing at which the color of the title characters changes in the title color change effect.

The performance control CPU 120 can execute a title color change performance in which the white title characters change to red or gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances.

During the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the performance control CPU 120 makes some of the white title characters appear from the left side of the display area during the title start period, moves them towards a fixed position, and stops them at the fixed position. After that, the performance control CPU 120 displays the white title characters in a stationary state at the fixed position during the title display period, as shown in FIG. 11-57 (A). Then, when it has not been decided to execute the title color change performance, the performance control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R after a time of t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period, and maintains the white title characters in a stationary state at the fixed position, as shown in FIG. 11-57 (B) (C), and then moves the white title characters displayed at the fixed position from the fixed position to the right side of the display area during the title end period until all of the title characters disappear.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a title color change effect is to be executed, the CPU 120 for controlling the effect outputs a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R after a time t1 has elapsed since the start of the title display period, and changes the title characters displayed in the fixed position to a state in which they appear to glow, as shown in FIG. 11-57(D). After a time t2 has elapsed, if a change to red has been determined, the CPU 120 changes the title characters to red, as shown in FIG. 11-57(E), and if a change to gold has been determined, the CPU 120 changes the title characters to gold, as shown in FIG. 11-57(F). After that, during the title end period, the CPU 120 moves the title characters from their fixed positions to the right side of the display area, while maintaining the changed color displayed in their fixed positions, until all of the title characters have disappeared. When the title characters are changed from a state in which they appear to glow to red or gold, the title characters have changed to red or gold when the light on the title characters clears.

As shown in Figures 11-58 (A) and (B), in the low base weak reach A and B performances, the presentation time T1 of the title start period of the title display part is set to 500 ms, the presentation time T2 of the title display period is set to 2200 ms, and the presentation time T3 of the title end period is set to 300 ms. During the title display period, the time t1 from the start of the title display period to when the title characters change to a state where they appear to glow is set to 800 ms, the time t2 from when the title characters change to a state where they appear to glow to when the title characters change to red or gold is set to 200 ms, and the time t3 from when the title characters change to red or gold to when the title display period ends is set to 1200 ms.

For this reason, as shown in FIG. 11-58 (C), when the color of the title characters changes from white to red or gold, the time (t3) during which the title characters are displayed in the changed red or gold form during the title display period is longer than the time (t1) during which the title characters are displayed in white form during the title display period, and the time (t3+T3) during which the title characters are displayed in the changed red or gold form during the title display part is longer than the time (T1+t1) during which the title characters are displayed in white form during the title display part.

[Regarding operation promotion performance A]
Figure 11-59 is a diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion presentation A.

The presentation control CPU 120 can execute operation promotion presentation A, which prompts the player to operate the push button 31B, during a normal reach presentation.

When it has been decided that operation prompting performance A will be performed, as shown in Figures 11-59 (A) and (B), during the execution of a normal reach performance in which the decorative pattern (large) is in a reach state, the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting image (small) consisting of a button image (small) that resembles the push button 31B and operation prompting text (small) "Press!" that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B.

The button image (small) has a remaining time meter formed that indicates the remaining time of the valid period during which operation of the push button 31B is valid, and if operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches 0, or if the remaining time meter reaches 0, the performance control CPU 120 executes a whiteout performance in which the entire display area is displayed in white, as shown in Figure 11-59 (C), in the case of a fluctuation pattern that develops into a low base weak reach A or B performance, and then executes a low base weak reach A or B performance, as shown in Figure 11-59 (D).

On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern that results in a loss, the performance control CPU 120 erases the operation prompt image (small) and stops the decorative pattern (large) in a loss state, as shown in Figure 11-59 (E).

[About operation promotion performance B]
Figure 11-60 is a diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion presentation B.

In low-base weak reach A and B performances, the performance control CPU 120 can execute operation promotion performance B, which encourages the player to operate the push button 31B at the end of the introductory part.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance has decided to execute operation prompting performance B and has decided to display an operation prompting image (small), it displays an operation prompting image (small) consisting of a button image (small) that imitates the push button 31B and operation prompting text (small) "Press!" that encourages the operation of the push button 31B at the end of the introductory part, as shown in FIG. 11-60 (A).

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance has decided to execute the operation prompting performance B and to display the operation prompting image (large), as shown in Fig. 11-60 (B) (C), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays an operation prompting image (large) consisting of a button image (large) that imitates the push button 31B and is larger than the button image (small) and operation prompting text (large) "Press!" that prompts the operation of the push button 31B at the end of the introductory part. At this time, unlike when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays an operation prompting image (small) as shown in Fig. 11-60 (B), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays multiple button images (large) with a transparent background and combines these multiple button images (large) into one button image (large), and then displays an operation prompting image (large) consisting of a button image (large) and operation prompting text (large) "Press!" that prompts the operation of the push button 31B.

Both the button image (small) and the button image (large) have a remaining time meter formed, and if the operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches 0, or if the remaining time meter reaches 0, the performance control CPU 120 erases the operation prompt image (small) or operation prompt image (large) as shown in FIG. 11-60 (D) in the case of a fluctuation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A-C performance or a low base strongest reach performance, and then executes a drop performance in which the movable body 32 falls, as shown in FIG. 11-60 (E).

On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern that results in a miss, the performance control CPU 120 erases the operation prompt image (small) or operation prompt image (large) as shown in FIG. 11-60 (F) and executes a blackout performance in which the entire display area goes dark, and then notifies the player of a miss as the performance result as shown in FIG. 11-60 (G).

[About operation promotion performance C]
Figure 11-61 is a diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion presentation C.

The performance control CPU 120 can execute operation promotion performance C, which encourages the user to operate the push button 31B in the middle of the introductory part, in the low base strong reach performances A to C and the low base strongest reach performance.

When it has been decided to execute operation prompting performance C, the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting image (small) consisting of a button image (small) that resembles the push button 31B and operation prompting text (small) "Press!" that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B in the middle of the introductory part, as shown in Figures 11-61 (A) and (B).

The performance control CPU 120 has determined that a cut-in image (A) is to be displayed, and if operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches zero, the operation prompt image (small) is erased as shown in FIG. 11-61 (C), and a cut-in image (A) showing the ally character "Nana" is displayed, and then the continuation of the introductory part is executed as shown in FIG. 11-61 (F).

The performance control CPU 120 also determines that a cut-in image (B) is to be displayed, and if operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches zero, the operation prompt image (small) is erased as shown in FIG. 11-61 (D), and a cut-in image (B) showing the ally character "Jam" is displayed, and then the continuation of the introductory part is executed as shown in FIG. 11-61 (F).

In addition, whether it has been determined that a cut-in image (A) is to be displayed or that a cut-in image (B) is to be displayed, if the operation of the push button 31B is not detected before the remaining time meter reaches zero, the performance control CPU 120 erases the operation prompting image (small) while continuing the performance of the middle part of the introductory part, as shown in FIG. 11-61 (E), and executes the continuation of the introductory part, as shown in FIG. 11-61 (F).

[Regarding operation promotion performance D]
Figure 11-62 is a diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion presentation D.

The performance control CPU 120 can execute operation promotion performance D, which encourages the player to operate the push button 31B at the end of the introductory part, in the low base strong reach performances A to C and the low base strongest reach performance.

When it has been decided that a small operation prompting image should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays a small operation prompting image consisting of a small button image that resembles a push button 31B and small operation prompting text "Press!" encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B at the end of the introductory part, as shown in Figures 11-62 (A) and (B).

When it has been decided that an operation prompting image (large) is to be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting image (large) consisting of a button image (large) that is larger than the button image (small) and that imitates the push button 31B at the end of the introductory part, as shown in Fig. 11-62 (A) (G). At this time, unlike when an operation prompting image (small) is displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays multiple button images (large) with a transparent background and performs a prompt introduction performance (see Fig. 11-60 (B)) in which these multiple button images (large) are combined into one button image (large), and then displays an operation prompting image (large) consisting of a button image (large) and operation prompting text (large) "Press!" that prompts the operation of the push button 31B.

When the operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches 0, or when the remaining time meter reaches 0, in the case of a variation pattern that indicates a jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a rainbow presentation in which a rainbow pattern swirls across the entire display area while the operation prompt image (small) or operation prompt image (large) gradually disappears, as shown in FIG. 11-62(C)(H), and then notifies the user of a jackpot as a presentation result, as shown in FIG. 11-62(D)(I).

On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern that results in a miss, the performance control CPU 120 erases the operation prompt image (small) or operation prompt image (large) as shown in FIG. 11-62 (E) (J) and executes a blackout performance in which the entire display area goes dark, and then notifies the player of a miss as the performance result as shown in FIG. 11-62 (F) (K).

[About the operation promotion image]
Fig. 11-63 is a diagram showing the display mode of the operation prompting image. The performance control CPU 120 displays the button images constituting the operation prompting image (small) and the operation prompting image (large) while continuously moving alternately in the left and right direction as shown in Fig. 11-63 (A), and while continuously changing between the state where the button is not pressed and the state where the button is pressed. At this time, as shown in Fig. 11-63 (B), the interval at which the button image moves left and right and the interval at which the button changes from the state where the button is not pressed to the state where the button is pressed are different, and the action of the button image moving left and right and the action of the button changing from the state where the button is not pressed to the state where the button is pressed are not synchronized, resulting in a complex movement.

[About the start of the big win]
FIG. 11-64 shows the execution status of the jackpot start presentation.

As shown in FIG. 11-64(A), after the decorative pattern (large) has stopped in a jackpot state, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation executes the jackpot start presentation when it receives a jackpot start command that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of the jackpot game state.

As shown in Figs. 11-64(B) to (G), the presentation control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image of a flickering flame as the background during the jackpot start presentation, and as shown in Fig. 11-64(B), first displays the first half of the title letters "BIG (REG)" of the jackpot title letters "BIG BONUS (REG BONUS)" in an enlarged size, as shown in Fig. 11-64(B), and then gradually reduces the first half of the title letters "BIG (REG)" until it is reduced in size so that the entirety is visible in the display area, as shown in Fig. 11-64(C), and displays it in a fixed position near the top center of the display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-64(D), the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation displays the latter half of the title letters "BONUS" of the title letters "BIG BONUS (REG BONUS)" of the jackpot title in an enlarged size, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-64(E), gradually reduces the latter half of the title letters "BONUS" until it is reduced in size so that the entire latter half is visible in the display area, and displays it at the bottom of the fixed position near the center of the display area (below the first half of the title letters "BIG").

In this embodiment, if the jackpot type is a 6-round jackpot game state, the title text is displayed as "REG BONUS", and if the jackpot type is a 10-round jackpot game state, the title text is displayed as "BIG BONUS".

Next, as shown in Figures 11-64 (E) to (G), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the title letters "BIG BONUS" in their entirety in a fixed position, then gradually enlarges the title letters "BIG BONUS", and then, as shown in Figure 11-64 (H), starts the jackpot presentation and switches the display on the image display device 5 to the background of the jackpot game state.

When the performance control CPU 120 starts the jackpot performance, it first displays a right hit promotion image (large) and a right hit promotion image (small) to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, as shown in FIG. 11-64 (H).

The right-hit promotion image (small) is composed of the message "right hit" (small) that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and an arrow image (small) that indicates the right direction. As shown in Figure 11-64 (H) (I), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the right-hit promotion image (small) in a position toward the top right of the display area from the start of the jackpot presentation until the end of the jackpot game state.

The right hit promotion image (large) is a message that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and is composed of the message "Right Hit" (large), which is larger in size than the right hit promotion image (small), and an arrow image (large), which is an arrow indicating the right direction and is larger in size than the arrow image (small).The presentation control CPU 120 repeatedly displays the right hit promotion image (large) in a manner that moves from the left side of the display area to the right side only for a certain amount of time during the period from the start of the jackpot presentation until the end of the jackpot game state, as shown in Figures 11-64 (H) (I).

In addition, when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, after the title characters are displayed in the jackpot start performance, the game is switched to during the jackpot game, and a right hit promotion image (small) and a right hit promotion image (large) that suggest the operation method of the jackpot game state (operation method of shooting the game ball toward the right game area 2R) are displayed. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 switches to the jackpot game at a timing a predetermined time before the timing at which control is performed on the main board 11 side that is advantageous by operating the game ball in the operation method of shooting the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and displays the right hit promotion image (small) and the right hit promotion image (large). Therefore, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the right hit promotion image (small) and the right hit promotion image (large) were displayed, control is performed that is advantageous by operating the game ball in the operation method of shooting the game ball toward the right game area 2R.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the title characters during the jackpot start performance, and then ends the jackpot start performance, erases the title characters, and switches to the next performance, the CPU 120 erases the title characters of the jackpot start performance and switches to the next performance in a shorter time than when erasing the title characters during the title end period in the title display part of the super reach performance.

In particular, the performance control CPU 120 switches to the jackpot performance in one frame (the minimum unit of image update) after displaying the title characters in the jackpot start performance, and displays a right hit prompt image (small) and a right hit prompt image (large). In the title display part of the super reach performance, a title end period is set instead of one frame, and the title characters are erased over a certain period of time. However, if the title characters are erased over a similar period of time when the title characters are displayed in the jackpot start performance and the performance is switched to the jackpot performance and the right hit prompt image (small) and the right hit prompt image (large) are displayed, there is a risk that the game ball will be operated in a manner that shoots out toward the right game area 2R during the period in which the title characters are being erased. However, if the game ball is launched toward the right game area 2R at this timing, the control that gives an advantage by operating the game ball in a manner that shoots out toward the right game area 2R has not yet started, and the game ball will be wasted. In response to this, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the title text in the jackpot start presentation, and then in one frame (the smallest unit of image update), switches to the jackpot mid-presentation and displays the right-hit promotion image (small) and right-hit promotion image (large), thereby reducing the generation of wasted game balls.

[Display of remaining spins until Yu-time]
When the game control microcomputer 100 performs 900 variable displays without being controlled to a jackpot in a low probability state, it controls the game to a time-saving state B (in this embodiment, a play time with 1100 time-saving times) in which (1) time-saving control is performed 1100 times and (2) low probability control is performed 1100 times.

The performance control CPU 120 can also display on the image display device 5 the remaining number of times to reach rescue time-saving mode (hereinafter referred to as the remaining number of times until Yu-time) 131SG005Z (see Figure 11-1), which is the remaining variable display number of times until control is given to time-saving mode B (Yu-time).

As shown in FIG. 11-65(A), in the normal state, when the normal reach effect, low base weak reach A, B effect, low base strong reach A-C effect, or low base strongest reach effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the remaining number of times until Yu-Time in the upper left corner of the display area. The remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z is displayed as "XXX times remaining" (XXX is a number between 0 and 900 depending on the remaining number of times). In this case, whether the remaining number of times until Yu-Time is between 0 and 900, the remaining number of times until Yu-Time 131SG005Z is displayed in characters of the same font size.

As shown in FIG. 11-65(B), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to display the remaining number of times until the Yu-Time 131SG005Z even during the execution of a normal reach presentation in which the decorative pattern (large) is in a reach state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-65(C), when a normal reach effect develops into a low base weak reach A or B effect, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the Yu-Time even while the low base weak reach A or B effect is being executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-65(D)(E), if a miss is announced as the result of the low base weak reach A or B effect, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the Yu-Time even after the low base weak reach A or B effect has ended.

In addition, the configuration is such that a jackpot can be announced as the result of the low base weak reach A, B performance, and when a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base weak reach A, B performance, the remaining number of times until the Yu-time 131SG005Z continues to be displayed until the low base weak reach A, B performance ends, and the remaining number of times until the Yu-time 131SG005Z is erased at the end of the low base weak reach A, B performance. Furthermore, the remaining number of times until the Yu-time 131SG005Z may be erased at the point when the content indicating that a jackpot has been confirmed as the result of the low base weak reach A, B performance is displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-65(F), when a normal reach effect or a low base weak reach A or B effect develops into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 erases the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the Yu-Time when the low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach effect starts. At this time, when the effect develops from a normal reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 erases the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the Yu-Time at the timing when the selection effect starts, and when the effect develops from a low base weak reach A or B effect, if it is a low base strong reach A-C effect, during the prologue display period of the title display part, the effect control CPU 120 erases the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the Yu-Time together with the pending display and active display, and if it is a low base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 erases the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the Yu-Time at the start of the title display part.

In addition, when progressing from a low base weak reach A or B performance, the hold display and active display as well as the remaining number of times until Yu-time 131SG005Z may be erased at the timing when the falling display associated with the execution of operation prompting display B starts (the timing shown in FIG. 11-60 (D)). This allows the timing for erasing the hold display, active display, and the remaining number of times until Yu-time 131SG005Z to be the same regardless of whether the performance progresses to a low base strong reach A to C performance or a low base strongest reach performance.

Then, when a miss is announced as the result of the low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the Yu-Time ends again after the low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 11-65(G)(H). On the other hand, when a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 keeps the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the Yu-Time ends erased until the next normal state is reached, as shown in FIG. 11-65(I)(J).

In addition, if the operation prompting performance A is configured to develop into a low base strong reach A-C performance or a low base strongest reach performance in response to the operation of push button 31B, the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the Yu-time may be continuously displayed while the operation prompting performance A is being executed, and the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the Yu-time may be erased when the low base strong reach A-C performance or the low base strongest reach performance begins. In such a configuration, the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the Yu-time may be displayed in the operation prompting performance A, but the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the Yu-time may not be displayed in the operation prompting performance C and D in the subsequent low base strong reach A-C performance or the low base strongest reach performance.

[About the Yu-time start effect]
When the game control microcomputer 100 performs 900 variable display without being controlled by a jackpot in a low probability state, it controls to the time-saving state B (play time). At this time, the game control microcomputer 100 turns on the right hit lamp 131SG132 as shown in FIG. 11-66(C) and transmits a right hit LED lighting notification command. After that, the performance control CPU 120 stops the variable display when the remaining number of times until the play time is 0 as shown in FIG. 11-66(A)(B), and when it receives the right hit LED lighting notification command, it displays a right hit promotion image (small) that encourages the operation of shooting the game ball toward the right play area 2R as shown in FIG. 11-66(C). The timing of turning on the right hit lamp 131SG132 and the timing of displaying the right hit promotion image (small) are almost simultaneous, but the game control microcomputer 100 turns on the right hit lamp 131SG132 and then sends a right hit LED lighting notification command, and in response, the performance control CPU 120 displays the right hit promotion image (small), so that the right hit lamp 131SG132 turns on before the right hit promotion image (small) is displayed.

When the time-saving state B (Yu-time) is started, the game control microcomputer 100 keeps the right-hit lamp 131SG132 lit until the time-saving state B (Yu-time) ends. The right-hit promotion image (small) is composed of a message "right hit" (small) that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and an arrow image (small) that indicates the right direction. As shown in Figures 11-66 (C) to (H), when the time-saving state B (Yu-time) is started, the performance control CPU 120 displays the right-hit promotion image (small) in a position toward the upper right of the display area until the time-saving state B (Yu-time) ends.

When the variable display stops with the number of remaining plays until Yu-Time is 0 and a game state designation command that designates time-saving state B (Yu-Time) is received, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the Yu-Time start presentation as shown in Figures 11-66 (D) to (G).

The Yu-time start performance includes a title start period from when part of the Yu-time title characters "Yu-time entry" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until it is displayed in the fixed position, a title display period during which the title characters "Yu-time entry" are displayed in the fixed position, and a title end period from when the title characters "Yu-time entry" that were displayed in the fixed position disappear and switch to the Yu-time performance.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Entering Yu-Time" in the same manner as when it displays the title characters "Six people, catch the explosive chu!" during the title start period, title display period, and title end period of the Yu-Time start performance.

In more detail, during the title start period, the performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Enter Yu Time" in an enlarged size where only a portion of the characters is visible in the display area, as shown in FIG. 11-66 (D). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Enter Yu Time" in such a way that the entire display area is filled with a portion of the title characters "Enter Yu Time". After that, the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the title characters "Enter Yu Time" as shown in FIG. 11-66 (D) (E), and stops the title characters "Enter Yu Time" in a fixed position at a reduced size where all of the characters of the title characters "Enter Yu Time" are visible in the display area.

During the title start period, the performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Entering Yu-Time" in a reduced size at a fixed position, and then transitions to the display of the title display period. During the title display period, the performance control CPU 120 keeps the title characters "Entering Yu-Time" displayed in a fixed position and frozen, as shown in Figures 11-66 (E) and (F).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the display of the title end period. During the title end period, as shown in FIG. 11-66 (F) (G), the performance control CPU 120 enlarges the title characters "Enter Yu Time", which are displayed in a reduced size at a fixed position, until the entire display area is filled with parts of the title characters "Enter Yu Time". At this time, the title characters "Enter Yu Time" are not enlarged in the opposite manner to when the title characters "Enter Yu Time" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, but are enlarged in a manner different from the opposite manner to when the title characters "Enter Yu Time" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period until the entire display area is filled with parts of the title characters "Enter Yu Time". In other words, the trajectory that each part of the title characters follows as the title characters "Enter Yu Time" shrink during the title start period is different from the trajectory that each part of the title characters follows as the title characters "Enter Yu Time" expand during the title end period. Therefore, the display area is completely filled with part of the title text "Entering Yu-Time" in a manner different from the manner in which the display area is completely filled at the start of the title start period. After that, as shown in FIG. 11-66(H), the background switches to the Yu-Time presentation and the Yu-Time presentation begins.

During the Yu-Time start presentation, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a right-hit promotion image (large) that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right play area 2R, in addition to the right-hit promotion image (small), and also displays an image warning about addiction (message: "Be careful not to get addicted!") below the display area.

The right hit promotion image (large) is a message that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and is composed of the message "Right Hit" (large), which is larger in size than the right hit promotion image (small), and an arrow image (large), which is an arrow indicating the right direction and is larger in size than the arrow image (small).The presentation control CPU 120 repeatedly displays the right hit promotion image (large) in a manner that moves from the left side of the display area to the right side over the period during which the Yu-time start presentation is being executed, as shown in Figures 11-66 (D) to (G).

In addition, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the time-saving state B, and when the variable display result is a miss, it selects the variable pattern PA1-4 with a special chart variable time of 500 ms to perform the variable display, and when it is controlled to the time-saving state B, and when the variable display result is a jackpot, it selects the variable pattern PB1-18 with a special chart variable time of 500 ms + 15,000 ms to perform the variable display, and when the control of the time-saving state B starts, the performance control CPU 120 is configured to execute the Yu-time start performance during the period when the variable display according to these variable patterns is being performed. The microcomputer 100 may be configured to perform a variable display by selecting a time-saving B start variable pattern that has a longer variable time than the variable pattern PA1-4 and that has a variable time corresponding to the play time start presentation in the first variable display controlled to the time-saving state B, that is, in the variable display based on the first game ball winning the first start winning port and the second start winning port after controlling to the time-saving state B, when the variable display result is a miss, and the presentation control CPU 120 executes the play time start presentation during the period in which the variable display by the time-saving B start variable pattern is being performed in the first variable display controlled to the time-saving state B. In this configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 performs a variable display in the variable pattern PB1-18 with a special chart variable time of 500 ms + 15,000 ms when the variable display result is a jackpot in the first variable display controlled to the time-saving state B, and the presentation control CPU 120 may stop the decorative pattern (large) in a jackpot mode without executing the play time start presentation.

[About title characters, etc. 1]
Figure 11-67 is a diagram showing one form of the relationship between the title characters of the title display part in the super reach performance, the explanatory characters in the explanatory text display performance, the title characters of the jackpot start performance, the operation prompting characters (small) in the operation prompting performance (small), and the operation prompting characters (large) in the operation prompting performance (large).

As shown in Figure 11-67 (A), the title characters of the Super Reach performance are displayed in a stationary state during the title display period, and the background image at that time is a still image (low base strong reach B, C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A-D performance) or a moving image (low base weak reach A, B performance, low base strong reach A performance). In addition, the number of characters in the title characters of the Super Reach performance is 7 to 13 characters, the display time of the title characters of the Super Reach performance (the time from when all the characters constituting the title characters are displayed until at least a part of the characters are no longer displayed) is LR, the font size of the title characters of the Super Reach performance is FR, and the display area size in which the title characters of the Super Reach performance are displayed is ER.

As shown in Figure 11-67 (A), the explanatory characters are displayed in an operating state, and the background image at that time is an operating image. The number of explanatory characters is 3 to 6 characters, the display time of the explanatory characters (one explanatory character out of three explanatory characters) (the time from when all the characters constituting the explanatory characters are displayed until at least a part of the character string is no longer displayed) is LS, the font size of the explanatory characters is FS, and the display area size in which the explanatory characters (one explanatory character out of three explanatory characters) are displayed is ES.

As shown in FIG. 11-67(A), the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed in an operating state, and the background image at that time is an operating image. In addition, the number of characters in the title characters of the jackpot start performance is 8, the display time of the title characters of the jackpot start performance (the time from when all the characters constituting the title characters are displayed until at least a part of the characters are no longer displayed) is LB, the font size of the title characters of the jackpot start performance is FB, and the display area size in which the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed is EB.

As shown in FIG. 11-67(A), the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed in an operating state, and the background image at that time is an operating image. The number of characters in the operation prompting characters (small) is three, the display time of the operation prompting characters (small) (the effective operation period of the push button 31B during which the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed without the push button 31B being operated) is L1P, the font size of the operation prompting characters (small) is F1P, and the display area size in which the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed is E1P.

As shown in FIG. 11-67(A), the operation prompting characters (large) are displayed in an operating state, and the background image at that time is an operating image. The number of characters in the operation prompting characters (large) is three, the display time of the operation prompting characters (large) (the effective operation period of the push button 31B during which the operation prompting characters (large) are displayed without the push button 31B being operated) is L2P, the font size of the operation prompting characters (large) is F2P, and the display area size in which the operation prompting characters (large) are displayed is E2P.

In this embodiment, when comparing the display times of the title character, explanatory character, title character, operation prompt character (small), and operation prompt character (large) of the super reach effect, as shown in Figure 11-67 (B), the display time LB of the title character of the jackpot start effect is longer than the display times LR, LS, L1P, L2P of the title character, explanatory character, operation prompt character (small) and operation prompt character (large) of the super reach effect, the display time LR of the title character of the super reach effect is longer than the display times LS, L1P, L2P of the explanatory character, operation prompt character (small) and operation prompt character (large), and the display times LS, L1P of the operation prompt character (small) and operation prompt character (large) are set longer than the display time LS of the explanatory character. In addition, the display times LR, LB, L1P, and L2P of the title characters of the super reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt characters (small), and the operation prompt characters (large) are all set to be longer than the display time required for all three explanatory characters that make up the explanatory text display effect to be displayed. Furthermore, the relationship between these display times holds regardless of the type of super reach effect.

In this embodiment, when comparing the font sizes of the title characters, explanatory characters, title characters of the jackpot start performance, operation prompt characters (small), and operation prompt characters (large) of the super reach performance, as shown in FIG. 11-67 (C), the font size F2P of the operation prompt characters (large) is larger than the font sizes FR, FS, FB, and F1P of the title characters, explanatory characters, title characters of the jackpot start performance, and operation prompt characters (small) of the super reach performance. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (large) is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters, explanatory characters, title characters of the jackpot start performance, operation prompt characters (small), and operation prompt characters (large) of the super reach performance.

Also, the font size FB of the title character of the jackpot start performance is larger than the font size FR, F1P of the title character, explanatory character, and operation prompt character (small) of the super reach performance. Also, the title character "BIG BONUS" of the jackpot start performance is first displayed in the first half "BIG" at the top of the fixed position, and then the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, and then the title character "BIG BONUS" is gradually enlarged and displayed. When the first half "BIG" is displayed at the top of the fixed position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, the size of the characters that make up the title character "BIG BONUS" is the smallest. In this configuration, the size of the title character of the jackpot start performance when the first half "BIG" is displayed at the top of the fixed position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position is larger than the size of the title character, explanatory character, and operation prompt character (small) of the super reach performance. Furthermore, when the first half of "BIG" is displayed at the top of the fixed position and the second half of "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, the size of the smallest character that makes up the title of the jackpot start performance is larger than the size of the largest character that makes up the title, explanation, operation prompt character (small), and operation prompt character (large) of the super reach performance.

The font size FR of the title characters of the Super Reach performance is larger than the font sizes FS and F1P of the explanatory characters and operation prompt characters (small). The size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Super Reach performance is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the explanatory characters and operation prompt characters (small).

The font size FS of the explanatory characters is larger than the font size F1P of the operation prompting characters (small). Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the explanatory characters is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the operation prompting characters (small).

Furthermore, these font size and character size relationships apply regardless of the type of Super Reach performance.

In this embodiment, when comparing the display area sizes of the title character, explanatory character, title character, operation prompt character (small), and operation prompt character (large) of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 11-67 (D), the display area size E2P of the operation prompt character (large) is larger than the display area sizes ER, ES, EB, and E1P of the title character, explanatory character, title character, and operation prompt character (small) of the super reach effect. Also, the display area size EB of the title character of the jackpot start effect is larger than the display area sizes ER, ES, and E1P of the title character, explanatory character, and operation prompt character (small) of the super reach effect. Also, the display area size ES of the explanatory character is larger than the display area size E1P of the operation prompt character (small). Also, these display area size relationships hold regardless of the type of super reach effect.

[Title characters, etc. 2]
Figure 11-68 is a diagram showing one embodiment of the relationship between the title characters of the title display part in the super reach performance, the title characters of the jackpot start performance, the operation prompting characters (small) in the operation prompting performance (small), the operation prompting characters (large) in the operation prompting performance (large), the title characters of the Yu-time start performance, and the remaining number characters that constitute the remaining number of times until Yu-time.

As shown in Figure 11-68 (A), the display time of the title characters in the Super Reach performance (the time from when all the characters constituting the title characters are displayed until at least a part of the characters are no longer displayed) is LR, the font size of the title characters in the Super Reach performance is FR, and the size of the display area in which the title characters in the Super Reach performance are displayed is ER.

As shown in FIG. 11-68(A), the display time of the title characters of the jackpot start effect (the time from when all the characters constituting the title characters are displayed until at least a part of the characters are no longer displayed) is LB, the font size of the title characters of the jackpot start effect is FB, and the size of the display area in which the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed is EB.

As shown in FIG. 11-68 (A), the display time of the operation prompting character (small) (the effective operation period of the push button 31B during which the operation prompting character (small) is displayed without the push button 31B being operated) is L1P, the font size of the operation prompting character (small) is F1P, and the display area size in which the operation prompting character (small) is displayed is E1P.

As shown in FIG. 11-68 (A), the display time of the operation prompting character (large) (the effective operation period of the push button 31B during which the operation prompting character (large) is displayed without the push button 31B being operated) is L2P, the font size of the operation prompting character (large) is F2P, and the display area size in which the operation prompting character (large) is displayed is E2P.

As shown in FIG. 11-68(A), the display time of the title characters of the Yu-time start effect (the time from when all the characters constituting the title characters are displayed until at least a part of the characters are no longer displayed) is LY, the font size of the title characters of the Yu-time start effect is FY, and the size of the display area in which the title characters of the Yu-time start effect are displayed is EY.

As shown in FIG. 11-68(A), the font size of the remaining number of times until the Yu-time is FZ, and the size of the display area in which the remaining number of times until the Yu-time is displayed is EZ.

In this embodiment, when comparing the font sizes of the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt character (small), the operation prompt character (large), the title characters of the Yu-time start effect, and the characters of the number of times remaining until Yu-time, as shown in FIG. 11-68(B), the font size F2P of the operation prompt character (large) is larger than the font sizes FR, FB, F1P, FY, and FZ of the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt character (small), the title characters of the Yu-time start effect, and the characters of the number of times remaining until Yu-time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation prompt character (large) is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt character (small), the title characters of the Yu-time start effect, and the characters of the number of times remaining until Yu-time (remaining XXX times (X is a number between 0 and 900)). Additionally, the size of the smallest character that makes up the operation prompt character (large) is larger than the size of the largest character that makes up the remaining number of times until Yu-time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until Yu-time is between 0 and 900.

Furthermore, the font size FB of the title characters of the jackpot start performance is larger than the font sizes FR, F1P, FY, and FZ of the title characters of the super reach performance, the operation prompt character (small), the title characters of the Yu-time start performance, and the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters constituting the title characters of the jackpot start performance is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters constituting the title characters of the super reach performance, the operation prompt character (small), the title characters of the Yu-time start performance, and the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters constituting the title characters of the jackpot start performance is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters constituting the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until Yu-time is between 0 and 900.

Furthermore, the font size FY of the title characters of the Yu-time start effect is larger than the font sizes FR, F1P, and FZ of the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the operation prompt characters (small), and the remaining number of times until Yu-time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Yu-time start effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the operation prompt characters (small), and the remaining number of times until Yu-time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Yu-time start effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the remaining number of times until Yu-time, regardless of whether the remaining number of times until Yu-time is 0 to 900.

The font size FR of the title characters of the Super Reach performance is larger than the font sizes F1P and FZ of the operation prompt characters (small) and the remaining number of times until Yu-Time. The size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Super Reach performance is larger than the size of the operation prompt characters (small) and the largest character among the characters that make up the remaining number of times until Yu-Time. The size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Super Reach performance is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the remaining number of times until Yu-Time, regardless of whether the remaining number of times until Yu-Time is 0 to 900.

Furthermore, the font size F1P of the operation prompting characters (small) is a larger font size than the font size FZ of the remaining number of times until Yu-time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation prompting characters (small) is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the remaining number of times until Yu-time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation prompting characters (small) is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the remaining number of times until Yu-time, regardless of whether the remaining number of times until Yu-time is 0 to 900.

Furthermore, these font size and character size relationships apply regardless of the type of Super Reach performance.

In this embodiment, when comparing the display area sizes of the title characters of the super reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt character (small), the operation prompt character (large), the title characters of the Yu-time start effect, and the characters of the remaining number of times until Yu-time, as shown in FIG. 11-68(C), the display area size E2P of the operation prompt character (large) is larger than the display area sizes ER, EB, E1P, EY, and EZ of the title characters of the super reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt character (small), the title characters of the Yu-time start effect, and the characters of the remaining number of times until Yu-time. Also, the display area size EB of the title characters of the jackpot start effect is larger than the display area sizes ER, E1P, EY, and EZ of the title characters of the super reach effect, the operation prompt character (small), the title characters of the Yu-time start effect, and the characters of the remaining number of times until Yu-time. In addition, the display area size EY of the title character of the Yu-time start performance is larger than the display area sizes ER, E1P, and EZ of the title character of the Super Reach performance, the operation prompt character (small), and the remaining number of times until Yu-time. In addition, the display area size ER of the title character of the Super Reach performance is larger than the display area sizes E1P and EZ of the operation prompt character (small) and the remaining number of times until Yu-time. In addition, the display area size E1P of the operation prompt character (small) is larger than the display area size EZ of the remaining number of times until Yu-time. In addition, these display area size relationships hold regardless of the type of Super Reach performance.

In this embodiment, when comparing the display time of the title characters of the Super Reach performance and the Yu-Time start performance, as shown in FIG. 11-68 (D), the display time LY of the title characters of the Yu-Time start performance is set longer than the display time LR of the title characters of the Super Reach performance. Furthermore, the relationship between these display times holds regardless of the type of Super Reach performance.

Comparing the display mode of the title characters in the Super Reach effect and the Yu-Time start effect in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-68 (E), in the low base weak reach A, B effects and the low base strong reach A-C effects, during the title start period the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side of the display area to the center, and during the title end period the title characters are erased while moving from the center to the right side of the display area. On the other hand, in the low base strongest reach effect and the Yu-Time start effect, during the title start period the title characters are displayed in an enlarged and reduced form, and during the title end period the title characters are erased while enlarging.

[LED placement]
The game effect lamps 9 in this embodiment include frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4.

As shown in FIG. 11-69, the LED frames LWL1 to LWL12 are provided to surround the upper position of the image display device 5 of the gaming machine frame 3 and the left side of the gaming area, and the LED frames LWR2 to LWR12 are provided to surround the right side of the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. The logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are also located in positions corresponding to the logo "POWER II" formed on the front of the movable body 32. The decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are also located in positions corresponding to the decorative parts formed on the gaming area 2L. The attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 are also located in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

The frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 are full-color LEDs made up of RGB (Red, Green, Blue) light-emitting elements, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4 are red LEDs capable of emitting a single color red light, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 are white LEDs capable of emitting a single color white light.

[Output mechanism to LED driver (lamp driver)]
FIG. 11-70 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 outputs brightness data for turning on/blinking/turning off one or more of the multiple LEDs included in the game effect lamp 9 to the LED driver (also called a lamp driver). In the following, the control of turning on/blinking/turning off lamps such as LEDs by the performance control CPU 120 is also called lamp control. The LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 that is the lamp control target, based on the brightness data received from the performance control CPU 120, in order to turn on/blink/turn off each lamp. Each game effect lamp 9 turns on/blink/turns off based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

To explain more specifically, the ROM 121 of the performance control board 12 stores a brightness data table that contains brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9. The brightness data table includes an error brightness data table that is used when an error occurs, an SP reach brightness data table that is used during a super reach, and a background brightness data table.

Furthermore, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in a low probability low base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state in which a fanfare effect is executed, a jackpot background brightness data table used during a round in a jackpot game state, an ending background brightness data table used in an ending state in which an ending effect is executed to notify the end of the jackpot game state, and a time-saving background brightness data table used in a low probability high base state (time-saving state).

The above-mentioned background brightness data tables are used without overlapping, and one of the background brightness data tables is used depending on which of multiple game states the game is controlled to, such as normal state, fanfare state, jackpot game state, ending state, and time-saving state. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background brightness data tables for each game state being controlled, and outputs brightness data based on that background brightness data table to the LED driver. This causes each game effect lamp 9 to be lamp-controlled depending on the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, a priority is set for each of the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-70, the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table have the highest priority when used.

For example, when the effect control CPU 120 outputs brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table in the normal state and the effect progresses to a super reach effect, it uses the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the super reach effect in preference to the normal background brightness data table, and outputs brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, when the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the normal background brightness data table and the effect progresses to a super reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the super reach effect based on the SP reach brightness data table. Note that during the period when the brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but when the normal state is restored after the super reach effect ends, the brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is output to the LED driver, and when a jackpot is hit and the fanfare state is entered, the brightness data based on the fanfare background brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the game state being controlled, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the background brightness data table corresponding to the game state being controlled. However, when the performance progresses to a super reach performance, the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the super reach performance is used preferentially over the background brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the lamp control time using the background brightness data table. In other words, even while the performance control CPU 120 is lamp controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP reach brightness data table, it continues to update the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table, but since the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table, the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. After the Super Reach performance ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data contained in the background luminance data table to the LED driver again, starting from the continuation of the luminance data that was being updated.

For example, when an error occurs while outputting brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table during a Super Reach performance, the performance control CPU 120 uses the error brightness data table corresponding to the error in preference to the SP Reach brightness data table, and outputs brightness data based on the error brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, when an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is being lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the Super Reach performance based on the SP Reach brightness data table, the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the error brightness data table. Note that during the period when the brightness data based on the error brightness data table is being output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but when the error is released and the game returns to the Super Reach performance, the brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the time of lamp control corresponding to the super reach performance being controlled, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the super reach performance. However, when an error occurs, the performance control CPU 120 outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the error brightness data table corresponding to the error in preference to the SP reach brightness data table. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the time of lamp control using the SP reach brightness data table. In other words, even while the performance control CPU 120 is lamp controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the error brightness data table, it continues to update the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table, but since the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data included in the error brightness data table, the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. After the error is cleared, the performance control CPU 120 again starts outputting the luminance data contained in the SP reach luminance data table to the LED driver, starting from the continuation of the luminance data that had been continuously updated.

[Lighting state of the game effect lamp]
In this embodiment, the lamps of each game effect lamp 9 are controlled by the output of brightness data to the LED driver by the performance control CPU 120 as described above. In this embodiment, terms such as "off", "almost off", "on", and "blinking" are used to refer to the lighting of each game effect lamp 9. As described above, the states of each game effect lamp 9 according to "on" and "blinking" are also referred to as "lighting states".

The term "off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and has a brightness of 0. The term "almost off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but has a very low brightness (for example, the brightness "1" described below).

For example, when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data is "000", the corresponding LED is "off". Also, when the brightness data (RGB data) is "111", the corresponding LED is lit in white with extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of an LED when the RGB data is "111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

When the R (Red) data defined as the brightness data of the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 is "0", the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are "off". Also, when the brightness data (R data) of the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 is "1", the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are lit at an extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 when the R data is "1" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

When the W (White) data, which is defined as the brightness data of the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, is "0", the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are "off". Also, when the brightness data (W data) of the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 is "1", the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are lit at an extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 in which the W data is "1" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

The term "lighting" includes a constant lighting state in which the game effect lamp 9 is always on, a wave lighting state in which the multiple lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are switched from off to on in sequence, and a hazy lighting state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing brightness. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is any of "2" to "F." The brightness data is hexadecimal data that can be specified from "0" to "F," with "0" being no brightness, "1" being the lowest brightness, and "F" being the highest brightness.

The term "blinking" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is in a state other than the above-mentioned "off" and "on", and in which the brightness of each lamp when it is on alternates between a first brightness and a second brightness higher than the first brightness. For example, "blinking" includes repeating on and off or almost off, and specifically, "blinking" includes switching over time between a case in which the brightness data is any of "2" to "F" and a case in which the brightness data is "0" or "1". As described above, in this embodiment, there is a hazy lighting as a lighting state of the lamp, but the hazy lighting is a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing its brightness, whereas the blinking is a state in which all of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are repeatedly lit and off or almost off.

[Explanation of the game effect lamp]
Next, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained with reference to Figures 11-71 to 12-36.

[Regarding lamp control of game effect lamps using a brightness data table]
The performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table stored in the ROM 121 to control one or more of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 to light/blink/turn off through lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 123 sets the sub-variation time according to the variation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by one for each frame (33 ms) of the image to be displayed. When the sub-variation time reaches the timing to start displaying corresponding to each part (for example, various displays in each part of the super reach performance), the display control unit 123 performs display control of the image display device 5 based on the image data (video data, animation data) stored in the ROM 121. The display control unit 123 sets an extension command (for example, extension command BXXX (where "X" is any alphanumeric character)) corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the display control it is performing, and transmits the extension command to the performance control CPU 120. Based on the extension command received from the display control unit 123, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) for which display control is performed by the display control unit 123.

Figure 11-71 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. As shown in Figure 11-71, for example, when the display control unit 123 performs display control on the title display part of a low base weak reach A performance, it sends an extension command (B421) for specifying the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance to the performance control CPU 120. Based on the extension command received from the display control unit 123, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table (weak reach common title (parent)) corresponding to the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance.

The parent table stores information specifying the lamps (illuminated locations) that are subject to lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, information specifying the child table that is referenced during lamp control corresponding to the lamps that are subject to lamp control, and information specifying the maximum time for which lamp control is performed. Note that the parent table stores only information about lamps that are subject to lamp control, and does not store information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control.

For example, in the parent table shown in Figure 11-74, frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 (XD_A_LWU_1_B421), logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD_A_LLOGO_B421), decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD_A_LSLMP_B421), and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_A_LATAK_B421) are specified as targets for lamp control. In addition, a child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and 600,000 ms (600,000/10) is specified as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed by this child table. A child table: XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, and 600,000 ms (600,000/10) is specified as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed by this child table. ) is specified, and a child table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, with 600,000 ms (600,000/10) specified as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed by this child table, and a child table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to the attaka lamps LA1 to LA4, with 600,000 ms (600,000/10) specified as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed by this child table.

As shown in FIG. 11-71, when the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control of a lamp specified in a parent table using a specified child table, for example, if 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum time, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the counter every 10 ms to time this 600,000 ms (10 minutes). In other words, the performance control CPU 120 performs the counter subtraction process 60,000 times to time 600,000 ms (10 minutes). The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control of the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) has been timed. Furthermore, if the performance control CPU 120 receives a new extended command before timing out a maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) after receiving an extended command, it will stop the ongoing lamp control and use the child table specified by the parent table specified by the newly received extended command to perform lamp control of the target lamp. Note that it is not anticipated that a performance display (performance scene) will take 600,000 ms, but the maximum time for lamp control using the child table is set to 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for a performance display (performance scene). Therefore, even if the performance control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason, it can continue the ongoing lamp control for a maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes).

In the child table, for each lamp (illuminated location) that is the subject of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, information specifying the grandchild table to be referenced during lamp control and information specifying the execution time for which the lamp control is performed are stored in the order in which each lamp control is performed.

For example, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to the frame LED LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LED LWR2 to LWR12 (XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and the execution time when the lamp is controlled by this grandchild table: 500 ms, the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and the grandchild table The execution time for lamp control by the table is 500 ms, the execution time for lamp control by grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table is 230 ms, and the execution time for lamp control by grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table is 600,000 ms, which are specified as the order in which lamp control by these grandchild tables is performed.

In addition, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), the following are specified in the order in which lamp control by the grandchild tables is executed: grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: 230 ms, grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: 600,000 ms.

In the child table shown in FIG. 11-75, the following execution times are specified for the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE): grandchild table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and lamp control by this grandchild table: execution time: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and lamp control by this grandchild table: execution time: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and lamp control by this grandchild table: execution time: 230 ms, grandchild table: X_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and lamp control by this grandchild table: execution time: 600,000 ms, in the order in which lamp control by these grandchild tables is performed.

In the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to the attack lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), the following execution time is specified in the order in which lamp control is performed by the grandchild table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and this grandchild table: execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table: execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table: execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: 230 ms, and execution time for lamp control by the grandchild table: X_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table: execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: 600,000 ms, in accordance with the order in which lamp control is performed by these grandchild tables.

As shown in Figure 11-71, when the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control of a target lamp using a grandchild table specified by a child table, it performs the process of, for example, controlling the target lamp using the grandchild table specified first, timing the execution time corresponding to this grandchild table, and then performing lamp control of the target lamp using the grandchild table specified next, for all specified grandchild tables in the specified order. For example, in the case of the child table shown in Figure 11-75, for frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 until 500 ms is first clocked, then lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until 500 ms is clocked, then lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 until 230 ms is clocked, and then lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until 600,000 ms is clocked. Although it is not anticipated that a performance display (performance scene) will take 600,000 ms, the last grandchild table specified sets the maximum time for lamp control to 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for the performance display (performance scene), so that the currently running lamp control can be continued for up to 600,000 ms (10 minutes) even if the performance control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason.

In addition, in the child table, when frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 are to be the targets of lamp control, one grandchild table, XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1, may be specified as the grandchild table corresponding to frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, as shown in Figure 11-75, or two grandchild tables, XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1 and XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1, may be specified as the grandchild table corresponding to frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, as shown in Figure 11-75. When one grandchild table is designated as the grandchild table corresponding to the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the performance control CPU 120 uses this one grandchild table to perform the same lamp control for both the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12. On the other hand, when two grandchild tables are designated as the grandchild tables corresponding to the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the two grandchild tables to perform lamp control for the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, and uses the other grandchild table to perform lamp control for the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12. Therefore, when one grandchild table is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to frame LEDLWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2-LWR12, common lamp control is performed for frame LEDLWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2-LWR12, whereas when two grandchild tables are specified, individual lamp control is performed for frame LEDLWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2-LWR12.

The grandchild table stores, for each lamp (illuminated location) that is the subject of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, brightness data that is referenced during lamp control and information that specifies the execution time for the lamp control, in the order in which each lamp control is executed.

For example, in the grandchild table shown in FIG. 11-76, corresponding to frame LED LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LED LWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1), the following are set: brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 100 ms, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 40 ms are specified as the order in which lamp control using this brightness data is performed.

In the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the following are specified for logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1): brightness data: 0x0000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 100 ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 40 ms.

In the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the following are specified for decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD___LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1): brightness data: 0x00000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 100 ms, brightness data: 0x00000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x66666, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x66666, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x66666, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 40 ms.

In the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the following are specified for the Attacka lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD___LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1): luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this luminance data: 100 ms, luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this luminance data: 120 ms, luminance data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control using this luminance data: 120 ms, luminance data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control using this luminance data: 120 ms, luminance data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control using this luminance data: 120 ms, luminance data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control using this luminance data: 40 ms.

In the brightness data of the grandchild table frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1) shown in Figure 11-76, the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL1, the values in the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL2 and LWR2, the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL3 and LWR3, and the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL4 and LWR4. The values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL4 and LWR4, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL5 and LWR5, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL6 and LWR6, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL7 and LWR7, and the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL8 and LWR8.

In addition, as in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-81, when different grandchild tables are specified for frame LED LWL1 to LWL12 (XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1) and frame LED LWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), in the brightness data for frame LED LWL1 to LWL12 (XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to 1 and 2 represent the RGB values of frame LED LWL1. the first to third lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL2, the fourth to sixth lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL3, the first to third lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL4, the fourth to sixth lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL5, and the first to third lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL6, The values of the 4th to 6th lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL7, the values of the 1st to 3rd lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL8, and in the luminance data of frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), the values of the 1st to 3rd lowest digits of the data corresponding to number 2 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR2, and the values of the 4th to 6th lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR3. The values of the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR4, the values of the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR5, the values of the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR6, the values of the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR7, and the values of the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR8.

In addition, in the brightness data of logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the value in the fourth lowest digit indicates the R (Red) value of logo LED LL1, the value in the third lowest digit indicates the R value of logo LED LL2, the value in the second lowest digit indicates the R value of logo LED LL3, and the value in the fourth lowest digit indicates the R value of logo LED LL4.

In addition, in the brightness data of decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the value in the fourth lowest digit indicates the W (White) value of decorative LED LS1, the value in the third lowest digit indicates the W value of decorative LED LS2, the value in the second lowest digit indicates the W value of decorative LED LS3, and the value in the fourth lowest digit indicates the W value of decorative LED LS4.

In the brightness data of the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of attacca lamp LA1, the values in the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of attacca lamp LA2, the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of attacca lamp LA3, and the values in the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of attacca lamp LA4.

The brightness data value corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the subject of lamp control. The frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4 are composed of LEDs consisting of three elements, "R", "G", and "B", and the brightness data for each element corresponds to the current value output to each element. Specifically, the brightness data has 16 current values from 0 to F, and when the brightness data is 0, the current value is the minimum value (for example, 0), and when the brightness data is F, the current value is the maximum value. For example, when the brightness data of "A" is output to the "R" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "A" flows through the "R" element, when the brightness data of "1" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "G" element, and when the brightness data of "F" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "F" flows through the "G" element.

The frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and Attacca lamps LA1-LA4 can emit light in various colors by passing a current corresponding to brightness data through each RGB element. The frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and Attacca lamps LA1-LA4 can also be lit in colors corresponding to each performance or character by emitting light based on brightness data. As an example, when data "F00" is output from an LED lamp to an LED as brightness data, a current corresponding to that data flows, and the LED lights up in red. When data "F0F" is output from an LED lamp to an LED as brightness data, a current corresponding to that data flows, and the LED lights up in magenta. When data "FF0" is output from an LED lamp to an LED as brightness data, and a current corresponding to that data flows, the LED lights up in yellow.

In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 can emit red light with a brightness corresponding to the brightness data by passing a current corresponding to the brightness data through the R (Red) element, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 can emit white light with a brightness corresponding to the brightness data by passing a current corresponding to the brightness data evenly through the three "R", "G", and "B" elements.

As shown in Figure 11-71, when the performance control CPU 120 controls the target lamp by referring to the brightness data in the grandchild table, it performs the process of, for example, outputting the first specified brightness data to the LED driver, timing the execution time corresponding to this brightness data, and then outputting the next specified brightness data to the LED driver, for all specified brightness data, in the specified order. For example, in the case of the child table shown in FIG. 11-75, for frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the following luminance data is output to the LED driver until 100 ms is first clocked: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000. Then, the following luminance data is output to the LED driver until 120 ms is clocked: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000. The CPU 120 outputs 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000 to the LED driver, and then outputs the following brightness data to the LED driver until 120 ms is clocked: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, and 0x5AA5AA. The CPU 120 then outputs 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, and 0x5AA5AA to the LED driver until 40 ms is clocked. The LED driver then passes a current corresponding to the received brightness data through the specified LED based on the received brightness data. This allows the performance control CPU 120 to control each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the performance control CPU 120 has timers corresponding to each of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table, and performs lamp control based on the parent table, child table, and grandchild table while decrementing the timers at regular intervals (e.g., 10 ms intervals).

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table, and when it has completed outputting brightness data up to the last specified location in the grandchild table, if the timer value corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table still remains, it starts outputting brightness data again from the first specified location in the grandchild table. On the other hand, if the timer value corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table becomes 0 while the performance control CPU 120 is outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table, it sets a timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying that child table, and starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table specified by that child table. This switches the grandchild table, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table after the switch.

The timer management of child tables by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to the figure. Figure 11-72 is a diagram to explain an example of lamp control using a grandchild table with timer management of a child table. As shown in Figure 11-72, in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, 500 ms is specified as the time when lamp control is first performed for frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 is specified, 500 ms is specified as the time when lamp control is second performed and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 is specified, 230 ms is specified as the time when lamp control is third performed and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 is specified, and 600,000 ms is specified as the time when lamp control is fourth performed and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 is specified. In the second and fourth grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, the brightness data (RGB data) for frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 is "0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499", "0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388", "0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499", "0x499388, 0x4995AA, It is specified that the data should be executed at 100 ms intervals in the order "0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA". For ease of explanation, the luminance data in the first 100 ms will be called data 1, the luminance data in the second 100 ms will be called data 2, the luminance data in the third 100 ms will be called data 3, and the luminance data in the fourth 100 ms will be called data 4.

When the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for the second specified grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 of the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, it times the specified 500 ms by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms, and outputs the brightness data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until the time reaches 500 ms. However, after data 1 to data 4 have been output, if the time has not yet reached 500 ms, it again outputs the brightness data to the LED driver in order, starting from the first data 1. When the timer reaches 500 ms, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, and starts outputting brightness data based on the next grandchild table specified by the child table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for the fourth specified grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 of the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, it times the specified 600,000 ms by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms, and outputs the brightness data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until the time reaches 600,000 ms. However, after data 1 to data 4 have been output, if the time has not yet reached 600,000 ms, it again outputs the brightness data to the LED driver in order starting from the first data 1. When the time reaches 600,000 ms, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2. At this time, because the child table does not specify a next grandchild table, it starts outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1, which was specified first in the child table. However, unless some abnormality occurs, the time will not reach 600,000 ms, and by receiving the next extension command from the display control unit 123 before the time reaches 600,000 ms, it will start outputting brightness data based on the parent table, child table, and grandchild table specified by the newly received extension command.

As shown in the parent table in Figure 11-74, the maximum time for lamp control by a child table is specified as 600,000 ms (10 minutes), and the 10-minute data in this parent table serves as a measure against malfunctions. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 switches parent tables to control the lamps based on the performance control commands from the main board 11, but even if some malfunction occurs while lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table and the performance control CPU 120 does not receive a performance control command from the main board 11, lamp control will be performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, so it is possible to prevent different lamp controls from being performed one after another from the point where the malfunction occurred.

In addition, as shown in the child table in Figure 11-75, the execution time for lamp control by the last-specified grandchild table is specified as 600,000 ms (10 minutes). The 10-minute data in this child table serves to prevent lamp control from being performed again by the first-specified grandchild table of the child table when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table becomes 0, because the parent table's timer is still remaining.

In addition, in the grandchild table, 600,000 ms (10 minutes) may be specified as the execution time of the lamp control that references the last specified brightness data. With this configuration, the 10-minute data in the brightness data serves to prevent lamp control from being performed again using the first specified brightness data in the grandchild table when the timer corresponding to the grandchild table has reached 0, because the timer in the child table is still remaining. In this way, by setting the brightness data specified at the end of the grandchild table to 10-minute data, the lamp is maintained at a fixed light emission, preventing the problem of continuous changes in the lamp lighting. Furthermore, by specifying brightness data spanning 600,000 ms (10 minutes) at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, the problem of continuous changes in the lamp lighting can be more effectively prevented.

[Brightness data table used for Super Reach performance 1]
FIG. 11-73 is a diagram showing a brightness data table used in the super reach performance.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and as shown in FIG. 11-73, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part using a common weak reach common title that defines the lighting mode of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances as a brightness data table, whether the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance is executed.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the low base weak reach A and B performances, it executes a title color change performance in the title display part, and when changing the title characters to red, it controls the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 using the common title common chance up red, which defines the light emission mode when changing the title characters to red in the title color change performance as a brightness data table, whether it is the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance or the title display part of the low base weak reach B performance, and when it executes the title color change performance in the title display part and changes the title characters to gold, it controls the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 using the common title common chance up gold, which defines the light emission mode when changing the title characters to gold in the title color change performance as a brightness data table, whether it is the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance or the title display part of the low base weak reach B performance.

The execution time of the introduction part differs between the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and as shown in Figure 11-73, when a low base weak reach A performance is executed, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a weak reach system weak reach A introduction in which the light emission mode specific to the introduction part of the low base weak reach A performance is defined as a brightness data table, and when a low base weak reach B performance is executed, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a weak reach system weak reach B introduction in which the light emission mode specific to the introduction part of the low base weak reach B performance is defined as a brightness data table.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach C performance, and as shown in FIG. 11-73, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part using a common strong reach common title that defines the lighting mode of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performances as a brightness data table, regardless of whether the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, or the low base strong reach C performance is executed.

The execution time of the introduction part differs between the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach C performance, and as shown in FIG. 11-73, when a low base strong reach A performance is executed, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a strong reach system strong reach A introduction in which the light emission mode specific to the introduction part of the low base strong reach A performance is defined as a brightness data table, and when a low base strong reach B performance is executed, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a strong reach system strong reach B introduction in which the light emission mode specific to the introduction part of the low base strong reach B performance is defined as a brightness data table, and in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a strong reach system strong reach C introduction in which the light emission mode specific to the introduction part of the low base strong reach C performance is defined as a brightness data table.

As shown in FIG. 11-73, when executing a low-base strongest reach presentation, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part and introduction part using a strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction that defines a series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach presentation as a brightness data table.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for high base reach A performance, high base reach B performance, high base reach C performance, and high base reach D performance, and as shown in FIG. 11-73, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part using a common high base reach series common title which defines the lighting mode of the title display part of the high base reach A to D performances as a brightness data table, whether it is executing a high base reach A performance, a high base reach B performance, a high base reach C performance, or a high base reach D performance.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the high base reach A performance, high base reach B performance, high base reach C performance, and high base reach D performance, but as shown in Figure 11-73, when a high base reach A performance is executed, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach type reach A introduction in which the lighting mode specific to the introduction part of the high base reach A performance is defined as a brightness data table, and when a high base reach B performance is executed, in the introduction part, the lighting mode specific to the introduction part of the high base reach B performance is defined as a brightness data table. The lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach-type reach B introduction that defines the light emission mode specific to the introduction part of the high base reach C presentation as a brightness data table, and when a high base reach C presentation is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach-type reach C introduction that defines the light emission mode specific to the introduction part of the high base reach C presentation as a brightness data table, and when a high base reach D presentation is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach-type reach D introduction that defines the light emission mode specific to the introduction part of the high base reach D presentation as a brightness data table.

In this way, whether a low base weak reach A performance is executed or a low base weak reach B performance is executed, the title display part uses a common weak reach-type common title as the brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9, so the storage capacity of the brightness data table can be saved, while in the introduction part, whether a low base weak reach A performance is executed or a low base weak reach B performance is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a separate weak reach-type weak reach A introduction and a weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, so that in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light in different modes depending on the performance content of each, and the performance effect in the introduction part until the performance result is introduced in the super reach performance can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, whether a low base weak reach A performance is executed or a low base weak reach B performance is executed, the title display part uses a common weak reach common title as a brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. However, the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances includes a weak reach title start which defines a unique lighting pattern for the title start period from when part of the title characters are displayed until they are displayed in a fixed position, and a weak reach title display which defines a unique lighting pattern after the title display period in which the title characters are displayed in a fixed position. When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, By transmitting an extended command specifying the reach title start, the performance control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach title start to control the lamps of the frame LED LWL1-LWL12 and the frame LED LWR2-LWR12, and the Attack lamp LA1-LA4, and when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display period of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the performance control CPU 120 may use the brightness data table: weak reach title display to control the lamps of the frame LED LWL1-LWL12 and the frame LED LWR2-LWR12, and the Attack lamp LA1-LA4. Also, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, the brightness data table: weak reach title start or weak reach title display may be a common brightness data table for one of them, and a separate brightness data table with individual contents set for the other may be used.

In addition, when executing the low base weak reach A or B performance, when executing a title color change performance in the title display part, whether it is a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common title common chance up red (title common chance up gold) as the brightness data table, so the storage capacity of the brightness data table can be saved.

In addition, whether a low base strong reach A performance is executed, whether a low base strong reach B performance is executed, or whether a low base strong reach C performance is executed, in the title display part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common strong reach common title as the brightness data table, so that the storage capacity of the brightness data table can be saved. On the other hand, in the introduction part, when a low base strong reach A performance is executed, whether a low base strong reach B performance is executed, or whether a low base strong reach C performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a separate strong reach A system strong reach introduction, strong reach B system strong reach introduction, or strong reach C system strong reach introduction, so that in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance, it is possible to make the game effect lamp 9 emit light in different modes according to the respective performance contents, and the performance effect in the introduction part until the performance result is introduced in the super reach performance can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, whether a low base strong reach A performance is executed, a low base strong reach B performance is executed, or a low base strong reach C performance is executed, the title display part uses a common strong reach common title as a brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. Among the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C performances, there is a strong reach title start that defines a unique lighting pattern for the prologue display period and the title start period from when a part of the title characters are displayed until they are displayed in a fixed position, and a strong reach title display that defines a unique lighting pattern after the title display period in which the title characters are displayed in a fixed position, and the display control unit 123 controls the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C performances. When display control of the strong base weak reach A to C performance is started, the performance control CPU 120 may use the brightness data table: strong reach title start to send an extended command specifying the start of a strong reach title, so that the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacka lamps LA1 to LA4, and when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display period of the title display part of the strong base weak reach A to C performance, the performance control CPU 120 may use the brightness data table: strong reach title display to control the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacka lamps LA1 to LA4. Also, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low base strong reach A performance, a low base strong reach B performance, or a low base strong reach C performance, the brightness data table: either the start of a strong reach title or the display of a strong reach title may be a common brightness data table, and the other may be a separate brightness data table with individual contents set for each.

In addition, the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C performances include a strong reach prologue that defines a unique lighting pattern for the prologue display period, a strong reach title start that defines a unique lighting pattern for the title start period from when part of the title characters are displayed until they are displayed in a fixed position, and a strong reach title display that defines a unique lighting pattern after the title display period in which the title characters are displayed in a fixed position. When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C performances, it sends an extension command that specifies the strong reach prologue, and the performance control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: strong reach prologue to control the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, and the display control unit 123 However, by sending an extended command specifying a strong reach title start when starting display control of the title start period of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performance, the performance control CPU 120 can control the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: strong reach title start, and by sending an extended command specifying a strong reach title display when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display period of the title display part of the strong base weak reach A to C performance, the performance control CPU 120 can control the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: strong reach title display. Also, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low base strong reach A performance, a low base strong reach B performance, or a low base strong reach C performance, the brightness data table: strong reach prologue, strong reach title start, or strong reach title display may be a common brightness data table for at least one table, and the remaining tables may be separate brightness data tables with individual contents set for each.

In addition, the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performance includes a strong reach prologue that defines a unique lighting pattern during the prologue display period, and a strong reach title display that defines a unique lighting pattern after the title start period from when part of the title characters are displayed until they are displayed in a fixed position. When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performance, it sends an extension command that specifies the strong reach prologue, and the performance control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: strong reach prologue. When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title start period of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performance, it transmits an extended command specifying the strong reach title display, so that the performance control CPU 120 can control the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: strong reach title display. Also, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low base strong reach A performance, a low base strong reach B performance, or a low base strong reach C performance, the brightness data table: strong reach prologue, strong reach title display can be a common brightness data table for one of the brightness data tables, and a separate brightness data table with individual contents set for the other.

In addition, whether a high base reach A performance is executed, whether a high base reach B performance is executed, whether a high base reach C performance is executed, or whether a high base reach D performance is executed, in the title display part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common high base reach common title as the brightness data table, so that the storage capacity of the brightness data table can be saved. On the other hand, in the introduction part, when a high base reach A performance is executed, whether a high base reach B performance is executed, whether a high base reach C performance is executed, or whether a high base reach D performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a separate high base reach A performance introduction, high base reach B performance introduction, high base reach C performance introduction, or high base reach D performance introduction, so that in the introduction part of the high base reach A performance, high base reach B performance, high base reach C performance, or high base reach D performance, it is possible to make the game effect lamp 9 have different light emission modes according to the respective performance contents, and the performance effect in the introduction part until the performance result is introduced in the super reach performance can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, whether a high base reach A performance is executed, a high base reach B performance is executed, a high base reach C performance is executed, or a high base reach D performance is executed, the title display part is configured to use a common high base reach series common title as a brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. Among the title display parts of the high base reach A to D performances, there are a high base reach series title start which defines a unique lighting pattern for the title start period from when a part of the title characters are displayed until they are displayed in a fixed position, and a high base reach series title display which defines a unique lighting pattern after the title display period in which the title characters are displayed in a fixed position, and the display control unit 123 controls the title display parts of the high base reach A to D performances. When starting display control of the title display period of the title display part of the high base reach A to D performances, the performance control CPU 120 may send an extended command specifying the start of a high base reach title, so that the performance control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: high base reach title start to control the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4, and when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display period of the title display part of the high base reach A to D performances, the performance control CPU 120 may send an extended command specifying the high base reach title display, so that the performance control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: high base reach title display to control the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4. Also, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a high base reach A performance, a high base reach B performance, a high base reach C performance, or a high base reach D performance, the brightness data table: either the high base reach title start or the high base reach title display may be a common brightness data table, and the other may be a separate brightness data table with individual contents set for each.

In addition, when a low-base strongest reach effect is executed, in which the execution time of the title display part is not common with other super reach effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a strongest reach series strongest reach title introduction, which defines a series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach effect as a brightness data table, in the title display part and introduction part, so the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

In this embodiment, whether a low base weak reach A performance is executed or a low base weak reach B performance is executed, the title display part uses a common weak reach common title as the brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. However, when a low base weak reach A performance is executed, the title display part uses a weak reach A title that defines the light emission mode specific to the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance as the brightness data table of the title display part to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. When a low base weak reach B performance is executed, the title display part uses a weak reach B title that defines the light emission mode specific to the title display part of the low base weak reach B performance as the brightness data table of the title display part to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. This makes it possible to set the game effect lamp 9 to a different light emission mode depending on the content of each performance in the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, thereby enhancing the performance effect in the title display part in the super reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, whether a low base strong reach A performance is executed, a low base strong reach B performance is executed, or a low base strong reach C performance is executed, the title display part is configured to use a common strong reach system common title as the brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. When a low base strong reach A performance is executed, the title display part is configured to use a strong reach system strong reach A title that defines the lighting mode specific to the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance as the brightness data table of the title display part to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9, and when a low base strong reach B performance is executed, the title display part is configured to use a low base strong reach B performance title as the brightness data table of the title display part. When performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using a strong reach series strong reach B title that defines a lighting pattern specific to the display part, and executing a low base strong reach C performance, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 may be performed using a strong reach series strong reach C title that defines a lighting pattern specific to the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance as the brightness data table of the title display part. This makes it possible to set the game effect lamp 9 to a different lighting pattern according to the content of each performance in the title display parts of the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance, and enhances the performance effect in the title display part in the super reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, whether a high base reach A performance is executed, a high base reach B performance is executed, a high base reach C performance is executed, or a high base reach D performance is executed, the title display part uses a common high base reach series common title as a brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. When a high base reach A performance is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a high base reach series reach A title that defines the light emission mode specific to the title display part of the high base reach A performance as the brightness data table of the title display part, and when a high base reach B performance is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a high base reach series reach B title that defines the light emission mode specific to the title display part of the high base reach B performance as the brightness data table of the title display part. When a high base reach C performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach series reach C title in which the lighting mode specific to the title display part of the high base reach C performance is defined as the brightness data table of the title display part, and when a high base reach D performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach series reach D title in which the lighting mode specific to the title display part of the high base reach D performance is defined as the brightness data table of the title display part. This makes it possible to set the game effect lamp 9 to a different lighting mode depending on the content of each performance in the title display parts of the high base reach A performance, high base reach B performance, high base reach C performance, and high base reach D performance, and enhances the performance effect in the title display part in the super reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a low base strongest reach performance is executed, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction in the title display part and introduction part, which defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strongest reach performance as a brightness data table. However, when a low base strongest reach performance is executed, the game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a strongest reach system strongest reach title in which a light emission mode specific to the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance is defined as a brightness data table for the title display part, and the game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a strongest reach system strongest reach introduction in which a light emission mode specific to the introduction part of the low base strongest reach performance is defined as a brightness data table for the introduction part.

In addition, in this embodiment, when low base weak reach A and B performances are executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common weak reach system common title as the brightness data table of the title display part, and the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the weak reach system weak reach A introduction and the weak reach system weak reach B introduction as the brightness data table of the introduction part, respectively. However, when a low base weak reach A performance is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the weak reach system weak reach A title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base weak reach A as the brightness data table in the title display part and the introduction part, and when a low base weak reach B performance is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the weak reach system weak reach B title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base weak reach B as the brightness data table in the title display part and the introduction part, and by doing so, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a low base strong reach A to C performance is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common strong reach system common title as the brightness data table of the title display part, and the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, and strong reach system strong reach C introduction as the brightness data table of the introduction part, respectively. When a low base strong reach A performance is executed, in the title display part and introduction part, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using strong reach system strong reach A title introduction, which defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach A performance, as the brightness data table, and when a low base strong reach B performance is executed, in the title display part and introduction part, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using low base strong reach B performance as the brightness data table. When a low base strong reach C performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a strong reach system strong reach B title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach C performance as a brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part, and when a low base strong reach D performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a strong reach system strong reach D title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach D performance as a brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part, and by doing so, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when high base reach A to D performances are executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common high base reach common title as the brightness data table of the title display part, and the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using high base reach reach A introduction, high base reach reach B introduction, high base reach reach C introduction, and high base reach reach D introduction as the brightness data table of the introduction part, respectively. When a high base reach A performance is executed, in the title display part and introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach reach A title introduction, which defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the high base reach A performance, as the brightness data table, and when a high base reach B performance is executed, in the title display part and introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach B title introduction, which defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the high base reach A performance, as the brightness data table. The lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach-type reach B title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the base reach B performance, and when a high base reach C performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach-type reach C title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the high base reach C performance as a brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part, and when a high base reach D performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach-type reach D title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the high base reach D performance as a brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part, and by doing so, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

[Brightness data table used for Super Reach performance 2]
The following describes the settings of the brightness data table used in the super reach performance. As described above, the brightness data table is composed of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table, but in the brightness data table described below, only some of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table are shown, and the other tables may be omitted.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B effects]
Figure 11-74 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: weak reach common title used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B421 sent when performing display control of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, Figure 11-75 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: weak reach common title, and Figures 11-76 to 11-78 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: weak reach common title.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B421, it specifies the parent table of the weak reach common title based on the extension command B421. As shown in FIG. 11-74, the parent table of the weak reach common title is set to perform lamp control for frame LED LWL1-LWL12 and frame LED LWR2-LWR12 for a maximum of 600,000 ms by referring to the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B421, it performs lamp control for frame LED LWL1-LWL12 and frame LED LWR2-LWR12 by referring to the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE specified by the parent table of the weak reach common title.

Child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE contains the grandchild tables and execution times for frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 in the order of reference, as shown in Figure 11-75.

The performance control CPU 120 first controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 (Figure 11-76) that is set first in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE. As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 are turned off for 340 ms, and then the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 are lit in blue for 160 ms.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1, it performs lamp control by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 (Figure 11-77), which is the second grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE. As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 light up in a blue color, and the brightness changes every 100 ms.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, it performs lamp control by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 (Figure 11-78) that is set as the third grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE. As a result, some of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 are turned off and the rest are lit in blue, with the parts that are turned off and the parts that are lit changing every 30 ms or 20 ms.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed 230 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3, it performs lamp control by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 (Figure 11-77), which is set as the fourth grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE. As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 light up in a blue color, and the brightness changes every 100 ms.

Then, when the display control unit 123 receives an extension command (B400 or B40F) sent when controlling the display of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the performance control CPU 120 switches to lamp control using a brightness data table based on the newly received extension command. As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 will continue to light up in a blue-based color and change brightness every 100 ms until a new extension command is received, and when a new extension command is received, they will switch to a lighting mode based on the received extension command.

As shown in Figure 11-74, the parent table for weak reach common titles has child tables set up that also refer to the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4. These child tables also have grandchild tables etc. set up in order of execution to reference, and these grandchild tables also have brightness data etc. set up in order of execution to reference. The performance control CPU 120 references the child table specified in the parent table, the grandchild table specified in the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table to control the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 in the same procedure as above.

As a result, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 will change from off to red until 500 ms have elapsed, then stay red until 500 ms have elapsed, with the brightness changing every 100 ms, then go from red to almost off until 230 ms have elapsed, then stay red again, and continue to stay red and change brightness every 100 ms until a new extended command is received.

In addition, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 change from an off state to white until 500 ms have passed, then stay white until 500 ms have passed, and the brightness changes every 100 ms, then go from white to almost off until 230 ms have passed, and then stay white again, and continue to stay white and change brightness every 100 ms until a new extended command is received.

The attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 will change from off to blue until 500 ms have elapsed, then stay lit in blue until 500 ms have elapsed, and the brightness will change every 100 ms, then go from blue to almost off until 230 ms have elapsed, and then stay lit in blue again, and the brightness will continue to change every 100 ms until a new extended command is received.

As shown in Figure 11-152 (A), in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, the period from the start is the title start period of 500 sm, followed by the title display period of 2200 ms, followed by the title end period of 300 ms. Therefore, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: weak reach common title, so that in the title start period (the period from the start of the title display part to 500 ms elapsed) in which the title characters move from the left side of the display area toward their fixed position, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4 change from an off state to blue, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4 change from an off state to red, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 change from an off state to white (lamp control based on the grandchild table (1) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75). In addition, during the title display period when the title characters remain stationary in a fixed position and the title end period (the period from the start of the title display period to the end of the title display part) when the title characters move from the fixed position to the right, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 are lit in a blue color until 500 ms have elapsed, and the brightness changes every 100 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then by the time 230 ms have elapsed, they go from blue to a nearly off state and then light up in blue again (lamp control by grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then they are lit in a blue color again, and the state of the brightness changing every 100 ms continues (lamp control by grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75). In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 will light up red until 500 ms have elapsed, and the brightness will change every 100 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then within 230 ms, they will go from red to almost off, and then light up red again (lamp control by grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then they will light up red again, and the state of the brightness changing every 100 ms will continue (lamp control by grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75). In addition, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are lit in white until 500 ms have elapsed, and the brightness changes every 100 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75), then go from white to almost off once and then back to white within 230 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75), after which they are lit in white again and the brightness continues to change every 100 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75).

In addition, after 3000 ms has elapsed since the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) sent in conjunction with starting display control of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, and the lamp control based on the brightness data table: weak reach common title ends and switches to lamp control based on the brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performances.

In this way, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command B421, it performs lamp control based on the brightness data table: weak reach common title based on the extended command B421, so that the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 change in light color and light pattern according to the title start period in which the title characters move from the left side of the display area towards their fixed position, and the title end period in which the title characters move from their fixed position towards the right side.

[Brightness data table used in title color change effect (red)]
Figure 11-79 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: title common chance up red used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B511 sent when performing display control of the title color change effect that changes the title text from white to red, Figure 11-80 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: title common chance up red, and Figures 11-81 to 11-83 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: title common chance up red.

When controlling the display of a title color change effect in which the title characters change from white to red in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the display control unit 123 transmits an extension command 511 at the timing when the title characters change (1,300 ms after the start of the title display part).

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command B511, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-79) for the title common chance up red based on the extended command 511, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Fig. 11-80) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-81 to 83) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4 will flash white at 40 ms intervals until 200 ms have elapsed, then they will be lit in red until 1200 ms have elapsed, and their brightness will change at 20 ms intervals, after which they will gradually turn off from red at 280 ms, and will remain off until a new extended command is received.

In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 will remain off until 200 ms have elapsed, then will remain red until 1200 ms have elapsed, with the brightness changing at 20 ms intervals, after which they will gradually turn off from red at 280 ms, and will remain off until a new extended command is received.

In addition, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 flash white at 40 ms intervals until 200 ms have elapsed, then remain lit in white until 1200 ms have elapsed, with the brightness changing at 20 ms intervals, after which they gradually turn off from white at 280 ms, and remain off until a new extended command is received.

As shown in Figure 11-152 (B), the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances is the title start period from the start of 500 ms, followed by the title display period of 2200 ms, followed by the title end period of 300 ms. Also, when executing a title color change performance in which the color changes from white to red, the title characters are displayed in a manner that makes them appear to glow for 200 ms 800 ms after the start of the title display period, after which the title characters change to red, and after a further 1200 ms the transition to the title end period begins.

Therefore, after the start of the title display period, extended command B511 is received at the timing to execute the title color change effect, and lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: Title Common Chance Up Red, so that during the period in which the title characters are displayed in a manner that appears to glow (the period up to 200 ms after extended command B511 is received), frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 flash white, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are turned off, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 flash white (lamp control based on grandchild table (5) specified by the child table in Figure 11-80). In addition, until the title characters change to red and the title end period begins (the period from 200 ms after receiving extension command B511 until another 1,200 ms has passed), frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 light up in red and change brightness at 20 ms intervals, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 light up in red and change brightness at 20 ms intervals, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 light up in white and change brightness at 20 ms intervals (lamp control by grandchild table (6) specified by the child table in Figure 11-80). Also, during the title end period (the period 1,400 ms after receiving extension command B511) when the title characters move from their fixed position to the right and disappear, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4 gradually turn off from red, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4 gradually turn off from red, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 gradually turn off from white (lamp control by grandchild table (7) specified by the child table in Figure 11-80).

In addition, after 3000 ms has elapsed since the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) sent in conjunction with starting display control of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, and the lamp control based on the brightness data table: title common chance up red ends and switches to lamp control based on the brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performances.

[Brightness data table used in title color change effect (gold)]
Figure 11-84 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of the Brightness Data Table: Title Common Chance Up Gold used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B512 sent when performing display control of the title color change effect that changes the title text from white to gold, Figure 11-85 is a diagram showing the settings of the child table of the Brightness Data Table: Title Common Chance Up Gold, and Figures 11-86 to 11-88 are diagrams showing the settings of the grandchild table of the Brightness Data Table: Title Common Chance Up Gold.

When controlling the display of a title color change effect in which the title characters change from white to gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the display control unit 123 transmits an extension command 512 at the timing when the title characters change (1,300 ms after the start of the title display part).

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B512, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-84) of the Title Common Chance Up Gold based on the extension command 512, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Fig. 11-85) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-86-88) specified by the child tables, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4 will flash white at 40 ms intervals until 200 ms have elapsed, then they will light up in yellow until 1200 ms have elapsed, and their brightness will change at 20 ms intervals, after which they will gradually turn off from yellow over 280 ms, and will remain off until a new extended command is received.

In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 will remain off until 200 ms have elapsed, then will remain red until 1200 ms have elapsed, with the brightness changing at 20 ms intervals, after which they will gradually turn off from red at 280 ms, and will remain off until a new extended command is received.

In addition, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 flash white at 40 ms intervals until 200 ms have elapsed, then remain lit in white until 1200 ms have elapsed, with the brightness changing at 20 ms intervals, after which they gradually turn off from white at 280 ms, and remain off until a new extended command is received.

As shown in Figure 11-152 (B), the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances is the title start period from the start of 500 ms, followed by the title display period of 2200 ms, followed by the title end period of 300 ms. Also, when executing a title color change performance in which the color changes from white to gold, the title characters are displayed in a manner that makes them appear to glow for 200 ms 800 ms after the start of the title display period, after which the title characters change to gold, and after a further 1200 ms the transition to the title end period begins.

Therefore, after the start of the title display period, the extended command B512 is received at the timing to execute the title color change effect, and lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: Title Common Chance Up Gold, so that during the period in which the title characters are displayed in a manner that appears to glow (the period up to 200 ms after receiving the extended command B512), the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 flash white, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are turned off, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 flash white (lamp control based on the grandchild table (8) specified by the child table in Figure 11-85). In addition, until the title characters change to gold and the title end period begins (the period from 200 ms after receiving extension command B512 until another 1,200 ms has passed), frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 light up in yellow and change brightness at 20 ms intervals, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 light up in red and change brightness at 20 ms intervals, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 light up in white and change brightness at 20 ms intervals (lamp control by grandchild table (9) specified by the child table in Figure 11-85). Also, during the title end period (the period 1,400 ms after receiving extension command B512) when the title characters move from their fixed position to the right and disappear, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4 gradually turn off from yellow, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4 gradually turn off from red, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 gradually turn off from white (lamp control by grandchild table (10) specified by the child table in Figure 11-85).

In addition, after 3000 ms has elapsed since the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) sent in conjunction with starting display control of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, and the lamp control based on the brightness data table: title common chance up gold ends and switches to lamp control based on the brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performances.

[Modification of the brightness data table used in the title color change effect]
In this embodiment, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, regardless of whether or not a title change performance is performed, the performance control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach common title to control the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4. If a title change performance is not performed, the CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach common title to control the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4. When lamp control is performed to perform a title change presentation, an extended command specifying title common chance up red or title common chance up gold, which is sent from the display control unit 123 at the timing of performing display control to change the color of the title characters, is received, and from the time the color of the title characters changes, lamp control of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 is performed using the brightness data table: title common chance up red or title common chance up gold.

In contrast to this, in this modified example, the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances is provided with a brightness data table: weak reach common title (white) in which brightness data is set when no title change performance is performed, a brightness data table: weak reach common title (red) in which brightness data is set when a title change performance is performed in which the title characters change to red in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, and a brightness data table: weak reach common title (gold) in which brightness data is set when a title change performance is performed in which the title characters change to gold. When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, if no title change performance is performed, the performance control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach common title (white) to send an extension command that specifies the weak reach common title (white) to the frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and the frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12, the Attakkaran When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, in order to perform a title change performance in which the title characters are changed to red, the performance control CPU 120 transmits an extension command that specifies the weak reach common title (red), and uses the brightness data table: weak reach common title (red) to control the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, When lamp control is performed and the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, if a title change performance is performed in which the title characters change to gold, an extension command specifying the weak reach common title (gold) is sent, and the performance control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach common title (gold) to control the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4.

This allows the performance control CPU 120 to control the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4 in a lighting mode that corresponds to each situation: when no title change performance is performed in the title display part of the base weak reach A and B performances, when a title change performance in which the title characters change to red is performed, or when a title change performance in which the title characters change to gold is performed.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A performance]
Fig. 11-89 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach A introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B400 sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A performance, Fig. 11-90 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach A introduction, and Figs. 11-91 to 11-95 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach A introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B400, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-89) for the weak reach system weak reach A introduction based on the extension command B400, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Fig. 11-90) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-91 to 95) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-90 has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scene changes in the introductory part of the low base weak reach A performance, and a light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the performance scene, and further, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-91 to 95 have brightness data set with light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the characters etc. appearing in the performance scene.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, the attacca lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern according to the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the low base weak reach A performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B performance]
Fig. 11-96 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach B introduction used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B40F sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the low base weak reach B performance, Fig. 11-97 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach B introduction, and Figs. 11-99 to 11-103 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach B introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B40F, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-96) for the weak reach system weak reach B introduction based on the extension command B40F, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Fig. 11-97) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-98 to 103) specified by the child tables, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-97 has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the performance changes in the introductory part of the low base weak reach B performance, and an illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the performance scene, and further, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-98 to 103 have brightness data set with illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters etc. appearing in the performance scene.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, the attacca lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern according to the scene and characters that appear in the introductory part of the low base weak reach B performance.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of low base strong reach A to C effects]
Figure 11-104 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: strong reach common title used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B517 sent when performing display control of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance, Figure 11-105 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: strong reach common title, and Figures 11-106 to 11-109 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: strong reach common title.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B517, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-105) of the strong reach common title based on the extension command B517, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Fig. 11-106) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-107-109) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-106 is set with grandchild tables that set the execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scenes change, such as the prologue display period, title start period, title display period, and title end period that make up the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance, as well as the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the performance scene, and further, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-107 to 109 are set with brightness data that sets the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the characters that appear in the performance scene.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, the Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern according to the scene and characters appearing in the title display part of the low base strong reach A-C performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of the low base strong reach A performance]
Fig. 11-110 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach A introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B500 transmitted when performing display control of the introduction part in the low base strong reach A performance, Fig. 11-111 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach A introduction, and Fig. 11-112 to Fig. 11-117 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach A introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command B500, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-110) for the strong reach system strong reach A introduction based on the extended command B500, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Fig. 11-111) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-112 to 117) specified by the child tables, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-111 has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scene changes in the introductory part of the low base strong reach A performance, an illumination color corresponding to the performance scene, and illumination mode, and further, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-112 to 117 have brightness data set with illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters etc. appearing in the performance scene.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, the attacca lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern according to the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the low base strong reach A performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B performance]
Fig. 11-118 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach B introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B504 transmitted when performing display control of the introduction part in the low base strong reach B performance, Fig. 11-119 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach B introduction, and Fig. 11-120 to Fig. 11-124 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach B introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B504, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-118) for the strong reach system strong reach B introduction based on the extension command B504, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Fig. 11-119) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-120-124) specified by the child tables, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-119 has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the performance changes in the introductory part of the low base strong reach B performance, an illumination color corresponding to the performance scene, and an illumination mode, and further, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-120 to 124 have brightness data set with illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters etc. appearing in the performance scene.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, the attacca lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern according to the scene and characters that appear in the introductory part of the low base strong reach B performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of low base strong reach C performance]
When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B505 transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control of the introductory part in a low base strong reach C performance, it specifies a parent table (not shown) for the strong reach C introduction of the strong reach system based on the extension command B505, and controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 by referring to the child table (not shown) specified by the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

In particular, the child table of the strong reach system strong reach C introduction has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scene changes in the introductory part of the low base strong reach C performance, an illumination color corresponding to the performance scene, and an illumination mode, and further, the grandchild table of the strong reach system strong reach C introduction has brightness data set with an illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters etc. appearing in the performance scene in the introductory part of the low base strong reach C performance.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, the attacca lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern according to the scene and characters that appear in the introductory part of the low base strong reach C performance.

[Brightness data table used in low-base strongest reach performance]
Fig. 11-125 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B600 sent when performing display control of the low-base strongest reach performance, Fig. 11-126 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction, and Fig. 11-127 to Fig. 11-135 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B600, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-126) for the strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction based on the extension command B600, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Fig. 11-127) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-128-135) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-126 is set with a grandchild table that sets the execution time according to the time it takes for the performance scene to change from the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance to the end of the introductory part, the light emission color according to the performance scene, and the light emission mode.Furthermore, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-127 to 135 are set with brightness data that sets the light emission color and light emission mode according to the characters, etc. that appear in the performance scene.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, the Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern according to the scene and characters that appear in the introductory part of the low base strongest reach performance.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of high base reach A to D performance]
Figure 11-136 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: high bass reach common title used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B605 sent when performing display control of the title display part in the high bass reach A to D performances, Figure 11-137 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: high bass reach common title, and Figures 11-138 to 11-140 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: high bass reach common title.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B605, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-136) of the high base reach common title based on the extension command B605, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Fig. 11-137) specified by the parent table, the grandchild table (Fig. 11-138-140) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-137 is set with grandchild tables that set the execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scene changes, such as the title start period, title display period, and title end period that make up the title display part in the high base reach A to D performance, and the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the performance scene, and further, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-138 to 140 are set with brightness data that sets the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the characters, etc. that appear in the performance scene.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, the attacca lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern according to the scenes and characters appearing in the title display parts of the high base reach A-D performances.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high base reach A performance]
Fig. 11-141 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: high base reach type reach A introduction used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B606 sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the high base reach A performance, Fig. 11-142 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: high base reach type reach A introduction, and Figs. 11-143 to 11-145 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: high base reach type reach A introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table have been omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B606, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-141) for the introduction of high base reach type reach A based on the extension command B606, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Fig. 11-142) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-143 to 145) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-142 has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scene changes in the introductory part of the high base reach A performance, and an illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the performance scene, and further, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-143 to 145 have brightness data set with illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters etc. appearing in the performance scene.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, the attacca lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern according to the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the high base reach A performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high base reach B performance]
Fig. 11-146 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: parent table of high base reach type reach B introduction used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B607 transmitted when performing display control of the introduction part in the high base reach B performance, and Fig. 11-147 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: child table of high base reach type reach B introduction. Note that the child table is omitted except for some setting contents, and all grandchild tables are omitted.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B607, it specifies the parent table (Figure 11-146) for the introduction of high base reach system reach B based on the extension command B607, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Figure 11-147) specified by the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-147 is set with a grandchild table that sets the execution time according to the time when the performance scene changes in the introductory part of the high base reach B performance, the light emission color according to the performance scene, and the light emission mode, and further, the grandchild table for the high base reach type reach B introduction is set with brightness data that sets the light emission color and light emission mode according to the characters etc. that appear in the performance scene in the introductory part of the high base reach B performance.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, the attacca lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern according to the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the high base reach B performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high base reach C performance]
Fig. 11-148 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: parent table of high bass reach type reach C introduction used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B608 transmitted when performing display control of the introduction part in the high bass reach C performance, and Fig. 11-149 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: child table of high bass reach type reach C introduction. Note that the child table is omitted except for some setting contents, and all grandchild tables are omitted.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B608, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-148) for the introduction of the high base reach type reach C based on the extension command B608, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Fig. 11-149) specified by the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-148 has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scene changes in the introductory part of the high base reach C performance, an illumination color corresponding to the performance scene, and illumination mode, and further, the grandchild table for the high base reach type reach C introduction has brightness data set with illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters etc. that appear in the performance scene in the introductory part of the high base reach C performance.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, the attacca lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern according to the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the high base reach C performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high base reach D performance]
Fig. 11-150 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: parent table of high bass reach type reach D introduction used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B609 transmitted when performing display control of the introduction part in the high bass reach D performance, and Fig. 11-151 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: child table of high bass reach type reach D introduction. Note that the child table is omitted except for some setting contents, and all grandchild tables are omitted.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B609, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-150) for the introduction of the high base reach type reach D based on the extension command B609, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Fig. 11-151) specified by the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-150 has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scene changes in the introductory part of the high base reach D performance, an illumination color corresponding to the performance scene, and illumination mode, and further, the grandchild table for the high base reach type reach D introduction has brightness data set with illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters etc. that appear in the performance scene in the introductory part of the high base reach D performance.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, the attacca lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern according to the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the high base reach D performance.

[Effect 1]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes a reach state. The super reach performance is composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. Then, the decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the super reach performance, and the title character corresponding to the super reach performance is displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the decorative pattern that has become a reach state. In this way, when the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern has become a reach state, but by displaying the title character corresponding to the super reach performance using the display position of the decorative pattern that has become a reach state in the title display part in the super reach performance, the player can naturally pay attention to the title character, and as a result, the title display can be performed preferably.

In addition, since the likelihood of a big win differs depending on whether the decorative pattern that has reached the reach state is an odd number pattern or an even number pattern, when the decorative pattern reaches the reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern has reached the reach state, which will also draw more attention to the title text.

In addition, a decorative symbol (large) is displayed in reach mode before the title display part in the Super Reach performance, and then the decorative symbol (large) displayed in reach mode is reduced to a smaller decorative symbol (small), and the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach performance are displayed using the display position of the reduced decorative symbol (small). In this way, the reduced display of the decorative symbol (large) attracts the player's attention, and the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach performance are displayed using the display position of the reduced decorative symbol (small), making it easier to draw attention to the title characters.

In addition, in the title display part of the Super Reach performance, at the timing when the decorative pattern in the reach mode is displayed, the title text corresponding to the Super Reach performance is displayed so that it overlaps with the decorative pattern in the reach mode, making it easier to focus attention on the title text.

In addition, the super reach effects include low base weak reach A and B effects, and low base strong reach A to C effects, which have a higher chance of winning than the low base weak reach A and B effects. The title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects and the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C effects appear overlapping with one of the decorative patterns (the decorative pattern on the left) of the decorative patterns that have become a reach mode, making it easier to draw attention to the title display.

The Super Reach effect also includes a low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher chance of winning than the low base strong reach effects A to C, and the title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach effect appear overlapping with both decorative patterns (decorative patterns on both sides) that have reached the reach state, allowing the title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach effect to be displayed in a more impactful manner.

In addition, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C effects, and the title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach effects appear overlapping with one of the decorative patterns that have reached the reach state (the decorative pattern on the left) or both decorative patterns (the decorative patterns on both sides) and are then displayed in their fixed positions, and even during the period when they are displayed in their fixed positions, they are displayed overlapping with a portion of the decorative patterns on both sides that have reached the reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title characters even after they are displayed in their fixed positions.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, uses a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 2]
In this embodiment, after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes a reach state, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A, B performance and the low base strong reach A to C performance. The low base weak reach A, B performance and the low base strong reach A to C performance are each composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. When an odd-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base weak reach A, B performance, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the odd-numbered decorative pattern in the reach state, when an even-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base weak reach A, B performance, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the even-numbered decorative pattern in the reach state, when an odd-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the odd-numbered decorative pattern in the reach state, and when an even-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the even-numbered decorative pattern in the reach state. By doing this, when a decorative pattern reaches a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern has reached the reach state. However, by displaying the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects using the display position of the decorative pattern that has reached the reach state in the title display part of the low base weak reach A, B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the player can naturally pay attention to the title letters, and as a result, the title can be displayed in an optimal manner.

In addition, since the likelihood of a big win differs depending on whether the decorative pattern that has reached the reach state is an odd number pattern or an even number pattern, when the decorative pattern reaches the reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern has reached the reach state, which will also draw more attention to the title text.

[Effect 3]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A, B performance, low base strong reach A to C performance, and low base strongest reach performance after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes a reach state. The low base weak reach A, B performance, low base strong reach A to C performance, and low base strongest reach performance are each composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. When an odd-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base weak reach A, B performance, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B performance are displayed in the title display part using the display position of the odd-numbered decorative pattern that has become the reach state, when an even-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base weak reach A, B performance, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B performance are displayed in the title display part using the display position of the even-numbered decorative pattern that has become the reach state, when an odd-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C performance are displayed in the title display part using the display position of the odd-numbered decorative pattern that has become the reach state. When an even-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C performances are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the even-numbered decorative pattern in the reach state, when an odd-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance, title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the odd-numbered decorative pattern in the reach state, and when an even-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance, title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the even-numbered decorative pattern in the reach state. By doing this, when a decorative pattern reaches a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern has reached the reach state. However, by displaying the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B effects, the low base strong reach A-C effects, and the low base strongest reach effects using the display positions of the decorative patterns that have reached the reach state in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A, B effects, the low base strong reach A-C effects, and the low base strongest reach effects, the player can naturally pay attention to the title letters, and as a result, the title display can be performed preferably.

In addition, since the likelihood of a big win differs depending on whether the decorative pattern that has reached the reach state is an odd number pattern or an even number pattern, when the decorative pattern reaches the reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern has reached the reach state, which will also draw more attention to the title text.

[Effect 4]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes a reach state. The super reach performance is composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. Then, the decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the super reach performance, and the title character corresponding to the super reach performance is displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the decorative pattern that has become a reach state. In this way, when the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern has become a reach state, but by displaying the title character corresponding to the super reach performance using the display position of the decorative pattern that has become a reach state in the title display part in the super reach performance, the player can naturally pay attention to the title character, and as a result, the title display can be performed preferably.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, uses a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 5]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a low base strong reach B performance that has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach B performance and the low base weak reach B performance. The low base weak reach B performance and the low base strong reach B performance are composed of both a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, in the low base weak reach B performance, the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Boingo" are used, and the ally character "Yume Yume" announces that a jackpot will be reached, and in the low base strong reach B performance, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are used, and the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" announce that a jackpot will be reached. In the introductory part of the low base strong reach B performance, the display is started in a manner in which the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" are arranged in the foreground and the enemy character "Robo" is arranged in the background, and in the introductory part of the low base weak reach B performance, the display is started in a manner in which the ally character "Yume Yume" is arranged in the foreground and the enemy character "Boingo" is not arranged in the background (ally character "Yume Yume" and enemy character "Boingo" are arranged facing each other on the left and right). In this way, for the low base weak reach B performance, which has a relatively high expectation of a jackpot, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana", which are notified of a jackpot, are arranged in the foreground and the enemy character "Robo" is arranged in the background, allowing the player to empathize and making it easier for the player to intuitively recognize that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and as a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

Also, ally characters are characters who are given benefits if they win a battle, and enemy characters are characters who are not given benefits if they win a battle, and at the start of the introductory part of the low base strong reach B performance, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" are displayed in a position in front with their backs to you, and the enemy character "Robo" is displayed in a position in the back facing you, with the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" facing the enemy character "Robo", and for the low base strong reach B performance, which has a relatively high expectation, the player and the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" are facing in the same direction, making it easier for the player to empathize and recognize that there is a high expectation of a jackpot.

In addition, in the introductory part of the low base strong reach B performance, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are displayed in a position that includes the display area where the title characters were displayed in the title display part, so that when the title characters disappear, the player who was focusing on the title characters will naturally turn their attention to the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo".

[Effect 6]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach A to C performances that have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B performances and a longer performance time than the low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances are each composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances all use dialogue subtitles. In the low base weak reach A and B performances, the title characters and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part, and in the introduction part, the dialogue subtitles that were displayed in the title display part are continuously displayed, while in the low base strong reach A to C performances, the dialogue subtitles are not displayed in the title display part, and the title characters are displayed. In this manner, the low base strong reach A to C effects, which have a relatively high probability of winning and a long execution time, are displayed so that the title text and dialogue subtitles do not overlap as much as possible, while in the low base weak reach A and B effects, which have a relatively low probability of winning and a short execution time, even if the dialogue subtitles and title text overlap, the display of the title text is completed first so that the player can also focus on the dialogue subtitles, making it possible to provide the title text and dialogue subtitles appropriately, and as a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

In addition, when the title text and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, in the subsequent introductory part, the performance scene does not change until the dialogue subtitles that were displayed simultaneously with the title text end, so it is possible to draw attention to the title text and then to the dialogue subtitles.

In addition, when title text and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output while the audio corresponding to the title text is not output, making it easier to hear the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles.

[Effect 7]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach A to D performance. The low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach A to D performance are configured to include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, the title display of the low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach A to D performance is composed of multiple characters ("Catch the explosive chu with six people!", "Battle reach A (Battle reach B to D)"). Then, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach A to D performance, the title characters are started to be displayed at an enlarged size where only a portion of the multiple characters are visible, and the display size is gradually reduced from the enlarged size, and the title characters are displayed at a reduced size where all of the multiple characters are visible. In this way, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach A to D performance, the multiple characters are displayed at an enlarged size where only a portion of the multiple characters are visible, and then the size gradually becomes smaller until the title characters are displayed at a reduced size where all of the characters are visible, which allows the player to focus their attention on the title characters.

Also, before the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance starts, the movable body 32 is operated so as to overlap with the front side of the image display device 5, and a background dedicated to the falling performance is displayed during the period in which the falling performance is executed from when the movable body 32 operates until the movable body 32 returns to its initial position, and when the movable body 32 returns to its initial position, the title characters are displayed in an enlarged size in which not all of the characters that make up the title characters are visible and the display area is filled so that the background becomes unvisible, and then the reduced-sized title characters and a background dedicated to the title display are displayed. In this way, the title characters are displayed in an impactful way, while at the same time the background can be switched without any sense of incongruity, allowing the title characters to be viewed favorably by the player.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, attacca lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the high base reach A-D performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (common title for high base reach systems), and in the introduction part of the high base reach A-D performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D). In this way, in the title display part of the high base reach A to D performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

In addition, in the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part and the introduction part using one brightness data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and the introduction part. However, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance (strongest reach type strongest reach title)), and in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance (strongest reach type strongest reach introduction)). With such a configuration, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 8]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute the low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach A to D performance. The low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach A to D performance are configured to include both a title display part in which the corresponding title characters are displayed and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. The title display of the low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach A to D performance is configured with multiple characters ("Catch the explosive chu with six people!", "Battle reach A (Battle reach B to D"). In the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach A to D performance, the multiple characters are enlarged from the state in which the multiple characters are displayed, thereby ending the title display part and displaying the background at the start of the introduction part. In this way, the player pays attention to the title characters in the title display part, and the title characters can be suitably used to switch to the background corresponding to the next introduction part without any awkwardness.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, attacca lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the high base reach A-D performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (common title for high base reach systems), and in the introduction part of the high base reach A-D performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D). In this way, in the title display part of the high base reach A to D performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

In addition, in the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part and the introduction part using one brightness data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and the introduction part. However, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance (strongest reach type strongest reach title)), and in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance (strongest reach type strongest reach introduction)). With such a configuration, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 9]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A, B performance, and low base strong reach A to C performance. The low base weak reach A, B performance, and low base strong reach A to C performance are each composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. Also, unlike the execution time (T1-1 to 2) of the title display part in the low base weak reach A, B performance and the execution time (T2-1 to 3) of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance, each title display part is composed of a title start period from when the title character starts to be displayed to when it is displayed at a fixed position, a title display period that is displayed at a fixed position, and a title end period from when the title character is displayed at the fixed position to when it is displayed at the end. And, in the title display part in the low base weak reach A, B performance, and in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance, the title character is displayed so that the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is longer than the title end period. In this way, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low base weak reach A, B performance and the low base strong reach A to C performance, the title display period displayed at the fixed position is made the longest, so that attention can be drawn to the type of title characters. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low base weak reach A, B performance and the low base strong reach A to C performance, the title start period until the title is displayed at the fixed position is made longer than the title end period from the display of the fixed position to the end of the display, so that it is possible to arouse interest in which title characters will be displayed. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low base weak reach A, B performance and the low base strong reach A to C performance, the title display part can be made easier to understand by making the relationship of the execution times of the title start period, title display period, and title end period common.

[Effect 10]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the super reach performance in both the normal state and the probability variable state, which is more advantageous than the normal state. The super reach performance in the normal state and the probability variable state are both configured to include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. Also, the execution time (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) of the title display part in the super reach performance in the normal state is different from the execution time (T4) of the title display part in the super reach performance in the probability variable state, and both title display parts are configured to include a title start period from when the title characters start to be displayed to when they are displayed at a fixed position, a title display period that is displayed at a fixed position, and a title end period from when the title characters are displayed at the fixed position to when they end being displayed. And, in the title display part in the super reach performance in the normal state and in the title display part in the super reach performance in the probability variable state, the title characters are displayed so that the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is longer than the title end period. In this way, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the probability variable state, the title display period displayed at the fixed position is made the longest, so that the type of title character can be drawn to attention. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the probability variable state, the title start period until the title is displayed at the fixed position is made longer than the title end period from the display at the fixed position to the end of the display, so that it is possible to incite which title character is to be displayed. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the probability variable state, the title display part can be made easier to understand by making the execution time relationship between the title start period, the title display period, and the title end period common.

In addition, the execution time (T4) of the title display part of the Super Reach performance in the special probability state is shorter than the execution time (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) of the title display part of the Super Reach performance in the normal state. Since the execution time of the title display part in the Super Reach performance executed in the special probability state is relatively short, gameplay in the special probability state can be played at a good tempo, while the execution time of the title display part in the Super Reach performance executed in the normal state is relatively long, so it can be thoroughly hyped up.

In addition, the Super Reach performance executed in the probability variable state, regardless of the type, has a higher probability of winning than the low base weak reach A and B performances, which have a lower probability of winning among the Super Reach performances executed in the normal state, and even if the execution time of the title display part in the Super Reach performance executed in the probability variable state is relatively short, the mere execution of the Super Reach performance can give the player hope of winning a jackpot.

In addition, the execution time of the Super Reach effect and the execution time of the title display part are the same for all types of Super Reach effects executed in the special probability state, but among the Super Reach effects executed in the normal state, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than that of the low base weak Reach A and B effects, which have a lower expectation of a jackpot, and even though the execution time of the Super Reach effect and the execution time of the title display part are the same regardless of the type of Super Reach effect executed in the special probability state, the execution of the Super Reach effect alone can give the player hope of a jackpot.

In addition, among the super reach effects executed in the normal state, the execution time of the title display part in the low base strong reach A-C effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B effects, is set to be longer than the execution time of the title display part in the low base weak reach AB effect, and the execution time of the title display part in the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A-C effects, is set to be longer than the execution time of the title display part in the low base strong reach A-C effects. By doing this, in the normal state, the execution time of the title display part is longer for super reach effects with a higher jackpot expectation, so it can be effectively excited.

In addition, among the super reach effects executed in the normal state, the execution time of the title display period in which the title characters are displayed in a fixed position in the low base strong reach A-C effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B effects, is set to be longer than the execution time of the title display period in the low base weak reach AB effects, and the execution time of the title display period in the low base strongest reach effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A-C effects, is set to be longer than the execution time of the title display period in the low base strong reach A-C effects. By doing this, in the normal state, the higher the jackpot expectation of the super reach effect, the longer the execution time of the title display period in which the title characters are displayed in a fixed position, so it can be more exciting.

[Effect 11]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes both a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. The title display part includes a title start period from when the title character starts to be displayed at the fixed position until it is displayed at the fixed position, a title display period that is displayed at the fixed position, and a title end period from when the title character is displayed at the fixed position until it is ended. In the title display part, the title character is displayed so that the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is longer than the title end period. In this way, the title display period displayed at the fixed position is made the longest, so that attention can be drawn to the type of title character. In addition, by making the title start period until it is displayed at the fixed position longer than the title end period from when the title character is displayed at the fixed position until it is ended, it is possible to incite which title character is to be displayed. In addition, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the probability change state, the title display part can be made easier to understand by making the relationship between the execution times of the title start period, the title display period, and the title end period common.

[Effect 12]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strong reach A to C performance and the low base strongest reach performance. The low base strong reach A to C performance and the low base strongest reach performance are configured to include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-43, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance and the low base strong reach A to C performance, it is possible to display the title character in a white form and a red form that has a higher jackpot expectation than the white form. Then, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance and the low base strong reach A to C performance, the corresponding expectation indication is displayed, and then the title character is displayed in a size larger than the expectation indication. In this case, in both cases of displaying the title character in a white form and displaying it in a red form, the expectation indication is displayed in a common form. In this way, the title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects are larger in size than the expectation suggestion display, and the expectation is suggested by its appearance, so that it attracts the attention of the player, but by displaying the expectation suggestion display before the title characters, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the expectation suggestion first. Also, whether the title characters are displayed in white or red, the expectation suggestion display is performed in a common manner, so that the player can be drawn to the appearance of the subsequent title characters.

[Effect 13]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strong reach B performance and the low base strong reach C performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach B performance. The low base strong reach B and C performances are composed of both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the first mode (3.5 stars) in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, and the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the second mode (4 stars) in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance. At this time, the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance and the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance are highlighted in a common manner. By doing this, development costs can be reduced by making the highlighting a common mode whether the expectation level indication is displayed in a first manner in the title display part of a low base strong reach B performance, or whether the expectation level indication is displayed in a second manner in the title display part of a low base strong reach C performance.

The expectation indication display is composed of multiple star-shaped objects, and in the low base strong reach B performance, the expectation is indicated by N (N is an integer) + 0.5 (3.5) objects, and in the low base strong reach C performance, the expectation is indicated by N + 1 (4) objects, and each star-shaped object is highlighted, and the highlighting is done in a common manner whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted. In this way, the highlighting is done in a common manner whether one star-shaped object is highlighted or 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted, thereby reducing development costs.

In addition, in the expectation suggestion display, the time when one star-shaped object is highlighted and the time when 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted are the same. By doing this, the time when one star-shaped object is highlighted and the time when 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted are the same, which can reduce development costs.

In addition, in the expectation indication display, a common expectation indication sound is output whether a single star-shaped object is highlighted or a 0.5 star-shaped object is highlighted. In this way, a common expectation indication sound is output whether a single star-shaped object is highlighted or a 0.5 star-shaped object is highlighted, thereby reducing development costs.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacker lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the low base strong reach B and C performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (strong base common title), and in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B and C performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data table for each introduction part (strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B and C performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

In the low base strong reach B and C performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common brightness data table (strong base common title) in the title display part, but in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display in the low base strong reach B performance (brightness data table (strong reach strong reach B title) composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance). The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a brightness data table (a brightness data table (strong reach series strong reach C title) composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance). With such a configuration, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using different brightness data tables for title display for the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance and the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed appropriately.

[Effect 14]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strong reach A to C performances, the low base strongest reach performance, and the high base reach A to D performances. The low base strong reach A to C performances, the low base strongest reach performance, and the high base reach A to D performances are configured to include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performances, the low base strongest reach performance, and the high base reach A to D performances can display an expectation suggestion display composed of multiple star-shaped objects. Then, in the expectation suggestion display, the first star-shaped object is highlighted, and then, while continuing the highlighting of the first star-shaped object, the second star-shaped object is highlighted, and then, the highlighting of the first star-shaped object is ended, and the third star-shaped object is highlighted. By doing this, in the expectation indication display, highlighting of the second star-shaped object begins before highlighting of the first star-shaped object ends, but highlighting of the third star-shaped object does not begin until highlighting of the first star-shaped object ends, making it easier to recognize the number of objects suggesting the expectation of a jackpot.

In addition, in the expectation indication display, an expectation indication sound is output each time a star-shaped object is highlighted, and after the output of the expectation indication sound for the highlighting of one star-shaped object has finished, an expectation indication sound for the highlighting of the next object is output. In this way, the emphasis sound for the highlighting of one object and the emphasis sound for the highlighting of the next object do not overlap, making it easier to recognize the number of objects indicating the expectation.

The expectation level suggestion display is composed of multiple star-shaped objects and the text "expectation level" indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation level, and the star-shaped objects are highlighted in a size that overlaps with the text "expectation level." In this way, highlighting the star-shaped objects draws attention to both the multiple star-shaped objects that make up the expectation level suggestion display and the text indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation level.

In this embodiment, when some of the multiple star-shaped objects are highlighted, the highlighting of the star-shaped objects is superimposed on text indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the degree of expectation. However, for all star-shaped objects, the highlighting of the star-shaped objects may be superimposed on text indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the degree of expectation.

[Effect 15]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strong reach A to C performance, the low base strongest reach performance, and the high base reach A to D performance. The low base strong reach A to C performance, the low base strongest reach performance, and the high base reach A to D performance are configured to include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, it is possible to display multiple pending displays corresponding to variable displays that have not yet started, and it is possible to display an expectation suggestion display composed of multiple star-shaped objects in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performance, the low base strongest reach performance, and the high base reach A to D performance. And, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performance, the low base strongest reach performance, and the high base reach A to D performance, the pending display is not displayed simultaneously with the expectation suggestion display. By doing this, an expectation indication display consisting of a plurality of objects is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, the low base strongest reach performances, and the high base reach A to D performances, while the hold display is not displayed simultaneously with the expectation indication display, thereby preventing the hold display from being mistakenly recognized as the expectation indication display.

In particular, the maximum number of pending displays and active displays corresponding to the variable displays that have been started will match the maximum number of star-shaped objects that make up the expectation indication display, but even if a low base strong reach A-C performance, a low base strongest reach performance, or a high base reach A-D performance is executed when the maximum number of pending displays and active displays are displayed, it is possible to prevent the pending displays and active displays from being mistakenly recognized as the maximum number of star-shaped objects that make up the expectation indication display.

In addition, by erasing the hold display when a monochrome display effect is executed in which the display area is displayed in monochrome before the start of the title display part, the hold display can be ended without any awkwardness.

In addition, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacker lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the low base strong reach A-C performance and the high base reach A-D performance, the CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacker lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. In the title display part of the low base strong reach A-C performance and the high base reach A-D performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of strong reach A of the strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of the strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of the strong reach system, introduction of high base reach A of the reach system, introduction of high base reach B of the reach system, introduction of high base reach C of the reach system, introduction of high base reach D of the reach system). In this way, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A-C performance and the high base reach A-D performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

In addition, in the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part and the introduction part using one brightness data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and the introduction part. However, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance (strongest reach type strongest reach title)), and in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance (strongest reach type strongest reach introduction)). With such a configuration, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 16]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach A to C performances and high base reach A to C performances. The low base strong reach A to C performances and high base reach A to C performances are configured to include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance, it is possible to display an expectation suggestion display composed of a first number (3) of star-shaped objects, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance, it is possible to display an expectation suggestion display composed of a second number (3.5) of star-shaped objects that is greater than the first number, in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance, it is possible to display an expectation suggestion display composed of a third number (4) of star-shaped objects that is greater than the second number. The difference between the first number (3) and the second number (3.5) is the same (0.5) as the difference between the second number (3.5) and the third number (4), and the difference between the expectation of a jackpot when a low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed and the expectation of a jackpot when a low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed is greater than the difference between the expectation of a jackpot when a low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed and the expectation of a jackpot when a low base strong reach A effect/high base reach A effect corresponding to the first number (3). By doing this, when the number of star-shaped objects displayed as an expectation indication display in the title display part increases from the first number (3) to the second number (3.5) and when it increases from the second number (3.5) to the third number (4), the increase in the number of star-shaped objects is the same as when it increases from the second number (3.5) to the third number (4). However, the increase in the expectation of a jackpot is greater when it increases from the second number (3.5) to the third number (4) than when it increases from the first number (3) to the second number (3.5). Therefore, as the number of star-shaped objects increases, the player can expect a jackpot that is greater than the number of increased star-shaped objects, while not being overly led to expect a jackpot when the number of star-shaped objects is small.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance, and can display an expectation indication display consisting of a fourth number (4.5) star-shaped object that is greater than the third number (4) in the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance, and the difference in numbers (0.5) between the third number (4) and the fourth number (4.5) is smaller than the difference in numbers (1) between the first number (3) and the third number (4), and the low base corresponding to the fourth number (4.5) can be displayed. The difference between the probability of a jackpot when a low base strong reach C performance/high base reach D performance corresponding to the third number (4) is executed and the probability of a jackpot when a low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance corresponding to the third number (4) is executed is greater than the difference between the probability of a jackpot when a low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance corresponding to the third number (4) is executed and the probability of a jackpot when a low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance corresponding to the first number (3) is executed. By doing this, the increase in the number of star-shaped objects displayed as the expectation indication in the title display part is smaller when the number of star-shaped objects increases from the third number (4) to the fourth number (4.5) than when it increases from the first number (3) to the third number (4), but the increase in the expectation of a jackpot is greater when it increases from the third number (4) to the fourth number (4.5) than when it increases from the first number (3) to the third number (4). Therefore, the more the number of star-shaped objects increases, the more the player can expect a jackpot even if the number of increased star-shaped objects is small.

In addition, the difference between the third number (4) and the fourth number (4.5) is 0.5, and the difference between the first number (3) and the third number (4) is 1, so it is more likely to be a jackpot when the number of star-shaped objects displayed as an expectation indication in the title display part increases by 0.5 from the third number (4) to the fourth number (4.5) than when the number increases by 1 from the first number (3) to the third number (4).

In addition, the difference between the probability of a jackpot when a high base reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed in a probability variable state that is more favorable than the normal state and the probability of a jackpot when a high base reach B effect corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed is greater than the difference between the probability of a jackpot when a low base strong reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed in the normal state and the probability of a jackpot when a low base strong reach B effect corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed. In this way, it can be expected that a jackpot will occur when the number of star-shaped objects displayed as the probability suggestion display in the title display part increases in a probability variable state that is more favorable than the normal state.

[Effect 17]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach A to C performances that have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base weak reach A and B performances under normal conditions. The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances are each composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. The title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances has a longer execution time than the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, and while the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances. By doing this, the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, which have a relatively high level of expectation, is longer than the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, which have a relatively low level of expectation, and while an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, an expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, so that the player can intuitively recognize that the low base strong reach A to C performances have a higher level of expectation than the low base weak reach A and B performances.

In addition, the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance consists of a prologue display period and a title character display period in which the title characters are displayed (title start period, title display period, title end period), while the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performance does not have a prologue display period and is composed only of the title character display period, and the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performance. By doing this, since the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performance, it can be recognized by experience that the low base strong reach A to C performance has a higher expectation than the low base weak reach A and B performance.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a low base strongest reach performance that has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A to C performances in the normal state, and the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances is composed of a prologue display period and a title character display period in which the title characters are displayed (title start period, title display period, title end period), and the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance does not have a prologue display period and is composed only of the title character display period, and the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance. By doing this, the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance, so that the user can physically recognize that the low base strongest reach performance has a higher expectation than the low base strong reach A to C performance.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, attacca lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A, B performances and the low base strong reach A-C performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for each title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title), and in the introduction parts of the low base weak reach A, B performances and the low base strong reach A-C performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for each introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). In this way, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

[Effect 18]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach A to C performances that have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base weak reach A and B performances in a normal state. The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances are configured to include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, in the low base weak reach A and B performances, there are cases where a jackpot is notified as a performance result, and cases where a miss is notified as a performance result, and cases where it develops into another super reach performance, and in the low base strong reach A to C performances, there are cases where a jackpot is notified as a performance result, and cases where a miss is notified as a performance result. And, while an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, an expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances. By doing this, an expectation indication display is displayed in the title display part in low base strong reach A to C performances, which may directly notify the player that a jackpot will occur, while an expectation indication display is not displayed in the title display part in low base weak reach A and B performances, which do not directly notify the player that a jackpot will occur, thereby preventing the player from having excessive expectations due to the low base weak reach A and B performances.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, it is possible to display the title text in a golden form, which confirms that the performance will develop into another super reach performance, so it is possible to draw the player's attention even in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, where the expectation indication display is not displayed.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, attacca lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A, B performances and the low base strong reach A-C performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for each title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title), and in the introduction parts of the low base weak reach A, B performances and the low base strong reach A-C performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for each introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). In this way, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

[Effect 19]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach A to C performances and low base strongest reach. The low base strong reach A to C performances and low base strongest reach are configured to include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, the low base strong reach A to C performances and low base strongest reach may be executed via a selection performance using title characters corresponding to a plurality of super reach performances, and it is possible to display an expectation degree suggestion display together with the title characters in the title display part and selection performance of the low base strong reach A to C performances and low base strongest reach. Then, when displaying the expectation degree suggestion display in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performances and low base strongest reach, an expectation degree suggestion display composed of a plurality of star-shaped objects is displayed in stages, and when displaying the expectation degree suggestion display in the selection performance, an expectation degree suggestion display composed of a plurality of star-shaped objects is not displayed in stages. By doing this, when the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performances and the low base strongest reach, the expectation suggestion display made up of a plurality of star-shaped objects is displayed in stages, whereas when the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the selection performance, the expectation suggestion display made up of a plurality of star-shaped objects is not displayed in stages, thereby eliminating the annoyance caused by the expectation suggestion display being displayed in stages not only in the title display part but also in the selection performance preceding it.

The selection effect changes stepwise from a Super Reach effect with a low probability of winning to a Super Reach effect with a high probability of winning by operating push button 31B, and the time required for one step in the selection effect, i.e., the minimum time required to switch to the title image of the next Super Reach effect, may be shorter than the time required for one step in the indication of the probability of winning of the title display part of the Low Base Strong Reach A-C effects and the Low Base Strongest Reach, i.e., the time it takes for the star-shaped object to change from black to highlighted and then to gold, giving a sense of speed to the gradual change in the selection effect.

The selection effect changes step by step from the current Super Reach effect to a Super Reach effect with one step higher chance of winning, and the number of times the push button 31B needs to be operated to change to the next effect increases with each step. This makes it more likely that the player will be impatient as the chance of winning the Super Reach effect increases.

In addition, if the low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach is selected through the selection effect, the title display part of that super reach effect will start. By doing this, even if the low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach is executed via the selection effect, the title display part will start, making it easier for the player to determine which super reach effect was ultimately executed.

[Effect 20]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, after the super reach performance notifies that a jackpot will be won, the title character corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. The title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed in a manner with a larger movement than the title character of the super reach performance. In this way, the situation in which the title character is displayed in the super reach performance is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will be won, whereas the situation in which the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed is a situation after it has already been notified that a jackpot will be won, and it is possible to celebrate the fact that the jackpot game state is controlled by moving the title character of the jackpot start performance more greatly.

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a stationary state in the title display part of the Super Reach performance, but the title characters may be displayed in a moving manner in the title display part of the Super Reach performance. Even in such a configuration, the title characters of the jackpot start performance can be displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title characters of the Super Reach performance, allowing you to celebrate being controlled into a jackpot game state.

In addition, in the title display part of the Super Reach performance, when the title characters are displayed, a background dedicated to the title display is displayed (Low base strong reach B, C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A-D), and the background of the title characters in the jackpot start performance is displayed in a manner with greater movement than the background dedicated to the title display in the Super Reach performance. By doing this, the background of the title characters in the jackpot start performance can also be moved more greatly, allowing you to celebrate the fact that you have been controlled into a jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, the background dedicated to the title display in the Super Reach performance is a still image, but the background dedicated to the title display in the Super Reach performance may also be a moving image, and even in this configuration, the background of the title characters in the jackpot start performance is displayed in a manner with more movement than the background dedicated to the title display in the Super Reach performance, so that it is possible to celebrate the control of the jackpot game state.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, uses a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 21]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, in the operation prompting performances B and D in the introduction part of the super reach performance, it is possible to display operation prompting characters (small) that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. At this time, the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed in a manner that moves more than the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance. In this way, the operation prompting characters (small) displayed in the introduction part prompt the player to perform an action (operation), and by moving them more than the title characters displayed in the title display part, it is possible to intuitively prompt the player to perform an action (operation).

In addition, in operation prompting effects B and D in the introductory part of the super reach effect, it is possible to display operation prompting characters (large) that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B and suggest a more favorable situation than the operation prompting characters (small), and both the operation prompting characters (small) and the operation prompting characters (large) are displayed in a manner that causes greater movement than the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect. In this way, whether the operation prompting characters (small) or (large) are moved more than the title characters displayed in the title display part, it is possible to intuitively prompt the player to take action (operate).

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a stationary state in the title display part of the Super Reach performance, but the title characters may be displayed in a moving manner in the title display part of the Super Reach performance. Even in this configuration, the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title characters of the Super Reach performance, thereby intuitively encouraging the player to take action (operate). Also, even in this configuration, both the operation prompting characters (small) and the operation prompting characters (large) are displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach performance, and whether the operation prompting characters (small) or (large) are moved more than the title characters displayed in the title display part, intuitively encouraging the player to take action (operate).

In addition, the number of characters (3) of the operation prompt characters (small) is less than the number of characters (7-13) of the title characters of the Super Reach performance, so the content of the characters can be recognized even if the operation prompt characters (small) are moved a lot.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, uses a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 22]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach performance. The super reach performance is composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introductory part until the performance result is announced. Also, in the title display part of the super reach performance, explanatory characters that explain the contents of the super reach performance can be displayed. At this time, the explanatory characters are displayed in a manner that has greater movement than the title characters that correspond to the super reach performance. In this way, the additionally displayed explanatory characters are displayed in a manner that has greater movement than the title characters, so that attention can be drawn to the fact that explanatory characters have been added in addition to the title characters.

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a stationary state in the title display part of the super reach performance, but the title characters may be displayed in a moving manner in the title display part of the super reach performance. Even in such a configuration, the explanatory characters are displayed in a manner that has more movement than the title characters of the super reach performance, so that attention can be drawn to the fact that explanatory characters have been added in addition to the title characters.

In addition, the explanatory text suggests that the Super Reach performance is advantageous, so the presence of the explanatory text draws even more attention.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, uses a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 23]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strong reach A to C performances that have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. The title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C performances are displayed in a larger character size than the title title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances. By doing this, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C performances with a relatively high expectation are displayed in a larger character size than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances with a relatively low expectation, so that even just the title characters can be recognized by the user that the low base strong reach A to C performances have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B performances.

In addition, the number of characters (10) that make up the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B effects is greater than the number of characters (7, 8) that make up the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach B, C effects, but the display area size of the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach B, C effects is larger than the display area size of the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B effects. By doing this, the display area size occupied by one character is larger for the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach B, C effects, so that the player can intuitively recognize that the low base strong reach B, C effects have a higher chance of winning than the low base weak reach A, B effects.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, attacca lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A, B performances and the low base strong reach A-C performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for each title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title), and in the introduction parts of the low base weak reach A, B performances and the low base strong reach A-C performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for each introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). In this way, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

[Effect 24]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes a reach state. The super reach performance is composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, a decorative pattern (large) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the super reach performance, and then the decorative pattern (large) displayed in the reach state is reduced to a small decorative pattern (small). At this time, at least one character of the title character corresponding to the super reach performance is displayed in a size larger than the decorative pattern (small). In this way, at least one character of the title character corresponding to the super reach performance is displayed in a size larger than the reduced decorative pattern (small), so that the title character can be focused on in the title display part.

In addition, all characters of the title letters corresponding to the Super Reach performance are displayed smaller than the decorative pattern (large) and larger than the decorative pattern (small). By doing this, the decorative pattern (large) can be clearly recognized when the Reach state is reached, and thereafter, the decorative pattern (large) is reduced to a decorative pattern (small), and each character that makes up the title letters is displayed larger than the decorative pattern (small), so that attention can be drawn to the title letters in the title display part.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, uses a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 25]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, in the operation prompting performances B and D in the introduction part of the super reach performance, an operation prompting character (small) that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B can be displayed. In addition, after the fact that a jackpot will be won is notified by the super reach performance, a title character corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. Then, the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed larger than the operation prompting character (small). In this way, the situation in which the operation prompting character (small) is displayed in the super reach performance is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will be won, whereas the situation in which the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed is a situation after it has already been notified that a jackpot will be won, and it is possible to celebrate the control to the jackpot game state by displaying the title character of the jackpot start performance larger than the operation prompting character (small).

The title characters of the jackpot start performance are composed of "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS", and after "BIG" or "REGULAR" is displayed at the top of the fixed position, "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, and after "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, "BIG" or "REGULAR" displayed at the top of the fixed position and "BONUS" displayed at the bottom of the fixed position are gradually enlarged. Furthermore, "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS" are displayed at their smallest size when displayed at the top and bottom of the fixed position, and the size of the characters when "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS" are displayed at the top and bottom of the fixed position is larger than the size of the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small). By doing this, the characters that make up the title characters for the jackpot start performance are always displayed larger than the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small), making it even more congratulatory to be in control of the jackpot game state.

In addition, the smallest character in the string of characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start performance is larger than the largest character in the string of characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small). By doing this, no matter which character you focus on, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed larger than the operation prompt characters (small), so you can be more congratulated on being controlled into the jackpot game state.

It is also possible to display special prompting characters (large) that suggest a more favorable situation than the small prompting characters, and the large prompting characters are displayed larger than the title characters of the jackpot start performance, allowing the player to sense the favorable situation.

In addition, the smallest character in the string of characters that make up the operation prompt character (large) is displayed larger than the largest character in the string of characters that make up the title character of the jackpot start performance, so that no matter which character the player focuses on, the operation prompt character (large) is displayed larger than the title character of the jackpot start performance, allowing the player to sense the advantageous situation.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, uses a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 26]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, after the super reach performance notifies that a jackpot will be won, the title character corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. Then, the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed larger than the title character corresponding to the super reach performance. In this way, the situation in which the title character is displayed in the super reach performance is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will be won, whereas the situation in which the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed is a situation after it has already been notified that a jackpot will be won, and it is possible to celebrate the control of the jackpot game state by displaying the title character of the jackpot start performance larger than the title character corresponding to the super reach performance.

The Super Reach performance also includes multiple types of Super Reach performance with different title characters, and the title characters of the performance that starts the jackpot are displayed larger than the title characters that correspond to any of the types of Super Reach performance, thereby celebrating the fact that the player has been controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, the smallest character in the string of characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start performance is displayed larger than the largest character in the string of characters that make up the title characters corresponding to any type of super reach performance, so no matter which character you focus on, the title characters of the jackpot start performance will be displayed larger than the title characters that correspond to the super reach performance, so you can celebrate being controlled into a jackpot gaming state even more.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, uses a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 27]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, in the operation prompting performance A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, it is possible to display operation prompting characters (small) that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Then, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances are displayed larger than the operation prompting characters (small). In this way, the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title characters displayed thereafter are displayed larger than the operation prompting characters (small), so that the player can pay attention to the title characters.

In addition, after the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed, the game progresses to the low base weak reach A and B performance, and the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performance begins. By doing this, the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed before the title display part in the series of events, and the title characters that are displayed afterwards are displayed larger than the operation prompting characters (small), drawing attention to the title characters.

In addition, the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects) is displayed larger than the largest character among the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small), so no matter which character you focus on, you can draw attention to the title characters.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacker lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title), and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach introduction weak reach A, weak reach introduction weak reach B). In this way, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 28]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, in the operation prompting performance A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, it is possible to display an operation prompting character (small) that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B. In addition, after the low base weak reach A and B performances notify that a jackpot will be generated, it is possible to display the title character of the jackpot start performance corresponding to the controlled jackpot game state. Then, the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed larger than the title character corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances, and the title character corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances is displayed larger than the operation prompting character (small). By doing this, the situation where the title characters are displayed in the low base weak reach A and B performances is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will occur, whereas the situation where the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot will occur, and by displaying the title characters of the jackpot start performance larger than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances, it is possible to celebrate the control of the jackpot game state. Also, by displaying the operation prompt characters (small) before the title display part, and displaying the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances displayed afterwards larger than the operation prompt characters (small), it is possible to draw attention to the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances.

In addition, after the operation prompt character (small) is displayed, it progresses to the low base weak reach A, B performance, the title display part in the low base weak reach A, B performance starts, and after the low base weak reach A, B performance notifies the player that a jackpot will occur, the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed. In this way, the operation prompt character (small) is displayed before the title display part in the series of events, and the title character corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B performance that is displayed afterwards is displayed larger than the operation prompt character (small), so that attention can be drawn to the title character corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B performance, and after the low base weak reach A, B performance notifies the player that a jackpot will occur, the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed larger than the title character corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B performance, so that the player can celebrate being controlled to a jackpot game state.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacker lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title), and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach introduction weak reach A, weak reach introduction weak reach B). In this way, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 29]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, after the super reach performance notifies that a jackpot will be won, the title character corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. The title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed for a longer time than the title character corresponding to the super reach performance. In this way, the situation in which the title character is displayed in the super reach performance is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will be won, whereas the situation in which the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed is a situation after it has already been notified that a jackpot will be won, and it is possible to celebrate the control of the jackpot game state by displaying the title character of the jackpot start performance for a longer time than the title character corresponding to the super reach performance.

In addition, the time from when all of the characters constituting the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed until at least a part of the characters are no longer displayed is longer than the time from when a part of the characters constituting the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance is displayed until all of the characters are no longer displayed. By doing this, the time during which the title characters of the jackpot start performance, which has a congratulatory meaning, are clearly visible is made longer than the time during which the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance, which is intended to increase the possibility of a jackpot, are displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, after the title letters of the jackpot start performance are displayed, the title letters of the jackpot start performance are switched to a right hit promotion image (small) and a right hit promotion image (large) which suggest the operation method during the jackpot game state, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since they switched to the right hit promotion image (small) and right hit promotion image (large), advantageous control is exercised by operating using the operation method suggested by the right hit promotion image (small) and right hit promotion image (large) (an operation method for shooting the game ball towards the right game area 2R), and the time taken to switch from the title letters of the jackpot start performance to the right hit promotion image (small) and right hit promotion image (large) is shorter than the time taken to end the title letters corresponding to the super reach performance. By doing this, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are switched to the right hit prompt image (small) and right hit prompt image (large) in a short time, and then after a specified period of time has passed, control is performed that gives an advantage to the player by operating in the manner suggested by the right hit prompt image (small) and right hit prompt image (large), preventing the player from being disadvantaged by changing the operating method from the period when the title characters of the jackpot start performance ends.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, uses a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 30]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, in the operation prompting performances B and D in the introduction part of the super reach performance, an operation prompting character (small) that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B can be displayed. In addition, after the fact that a jackpot will be won is notified by the super reach performance, a title character corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. Then, the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed for a longer time than the operation prompting character (small). In this way, the situation in which the operation prompting character (small) is displayed in the super reach performance is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will be won, whereas the situation in which the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed is a situation after it has already been notified that a jackpot will be won, and it is possible to celebrate the control to the jackpot game state by displaying the title character of the jackpot start performance for a longer time than the operation prompting character (small).

The operation prompting character (small) is displayed until the prompted operation is performed or the time during which the prompted operation is valid has elapsed, and the time during which the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed is longer than the time from when the operation prompting character (small) is displayed until the time during which the prompted operation is not performed and the time during which the prompted operation is valid has elapsed. By doing this, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the jackpot game state has been controlled by displaying the title character of the jackpot start performance for a longer period of time than the time during which the operation prompting character (small) is displayed without the prompted operation being performed.

In addition, the time from when all the characters constituting the title character of the jackpot start performance are displayed until at least a part of the character string disappears is longer than the time when the operation prompt character (small) is displayed. By doing this, the time during which the title character of the jackpot start performance, which has a congratulatory meaning, is clearly visible is longer than the time when the operation prompt character (small), which is intended to encourage the player to operate, is displayed, giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

It is also possible to display large operation prompting characters that suggest a more advantageous situation than small operation prompting characters, where small operation prompting characters are displayed without any prompting introduction effect, and large operation prompting characters are displayed after the prompting introduction effect has been executed. The time that the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed is longer than the time that large operation prompting characters are displayed. In this way, the time that the congratulatory advantageous state name display is displayed is longer than the time that large operation prompting characters accompanied by a prompt introduction display are displayed, giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, uses a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 31]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, in the operation prompting performance A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, it is possible to display an operation prompting character (small) that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B. Then, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances are displayed for a longer time than the operation prompting character (small). In this way, the operation prompting character (small) is displayed before the title display part, and the title characters displayed thereafter are displayed for a longer time than the operation prompting character (small), so that the player can pay attention to the title characters.

In addition, the time from when all the characters making up the title are displayed until at least a part of the characters disappears is longer than the time that the action prompt character (small) is displayed. By doing this, the time that the title display is clearly visible is longer than the time that the prompt character display, which is intended to encourage the player to take an action, is displayed, making it possible to draw attention to the title characters.

It is also possible to display operation prompting characters (large) which suggest a more favorable situation than operation prompting characters (small), with operation prompting characters (small) being displayed as characters encouraging an operation without an introductory prompt, and operation prompting characters (large) being displayed as characters encouraging an operation after an introductory prompt has been executed. The time period during which the title characters are displayed is longer than the time period during which the operation prompting characters (large) are displayed. In this way, the time period during which the title display is displayed is longer than the time period during which operation prompting characters (large) accompanied by an introductory prompt are displayed, drawing attention to the title characters.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacker lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title), and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach introduction weak reach A, weak reach introduction weak reach B). In this way, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 32]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B performances are configured to include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, in the operation prompting performance A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, an operation prompting character (small) that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B can be displayed. In addition, after the fact that a jackpot will be obtained is notified by the low base weak reach A and B performances, the title character of the jackpot start performance corresponding to the controlled jackpot game state can be displayed. Then, the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed for a longer time than the title character corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances, and the title character corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances is displayed for a longer time than the operation prompting character (small). By doing this, the situation in which the title characters are displayed in the low base weak reach A and B performances is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will occur, whereas the situation in which the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot will occur, and by displaying the title characters of the jackpot start performance for a longer period of time than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances, it is possible to celebrate the control of the jackpot game state. Also, by displaying the operation prompt characters (small) before the title display part, and displaying the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances displayed thereafter for a longer period of time than the operation prompt characters (small), it is possible to draw attention to the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacker lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title), and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach introduction weak reach A, weak reach introduction weak reach B). In this way, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 33]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A, B performance, and low base strong reach A to C performance in the normal state, and can execute high base reach A to D performance in the probability variable state that is more advantageous than the normal state. The low base weak reach A, B performance, low base strong reach A to C performance, and high base reach A to D performance in the probability variable state are configured to include a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, the low base strong reach A to C performance has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A, B performance, the high base reach B to D performance has a higher jackpot expectation than the high base reach A performance, and the high base reach A performance has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A, B performance. Then, the expectation degree suggestion display is displayed in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performances, the high base reach A performance, and the high base reach B to D performances, and the expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances. By doing this, since the low base weak reach A and B performances in the normal state have a lower jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A to C performances in the normal state, the expectation degree suggestion display is displayed in the low base strong reach A to C performances, but the expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed in the low base weak reach A and B performances, so that excessive expectations of a jackpot due to the low base weak reach A and B performances are not generated. On the other hand, although the high base reach A performance in a special probability state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, has a lower expectation of a jackpot than the high base reach B to D performance in the special probability state, it has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A and B performances in the normal state. Therefore, by displaying the expectation indication display in both the high base reach A performance and the high base reach B to D performance, it is possible to expect a jackpot in both the high base reach A performance and the high base reach B to D performance.

[Effect 34]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance both in the normal state and in a probability variable state that is more advantageous than the normal state. The super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the probability variable state are both configured to include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. The title display part of the super reach performance in the probability variable state is shorter than the title display part of the super reach performance in the normal state. In this way, the title display part of the super reach performance in the probability variable state is shorter than the title display part of the super reach performance in the normal state, and the game in the probability variable state can be played at a good tempo.

In addition, even if the frequency with which the Super Reach performance is executed during the special probability state is higher than the frequency with which the Super Reach performance is executed during the normal state, the title display part of the Super Reach performance during the special probability state is shorter than the title display part of the Super Reach performance during the normal state, allowing play in the special probability state to proceed at a good tempo.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attakka lamps LA1-LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the probability change state, it also uses the brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system common title, The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems) in the super reach performance in the normal state and in the introduction part of the super reach performance in the probability change state. In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 35]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a low base strongest reach performance that has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A to C performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances. The low base strong reach A to C performances and the low base strongest reach performance are configured to include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs 900 variable displays without being controlled by a jackpot in the normal state, it controls to a time-saving state B (play time) that is more advantageous than the normal state. In the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, the title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side of the display area to the center, and in the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance, the title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters are displayed reduced from an enlarged display, and when controlled to the time-saving state B (Yu-time), in the Yu-time start performance, the title characters of the Yu-time start performance are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters are displayed reduced from an enlarged display, similar to the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance. In this way, when controlled to the time-saving state B (Yu-time), in the Yu-time start performance, the title characters of the Yu-time start performance are displayed in the same display mode as the title characters of the low base strongest reach performance, which has a relatively high expectation of a jackpot, so that it can be recognized that the time-saving state B (Yu-time) is highly advantageous.

In addition, when the title characters are erased in the Yu-time start performance, they are erased in a display mode in which they are enlarged as they are erased, similar to when the title characters are erased in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance. By doing this, when the title characters are erased in the Yu-time start performance, they are erased in the same display mode as when the title characters are erased in the low-base strongest reach performance, which has a relatively high expectation of a jackpot, so that the time-saving state B (Yu-time) can be recognized as being highly advantageous.

[Effect 36]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs 900 variable displays without being controlled to a jackpot in the normal state, it controls to a time-saving state B (play time) that is more advantageous than the normal state. When controlled to the time-saving state B (play time), the title character of the play time start performance is displayed in the play time start performance, and the size of the characters constituting the title character of the play time start performance is larger than the size of the characters constituting the title character corresponding to the super reach performance. By doing this, the situation in which the title character is displayed in the super reach performance is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will be generated, while the title character of the play time start performance is a situation in which it is controlled to the time-saving state B (play time), and the characters constituting the title character of the play time start performance are displayed larger than the characters constituting the title character corresponding to the super reach performance, so it is possible to celebrate being controlled to the time-saving state B (play time).

The Super Reach performance also includes multiple types of Super Reach performance with different title characters, and the characters that make up the title characters of the Yu-Time start performance are larger than the characters that make up the title characters that correspond to any of the types of Super Reach performance. By doing this, the characters that make up the title characters of the Yu-Time start performance are displayed larger than the characters that make up the title characters that correspond to any of the types of Super Reach performance, so you can celebrate being controlled to time-saving state B (Yu-Time).

In addition, the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect is larger than the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters corresponding to any type of Super Reach effect. By doing this, no matter which character you focus on, the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect will be displayed larger than the title characters that correspond to the Super Reach effect, so you can celebrate being controlled to the time-saving state B (Yu-Time) even more.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, uses a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 37]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs 900 variable displays without being controlled to a jackpot in the normal state, it controls to a time-saving state B (play time) that is more advantageous than the normal state. When controlled to the time-saving state B (play time), the title character of the play time start performance is displayed in the play time start performance, and the display time of the title character of the play time start performance is longer than the display time of the title character corresponding to the super reach performance. By doing so, the situation in which the title character is displayed in the super reach performance is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will be generated, while the title character of the play time start performance is a situation in which it is controlled to the time-saving state B (play time), and the title character of the play time start performance is displayed longer than the title character corresponding to the super reach performance, so it is possible to celebrate being controlled to the time-saving state B (play time).

In addition, the time from when all the characters constituting the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect are displayed until at least a part of the characters are no longer displayed is longer than the time from when a part of the characters constituting the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach effect is displayed until all of the characters are no longer displayed. By doing this, the time during which the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect, which has a congratulatory meaning, are clearly visible is longer than the time during which the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach effect, which is intended to increase the possibility of a jackpot, are displayed, giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, uses a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 38]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, when 900 variable displays are performed in the normal state without being controlled by a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to a time-saving state B (play time) that is more advantageous than the normal state. In addition, in the normal state, it is possible to display the remaining number of times until the play time, which indicates the remaining number of times until the time-saving state B (play time). The size of the characters that constitute the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance is larger than the size of the characters that constitute the remaining number of times until the play time. In this way, the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance are displayed larger than the characters that constitute the remaining number of times until the play time, so that attention can be drawn to the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance.

The super reach effect includes low base weak reach A and B effects, and low base strong reach A to C effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than low base weak reach A and B effects, and the characters of the remaining number of times until Yu-time are displayed during the execution of low base weak reach A and B effects, but are not displayed during the execution of low base strong reach A to C effects. By doing this, the characters of the remaining number of times until Yu-time are displayed in low base weak reach A and B effects, which have a low jackpot expectation, so that the player can be aware of the number of times until time-saving state B (Yu-time), while in low base strong reach A to C effects, which have a high jackpot expectation, the characters of the remaining number of times until Yu-time are not displayed, so that the player can focus on the content of the effect. Also, since time-saving state B (Yu-time) is more likely to result in a jackpot that is more favorable than in the normal state, the player's disappointment can be alleviated when there are few remaining times until time-saving state B (Yu-time).

In addition, if the selection effect progresses to a low base strong reach A-C effect without going through the low base weak reach A or B effect, the remaining number of times until Yu-Time is not displayed even during the selection effect. This prevents the remaining number of times until Yu-Time from interfering with the selection effect that determines a super reach effect of low base strong reach A-C or higher, and also reduces the player's disappointment when there are only a few times remaining until the time-saving state B (Yu-Time).

In addition, when a jackpot is announced in the low base strong reach A-C performance, the character of the remaining number of times until the Yu-time is not displayed again, and the jackpot game state is controlled, and when a miss is announced in the low base strong reach A-C performance, the character of the remaining number of times until the Yu-time is displayed again after the end of the low base strong reach A-C performance. By doing this, when a jackpot is announced in the low base strong reach A-C performance, the character of the remaining number of times until the Yu-time is not displayed again, so that the disappointment of the player can be alleviated when there are few remaining times until the time-saving state B (Yu-time). In addition, when a miss is announced in the low base strong reach A-C performance, the character of the remaining number of times until the Yu-time is displayed again after the end of the low base strong reach A-C performance, so that the player can feel relieved as soon as possible when there are few remaining times until the time-saving state B (Yu-time).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, uses a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 39]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, when 900 variable displays are performed in the normal state without being controlled by a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game to a time-saving state B (play time) that is more advantageous than the normal state. In addition, in the operation prompting performances A to D that are executed at a timing related to the super reach performance, it is possible to display an operation prompting character (small) that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B. In addition, in the normal state, it is possible to display a character indicating the remaining number of times until the time-saving state B (play time) is controlled. And, the size of the character that constitutes the operation prompting character (small) is larger than the size of the character that constitutes the character indicating the remaining number of times until the play time. In this way, the operation prompting character (small) is displayed larger than the character that constitutes the character indicating the remaining number of times until the play time, so that it is possible to draw attention to the operation prompting character (small) and effectively prompt the player to perform an action (operation).

In addition, when executing the low base strong reach A-C performances among the super reach performances, if the operation prompt character (small) is displayed in the operation prompt performance A executed before the title display part, the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time is displayed at the same time, whereas if the operation prompt character (small) is displayed in the operation prompt performance D executed at the end of the introduction part, the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time is not displayed. By doing this, the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time is displayed at the same time as the prompt character display operation prompt character (small) before the development into the low base strong reach A-C performance, it is possible to make the player aware of the number of times until the time-saving state B (Yu-time), and by not displaying the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time in the operation prompt character (small) in the introduction part, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not a jackpot will be announced.

In addition, when the low base strong reach A-C effects are executed, in the operation prompting effect A executed before the title display part, only the operation prompting character (small) is displayed out of the operation prompting character (small) and the operation prompting character (large), which suggests a more favorable situation than the operation prompting character (small), while in the operation prompting effect D executed at the end of the introductory part, both the operation prompting character (small) and the operation prompting character (large) can be displayed, and when the operation prompting character (large) is displayed in the low base strong reach A-C effects, the character showing the number of times remaining until the play time is not displayed at the same time. By doing this, in addition to whether or not a jackpot will be announced, the operation prompting character (large) is displayed, drawing attention to the fact that a more favorable situation is suggested.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems, common title for strong reach systems), and in the introduction part of the super reach performance, controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in a suitable manner.

[Effect 40]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, when 900 variable displays are performed in the normal state without being controlled by a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to a time-saving state B (play time) that is more advantageous than the normal state. In addition, after a jackpot is notified by the super reach performance, the title character of the jackpot start performance corresponding to the controlled jackpot game state can be displayed. In addition, in the normal state, the remaining number of times until the play time, which indicates the remaining number of times until the time-saving state B (play time), can be displayed. Then, before displaying the title character of the jackpot start performance, the remaining number of times until the play time is erased, and the size of the characters constituting the title character of the jackpot start performance is larger than the size of the characters constituting the remaining number of times until the play time. By doing this, the situation in which the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed is one in which it has already been notified that a jackpot has occurred, and the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time are unnecessary, so the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time are erased before the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed, and the characters constituting the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed larger than the characters constituting the number of times remaining until Yu-time, so that the player can be congratulated for being controlled into the jackpot game state.

In addition, regardless of the number of remaining plays until time-saving state B (Yu-time), the size of the characters that make up the characters for the number of remaining plays until Yu-time is the same, and the size of the characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start performance is larger than the size of the characters that make up the characters for the number of remaining plays until Yu-time. By doing this, regardless of the number of remaining plays until time-saving state B (Yu-time), the characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed larger than the characters that make up the characters for the number of remaining plays until Yu-time, so you can celebrate being controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 performs the variable display using a time-saving B start variable pattern having a longer variable time than the variable pattern normally used in the time-saving state B (Yu-time) in the variable display caused by the game ball first entering the first start winning port or the second start winning port in the time-saving state B (Yu-time). By doing this, the Yu-time start presentation can be executed with a variable period according to the time-saving B start variable pattern in the first variation in the time-saving state B (Yu-time).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems, common title for strong reach systems), and in the introduction part of the super reach performance, controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in a suitable manner.

[Effect 41]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B performances are configured to include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, it is possible to change and display the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances from a white state to a red or gold state. Then, when the title characters are changed from a white state to a red or gold state in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the time during which the title characters are displayed in the red or gold state is longer than the time during which the title characters are displayed in the white state. In this way, when the title characters are changed from a white state to a red or gold state in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the title characters in the red or gold state, i.e., the title characters in the state after the change, are displayed longer than the title characters in the white state, i.e., the state before the change, so that it is possible to reliably recognize that the white state has been changed to red or gold.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the title characters may be changed from a white state to a red or gold state, or may remain in the white state. When the title characters are changed from a white state to a red or gold state, a specific sound is outputted when t1 time has elapsed since the start of the title display period, and when the title characters are not changed and remain in the white state, a specific sound is outputted without changing the white state when t1 time has elapsed since the start of the title display period. In this way, a specific sound is outputted when the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances change from a white state to a red or gold state at a specific timing, and a specific sound is also outputted when the title characters do not change and remain in the white state at a specific timing, so that it can be expected that the specific sound will cause the title characters to change to a red or gold state.

In addition, when the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects change from a white state to another state, a specific sound is output whether the character changes to a red state or a gold state, so that the output of the specific sound draws attention to the type of state the character changes to.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacker lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title), and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach introduction weak reach A, weak reach introduction weak reach B). In this way, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 42]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, it is possible to change and display the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances from a white state to a red state, or a gold state that suggests a higher probability of winning than the red state. And, in either case of changing the title characters from a white state to a red state or a gold state in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the characters are displayed so as to change from the white state to a common display state and then to the red state or the gold state. By doing this, whether the title characters are changed from a white form to a red form or from a white form to a gold form in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, they are changed to a common display form and then changed to the red form or the gold form. Therefore, by changing from the white form to the common display form, until the common display form changes to the red form or the gold form, the player can expect until the end that the display will change to the gold form, which has a higher probability of winning than the red form,

The common display mode is one in which the characters that make up the title text are illuminated, and when the light clears, they change to a red or gold color. By doing this, it is possible to encourage the characters that make up the title text to change to a red or gold color by illuminating them.

[Effect 43]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. The performance control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. The performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using a common brightness data table for the title display part (weak reach common title) in both the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance and the title display part of the low base weak reach B performance, controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for the low base weak reach A performance (weak reach weak reach A introduction) in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A performance, and controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for the low base weak reach B performance (weak reach weak reach B introduction) in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B performance. In this way, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is common for two different super reach performances, preventing an increase in cost and capacity, and the brightness data table corresponding to each of the introduction parts is the brightness data table corresponding to each of the introduction parts, so that the period until the notification of whether or not a jackpot will be obtained can be suitably aroused, and as a result, a suitable title display can be performed.

[Effect 44]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A, B performance and the low base strong reach A to C performance, which have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A, B performance. The low base weak reach A, B performance and the low base strong reach A to C performance each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. The presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using a common title display part brightness data table (weak reach type common title) in the title display part of the low base weak reach A presentation and in the title display part of the low base weak reach B presentation, controls the game effect lamp 9 using a common title display part brightness data table (strong reach type common title) in the title display part of the low base strong reach A presentation, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B presentation and in the title display part of the low base strong reach C presentation, and controls the game effect lamp 9 using a common title display part brightness data table (strong reach type common title) in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A presentation. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the low base weak reach B presentation (introduction of weak reach B of a weak reach system) and in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach A presentation (introduction of strong reach A of a strong reach system) and in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach B presentation (introduction of strong reach B of a strong reach system) and in the introduction part of the low base strong reach C presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach C presentation (introduction of strong reach C of a strong reach system). In this way, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is common for two types of super reach effects with high expectations and two types of super reach effects with low expectations, thereby preventing an increase in cost and capacity, and by using the corresponding brightness data table for each of the introductory parts, it is possible to appropriately stimulate the period until it is announced whether or not a jackpot has been hit, and as a result, an appropriate title display can be performed.

[Effect 45]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute the low base weak reach A, B performance, the low base strong reach A to C performance, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A, B performance, and the low base strongest reach performance, which has an even higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A to C performance. The low base weak reach A, B performance, the low base strong reach A to C performance, and the low base strongest reach performance each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. The presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for a common title display part (weak reach-type common title) in the title display part of the low base weak reach A presentation and in the title display part of the low base weak reach B presentation, controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for a common title display part (strong reach-type common title) in the title display part of the low base strong reach A presentation, controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for a common title display part (strong reach-type common title) in the title display part of the low base strong reach A presentation, controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for title display for the low base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach-type strongest reach title) in the title display part of the low base strongest reach presentation, and controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for low base weak reach A presentation (weak reach-type weak reach title) in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A presentation. In the introduction part of the low base weak reach B presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the low base weak reach B presentation (weak reach system weak reach B introduction), in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the low base strong reach A presentation (strong reach system strong reach A introduction), in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the low base strong reach B presentation (strong reach system strong reach B introduction), in the introduction part of the low base strong reach C presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the low base strong reach C presentation (strong reach system strong reach C introduction), and in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the low base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction). In this way, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is common for two types of super reach effects with high expectation and two types of super reach effects with low expectation, thereby preventing an increase in cost and capacity, and by using the brightness data table corresponding to each of the introduction parts, the period until the announcement of whether or not a jackpot will be won can be suitably excited, resulting in a suitable title display. Furthermore, the low-base strongest reach effect with the highest expectation is heightened in interest by providing dedicated brightness data tables for the title display part and introduction part, respectively, resulting in a suitable title display.

[Effect 46]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, it is possible to change and display the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances from a white state to a red state, or a gold state that suggests a higher probability of a jackpot than the red state. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. Then, when the color of the title letters is not changed in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using the brightness data table: weak reach system common title (white) in which brightness data is set for when a title change performance is not performed, and when the color of the title letters is changed to red or gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using the brightness data table: weak reach system common title (red) or weak reach system common title (gold) in which brightness data is set for when a title change performance is performed, and regardless of whether the color of the title letters is changed in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using the brightness data table for the common introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction). In this way, whether the title characters are not changed to red or gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances or are changed to the second form, the brightness data table corresponding to each introduction part is made common, preventing an increase in costs and capacity, and by using the corresponding brightness data table for each title display part, it is possible to appropriately present the title characters in either the case where the color is not changed or where the color is changed to red or gold, resulting in an appropriate title display.

[Effect 47]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. The performance control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. In addition, the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performance includes a title start period from when the title characters start to be displayed at the fixed position, and a title display period and a title end period after the title characters are displayed at the fixed position, and the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table (weak reach title start) that defines a light emission pattern specific to the title start period during the title start period of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performance, and controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table (weak reach title display) that defines a light emission pattern specific to the title display period and after during the title display period and title end period. In this way, by using the brightness data table corresponding to the title start period from when the title characters start to be displayed at the fixed position during the low base weak reach A and B performance, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display period and the title end period after the title characters are displayed at the fixed position, and the brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part, the period during which the title characters are displayed and the period until the notification of whether or not the advantageous state will be obtained can be suitably stimulated, and as a result, a suitable title display can be performed.

In addition, depending on whether it is a low base weak reach A presentation or a low base weak reach B presentation, a common brightness data table is used for either the brightness data table corresponding to the title start period or the brightness data table corresponding to the title display period and title end period, and a separate brightness data table with individual contents is set for the other.By using a common brightness data table for either the brightness data table corresponding to the title start period or the brightness data table corresponding to the title display period and title end period, it is possible to prevent an increase in costs and capacity, and by using a brightness data table corresponding to each of the other periods, it is possible to appropriately present whether it is a low base weak reach A presentation or a low base weak reach B presentation, and as a result, it is possible to display the title in an appropriate manner.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

In addition, it is conceivable that gaming machines with multiple game states can increase the efficiency of the number of changes in a specific game state by shortening the change display time or varying the time until the next change display begins. In this case, it is preferable to execute a suggestion effect that suggests which game state the game state is in, or a change time suggestion effect that suggests the change time to be executed. Specific control is explained below.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
12 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 12, to the right of the play area), a first special pattern display device 4A and a second special pattern display device 4B are provided which perform a variable display (also called a special pattern game) of special patterns (also called special patterns) as multiple types of special identification information. Each of these is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special patterns are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The special patterns may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various presentation images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 13). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 12, four positions are provided at the lower left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 13), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into a starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (to the left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 12). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the left of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A normal symbol pending display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal symbol pending memory count, which is the number of normal symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and gaming effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are provided around the periphery of the gaming area. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in Figure 12).

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 13).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 13).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special game is started by the second special pattern display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc., as described below), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that allow many prize balls to be obtained, and jackpot types that allow few or no prize balls to be obtained.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the Presentation, etc.) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various presentations (presentations to inform the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The presentations are described below. The presentations are executed by displaying various presentation images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the presentations may be executed by sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and/or by turning on/off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, etc.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed, which have different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a look-ahead preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a look-ahead preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in Fig. 13. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, a power supply board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1.

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 14 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on or not (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch in the on state, the output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the working area.

The CPU 103 also transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct initialization (step S9). When the presentation control CPU 120 receives the presentation control command, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the machine becomes unable to operate due to the power supply being stopped. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, etc. are executed. The data protection process includes the addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The backed up data includes various data for progressing the game (including various flags, the status of various timers, etc.), as well as the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, a parity bit or a checksum is used to determine whether the data in RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, so an initialization process (step S8) is performed.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal (Step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (Step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a working area based on the memory contents of RAM 102 (contents of the backed-up data). This restores the game state to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbols were changing, the game control timer interrupt process described below is executed to resume the change of the special symbols from the state before the recovery.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In conjunction with this, a presentation control command specifying the backed-up game state before the power outage, or, if a special symbol game was being played, a presentation control command specifying the display result of the special symbol game being played may be transmitted. These commands can be the same as the commands transmitted and set in the special symbol process processing described below. When the presentation control CPU 120 receives a presentation control command specifying the time of recovery from the power outage, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that recovery from the power outage has been achieved or that recovery from the power outage is in progress. The presentation control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the presentation control command.

After completing the recovery or initialization process and sending a performance control command to the performance control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 15. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 15 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, it diagnoses an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output processing, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the big win game state and the small win game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized (described in detail later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 16 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 15. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 15.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in preference to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). In addition, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability of winning is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 17 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 18 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 17 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 18, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing a look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display a hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process ends.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the presentation control process flag is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation control process flag is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process is ended.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Part 152F)
Next, the characteristic part 152F of this embodiment will be described. Regarding the characteristic part 152F, a technology targeted at a pachinko game machine capable of setting a setting value with different advantageous degrees for a player, such as a winning probability of a jackpot, by a setting means will be described as follows. The game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) also functions as a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different advantageous degrees for a player as a setting value for the winning probability of a jackpot.

First, let us explain the setting values. The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in this example is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot can be changed according to the setting values by someone at the gaming facility (such as a gaming facility staff member) using a specified switch or other operating means to change the settings.

For example, in the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103), a setting change process is executed that allows the probability of winning a jackpot set in the pachinko game machine 1 to be changed in response to a setting change operation. As a result, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, a setting change process is executed that allows the probability of winning a jackpot to be changed by using a display result judgment table according to the setting value. The setting value consists of six levels (multiple levels) from 1 to 6, for example, and the probability of winning a jackpot increases in the order of setting value 1 < setting value 2 < setting value 3 < setting value 4 < setting value 5 < setting value 6. In other words, when setting value 1 is set as the setting value, the player has the lowest advantage, and the advantage increases stepwise in the order of setting value 2 < setting value 3 < setting value 4 < setting value 5 < setting value 6. Note that the setting value may be set in multiple levels and is not limited to six levels. In this way, by making it possible to change the probability of winning a jackpot, the payout rate (number of balls paid per unit time (number of winning balls)) changes, so changing the setting value can also be said to change the payout rate.

For example, in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot changes depending on the setting value selected by the setting change operation when the power is turned on. Of the six setting values, for example, setting values 4 to 6 may be called high settings, which have a high probability of winning a jackpot, and setting values 1 to 3, for example, may be called low settings, which have a low probability of winning a jackpot.

The probability of selecting a type of jackpot may also be changeable by setting values 1 to 6, just like the probability of winning a jackpot. The probability of selecting a variation pattern type may also be changeable by setting values 1 to 6, just like the probability of winning a jackpot. The probability of selecting a variation pattern may also be changeable by setting values 1 to 6, just like the probability of winning a jackpot.

Regarding the characteristic section 152F, in a pachinko game machine that can set any one of a plurality of set values, when the machine is controlled to a jackpot game state, a reserved consecutive win may be executed in which reserved information determined to be controlled to a win (jackpot or small win) is stored in the RAM 122 as a reserved memory buffer. Specifically, a reserved consecutive win refers to a consecutive win (reserved consecutive wins) within a reserved information range in which there is reserved information that will be a win in the future among the reserved information that exists when a jackpot occurs, and the next win occurs consecutively within the reserved information that existed at the time of the jackpot occurrence after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, in the case of a small win, a jackpot via a small win is generated based on the occurrence of a V prize, so the reserved information of the small win can be said to be reserved memory information of a win that will be a jackpot in the future. When such a reserved consecutive win is executed, a notification effect that notifies the player that the reserved consecutive win is a reserved consecutive win may be executed.

Figure 19-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 152F. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 152F, the reference symbols and explanations for the same configuration as in the front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in Figure 1 are omitted, and only the different parts are explained.

In the game area where the game balls can flow down after being thrown, a first path of the game balls' flow paths is provided mainly in the area to the left of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and a second path of the game balls' flow paths, which is different from the first path, is provided mainly in the area to the right of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front.

Hitting a game ball into the left area (left game area) of the image display device 5 to make the game ball flow down the first path is called a left hit. Hitting a game ball into the right area (right game area) of the image display device 5 to make the game ball flow down the second path is called a right hit. The first path is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by hitting the game ball into the left side of the game area, so it may be called the left hit path. Also, the second path is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by hitting the game ball into the right side of the game area, so it may be called the right hit path.

The first path and the second path may be separate paths, or may be paths that are partially shared. The left and right play areas may be separated, for example, by the end face of the image display device 5 or the arrangement of the play nails within the play area.

When a game ball is launched from the ball launching device in response to the operation of the ball operating handle 30 and hit into the game area, if it is guided to the left game area, it will be guided, for example, along the arrangement of the game nails, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the right game area. Also, when a game ball is guided to the right game area, it will be guided, for example, along the arrangement of the game nails, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area.

A winning ball device 6A with a first start winning hole is provided as a structure into which a game ball hit into the left game area of the game area can enter. The winning ball device 6A is disposed below the image display device 5. The winning ball device 6A is provided with a first start winning hole switch 22A for detecting a game ball that has entered the first start winning hole.

The passing gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the V-determination winning device 87 are provided as structures through which game balls that have been hit into the right playing area of the playing area can enter. The variable winning ball device 6B has a second start winning port through which game balls can enter. In addition, as switches for detecting game balls that have entered each port, a gate switch 21 is provided inside the passing gate 41, a second start winning port switch 22B is provided inside the second start winning port, and a V-winning switch 87a, a V-determination winning switch 15a, and a V-determination discharge switch 15b are provided inside the V-determination winning device 87.

In the left play area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the first start winning hole of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the first start winning hole, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the left. Also, in the right play area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the second start winning hole and the passing gate 41 of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the second start winning hole and the passing gate 41, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the right.

The passing gate 41 is a gate structure through which the game ball can enter (pass). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol changes and is displayed. The normal symbol will be described later. In the left game area, the game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the first start winning hole of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to have the game ball enter the first start winning hole, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the left. In the right game area, the game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the second start winning hole of the winning hole structure and the passing gate 41. Therefore, when aiming to have the game ball enter the second start winning hole and the passing gate 41, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the right.

The V-judging winning device 87 is a device for judging the V-winning of the game ball, which is a condition for generating a big win when a small win occurs.

The V-judgment winning device 87 is made of a transparent material, and the game ball passing through the inside can be seen. The V-judgment winning device 87 has a width in the front and back directions at the top that allows the game ball to pass through, and walls are provided on both sides (the front and back sides) of a passage that slopes from right to left and extends in the left and right directions, and a guide path along which the game ball is guided is formed. In the center of the guide path, an operating port is formed as an opening that can allow a total of about 10 or more game balls to enter during the specified open period by repeatedly opening and closing for a specified period (for example, 0.1 seconds x 10 opening periods + 1 second closing period (interval period) x 9 times + 1 second end period) when a small win occurs. In the passage of the game ball in the V-determination winning device 87, multiple protrusions are provided alternately on both sides of the wall as deceleration means for decelerating the game ball being guided, forming a structure (hereinafter referred to as a deceleration structure) in which the game ball flows slowly in the passage above the operating port at the top of the V-determination winning device 87 when hit from the right.

In the small win game state, the opening control of the V-determination winning device 87 is executed for a relatively long period of time until the entry of 10 game balls into the V-determination winning device 87 is detected or until a predetermined period of time has elapsed. In the V-determination winning device 87, the portion of the induction path where the operating port is not formed forms a fixed passage called the fixed portion 873. At a position where the operating port can be opened and closed, a movable portion 872 that can move forward and backward on the operating port is provided.

The movable part 872 is driven by the solenoid 22 and can move back and forth to open and close the operating port. When the operating port is closed due to the state of the movable part 872, the game ball can pass through the upper surfaces of the movable part 872 and the fixed part 873 as a guide path, and is guided along the guide path from the right end to the left end and falls from the left end. When the operating port is open due to the operating state of the movable part 872, the operating port opens on the guide path, so that the game ball guided along the guide path can fall from the operating port into the inside of the V-determination winning device 87.

Inside the V-determination winning device 87 (operating port), a specific V winning area 870 is provided in the center of the left-right direction at the bottom of the V-determination winning device 87 as a winning area where game balls entering from the operating port can win, and further, a ramp is provided that guides all game balls that enter from the operating port onto the V winning area 870 via an inclined path. The V winning area 870 has a V winning port through which game balls can enter, and is capable of guiding game balls that enter from the V winning port downward.

At the top of the winning opening (V winning opening) of the V winning area 870, a plate-like opening/closing member (not shown) is provided that can switch the V winning area 870 to either an open state or a closed state. The opening/closing member is driven by a solenoid 22 and can move forward and backward to open and close the V winning opening. When the opening/closing member is in the open state, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 is able to fall into the V winning area 870. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member is in the closed state, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 passes over the opening/closing member and is set up in a manner that opens near the downstream side of the V winning area 870, and is able to fall into the winning ball area (not shown) that can guide the game downward.

Specifically, the V winning area 870 of the V-judgment winning device 87 is basically in an open state, and in a small win game state in which the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is open, when one game ball enters the V winning area 870 and wins, the game ball is detected by the V-winning switch 87a provided in the V-winning area 870. In a small win game state, when one game ball is detected by the V-winning switch 87a, the opening and closing member is controlled to a closed state, and game balls guided onto the V-winning area 870 thereafter enter the winning ball area. Game balls that enter the winning ball area are detected by the V-judgment winning switch 15a provided in the winning ball area. As a result, of the game balls that enter the V-judgment winning device 87, one game ball is detected by the V-judgment winning switch 87a, and the subsequent game balls are detected by the V-judgment winning switch 15a.

When the total number of balls detected by the V-winning switch 87a and the V-judgment winning switch 15a reaches 10, the V-judgment winning device 87, which is opened during a small win game state, closes its operating port and is placed in a state where game balls cannot enter. The V-winning area 870 and the winning ball area are configured to merge below, and game balls that enter the V-judgment winning device 87 through the merged discharge passage are discharged to a specified discharge path inside the game board 2. The discharge passage is provided with a V-judgment discharge switch 15b that can detect discharged game balls, and all discharged game balls are detected by this switch.

When a small win occurs and the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened, if a game ball enters the V-winning area 870 and is detected by the V-winning switch 87a during a specified valid period, the conditions for a big win are met and the game is controlled to a big win game state. Such a game ball entering the V-winning area 870 is called a V-winning. In the pachinko game machine 1, as described above, during the period when a small win occurs and the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened, the structure and control are designed so that an average of about 10 game balls in total can enter the V-judgment winning device 87 without requiring any special operation, and further, the structure is designed so that when a game ball can enter the V-judgment winning device 87, the game ball always (100%) enters the V-winning area 870. In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a small win occurs, a right-hit promotion notification is executed to instruct the player to hit to the right so that the player can easily hit the game ball into the V-determination winning device 87.

Therefore, when a small win occurs, unless the player does not shoot the game ball while the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 is open, or the player hits with the left hand, if the player hits with the right hand, the game ball will always (100%) enter the V winning area 870 and a big win will occur.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which a deceleration structure for the game ball is provided in the V-determination winning device 87. However, instead of providing such a deceleration structure, an operating port that allows the game ball to fall into a part of the guide path for the game ball in the V-determination winning device 87 may be provided, and the operating port may be opened 10 times to allow about 10 game balls to enter the V-winning area 870 during the small win game state.

In the right play area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the variable winning ball device 6B and the V-determination winning device 87. Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B and the V-determination winning device 87, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the right.

It is also possible for a game ball hit into the left game area to have the potential to enter either the variable winning ball device 6B or the V-determined winning ball device 87, but from the standpoint of gameplay, it is desirable to make this possibility extremely low compared to the possibility of a game ball hit into the right game area entering either of them.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the play area. In the special variable winning ball device 7, game balls hit to the right are guided by game nails planted in the right play area. In addition, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that game balls cannot enter from the left play area, depending on the state in which the game nails are planted.

The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening whose front is covered by a rectangular door, and when a big win occurs, a solenoid causes the door to tilt forward around the base as an axis, revealing (opening) the large winning opening. A count switch 23 for detecting the game ball that has entered is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. The winning route to the special variable winning ball device 7 is restricted by game nails and other structures so that the game ball can enter the large winning opening only when the game ball is shot into the right game area. It is also possible to make it possible for the game ball to enter the large winning opening regardless of whether it is shot into the left game area or the right game area.

A jackpot occurs when a jackpot pattern (jackpot display result) is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A, and when a jackpot pattern (jackpot display result) is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B. When a jackpot is determined by lottery based on a game ball entering the first start winning slot, a jackpot pattern is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A. When a jackpot is determined by lottery based on a game ball entering the second start winning slot, a jackpot pattern is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B.

A big win also occurs when a game ball that entered the V-judgment winning device 87 when the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is open due to a small win game state enters the V-winning area 870. Hereinafter, a game ball entering the V-winning area 870 and being detected by the V-winning switch 87a is called a V-winning. A small win is a win in which the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 opens as a predetermined value, and a big win can occur on the condition of a V-winning. In the V-judgment winning device 87, a game state in which the operating port opens is called a "small win game state." And a big win that occurs based on a game ball entering the V in a small win game state is called a "big win via a small win." In contrast, a big win game state that is entered based on the display result of the variable display of the special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B is called a "big win by a special pattern."

The jackpot game state is a specific game state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player as a predetermined value is awarded, and a repeat continuation control is performed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 repeats an open state and a closed state a predetermined number of times. In the repeat continuation control, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is open (the big winning opening is open) is called a round. The repeat continuation control is also called round control.

In the jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened, and then closed when a predetermined end condition for the open state is met (either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or a predetermined number of winning balls (e.g., 10) have been generated). When the open end condition is met, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times the device is opened in the jackpot game state reaches a predetermined upper limit of 15 rounds (the final round).

The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started when the first start condition (first execution condition) or the second start condition (second execution condition), which is the execution condition for the variable display, is met (for example, when the game ball passes through the first start winning port or the second start winning port as the start winning area (including winning)), and the start condition for the variable display is met (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not being executed and a jackpot game is not being executed), and the display result (stopped symbol) is derived and displayed after the variable display time (change time) has elapsed. The game ball passing through means that the game ball has passed through an area that has been determined in advance as a winning area, such as a winning port or gate, and is a concept that includes the game ball entering the winning port (winning). The display result is derived and displayed means that the symbol (an example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed (determined display).

In addition, for variable displays where the game ball has entered a start area such as the first start winning port and the second start winning port but the start conditions have not yet been met, storing information about the variable displays where the start conditions have not yet been met within a specified upper limit number is called reserved memory. The term reserved memory is also used to indicate (specify) the reserved information. Reserved memory is also called start memory or start winning memory.

For the first special symbol, the variable display is performed based on the first reserved memory, which is a reserved memory based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first start winning port. For the second special symbol, the variable display is performed based on the second reserved memory, which is a reserved memory based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second start winning port. If a jackpot occurs when such a first reserved memory or second reserved memory exists, the reserved memory that existed before the jackpot occurs is maintained as is, and is used for the variable display after the jackpot gaming state ends.

When a second start winning occurs in the second start winning slot, even if there is a reserved memory of a first start winning, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second start winning is executed with priority. In this way, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol.

Above the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, there is provided a second reserve display device 25B consisting of four displays that show the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second start winning port, i.e., the second reserve memory number. The second reserve display device 25B increases the number of lit displays by one each time there is a valid start winning. And, each time a variable display is started on the second special pattern display device 4B, the number of lit displays is decreased by one.

Further above the second reserve display 25B, there is a first reserve display 25A consisting of four displays that show the number of valid winning balls that entered the first start winning port, i.e., the first reserve memory number. The first reserve display 25A increases the number of lit displays by one each time there is a valid start winning. And, each time a variable display is started on the first special pattern display device 4A, the number of lit displays is decreased by one.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game state and presentation state are controlled so that the player can enjoy a variety of games by shooting the game ball in either a "left hit" aimed at the left playing area or a "right hit" aimed at the right playing area depending on the game situation. The flow of the game after the player starts playing the pachinko gaming machine 1 is explained below.

When a player sits down at the pachinko game machine 1 and starts playing for the first time, he or she first plays by hitting the ball from the left so that the ball will enter the first start winning hole. Then, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and if the display result is a jackpot (a jackpot with a special symbol), the player switches from hitting the ball from the left to hitting the ball from the right, and plays by aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 that opens. After the jackpot game state ends, a right-hit promotion notification is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, encouraging the player to play by hitting the ball to the right. Specifically, a message such as "Aim to the right" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

During the jackpot game state, the player plays a game in which the player hits the ball with the right hand to aim at the opened special variable winning ball device 7. During the jackpot game state, a right hand hit promotion notification is made. After the jackpot game state ends, if the game enters a time-saving state, which will be described later, the player continues to play by hitting the ball with the right hand. After the jackpot game ends, if the game enters a time-saving state, a time-saving notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the player that the time-saving state will begin if the game is in a time-saving state. In addition, during the time-saving state, a right hand hit promotion notification is also made. If the game does not enter a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, the game is played by switching from right hand hit to left hand hit so that the game ball will enter the first start winning hole as the right hand hit promotion notification executed during the jackpot game state ends. In addition, if the game does not enter a time-saving state, a left hand hit promotion notification (also called a left hand hit notification) may be made on the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage the player to play by returning to left hand hit.

During the time-saving state after the end of the big win game, the player plays by hitting the right hand to aim at the variable winning ball device 6B having the second start winning port. If the game ball enters the second start winning port and the display result is a big win (a big win with a special pattern), the player continues to hit the right hand to aim at the special variable winning ball device 7. Also, if the game ball enters the second start winning port and the display result is a small win display result, the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 is opened in the small win game state, so the player continues to hit the right hand to aim at the V-determination winning device 87. At the start of the small win game state, a small win start notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the player that the small win game state has started. In addition, when the game is controlled to a small win game state, a right-hit promotion notification is also issued at a specific timing (depending on the game situation, at the start of the small win display that is executed before the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened in response to a small win, or at a specified timing before the small win display is executed).

When the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is open due to the small win game state, a game ball falls from the operating port into the inside of the V-judgment winning device 87, enters the V-winning area 870 and is detected, and a V-winning occurs. When a V-winning occurs, a V-winning notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that a V-winning has occurred. In addition, when the small win game state ends, a small win end notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small win game state has ended. Then, after the small win ends, the game enters a big win game state and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened, so the player continues playing by hitting with the right hand, aiming for the special variable winning ball device 7.

In addition, when playing a game aiming at the V-judgment winning device 87 in a small win game state, if the game ball does not enter the V winning area 870 but enters a non-specific area other than the V winning area 870, a big win does not occur. When a V win does not occur during a small win game state like this, a V winning failure notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that a V win has failed. In addition, at the end of the small win game state, a small win end notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small win game state has ended. Then, after the end of the small win game state, while the time-saving state continues, the player continues to play by aiming at the variable winning ball device 6B while still hitting from the right. When the time-saving state ends, the game is played by switching from hitting from the right to hitting from the left so that the game ball will win the first start winning hole. When the time-saving state ends, a time-saving end notification is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the player that the time-saving state has ended, and a left-hand hit promotion notification is displayed to encourage the player to return to left-hand play.

Figure 19-2 is a diagram showing a winning type table. The winning type table shows, for each winning type, the conditions for a winning jackpot to occur, the control state (game state) after the winning jackpot, the number of times the jackpot opens (number of rounds), and the opening time of each round in the winning jackpot. In this embodiment, the winning types include a 15R time-saving winning jackpot, a 4R time-saving winning jackpot, a 16 (15)R time-saving winning jackpot via a small winning jackpot, a 9 (8)R time-saving winning jackpot via a small winning jackpot, and a 5 (4)R time-saving winning jackpot via a small winning jackpot. The number in parentheses for a winning jackpot via a small winning jackpot indicates the number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 opens.

A small win occurs when a game ball wins in the second start winning port provided in the variable winning ball device 6B and the display result of the second special pattern becomes a small winning pattern. The decision of whether or not to make the display result of the special pattern a small winning pattern is made in advance by random number lottery (special pattern small winning decision). When a small win occurs, the game enters a small winning game state, and the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 opens in an opening pattern with 10 openings and an opening time of 0.1 seconds. The game control state after the end of the small winning game state (big winning probability, small winning probability, base, described later) is the same as before the small winning. In a small win, a prize ball is paid out for a game ball that wins in the V winning area 870 in the V-determination winning device 87 during the small winning game state. It is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated during the small winning game state, and it is set that about 30 prize balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

When the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened and the game ball enters the V-judgment winning area 870 (V-winning) inside the V-judgment winning device 87, a big win occurs. Such a big win via a small win is called a small win via big win. A small win via big win includes a 16 (15) R time-saving big win via a small win, a 9 (8) R time-saving big win via a small win, and a 5 (4) R time-saving big win via a small win, which have different numbers of rounds in the big win. A small win that is linked to become a 16 (15) R time-saving big win is called a first small win. A small win that is linked to become a 9 (8) R time-saving big win is called a second small win. A small win that is linked to become a 5 (4) R time-saving big win is called a third small win.

On the other hand, a jackpot that occurs directly from the variable display of a special symbol, without going through a small jackpot, is called a pattern jackpot. Pattern jackpots include the 15R pattern time-saving jackpot, which occurs directly based on the variable display of the first or second special symbol, and the 4R pattern time-saving jackpot.

In this way, jackpots include pattern jackpots that occur directly based on the varying display of the first or second special pattern, and small jackpots that occur by V entry via a small jackpot based on the varying display of the second special pattern. Each pattern jackpot and small jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, and is called a time-saving jackpot. In this embodiment, the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player also includes the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7.

A 15R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the large prize opening is opened 15 times (15R). A 4R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the large prize opening is opened 4 times (4R). A 16 (15)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot is a jackpot in which the V-determined prize-winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), and then the large prize opening is opened 15 times (15R) on the condition of a V winning. Although the prize-winning device is opened for 16 rounds, the large prize opening is actually opened 15 times, and the player feels that the opening of the large prize opening is the same type of jackpot as a 15R time-saving jackpot. The 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot via small win is a jackpot in which the V-determined winning device 87 opens (0.1 seconds x 10 times) and then the large winning hole opens 8 times (8R) on the condition of a V win. The 5 (4) R time-saving jackpot via small win is a jackpot in which the V-determined winning device 87 opens once (0.1 seconds x 10 times) and then the large winning hole opens 4 times (4R) on the condition of a V win. The winning device opens for 5 rounds, but the large winning hole is actually opened 4 times, and the player feels that the opening of the large winning hole is the same type of jackpot as the 4R time-saving jackpot with respect to the pattern.

The time-saving state after the 4R time-saving jackpot has two end conditions: one in which the second special symbol is displayed once, and the other in which the first and second special symbols are displayed five times in total. The number of times for the time-saving end condition in which the second special symbol is displayed once is set in consideration of the fact that the game ball that entered the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 at a 100% rate. When the second special symbol is displayed once, a small win occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition in which the second special symbol is displayed once is set as the number of times that a jackpot via a small win may occur when the second special symbol is displayed once.

The number of times the second special symbol is displayed once as the time-saving end condition is set for the following reason. In the case of a 4R time-saving jackpot, the time-saving state (including the electric support state) is basically continued until the second special symbol is displayed once, but to display the second special symbol, it is necessary to hit the ball from the right to make the ball enter the passage gate 41 and open the variable winning ball device 6B, and in that state, the ball must enter the variable winning ball device 6B. It may take time to make the ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B, and the first special symbol that has been reserved and stored may be displayed first.

Therefore, the end condition of the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed five times is a condition for ensuring that one display of the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, can be executed even if the display of the first special symbol is started based on the reserved memory based on the first start winning of which up to four can be stored before the jackpot game state immediately after the start of the time-saving state and before the condition for starting the display of the second special symbol is met. In this way, it is possible to prevent the display of the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, from not being executed in the time-saving state, due to the display of the first special symbol is started based on the reserved memory based on the first start winning immediately after the start of the time-saving state.

After a jackpot other than the 4R time-saving jackpot, two ending conditions are set: the second special symbol is displayed seven times, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed 11 times in total. The seven times of the time-saving state ending condition is set in consideration of the fact that the game ball that entered the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 at a 100% rate. In the second special symbol, a small win occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the ending condition of the seven times of the second special symbol is set to a number of times that the possibility of a small win occurring when the second special symbol is displayed is significantly higher than the 4R time-saving jackpot. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the occurrence of a small win and to increase the player's expectations for the occurrence of a small win.

The end condition of the first special symbol and the second special symbol being displayed 11 times in total is to ensure that even if the display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory based on the first start winning (up to four can be stored) starts before the jackpot game state immediately after the start of the time-saving state and before the condition for starting the display of the second special symbol is met, the display of the seven times the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, can be displayed reliably. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the number of times the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, changes in the time-saving state, from starting the display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory based on the first start winning immediately after the start of the time-saving state.

In this embodiment, in the low base state, which is the normal state, the first start winning port is set so that winning can be made from the first path, so that the game ball flowing down the first path is more advantageous to the player in terms of starting winning than the game ball flowing down the second path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a big win game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that is opened is set so that winning can be made from the second path, so that the game ball flowing down the second path is more advantageous to the player in terms of winning at the time of a big win than the game ball flowing down the first path. Also, in a specific state such as a small win game state, the V-determined winning device 87 that is opened is set so that winning can be made from the second path, so that the game ball flowing down the second path is more advantageous to the player in terms of the occurrence of a big win than the game ball flowing down the first path.

In addition to the above comparison of advantages, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which, for example, other winning ports (for example, other variable winning ports (which may be for starting winning or non-starting winning) are provided on the first and second paths, and in a low base state as the normal state, it is easier to win at the variable winning port via the first path than via the second path, and in other states such as a high base state, a big win game state, and a small win game state, it is easier to win at the variable winning port via the second path than via the first path, such that in the normal state, it is more advantageous for the player if the gaming medium flows down the first path, and in other game states, it is more advantageous for the player if the gaming medium flows down the second path.

Figure 19-3 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In Figure 19-3, the type of random number, update range, purpose, and addition conditions are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R: A random counter for determining whether or not a jackpot will be generated and whether or not a small jackpot will be generated. Random 1 is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, and is updated by incrementing from 0 to its upper limit of 65535, and then is updated by incrementing from 0 again. (2) Random 1: Determines the type of jackpot (type, 15R time-saving jackpot, 4R time-saving jackpot, 16(15)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot, 9(8)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot, and 5(4)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot) and the jackpot pattern (for jackpot type determination, for jackpot pattern determination). (3) Random 2: Determines the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern (for fluctuation pattern type determination). (4) Random 3: Determines the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) (for fluctuation pattern determination). (5) Random 4: Determines whether or not a win based on a normal symbol will occur (for determining whether a win occurs based on a normal symbol). (6) Random 5: Determines the initial value of Random 5 (for determining the initial value of Random 5).

In this embodiment, the specific game state jackpot includes multiple types, such as a 15R time-saving jackpot, a 4R time-saving jackpot, a 16 (15)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot, a 9 (8)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot, and a 5 (4)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot. Therefore, when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R), or when a small jackpot is determined to be a small jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined to be one of these jackpot types based on the value of the random number for jackpot type determination (random 1). However, in the case of a jackpot via a small jackpot, if a V prize does not occur, the determined jackpot is invalid. Furthermore, when the type of jackpot is determined, the jackpot pattern is also determined based on the value of the random number for jackpot type determination (random 1). Therefore, random 1 is also a random number for determining the jackpot pattern. In addition, when the type of small win is decided, the small win symbol is decided at the same time. Therefore, Random 1 is also the random number used to decide the small win symbol.

Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern is determined by first determining the fluctuation pattern type using a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and then determining one of the fluctuation patterns included in the determined fluctuation pattern type using a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 3). In this manner, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. A fluctuation pattern type is a grouping of multiple fluctuation patterns according to the characteristics of their fluctuation modes. One or multiple fluctuation patterns belong to a fluctuation pattern type.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation patterns are classified into normal fluctuation pattern types, which are fluctuation pattern types that do not involve a reach, and reach fluctuation pattern types, which are fluctuation pattern types that involve a reach.

Figure 19-4 is an explanatory diagram showing the first special chart hit determination table, the second special chart hit determination table, and various jackpot type determination tables. These tables are stored in ROM 101.

Figure 19-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the first special symbol hit determination table. The first special symbol hit determination table is a data table for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value that is compared with random R is set. The "probability" shown in Figure 19-4 (A) indicates the probability (percentage) of a jackpot.

The probability of winning the first special symbol varies depending on the setting value. At setting 1 it is 1/199, at setting 2 it is 1/190, at setting 3 it is 1/180, at setting 4 it is 1/170, at setting 5 it is 1/160, and at setting 6 it is 1/150. Therefore, the probability of winning is highest in the following order: setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6.

Figure 19-4 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the second special symbol hit determination table. The second special symbol hit determination table is a data table for making big hit and small hit determinations for the second special symbol, and is a table in which a big hit determination value and a small hit determination value to be compared with random R are set. The upper section in Figure 19-4 (B) is the big hit determination table section, and the lower section in Figure 19-4 (B) is the small hit determination table section. The "probability" shown in the upper section of Figure 19-4 (B) indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the lower section of Figure 19-4 (B) indicates the probability (percentage) of a small hit.

The probability of a big win with the second special symbol varies depending on the setting value. It is 1/199 with setting 1, 1/190 with setting 2, 1/180 with setting 3, 1/170 with setting 4, 1/160 with setting 5, and 1/150 with setting 6. Therefore, the probability of a big win increases in the following order: setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6. In contrast, the probability of a small win with the second special symbol is set to 1/7.35 regardless of the setting value. A small win may be set for the first special symbol. In such a case, it is desirable to make the probability of a small win lower for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol. For example, the probability of a small win with the first special symbol may be set to 1/100.

When the CPU 103 detects a start winning entry into the first start winning entry port (first start winning entry) or a start winning entry into the second start winning entry port (second start winning entry), it extracts the count value (random R) of the random number circuit 124 at a predetermined timing. For the first start winning entry, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the first special symbol hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, it is determined that the first special symbol will be a jackpot. For the second start winning entry, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the second special symbol hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, it is determined that the second special symbol will be a jackpot. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the jackpot determination values, the extracted value is compared with the small jackpot determination value set in the second special symbol hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the small jackpot determination values, it is determined that the second special symbol will be a small jackpot. Deciding to have a small hit also means provisionally deciding to have a big hit via a small hit (it is written as provisionally deciding because if no V win occurs during the small hit, it will not be controlled as a big hit).

Deciding whether to get a big win or not means deciding whether to transition to a big win game state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern the big win pattern. Deciding whether to get a small win or not means deciding whether to transition to a small win game state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the second special pattern the small win pattern.

Figures 19-4 (C), (D), and (E) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. Figure 19-4 (C) is a first special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a pattern jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the first special pattern. Figure 19-4 (D) is a second special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a pattern jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the second special pattern.

The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 19-4(C) has a value to be compared with the value of Random 2 for jackpot type determination, and has jackpot determination values corresponding to "15R pattern time-saving jackpot" and "4R pattern time-saving jackpot".The second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 19-4(D) has a value to be compared with the value of Random 1, and has a jackpot determination value corresponding to "15R pattern time-saving jackpot".

Also, as shown in Figures 19-4 (C) and (D), the jackpot type judgment value is also used as a judgment value (jackpot pattern judgment value) that determines the jackpot patterns of the first special pattern and the second special pattern. For example, the judgment value corresponding to an "8R time-saving jackpot" is also set as a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "3". The judgment value corresponding to a "15R time-saving jackpot" is also set as a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "7".

Using these various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type that corresponds to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 1 matches, and determines the jackpot pattern with which the value of Random 1 matches, as the jackpot pattern. This simultaneously determines the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern that corresponds to the jackpot type.

The small hit via jackpot type determination table in FIG. 19-4(E) contains a numerical value to be compared with the value of Random 2 for jackpot type determination, and jackpot determination values corresponding to "small hit via 16(15)R time-saving jackpot", "small hit via 9(8)R time-saving jackpot", and "small hit via 5(4)R time-saving jackpot". However, the jackpot type determined by the small hit via jackpot type determination table is a provisional jackpot type linked to each of the first small hit (16(15)R time-saving jackpot), second small hit (9(8)R time-saving jackpot), and third small hit (5(4)R time-saving jackpot), and is invalid unless a V win occurs during a small hit game state.

Figures 19-5 and 19-6 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of a presentation control command sent by the game control microcomputer 100. Figures 19-5 and 19-6 show the relationship between specific command data for the presentation control command and the command name and command specification. As shown in Figures 19-5 and 19-6, the game control microcomputer 100 sends various presentation control commands to the presentation control CPU 120 depending on the game control state.

The main commands in Figures 19-5 and 19-6 will be explained. Command 80XX (H) is a performance control command (variation pattern command) that specifies the variation pattern that is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol (each corresponds to a variation pattern XX). When a unique number is assigned to each of multiple variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command that corresponds to each variation pattern identified by that number. "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number. In addition, the performance control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the performance control CPU 120 receives command 80XX (H), it controls the performance display device to start a performance that corresponds to the variable display of the special symbol.

Commands 8C01(H) to 8C06(H) are display result specification commands that show display results including miss display results, jackpot type, jackpot display results for each small jackpot type, and small jackpot display results.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first pattern change designation command that indicates that the display of the first special pattern change should begin. Command 8D02 (H) is a second pattern change designation command that indicates that the display of the second special pattern change should begin. Command 8F00 (H) is a pattern determination designation command that specifies that the display of the first and second special patterns should end.

Commands A001 to A005 (H) are jackpot start designation commands that specify the start of the jackpot game state for each type of jackpot.

Command A1XX (H) is a command for specifying when the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is open for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a command for specifying when the large prize opening is closed, indicating that the large prize opening has been opened for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX.

Commands A301 to A305 (H) are jackpot end designation commands that specify the end of the jackpot game state for each type of jackpot.

Command A401(H) is a first start winning designation command that specifies that a first start winning has occurred. Command A402(H) is a second start winning designation command that specifies that a second start winning has occurred.

Command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command that specifies that the game state is normal (low base state). Command B001 (H) is a first time-saving state designation command that specifies that the game state is first time-saving state (high base state). Command B002 (H) is a second time-saving state designation command that specifies that the game state is second time-saving state (high base state).

Command C0XX(H) is a first reserved memory number specification command that specifies the first reserved memory number. The "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the first reserved memory number. Command C1XX(H) is a second reserved memory number specification command that specifies the second reserved memory number. The "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the second reserved memory number.

In this embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the number of reserved memories, it sends a reserved memory number designation command that specifies the number of reserved memories after subtraction, but this is not limited to this, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command that specifies that the number of reserved memories is to be subtracted by 1 for each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number may also be used.

Commands C2XX(H) and C3XX(H) are presentation control commands that indicate the contents of the winning judgment results, such as a jackpot judgment, a jackpot type judgment, and a fluctuation pattern type judgment, when a starting winning is made at the first or second starting winning port. Of these, command C2XX(H) is a designation command that indicates whether or not a winning judgment result will be a jackpot, whether or not a small win will be made, and the type of jackpot judgment result. In addition, command C3XX(H) is a fluctuation type command that indicates the judgment result of which judgment value range the value of the fluctuation pattern type judgment random number falls into (fluctuation pattern type judgment result) among the winning judgment results.

Command C401 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the first small win. Command C402 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the second small win. Command C403 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the third small win. Command C501 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the first small win. Command C502 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the second small win. Command C503 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the third small win. Command C601 (H) is a V winning specification command that specifies that a V winning has occurred. Command C602 (H) is a V winning ball detection specification command that specifies that a winning ball (including both a V winning ball and a winning ball other than a V winning ball) has been detected in the V determination winning device 87.

In the game control microcomputer 100, a first reserved memory buffer is provided in the RAM 102 for storing reserved memory information for the first special symbol. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the first reserved memory number (4 in this example) is secured in the first reserved memory buffer. The first reserved memory buffer stores a hardware random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), and software random numbers for determining the type of jackpot (Random 1), the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 2), and the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 3).

For the second special symbol, a second reserved memory buffer is provided in RAM 102 for storing reserved memory information for the second special symbol. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the second reserved memory count (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved memory buffer. The second reserved memory buffer stores a hardware random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), and software random numbers for determining the type of jackpot (Random 1), the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 2), and the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 3).

Based on a win at the first start winning port, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting random numbers from the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and saving (storing) them in a storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Specifically, based on a win at the first start winning port, these random numbers are extracted and saved (stored) in the first reserved memory buffer. Based on a win at the second start winning port, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting random numbers from the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and saving (storing) them in a storage area in the second reserved memory buffer. Specifically, based on a win at the second start winning port, these random numbers are extracted and saved (stored) in the second reserved memory buffer.

In this way, storing information about the start winning in the reserved memory buffer may be referred to as "reserved storage." Note that the random number for determining the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 2) and the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 3) may be extracted when the special pattern begins to fluctuate, rather than being extracted at the time of the start winning and stored in advance in the reserved memory buffer.

Figure 19-7 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process executed as part of S101. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the first start port switch 22A is on (S1211). If the first start port switch 22A is not on, the process proceeds to S1221. If the first start port switch 22A is on, the CPU 103 checks whether the first reserved memory count has reached the upper limit (specifically, whether the value of the first reserved memory count counter for counting the first reserved memory count is 4) (S1212). If the first reserved memory count has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to S1221.

If the first reserved memory count has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increments the value of the first reserved memory count counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 124 or a counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the first reserved memory buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1), a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are extracted and stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning performance process that determines in advance at the time of the starting winning the result of the change display and the type of the change pattern when a change based on the starting winning of the detected first special symbol is subsequently executed (S1215).

In this embodiment, when a start winning occurs in the first start winning port or the second start winning port, and various data obtained at the time of the start winning is stored as reserved memory information, and then the condition for starting the variable display is established, at the timing to start the variable display, in the normal special pattern processing (S110), a decision is made based on the reserved memory information regarding the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) that starts the variable display, as to whether the variable display result is a jackpot display result or not, and the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot determination value and the jackpot type determination value set in response to the various random number values described above. Then, in the variable pattern setting processing (S111), the variable pattern (including the determination of the variable pattern type) is determined based on the variable pattern type determination value and the variable pattern determination value set in response to the various random number values described above.

On the other hand, apart from such a determination, the reserved memory information that stores various data obtained at the time of the start winning is read ahead at the timing before the variable display based on the start winning into the first start winning port or the second start winning port is started, specifically, at the timing when the game ball starts winning into the first start winning port or the second start winning port (the timing when the reserved memory information is stored), and based on the reserved memory information read ahead, a winning time performance process is executed in which a determination is made in advance as to whether or not there will be a big win, whether or not there will be a small win, the type of big win, and the type of variation pattern based on the big win determination value, big win type determination value, and variation pattern type determination value set in response to the various random number values described above. By doing so, the performance control CPU 120 can predict the result of the variable display before the variable display of the performance pattern is executed, and based on the various determination results at the time of the start winning, it is possible to execute a pre-reading performance such as a pre-reading notice that warns of a big win (possibility of a big win) during the variable display of the performance pattern.

Then, based on the result of the winning performance process, the CPU 103 controls the sending of a symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1216) and the sending of a variable type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1217). The CPU 103 also controls the sending of a first start winning designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1218), and also controls the sending of a first reserved memory number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 by setting the value of the first reserved memory number counter to EXT data (S1219).

By executing the processes of S1216 and S1217, in this embodiment, regardless of the game state (game state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot game state, etc.), both the pattern designation command and the variation type command are always sent to the performance control CPU 120 each time a start winning occurs in the first start winning port.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processes of S1216 to S1219, when a start winning occurs in the first start winning port, a set of four commands, namely, a pattern designation command, a variable type command, a first start winning designation command, and a first reserved memory number designation command, is sent all at once within one timer interrupt.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the second start port switch 22B is on (S1221). If the second start port switch 22B is not on, the process ends. If the second start port switch 22B is on, the CPU 103 checks whether the second reserved memory count has reached the upper limit (specifically, whether the value of the second reserved memory count counter for counting the second reserved memory count is 4) (S1222). If the second reserved memory count has reached the upper limit, the process ends.

If the second reserved memory count has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increments the value of the second reserved memory count counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 124 or a counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the second reserved memory buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1), a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are extracted and stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning performance process similar to the winning performance process described in S1215 for the start winning of the detected second special symbol (S1225). Then, the CPU 103 controls the sending of a symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the judgment result of the winning performance process (S1226), and controls the sending of a variable type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1227). The CPU 103 also controls the sending of a second starting winning designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1228), and controls the sending of a second reserved memory number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 by setting the value of the second reserved memory number counter to EXT data (S1229).

By executing the processes of S1226 and S1227, in this embodiment, regardless of the game state (game state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot game state, etc.), both the pattern designation command and the variation type command are always sent to the performance control CPU 120 every time a start winning occurs in the second start winning port.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processes of S1226 to S1229, when a start winning occurs in the second start winning port, a set of four commands, namely, a pattern designation command, a variable type command, a second start winning designation command, and a second reserved memory number designation command, is sent all at once within one timer interrupt.

Figure 19-8 is a flowchart showing the normal special symbol processing (S110) in the special symbol process. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 checks whether there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (S51). If there is no reserved memory data in either the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, the process ends.

If there is no reserved memory data in the reserved memory buffer in S51, the process ends after performing a process (S80) for sending a customer waiting demo designation command. On the other hand, if there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer in S51, the CPU 103 checks whether there is reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer (S52). If there is reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is set to data indicating "second" (S54). On the other hand, if there is no reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the special symbol pointer is set to data indicating "first" (S53).

In this embodiment, depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the first special pattern display device 4A displays the first special pattern and the second special pattern display device 4B displays the second special pattern using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special pattern pointer, the first special pattern display device 4A displays the first special pattern based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the second special pattern display device 4B displays the second special pattern based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer.

By the control of S52 to S54, if there is at least one second reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the variable display of the second special pattern display device 4B based on the data of the second reserved memory is executed in priority over the variable display of the first special pattern display device 4A based on the data of the first reserved memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area in the RAM 102 corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory buffer corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area in the second reserved memory buffer corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Also, when the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and erases the contents of the storage area in the second reserved memory buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory numbers = 1, 2, 3, 4. Also, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each second pending memory number are extracted always matches the order of the second pending memory numbers = 1, 2, 3, 4.

The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a reserved memory number designation command to the performance control CPU 120, based on the value of the reserved memory number counter pointed to by the special pattern pointer after subtraction (S59). In this case, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a first reserved memory number designation command. Also, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a second reserved memory number designation command.

In the normal special symbol processing, first, data indicating "first" indicating that processing is to be performed on the first start winning slot, i.e., data indicating "first" indicating that processing is to be performed on the first special symbol, or data indicating "second" indicating that processing is to be performed on the second start winning slot, i.e., data indicating "second" indicating that processing is to be performed on the second special symbol, is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, processing is performed according to the data set in the special symbol pointer. Thus, it is possible to make it common to the cases where the first special symbol is the target and the case where the second special symbol is the target.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out Random R (random number for determining a jackpot) from the random number buffer and executes the jackpot determination module (S61). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for determining a jackpot that was extracted in S1214 of the start port switch passing process or S1224 of the start port switch passing process and stored in the reserved memory buffer or random number buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value or small jackpot determination value with the random number for determining a jackpot, and if they match, determines that a jackpot or small jackpot has occurred. In other words, it is a program that executes a process for determining a jackpot or a small jackpot.

In the jackpot determination process, if the first special symbol matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 19-4(A), or if the second special symbol matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 19-4(B), it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined that there is a jackpot (Y in S61), the process moves to S71. Determining whether or not there is a jackpot means determining whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state, but also determining whether or not to treat the stopped symbol on the special symbol display as a jackpot symbol.

If it is determined in S61 that a jackpot has occurred (Y in S61), a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot is set (S71).

Next, it is determined whether the special symbol pointer is pointing to "1st" (S72). If the special symbol pointer is pointing to "1st", the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 19-4 (C) is selected (S73) and the process proceeds to S75. On the other hand, if the special symbol pointer is not pointing to "1st" (if it is pointing to "2nd"), the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 19-4 (D) is selected (S74) and the process proceeds to S75.

In S75, using the jackpot type determination table selected in S73 or S74, the jackpot type corresponding to the value that matches the random number (RANDOM 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area is determined as the jackpot type (S75), and the process proceeds to S81.

Also, if the value of the random number for determining a big win (random R) does not match any of the big win determination values in S61 (N in S61), it is checked whether the data set in the special symbol pointer is data indicating "second" to check whether the target of the big win determination is the variable display of the second special symbol (S76). If the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is not data indicating "second" (the variable display of the first special symbol), proceed to S82 described later. On the other hand, if the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is data indicating "second" (the variable display of the second special symbol), the second special symbol hit determination table in FIG. 19-4 (B) is used to determine whether the value of the random number for determining a big win (random R) matches any of the small win determination values, thereby performing the small win determination process (S77). In other words, if the value of the random number (random R) for determining a big win matches any of the small win determination values shown in FIG. 19-4 (B) (Y in S77), it is decided that a small win will occur for the second special symbol. Then, if it is decided that a small win will occur (Y in S77), a small win flag indicating a small win will be set (S78).

After setting the small hit flag, the small hit via big hit type determination table in FIG. 19-4 (E) is selected (S79), and the big hit type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (RANDOM 1) for big hit type determination stored in the random number buffer area is determined as the type of big hit via small hit (S80). Then, proceed to S81. On the other hand, if the value of the random number (RANDOM R) for small hit determination does not match any of the small hit determination values in S77 (N in S77), proceed to S82 described below.

In S81, data indicating the type of the jackpot determined in S75 or S80 is stored in the jackpot type buffer in RAM 102 (S81), and the process proceeds to S82. For example, if the jackpot type is a "15R time-saving jackpot with a pattern", "01" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type, and if the jackpot type is a "4R time-saving jackpot with a pattern", "02" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a "16 (15)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot", "03" is set in a temporary jackpot type buffer separate from the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. If the jackpot type is a 9 (8)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot, "04" is set in the temporary jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. If the jackpot type is a 5 (4) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot, the provisional jackpot type buffer is set to "05" as data indicating the jackpot type. Of these, data indicating a 16 (15) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot, a 9 (8) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot, and a 5 (4) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot are provisionally set as they are invalid data that will not result in a jackpot if no V win occurs during a small jackpot game state.

In S82, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is set (S78). Specifically, if neither the big win flag nor the small win flag is set, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is set to "-", which is a miss symbol. If the small win flag is set, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be one of the small win symbols "1", "5", or "9" according to the small win type selected and determined in S80. If the big win flag is set, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be one of the big win symbols "3" or "7" according to the big win type selected and determined in S75. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (S111) (S79).

Figure 19-9 is a flow chart showing the small win opening pre-processing (S118). In the small win opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 operates the movable part 872 to the open state by controlling the solenoid 22 based on the opening mode of the small win, and starts the opening operation of the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 (S411). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a small win start designation command indicating that the small win game state is to start to the performance control CPU 120 (S412). Next, the CPU 103 sets the V-judgment winning number counter as a counting means to use the number of winnings in the V-winning area 870 in the small win opening state as the end condition of the opening state (S413). Specifically, in S413, the counter value of the V-judgment winning number counter is set to "10" and the setting is made to count down the number of V-winnings. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small win release process (S119) (S414).

Figure 19-10 is a flow chart showing the small win opening process (S119) in the special symbol process. In the small win opening process, the CPU 103 updates the small win opening control timer by subtracting -1 (S430). Next, in S435 described later, it is confirmed whether the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter that counts the number of V winning balls is "0" (S431). The V-judgment winning number counter is set to "10" by S413 in Figure 19-9, and when 10 V winning balls are counted, the count value becomes "0". If the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is "0" in S430, proceed to S441. On the other hand, if the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is not "0" in S430, it is confirmed whether the small win opening control timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S432).

If the small win opening control timer has timed out in S432, proceed to S441. On the other hand, if the small win opening control timer has not timed out in S432, the solenoid 22 is controlled in accordance with the count value of the small win opening control timer based on the opening mode of the small win to operate the movable part 872 to an open state, and processing is performed to open and close the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 (S433).

Next, in order to determine whether a V winning has been detected by a game ball entering the V winning area 870, which is in an open state inside the V determination winning device 87, it is determined whether the V winning switch 87a is in an on state (S434). When it is in an on state in S434, it means that a V winning has been detected, and a V winning flag, which is set when a V winning is detected, is set (S435). Then, a process is performed to transmit a V winning ball detection designation command (S436). This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that a V winning ball has been detected, and it becomes possible to recognize the number of V winnings. Next, the solenoid is driven to operate the opening and closing member, changing the V winning port of the V winning area 870 from an open state to a closed state (S437), and proceeding to S439. As a result, when the first game ball that enters the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning hole of the V-winning area 870 is closed, and all game balls that enter the V-judgment winning device 87 thereafter are guided to the winning ball area and detected by the V-judgment winning switch 15a.

On the other hand, if the switch is not on in S434, it means that a V win has not been detected, and it is determined whether the V-judging win switch 15a is on (S438). If the switch is on in S438, the process proceeds to S439, and if the switch is not on in S438, the process ends.

In S439, the count value of the V-judgment winning ball number counter, which was set to "10" in S413 of FIG. 19-9, is counted down by "-1" (S439), and a process is performed to send a V-judgment winning ball detection designation command (S440). This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that a V-judgment winning ball that has entered the judgment winning device 87 has been detected after the V-judgment winning ball has been detected, and it becomes possible to recognize the number of game balls that have entered the judgment winning device 87.

When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is "0" in S431, the small win V winning number has reached the upper limit value and the small win opening end condition has been established. When the small win opening control timer has timed out in S432, the small win opening end condition has been established due to the end of the small win opening control. In these cases, the CPU 103 controls the solenoid 22 to operate the movable part 872 to the closed state and closes the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 (S441). When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is "0", even if the V-judgment winning device 87 is in the middle of opening according to the opening mode of the small win, the V-judgment winning device 87 is forcibly closed according to the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter. When the small win opening control timer has timed out, the V-judgment winning device 87 is closed according to the end of the small win opening control in the opening mode of the small win.

Next, data corresponding to the specific period that is the valid period for the V winning after the V determination winning device 87 is closed is set in the V winning valid period timer (S442), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small win end processing (S120) (S443), and the processing is terminated. This starts the timing of the specific period that is the valid period for the V winning after the V determination winning device 87 is closed. Note that since the specific period that is the valid period for the V winning is set in this way, the game ball can be detected even if it passes through the V winning area later than the time it normally passes through. In addition, since the specific period is set, even if someone tries to illegally win a prize in the V winning area, only that period is detected, so that fraud can also be prevented.

Figure 19-11 is a flowchart showing the small win end processing (S120) in the special pattern process processing. In the small win end processing, the CPU 103 updates the V winning validity period timer by subtracting 1 (S441), and checks whether the V winning validity period timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S442).

When the V winning validity period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag, which is set in S434 or S445 when a V winning has already been detected, is set (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 87a is in the on state in order to determine whether or not a V winning has been detected, which occurs when a game ball enters the V winning area 870 during the V winning validity period (S444). If it is not in the on state in S444, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is in the on state in S444, it is when a V winning is detected during the V winning validity period, and the V winning flag indicating that a V winning has been detected is set (S445). Then, the process is performed to transmit a V winning designation command (S446), and the process is terminated. This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that a V winning has occurred.

When the V winning validity period timer has timed out in S442, processing is performed to send a small win end designation command (S447). This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that the small win has ended. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 22, control is performed to open the opening and closing member and return the V winning area 870 (V winning port) to an open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the V winning flag is set (S448). If the V winning flag is set in S448, it is determined that a big win has occurred, and the big win flag is set (S449).

As mentioned above, in the small win game state, if you hit to the right in response to the right hit promotion notification described below, you can make the game ball enter the V-determination winning device 87 with a probability of approximately 100%, and the game ball that enters the V-determination winning device 87 will always V-enter the V-winning area 870, and the V-winning flag will be set with a probability of approximately 100% (S435 in Figure 19-10). Based on this, the big win flag is set in S449, and the game is controlled to the big win game state.

Next, the CPU 103 formally stores the data indicating the type of jackpot via a small jackpot stored in the temporary jackpot type buffer in S81 in the jackpot type buffer in response to the determination that a proper jackpot has occurred due to the occurrence of a V win (S450). Then, the time-saving flag that was set at that time is temporarily reset (S451).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start 3 command, a jackpot start 4 command, or a jackpot start 5 command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that a jackpot game state is about to start. Next, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (the time during which the occurrence of a jackpot is notified, for example, on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot entry port control timer (S453).

The jackpot opening pattern data stored in ROM 101 is also referenced, and opening pattern data indicating the opening mode, such as the number of openings (for example, 15 times, 8 times, or 4 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and interval time (time for closing the large prize opening between rounds), depending on the type of jackpot, is set in a predetermined memory area formed in RAM 102 (S454). Of such data, the data on the number of openings is set in an opening counter for counting the number of openings. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (S114) (S455), and the process ends. As a result, when a V win occurs in the small jackpot game state, the game state transitions to the jackpot game state.

If the V winning flag is not set in S448, the big win game state does not occur, so the data indicating the big win type via small win stored in the temporary big win type buffer in S81 is erased (S456), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing (S110) (S457), and the process ends. As a result, if a V winning does not occur in the small win game state, the game does not transition to the big win game state.

[Explanation regarding characteristic part 02TM]
Next, the characteristic part 02TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 20-1 to 20-66.
In this embodiment, it is possible to update the count value (jackpot occurrence count value) in response to being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.
In addition, the variable display period when this count value exceeds a predetermined value (mode switching determination value (in this example, "3") or greater) can be made shorter than the variable display period when this count value does not exceed the predetermined value (mode switching determination value (in this example, "less than 3")).
In addition, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of displaying on the image display device 5 a specific display (jackpot count display) relating to the relationship between this count value and a predetermined value.

[Decorative designs, small designs]
The various performance symbols (decorative symbols, small symbols) in this embodiment will be explained in detail.

<Decorative design>
In this embodiment, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, multiple types of decorative symbols as decorative identification information different from the special symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. The decorative symbols in this embodiment are composed of number symbols indicating numbers, etc.

In this embodiment, a decorative pattern including a number design is a decorative pattern that corresponds to the numbers "1" through "7," for example, a decorative pattern that includes the numbers "1" through "7."

In addition, in this embodiment, the even numbered decorative patterns (numbered patterns corresponding to the numbers "2", "4", and "6") are in a blue color (in this example, the decorative patterns are shown with blue numbers), the odd numbered decorative patterns (numbered patterns corresponding to the numbers "1", "3", and "5") excluding the number "7" are in a red color (in this example, the decorative patterns are shown with red numbers), and the odd numbered decorative pattern of the number "7" (numbered pattern corresponding to the number "7") is in a gold color (in this example, the decorative pattern is shown with gold numbers).

(Defined decoration design)
In this embodiment, as an effect executed according to the progress of the game, a variable display of decorative symbols is started in response to the start of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special symbol) in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is stopped/determined in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, a symbol matching effect is executed, and the determined decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols), which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols, is also stopped (derived).

In this embodiment, the type of final decorative pattern is varied depending on the display result and the type of big win (see Figures 20-3 and 20-4). In this embodiment, the types of final decorative patterns are set as miss patterns, even number patterns, and odd number patterns.

<Small design>
In this embodiment, the small pattern is a pattern that is smaller than the decorative pattern and is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 5, and indicates whether the special pattern is displayed or not and the display result of the special pattern. The small pattern display can be performed in parallel with the special pattern display, and the small pattern display can be performed in parallel with the special pattern display. The small pattern display area 5l, the small pattern display area 5c, and the small pattern display area 5r are the areas in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5 where the small pattern corresponding to the first special pattern is displayed and stopped, and the area in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5 where the small pattern corresponding to the second special pattern is displayed and stopped is also common to the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

The small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r have a smaller display area than the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the small patterns is lower than the visibility of the decorative patterns.

[Active display, Hold display, Hold memory count]
In this embodiment, a first hold display area 02TM01E that displays the first hold memory number (0 to 4 first hold displays 02TM01) is provided at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, and a second hold display area 02TM02E that displays the second hold memory number (0 to 4 second hold displays 02TM02) is provided at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. Also, an active display area 02TM03E that displays an active display 02TM03, which is information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed and is also information corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern being executed, is provided at the bottom center of the screen of the image display device 5.

A first pending memory number display area that displays the first pending memory number may be provided on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 (above the first pending display area 02TM01E), and a second pending memory number display area 02TM06E that displays the second pending memory number may be provided on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5 (above the second pending display area 02TM02E).

Here, the first hold display area 02TM01E displays a number of objects (circular images) corresponding to the first hold memory number, and the second hold display area 02TM02E displays a number of objects (circular images) corresponding to the second hold memory number.

[Time-saving mode]
In this embodiment, the time-saving state is a state in which control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) compared to the normal state, or by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game compared to the normal state. The time-saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In this embodiment, the time-saving state continues until one of the following end conditions is met first: (A) a predetermined number of special games have been played, (B) the game has been controlled to a big win game state, or (C) the game has been controlled to a specific type of small win game state. An end condition in which a predetermined number of special games have been played is also called a time-saving state (time-saving state with time-saving with time-saving).

In this embodiment, the types of time-saving states are the a time-saving state and the b time-saving state. The a time-saving state ends when one of the following ending conditions is met: (A) 10,000 second special symbol games have been played, (B) the game has been controlled to a big win game state, or (C) the game has been controlled to a small win game state corresponding to a normal small win, which will be described later.

The b time-saving state ends when one of the following conditions is met: (A) 10,000 second special symbol games have been played, or (B) the state has been controlled to a big win game state. Unlike the a time-saving state, the b time-saving state does not end when (C) the state has been controlled to a small win game state corresponding to a normal small win (see Figure 20-21 (3) No. 3-1).

[Winning type table]
Fig. 20-1 is a diagram showing a winning type table. Of the winning type tables, Fig. 20-1(1) is a diagram showing a big win type table, and Fig. 20-1(2) is a diagram showing a small win via big win type table. In the winning type table, for each type of big win, the big win occurrence conditions, the control state (game state) after the big win, the number of openings (number of rounds) in the big win, and the opening time of each round in the big win are shown.

In this embodiment, the types of jackpots are "3R pattern normal jackpot", "10Ra time-saving jackpot", "10Rb pattern time-saving jackpot", "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small jackpot", and "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot".

A small win occurs when the display result of the first special pattern or the second special pattern becomes a small win pattern. The decision as to whether the display result of the special pattern will be a small win pattern or not is made in advance by random number lottery (special pattern small win decision). When a small win occurs, the game enters a small win game state, and the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 opens in either an opening pattern with one opening and an opening time of 0.04 seconds (hereinafter referred to as the "first opening pattern" as appropriate), or an opening pattern with ten openings and an opening time of 0.1 seconds (hereinafter referred to as the "second opening pattern" as appropriate).

In the case of a small win, prize balls are paid out for the game ball that enters the V winning area 870 in the V-judging winning device 87 during the small win game state. During the small win game state, it is set that approximately 10 winning balls can occur, and it is set that prize balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

When a game ball is placed in the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 while the operating port is open, and the game ball enters the V-winning area 870 inside the V-determination winning device 87 (V-winning), a jackpot occurs. Such a jackpot that occurs via a small win is called a jackpot via a small win. Jackpots via a small win include a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a normal small win" and a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a time-saving small win", which have different opening patterns of the V-determination winning device 87.

In this embodiment, the small hit corresponding to the "10Ra time-saving big hit via normal small hit" has the first opening pattern of the V-judgment winning device 87, and it is extremely difficult to make the game ball enter the V-judgment winning device 87, so it is not expected to generate a big hit. Also, if the small hit that occurs when controlled to the a-time saving state cannot be made to enter the V, it is controlled to the normal state after the small hit ends, not the a-time saving state (see Figure 20-24). Therefore, the small hit corresponding to the "10Ra time-saving big hit via normal small hit" is essentially a small hit that is controlled from the time-saving state to the normal state. Hereinafter, this small hit will be referred to as the "normal small hit", "falling small hit", or "first small hit" as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the small hit corresponding to the "10Ra time-saving big hit via time-saving small hit" has the second opening pattern of the V-judgment winning device 87, so it is extremely easy to make the game ball win the V-judgment winning device 87, and it is expected that a big hit will occur. In addition, if a V-winning can be made with this small hit that occurs when controlled in the a-time-saving state, the state will be controlled to the a-time-saving state after the end of the big hit corresponding to the small hit. Therefore, this small hit corresponding to the "10Ra time-saving big hit via time-saving small hit" will essentially be a small hit that will be controlled to the time-saving state next time as well. In the following, this small hit will be referred to as a "time-saving small hit", "continuation small hit", or "second small hit" as appropriate.

On the other hand, a jackpot that occurs directly from the changing display of a special pattern, without going through a small jackpot, is called a pattern jackpot. Pattern jackpots include the "Pattern 3R Regular Jackpot," the "Pattern 10Ra Time-saving Jackpot," and the "Pattern 10Rb Time-saving Jackpot," which occur directly based on the changing display of the first or second special pattern.

In this way, jackpots include pattern jackpots that occur directly based on the changing display of the first or second special pattern, and small jackpots that occur by winning a V via a small jackpot based on the changing display of the first or second special pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-1 (1), a "3R pattern normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the large prize slot opens three times (3R). The game state controlled after a "3R pattern time-limited jackpot" is the normal state.

In addition, the "10Ra time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the large prize slot opens 10 times (10R). The game state controlled after the "10Ra time-saving jackpot" is the a time-saving state.

The a time-saving state has two end conditions, one in which the number of times the second special symbol is displayed is 10,000, and the other in which the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed is 10,004 (not shown). The number of times for the end condition of the a time-saving state in which the number of times the second special symbol is displayed is 10,000 is set in consideration of the fact that when a "time-saving small win" occurs, the game ball that entered the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 at a rate of about 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small win occurs at a rate of about 1/41.1. Therefore, the end condition of the a time-saving state in which the number of times the second special symbol is displayed is 10,000 is set to the number of times that a small win may occur at a rate of about 100% when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and the next small win is essentially confirmed. However, in this embodiment, where there are two types of small wins that can occur in the time-saving state, a "normal small win" and a "time-saving small win," if a "normal small win" occurs, no big win will occur and the game will be controlled to the normal state.

In addition, a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the large prize slot opens 10 times (10R). The game state controlled after a "10Ra time-saving jackpot" is the b time-saving state.

The b time-saving state after a "10Rb time-saving big win" has two end conditions set among the end conditions described above: one where the number of times the second special symbol changes is 10,000, and one where the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol change is 10,004 (not shown). The number of times for the end condition of the b time-saving state, where the number of times the second special symbol changes is 10,000, is set taking into consideration that when a "small time-saving win" occurs, the game ball that enters the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 at a rate of about 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small win occurs at a rate of about 1 in 41.1. Therefore, the condition for ending the b time-saving state, in which the second special symbol is displayed 10,000 times, is the number of times that there is a possibility of a small win occurring at a rate of about 100% when the second special symbol is displayed, and the next small win is essentially confirmed. However, in this embodiment, in which there are "normal small wins" and "time-saving small wins" as small wins that occur in the b time-saving state, even if a "normal small win" occurs, no big win occurs and the state continues to be controlled to the b time-saving state. Therefore, the b time-saving state is a game state in which the second special symbol is displayed 10,000 times, and a small win via big win occurs at a rate of about 100%, and the next big win is essentially confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 20-1 (2), the "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win" is a jackpot in which the V-determined winning device 87 opens once (0.04 seconds x 1 time), and then the large winning hole opens 9 times (9R) for a total of 10 times (10R) on condition that a V win is obtained. Also, the "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small win" is a jackpot in which the V-determined winning device 87 opens (0.1 seconds x 10 times), and then the large winning hole opens 9 times (9R) for a total of 10 times (10R) on condition that a V win is obtained. In these time-saving jackpots via small wins, the winning device opens for one round, but the large winning hole is actually opened 10 times, and the player feels that the opening of the large winning hole is the same or similar to the pattern 10R time-saving jackpot.

In this embodiment, in the low base state, which is the normal state, the first start winning port is set so that winning can be made from the first path, so it is more advantageous for the player to have the game ball flow down the first path than the second path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a big win game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that opens is set so that winning can be made from the second path, so it is more advantageous for the player to have the game ball flow down the second path than the first path in terms of winning at the time of a big win. Also, in a special state such as a small win game state, the V-determined winning device 87 that opens is set so that winning can be made from the second path, so it is more advantageous for the player to have the game ball flow down the second path than the first path in terms of the occurrence of a big win.

In addition to the above comparison of advantages, for example, other winning ports (for example, other variable winning ports (which may be for starting winning or non-starting winning)) may be provided on the first and second paths, and in the normal low base state, the first path is more likely to result in a winning entry into the variable winning port than the second path, and in other states such as the high base state, big win game state, and small win game state, the second path is more likely to result in a winning entry into the variable winning port than the first path. From other perspectives, a configuration may be adopted in which it is more advantageous for the player if the gaming medium flows down the first path in the normal state, and more advantageous for the player if the gaming medium flows down the second path in other game states.

[Random value]
Fig. 20-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in Fig. 20-2 (A), in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big win type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so that they can be counted.

Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating software using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built into the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip separate from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are set to the ranges shown in FIG. 20-2(A), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ranges of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be varied depending on the settings set in the pachinko game machine 1.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The CPU 103 also executes a random number generation program to generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores not only the game control program but also various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various judgments and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variable pattern table that stores a plurality of types of variable patterns that become the variable display mode of each pattern in the variable display of special patterns, normal patterns, etc.

[Display result judgment table]
20-2(B) ((B1) and (B2)) are explanatory diagrams showing a display result determination table for the first special symbol and a display result determination table for the second special symbol. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

Figure 20-2 (B1) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result judgment table [for the first special symbol]. The display result judgment table [for the first special symbol] is a data table for making big hit and small hit judgments for the first special symbol, and is a table in which a big hit judgment value and a small hit judgment value are set to be compared with the random number value MR1. In Figure 20-2 (B1), the top row is the big hit judgment table section, and the bottom row is the small hit judgment table section. The "probability" shown in the top row indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the bottom row indicates the probability (percentage) of a small hit.

In this example, the probability of a big win for the first special symbol is 1/319.7. The probability of a small win for the first special symbol is set to 1/200.

Figure 20-2 (B2) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result judgment table [for the second special symbol]. The display result judgment table [for the second special symbol] is a data table for making big hit and small hit judgments for the second special symbol, and is a table in which a big hit judgment value and a small hit judgment value are set to be compared with the random number value MR1. In Figure 20-2 (B2), the top row is the big hit judgment table section, and the bottom row is the small hit judgment table section. The "probability" shown in the top row indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the bottom row indicates the probability (percentage) of a small hit.

In this example, the probability of a big win with the second special symbol is 1/319.7. The probability of a small win with the second special symbol is set to 1/41.1.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which a small win is provided for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but this is not limited to the above, and a configuration in which a small win is provided for either the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be adopted. For example, a small win may be provided for the second special symbol, while a small win may not be provided for the first special symbol.

When the CPU 103 detects a start winning entry into the first start winning entry port (first start winning entry) or a start winning entry into the second start winning entry port (second start winning entry), it extracts the count value (random number value MR1) of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined timing.

For the first start winning, the extracted value is compared with the big win determination value set in the display result determination table [for the first special symbol], and if the extracted value matches any of the big win determination values, it is decided that a big win will occur for the first special symbol. Then, if the extracted value does not match any of the big win determination values, it is compared with the small win determination value set in the display result determination table [for the first special symbol], and if the extracted value matches any of the small win determination values, it is decided that a small win will occur for the first special symbol.

For the second start winning, the extracted value is compared with the big win judgment value set in the display result judgment table [for the second special symbol], and if the extracted value matches one of the big win judgment values, it is decided that the second special symbol will be a big win. Then, if the extracted value does not match one of the big win judgment values, it is compared with the small win judgment value set in the display result judgment table [for the second special symbol], and if the extracted value matches one of the small win judgment values, it is decided that the second special symbol will be a small win. Deciding on a small win also means provisionally deciding to make it a big win via a small win (it is written as provisionally decided because if no V win occurs during a small win, it will not be controlled as a big win).

Deciding whether to get a big win or not means deciding whether to transition to a big win game state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern the big win pattern. Deciding whether to get a small win or not means deciding whether to transition to a small win game state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern the small win pattern.

[Big hit type determination table]
Figures 20-3 and 20-4 are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table and the jackpot via small jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101.

Figure 20-3 shows a jackpot type determination table used to determine the type of jackpot for a pattern jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot when the game state is normal, and a jackpot type determination table via a small jackpot used to determine the type of jackpot for a jackpot via a small jackpot when a small jackpot is determined to be a jackpot when the game state is normal.

Figure 20-4 shows a jackpot type determination table used to determine the type of jackpot for a pattern jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot when the game state is in the a time-saving state or the b time-saving state, and a jackpot type determination table via small jackpot used to determine the type of jackpot for a jackpot via small jackpot when a small jackpot is determined to be a jackpot when the game state is in the a time-saving state or the b time-saving state.

These jackpot type determination tables and jackpot via small win type determination tables contain the number of time-saving controls executed after each jackpot corresponding to each jackpot type (jackpot via small win type), the type of determined decorative pattern, and a jackpot determination value, which is a number compared with the random number value MR2 used to determine the jackpot type.

<Normal state jackpot type determination table>
Fig. 20-3 (A1) is a jackpot type determination table [for first special symbol] used to determine the jackpot type of a pattern jackpot when the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot when the game state is in the normal state. Fig. 20-3 (A2) is a jackpot type determination table [for second special symbol] used to determine the jackpot type of a pattern jackpot when the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot when the game state is in the normal state.

([First special pattern] Big win type determination table)
The jackpot type determination table [for the first special pattern] in Figure 20-3 (A1) has jackpot determination values set therein that are compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type and correspond to each of the "pattern 3R normal jackpot", "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot", and "pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot".

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table for the [first special symbol], of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 119 (40%) is assigned to a "3R symbol normal jackpot", 120 to 239 (40%) is assigned to a "10Ra symbol time-saving jackpot", and 240 to 299 (20%) is assigned to a "10Rb symbol time-saving jackpot".

Figure 20-3 (A1) also shows the number of time-saving controls executed after each type of jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls is 0 for a "3R regular jackpot", 10,000 for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot", and 10,000 for a "10Rb time-saving jackpot".

Figure 20-3 (A1) also shows the type of determined decorative pattern that corresponds to each type of jackpot. In this example, the type of determined decorative pattern is an even number pattern for a "Pattern 3R normal jackpot," an odd number pattern excluding the number pattern "7" for a "Pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot," and an odd number pattern with the number pattern "7" for a "Pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot."

([Second special pattern] jackpot type determination table)
The jackpot type determination table [for the second special pattern] in Figure 20-3 (A2) has a jackpot determination value corresponding to a "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot" which is compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type.

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table for the [second special symbol], of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 299 (100%) is assigned to the "10Ra time-saving jackpot".

Figure 20-3 (A2) also shows the number of time-saving controls that are executed after a jackpot that corresponds to the type of jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls for the "10Ra time-saving jackpot" is 10,000.

Figure 20-3 (A2) also shows the type of fixed decorative pattern that corresponds to each type of jackpot. In this example, the "Pattern 10Ra Time-saving jackpot" is an odd-numbered pattern with the fixed decorative pattern type being the number pattern "7."

<Normal state small hit via big hit type judgment table>
Fig. 20-3 (B1) is a small-win via jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol] used to determine the small-win via jackpot type of a small-win via jackpot when the first special symbol is determined to be a small win when the game state is in the normal state. Fig. 20-3 (B2) is a small-win via jackpot type determination table [for the second special symbol] used to determine the small-win via jackpot type of a small-win via jackpot when the second special symbol is determined to be a small win when the game state is in the normal state.

([For the first special pattern] Small hit via big hit type judgment table)
The jackpot type determination table via small win [for the first special pattern] in Figure 20-3 (B1) has a jackpot determination value set therein that is compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type and corresponds to a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win."

In this example, in the [first special symbol] jackpot type determination table, of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 299 (100%) is assigned to "normal 10Ra time-saving jackpot via small win".

Figure 20-3 (B1) also shows the number of time-saving controls that are executed after a jackpot that corresponds to the type of jackpot via small jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls for a "normal 10Ra time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" is 10,000.

Figure 20-3 (B1) also shows the type of fixed decorative pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot via small jackpot. In this example, the type of fixed decorative pattern for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small jackpot" is a miss pattern. In this embodiment, if a V win occurs when a "normal small jackpot" occurs, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state and then to a normal state (see Figure 20-19).

([For the second special pattern] Small hit via big hit type judgment table)
The small jackpot type determination table [for the second special pattern] in Figure 20-3 (B2) has a numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR2 value for determining the jackpot type, and jackpot determination values corresponding to a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small jackpot" and a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot" are set.

In this example, in the [second special symbol] jackpot type determination table for small wins, of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 74 (25%) is assigned to "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win", and 75 to 299 (75%) is assigned to "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small win".

Figure 20-3 (B2) also shows the number of time-saving controls executed after a jackpot that corresponds to the type of jackpot via a small jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls is 10,000 for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a normal small jackpot" and 10,000 for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a time-saving small jackpot."

In addition, FIG. 20-3 (B2) also shows the type of determined decorative pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot via small win. In this example, the type of determined decorative pattern is a miss pattern or a special pattern described later for a "normal small win via 10Ra time-saving jackpot", and an odd number pattern, the number "7", for a "time-saving small win via 10Ra time-saving jackpot".

In this embodiment, the jackpot fanfare period when a jackpot or a jackpot via a small jackpot occurs in normal conditions is set to 0.1 seconds. The various effects executed during this jackpot fanfare period are referred to as fanfare effects.

In addition, the small win fanfare period when a small win occurs under normal conditions is set to 0.1 seconds. The various effects that are executed during this small win fanfare period are called small win fanfare effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, the pattern determination period is set to 0.5 seconds for all of the variable display patterns executed in the normal state (not shown).

<Table for determining the type of big win in a time-saving state and b time-saving state>
Fig. 20-4 (A1) is a jackpot type determination table [for the first special symbol] when the game state is in the time-saving state (time-saving state a or time-saving state b) and the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the first special symbol. Fig. 20-4 (A2) is a jackpot type determination table [for the second special symbol] when the game state is in the time-saving state and the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the second special symbol.

([First special symbol] Big hit type determination table)
The jackpot type determination table [for the first special pattern] in Figure 20-4 (A1) has jackpot determination values set therein that are compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type and correspond to each of the "pattern 3Rb time-saving jackpot" and "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot."

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table for the [first special symbol], of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 239 (80%) is assigned to a "symbol 3Rb time-saving jackpot", and 240 to 299 (20%) is assigned to a "symbol 10Ra time-saving jackpot".

Figure 20-4 (A1) also shows the number of time-saving controls that are executed after each type of jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls is 10,000 for a "pattern 3Rb time-saving jackpot" and 10,000 for a "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot."

Figure 20-4 (A1) also shows the type of fixed decorative pattern that corresponds to each type of jackpot. In this example, the type of fixed decorative pattern is the odd number pattern "3" for the "Pattern 3Rb Time-saving jackpot", and the odd number pattern "7" for the "Pattern 10Ra Time-saving jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 20-4 (A1), when the game state is in the time-saving state (time-saving state a or time-saving state b) and a jackpot is determined to have occurred based on the first special symbol, the jackpot type is determined to be either a "pattern 3Rb time-saving jackpot" or a "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot," so that appropriate presentation control can be performed when a jackpot is determined to have occurred based on the first special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state.

Specifically, in this embodiment, when a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" is won at the time of the first hit, the game is controlled to the b time-saving state, which essentially guarantees the next jackpot. At the time of the first hit, a presentation (3000 announcement presentation, described below) is executed to notify the player that a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded, consisting of the prize balls for the 10 rounds of the first hit (1500 balls) and the prize balls for the 10 rounds of the essentially guaranteed next jackpot (1500 balls), and the player is aware that a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded (see Figure 20-54).

In addition, if the variable display of the second special pattern is not executed for some reason despite being controlled to the b time-saving state, the variable display of the reserved memory (variable display whose execution is pending (up to 4 in this example)) of the first special pattern corresponding to the starting winning that occurred during the period until the variable display that won the first win ends may be executed. If the display result of the variable display of the first special pattern executed at this time is judged to be a "jackpot", the number of prize balls that is/will be awarded will differ depending on the type of jackpot that occurs (hereinafter referred to as "irregular special 1 jackpot")

(A) If the jackpot type of the irregular special 1 jackpot is a "pattern 3Rb time-saving jackpot",
(A1) First 10 rounds of prize balls (1,500 balls)
(A2) Irregular special 1 jackpot 3 rounds of prize balls (450 balls)
(A3) After the Irregular Special 1 jackpot, the next jackpot is essentially confirmed in the b time-saving state, with 10 rounds of prize balls (1,500 balls)
This essentially guarantees that a total of 3,450 prize balls will be awarded.

(B) If the jackpot type of the Irregular Special 1 jackpot is a "Pattern 10Ra Time-limited jackpot",
(B1) First 10 rounds of prize balls (1,500 balls)
(B2) 10 rounds of prize balls for the special irregular jackpot (1,500 balls)
This essentially guarantees that a total of 3,000 prize balls will be awarded.

In addition, in the time-saving state A that is controlled after the Irregular Special 1 jackpot, the next jackpot is not substantially determined, so here (B3) it is not considered to be substantially determined that 10 rounds' worth of prize balls (1,500 balls) will be awarded.

In this embodiment, the 3000 notification effect at the time of the first hit makes the player aware that a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded. Even if an irregular special 1 jackpot occurs, if a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the first special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state, the jackpot type is determined to be either a "Pattern 3Rb time-saving jackpot" or a "Pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot". This makes it possible to award more than 3000 prize balls, and prevents inconsistencies from occurring in the content of the 3000 notification effect at the time of the first hit, and also prevents the player from being at an excessive disadvantage in terms of the number of prize balls awarded.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the first special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state (time-saving state a or time-saving state b), the jackpot type is not determined to be a "pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot."

(C) If the jackpot type of the irregular special 1 jackpot is "Pattern 10Rb Time-saving jackpot",
(C1) First 10 rounds of prize balls (1500 balls)
(C2) Irregular special 1 jackpot 10 rounds of prize balls (1500 balls)
(A3) After the Irregular Special 1 jackpot, the next jackpot is essentially confirmed in the b time-saving state, with 10 rounds of prize balls (1,500 balls)
This would essentially guarantee that a total of 4,500 prize balls would be awarded, which would create a contradiction with the content of the 3,000 notification presentation at the time of the first win, and would also give the player an excessive advantage in terms of the number of prize balls awarded. Therefore, a "Pattern 10Rb Time-saving Jackpot" is not provided as a jackpot type when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the first special pattern when the game state is in the time-saving state.

([Second special pattern] jackpot type determination table)
The jackpot type determination table [for the second special pattern] in Figure 20-4 (A2) has a jackpot determination value corresponding to a "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot" which is compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type.

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table for the [second special symbol], of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 299 (100%) is assigned to the "10Ra time-saving jackpot".

Figure 20-4 (A2) also shows the number of time-saving controls that are executed after a jackpot that corresponds to the type of jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls for the "10Ra time-saving jackpot" is 10,000.

Figure 20-4 (A2) also shows the type of fixed decorative pattern that corresponds to the type of jackpot. In this example, the "Pattern 10Ra Time-saving jackpot" is an odd-numbered pattern with the number pattern "7" as the fixed decorative pattern type.

<Table for determining the type of big win via small win in a time-saving state and b time-saving state>
Fig. 20-4 (B1) is a small win via big win type determination table [for the first special symbol] when a small win is determined by the first special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state (a time-saving state, b time-saving state). Fig. 20-4 (B2) is a small win via big win type determination table [for the second special symbol] when a small win is determined by the second special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state.

([For the first special pattern] Small hit via big hit type judgment table)
The jackpot type determination table via small win [for the first special pattern] in Figure 20-4 (B1) has a jackpot determination value set therein that is compared with the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type and corresponds to a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win."

In this example, in the [first special symbol] jackpot type determination table, of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 299 (100%) is assigned to "normal 10Ra time-saving jackpot via small win".

Figure 20-4 (B1) also shows the number of time-saving controls that are executed after a jackpot that corresponds to the type of jackpot via small jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls for a "normal 10Ra time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" is 10,000.

In addition, FIG. 20-4 (B1) also shows the type of fixed decoration pattern that corresponds to the type of jackpot via small win. In this example, the type of fixed decoration pattern for a "normal 10Ra time-saving jackpot via small win" is a miss pattern.

([For the second special pattern] Small hit via big hit type judgment table)
The jackpot type determination table via small win [for the second special pattern] in Figure 20-4 (B2) has a numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR2 value for determining the jackpot type, and jackpot determination values corresponding to a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win" and a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small win" are set.

In this example, in the [second special symbol] jackpot type determination table for small wins, of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 74 (25%) is assigned to "10Ra time-saving jackpot via normal small win", and 75 to 299 (75%) is assigned to "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small win".

Figure 20-4 (B2) also shows the number of time-saving controls executed after a jackpot that corresponds to the type of jackpot via a small jackpot. In this example, the number of time-saving controls is 10,000 for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a normal small jackpot" and 10,000 for a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a time-saving small jackpot."

Figure 20-4 (B2) also shows the type of final decorative pattern that corresponds to the type of jackpot via small win. In this example, the type of final decorative pattern is a miss pattern in the a-time shortening state of the "10Ra time-shortening jackpot via normal small win", a special pattern in the b-time shortening state (in this example, a special pattern with the word "END" displayed), and an odd number pattern of the number "7" for the "10Ra time-shortening jackpot via time-shortening small win".

In this embodiment, the jackpot fanfare period is set to 0.1 seconds when a jackpot or a jackpot via a small jackpot occurs in the a time-saving state or the b time-saving state. The various effects executed during this jackpot fanfare period are referred to as jackpot fanfare effects.

In addition, the small win fanfare period when a small win occurs in the A time-saving state or the B time-saving normal state is set to 0.1 seconds. The various effects executed during this small win fanfare period are called small win fanfare effects.

In addition, in both the variation patterns of the variable display executed in the a time-saving state or the b time-saving state, the pattern determination period is set to 0.5 seconds (see Figures 20-15 to 20-20).

[Fluctuation pattern determination]
ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the multiple types of fluctuation patterns described above depending on the pre-determination result.

<Fluctuation patterns without reach>
In this embodiment, a fluctuation pattern without a reach (such as "long fluctuation miss", "high-speed miss", "ultra-high-speed miss", "high-speed time-saving small hit", "ultra-high-speed time-saving small hit", "entry fluctuation miss", "entry fluctuation big hit", "entry fluctuation time-saving small hit", "pseudo fluctuation miss", "straight big hit", ("high-speed normal small hit" = "high-speed miss")", etc.) is a fluctuation pattern in which a reach is not established after the fluctuation display has started and a combination of decorative patterns indicating that the fluctuation display result will be either a "miss", "big hit", "time-saving small hit", or "normal small hit" is displayed in a stopped state.

In this embodiment, among the fluctuation patterns that do not involve a reach when the fluctuation display result is "miss", when it is determined to be a "fast miss" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 1000 ms, when it is determined to be a "super fast miss" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 200 ms, when it is determined to be a "long fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 10000 ms, when it is determined to be a "entry fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 30200 ms, and when it is determined to be a "pseudo fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 2800 ms.

In addition, among the fluctuation patterns that do not involve a reach when the fluctuation display result is a "jackpot", if it is determined to be a "direct jackpot" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 10,000 ms, and if it is determined to be a "entering jackpot" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 40,000 ms.

In addition, among the fluctuation patterns that do not involve a reach when the fluctuation display result is a "time-saving small win," if it is determined to be a "high-speed time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 5,000 ms, if it is determined to be a "super-high-speed time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 500 ms, and if it is determined to be a "entering fluctuation time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 30,500 ms.

In addition, among the variation patterns that do not involve a reach when the variation display result is a "normal small hit," the variation display period is 1000 ms when the variation pattern is determined to be a "high-speed normal small hit."

Regarding the fluctuation pattern of the normal small win during the b time reduction In this embodiment, when the fluctuation display result becomes a "normal small win" in the b time reduction state, it is judged to be a fluctuation pattern of a "high-speed normal small win". This "high-speed normal small win" fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of a presentation mode similar to that of the "high-speed miss", and a combination of decorative patterns (for example, "245") corresponding to the fact that the reach is not established and the fluctuation display result is a "miss" is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display starts. When a "normal small win" occurs in the b time reduction state, even if a V winning does not occur, the state is continuously controlled to the b time reduction state (i.e., it is not controlled to the normal state (does not fall)) in this embodiment (see FIG. 20-24), and since there is no need to notify that the fluctuation display result has become a "normal small win" in the b time reduction state, a fluctuation pattern similar to that when the fluctuation display result becomes a "miss" is used.

＜Example of "Super High Speed Short Hit"＞
An example of the presentation when the fluctuation pattern is "ultra-high-speed time-saving small hit" will be explained using Figure 20-5.

Figure 20-5 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation image for each presentation related to the fluctuation pattern being "ultra-high-speed short-time hit."

Figures 20-5 (1) and (2) are similar to Figures 20-28 (1) and (2) described below in terms of the various effect images and third decorative patterns corresponding to the effect mode being [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], so the explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-5 (3), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be displayed in a reduced size, the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative symbols in a reduced size in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative symbols at this time is the combination of third decorative symbols (in this example, "777") that corresponds to the display result of the variable display being a "small time-saving win."

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-5 (4), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be displayed statically, the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") that results in a "small time-saving win" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (i.e., a symbol matching performance is being performed for the third decorative symbols). At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r are displaying variable small symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-5 (5), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (i.e., the symbol matching performance is being executed for the third decorative symbol). At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "777") is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-5 (6), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts a small win game in the small win game state, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a small win game start image on the image display device 5. This small win game start image is an image that includes a small win right hit promotion image that includes the text "Aim for the V!!" to win a V and an arrow image that instructs a right hit, and an ally character.

[Inrush fluctuation]
In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern executed in the first fluctuation of the a-time shortening state when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 (i.e., the first fluctuation of the first controlled "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH") is composed of a fluctuation pattern (first half) and a fluctuation pattern (second half). In the fluctuation pattern (first half), for example, a "entry fluctuation" fluctuation pattern is executed. In this embodiment, after the "entry fluctuation" fluctuation pattern is executed in the fluctuation pattern (first half), a fluctuation pattern (second half) according to each fluctuation display result is executed.

In the variation pattern (second half), a variation display of a decorative pattern is executed to notify the display result of the variation display. This presentation is called the "display result notification variation presentation." In the display result notification variation presentation of the variation pattern (second half), for example, if the variation display result is a "miss," a variation display of a "super-fast miss" variation pattern (200 ms) is executed, and if the variation display result is a "time-saving small win," a variation display of a "super-fast time-saving small win" variation pattern (500 ms) is executed.

The "entering fluctuation" of the fluctuation pattern (first half) is a fluctuation pattern in which, after information suggesting the currently controlled performance mode is displayed, a pseudo-fluctuation performance of the decorative symbols (a performance in which the display of the decorative symbols starts to fluctuate, the combination of decorative symbols that is a "miss" without a reach is temporarily stopped, and then the display of the decorative symbols starts to fluctuate, the combination of decorative symbols that is a "miss" without a reach is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-fluctuation is repeated) is executed, and at a predetermined timing, information suggesting the currently controlled performance mode is displayed again and information suggesting that the currently controlled performance mode will start is displayed (see Figures 20-7 to 20-9). In the following, the series of performances from the start of the display of the decorative symbols to the temporary stop of the combination of decorative symbols that is a "miss" without a reach is appropriately referred to as a "unit pseudo-fluctuation". Therefore, a pseudo-fluctuation performance is a performance in which multiple unit pseudo-fluctuations are executed.

In the "entry fluctuation" of this embodiment, the information suggesting the currently controlled presentation mode is the words "Super High Speed" or "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" (hereinafter referred to as "mode start suggestion presentation"), and the information suggesting that the currently controlled presentation mode will start is the words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" or "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH Entry" (hereinafter referred to as "mode start notification presentation").

In addition, the pseudo-fluctuation effect of the decorative symbols in the "entry fluctuation" is such that the second unit pseudo-fluctuation period is shorter than the period from when the first decorative symbol fluctuation display starts until the combination of decorative symbols that does not reach the winning position and is a "miss" stops temporarily (hereinafter referred to as the "unit pseudo-fluctuation period" as appropriate), and the third unit pseudo-fluctuation period is shorter than the second unit pseudo-fluctuation period. From then on, the unit pseudo-fluctuation period becomes shorter each time a pseudo-fluctuation is executed, in other words, the speed of the pseudo-fluctuation becomes faster at an accelerated rate. Below, this type of pseudo-fluctuation effect is referred to as the "accelerated pseudo-fluctuation effect" as appropriate. In this example, in the accelerated pseudo-fluctuation effect, a total of seven unit pseudo-fluctuations are executed.

In this way, by executing the accelerated pseudo-fluctuation presentation in the fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation of the "entry fluctuation" of the "ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH" that was controlled for the first time, it is possible to impress upon the player that the consumption speed of the fluctuation display of [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is faster than the consumption speed of the fluctuation display of other presentation modes.

In this embodiment, when the pseudo-change of the decorative pattern (the "third decorative pattern" described later) during the acceleration pseudo-change performance is executed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, if the third decorative pattern temporarily stops, the base pattern and the number pattern are included, but the light effect display is not included. At this time, the display color of the third decorative pattern is displayed in each color (blue, red, gold), and the display color inside the number pattern is displayed in a manner that makes it appear to shine (hereinafter referred to as the "special mode" as appropriate). In this way, when the third decorative pattern temporarily stops during the acceleration pseudo-change performance, the third decorative pattern is displayed in a manner that does not include the light effect display, but by being displayed in a special mode, the player can be made aware that the change currently being executed is a pseudo-change.

In addition, when the accelerated pseudo-fluctuation presentation ends and a fluctuation display is executed to notify the display result of the fluctuation display, the third decorative pattern is not displayed in a special manner, which allows the player to recognize that the currently executed fluctuation is not a pseudo-fluctuation, that is, it is a fluctuation display of a decorative pattern to actually notify the display result.

In addition, in this embodiment, at a predetermined timing during the jackpot ending period of the jackpot game state in which the jackpot occurrence count value is 3, the word "READY" is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify that the "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH" will start (the "entry fluctuation" will start).

<Example of "entry fluctuation miss">
An example of the presentation when the fluctuation pattern is "entry fluctuation miss" will be explained using Figure 20-6 and Figures 20-7 to 20-10.

Figure 20-6 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each related effect when the fluctuation pattern is "entry fluctuation miss", and Figures 20-7 to 20-10 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the performance images of each related effect when the fluctuation pattern is "entry fluctuation miss".

First, as shown in FIG. 20-7 (1), at a predetermined timing during the jackpot ending period in the jackpot game state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the word "READY" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-7 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T1 shown in FIG. 20-6), the performance control CPU 120 executes a mode start indication performance and displays the word "Super High Speed" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figures 20-7 (3) to (7), during the period from 10 seconds after the CPU 103 starts the display of the second special symbol to 17.5 seconds after the second special symbol is displayed (the period from T2 to T3 (7.5 seconds) shown in Figure 20-6), the performance control CPU 120 executes an accelerated pseudo-fluctuation performance (first unit pseudo-fluctuation), and executes a pseudo-fluctuation of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. As shown in Figures 20-7 (3), (6), and (7), when the third decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a special manner.

As shown in FIG. 20-7 (7), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a mode start indication presentation and causes the words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" to be displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" are an image with a higher display priority than the third decorative symbol. Therefore, to the player, it appears as if the words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" and the third decorative symbol are displayed in that order.

At this time, the display mode of the "ULTRA-SPEED HYPER RUSH" characters is displayed with reduced visibility compared to the display mode of the "ULTRA-SPEED HYPER RUSH" characters displayed in the mode start notification effect after the acceleration pseudo-fluctuation effect has ended. In this example, the "ULTRA-SPEED HYPER RUSH" characters during the acceleration pseudo-fluctuation effect are displayed in light white characters, while the "ULTRA-SPEED HYPER RUSH" characters during the mode start notification effect after the acceleration pseudo-fluctuation effect has ended are displayed in thick black characters.

Next, as shown in Figures 20-7 (8) to 20-8 (11), during the period from when 17.5 seconds have elapsed since the CPU 103 started the display of the second special symbol to when 21 seconds have elapsed (the period from T3 to T4 (3.5 seconds) shown in Figure 20-6), the performance control CPU 120 executes an accelerated pseudo-fluctuation performance (second unit pseudo-fluctuation), and executes a pseudo-fluctuation of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. As shown in Figures 20-8 (10) and (11), when the third decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a special manner.

As shown in FIG. 20-8 (11), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a mode start indication presentation and displays the words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-8 (12) and onwards, after 21 seconds have elapsed since the CPU 103 started displaying the variation of the second special symbol (timing T4 shown in FIG. 20-6), the performance control CPU 120 executes an accelerated pseudo-variation performance (third to eighth unit pseudo-variations), and executes a pseudo-variation of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in Figure 20-9 (13) to (15), the performance control CPU 120 executes an accelerated pseudo-fluctuation performance (the seventh unit pseudo-fluctuation), and executes a pseudo-fluctuation of the third decorative pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-9 (16), when 25.5 seconds have elapsed since the CPU 103 started the varying display of the second special symbol (timing T9 shown in FIG. 20-6), the performance control CPU 120 ends the accelerated pseudo-variation performance, erases the third decorative symbol from the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, executes a mode start notification performance, and displays the words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" (in thick black letters) in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-9 (17), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the mode start notification presentation and displays the words "Entering ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH" (in thick black text) in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-9 (18) to FIG. 20-10 (21), during the period from when 30 seconds have elapsed since the CPU 103 started the variable display of the second special symbol to when 30.2 seconds have elapsed (the period from T10 to T11 shown in FIG. 20-6), the performance control CPU 120 ends the mode start notification performance, erases the words "Entering Ultra-High-Speed HYPER RUSH" from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, executes the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and stops (stops display, confirms and stops) the combination of the confirmed third decorative symbols (in this example, "145") that results in a "miss". At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "145") is confirmed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance does not display the third decorative pattern in a special manner when the third decorative pattern stops (stop display, confirmed stop) based on the fact that the third decorative pattern is being displayed in a manner that includes a light effect display, not in a pseudo-variation manner, in order to notify the display result of the actual change display. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance also displays on the image display device 5 various performance images corresponding to the performance mode being [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] (see Figures 20-28 described later).

In this embodiment, when controlled in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], if a "normal small win" occurs with a small number of fluctuation displays, the [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] is controlled at a high rate, which selects a fluctuation pattern with an extremely short fluctuation display period ("Super High Speed Miss" (0.2 seconds)) compared to other presentation modes. This may cause the player to end [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] without having fully played, which can only be controlled after multiple big wins have occurred.

In consideration of the occurrence of such a situation, the first controlled [Ultra-High Speed HYPER
By executing the "entry fluctuation" fluctuation pattern (30 seconds or more) at a rate of 100% in the first fluctuation of [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], it is possible to ensure a control period of at least 30 seconds for [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] even if the player falls out of [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] at an early stage.

In addition, in the first fluctuation of the first controlled [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], the "entry fluctuation" fluctuation pattern (accelerated pseudo fluctuation presentation) is executed at a rate of 100%. Therefore, even if you fall off the [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] at an early stage, pseudo fluctuations of the decorative symbols similar to the fluctuation display of the third decorative symbol in the [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] are executed multiple times, so that you can play the fluctuation display of the third decorative symbol in the [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] at least multiple times, even though it is a pseudo fluctuation.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to change the length of the jackpot ending period depending on the number of jackpots that occur, so for example, the jackpot ending period for a jackpot with a jackpot occurrence count value of 3 (i.e., the jackpot immediately before control to "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH" for the first time) can be set to 30 seconds, and during this period, it is possible to display information suggesting that control to [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH] will occur for the first time after the jackpot (such as the words "ultra-high speed", "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH", or "entering ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH").

However, in pachinko gaming machines, it is prohibited to display decorative patterns or perform similar presentations during the jackpot game state (jackpot ending period). Therefore, although it is possible to display information suggesting that control will be switched to [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] for the first time during the jackpot ending period, it is not possible to execute an accelerated pseudo-variation presentation, and it is not possible to inform the player that the speed at which the [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] display changes is consumed is faster than the speed at which the display changes in other presentation modes.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the accelerated pseudo-fluctuation effect and the display of information suggesting that control will be changed to [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] for the first time are displayed during the first fluctuation controlled by [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], not during the jackpot ending period.

[Pseudo fluctuation deviation]
In this embodiment, the "pseudo fluctuation miss" variation pattern is a variation pattern in which a unit pseudo fluctuation of a decorative pattern (the "third decorative pattern" described later) is executed three times in succession, and after the third unit pseudo fluctuation is completed, a variable display of the third decorative pattern is executed to notify that the display result is a "miss", and a combination of decorative patterns indicating that the display result is a "miss" is displayed in a stopped state (see Figures 20-12 and 20-13). That is, this is a variation pattern in which three unit pseudo fluctuations and one variable display to notify the display result of the variable display are executed. The performance in which a variable display to notify the display result of the variable display is executed is called a "display result notification variable performance".

In this embodiment, the pseudo-fluctuation presentation of the decorative symbols in the "pseudo-fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern is such that the first unit pseudo-fluctuation period, the second unit pseudo-fluctuation period, and the third unit pseudo-fluctuation period are all set to 700 ms, which is the period during which the decorative symbols perform the pseudo-fluctuation (200 ms) plus the period during which the decorative symbols temporarily stop (500 ms). In other words, a configuration is adopted in which the speed of all three unit pseudo-fluctuations is executed at the same speed (uniform speed). Hereinafter, this type of pseudo-fluctuation presentation will be referred to as "uniform speed pseudo-fluctuation presentation" as appropriate.

In this embodiment, when the pseudo-fluctuation of the decorative symbols during the uniform speed pseudo-fluctuation performance is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, if the third decorative symbol temporarily stops, the configuration includes the base symbol, the number symbol, and a light effect display. At this time, the display color of the third decorative symbol is displayed in each color (blue, red, gold), and the display color inside the number symbol is displayed in a manner that makes it appear to shine (hereinafter referred to as a "special manner" as appropriate). In this way, when the third decorative symbol temporarily stops during the uniform speed pseudo-fluctuation performance, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a special manner, which allows the player to recognize that the currently executed fluctuation is a pseudo-fluctuation.

In addition, when the uniform speed pseudo-variation presentation ends and a variation display is executed to notify the display result of the variation display, the third decorative pattern is not displayed in a special manner, thereby allowing the player to recognize that the variation currently being executed is not a pseudo-variation.

<Example of "pseudo fluctuation miss">
An example of the presentation when the fluctuation pattern is a "pseudo fluctuation miss" will be explained using Figure 20-11 and Figures 20-12 to 20-13.

Figure 20-11 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each related effect when the fluctuation pattern is a "pseudo fluctuation miss," and Figures 20-12 to 20-13 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the performance images of each related effect when the fluctuation pattern is a "pseudo fluctuation miss."

First, as shown in Figures 20-12 (1) to (3), during the period from when the CPU 103 starts the varying display of the second special symbol to when 0.7 seconds have elapsed (the period from T1 to T2 shown in Figure 20-11), the performance control CPU 120 executes a uniform speed pseudo-variation performance (first unit pseudo-variation), and executes a pseudo-variation of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. As shown in Figure 20-12 (3), when the third decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a special manner.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display various performance images corresponding to the performance mode being [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] (see Figure 20-28 described later).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (4) to (6), in the period from 0.7 seconds after the CPU 103 starts the varying display of the second special symbol to 1.4 seconds after (the period from T2 to T3 shown in FIG. 20-11), the performance control CPU 120 executes a uniform speed pseudo-variation performance (second unit pseudo-variation), and executes a pseudo-variation of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 20-12 (6), when the third decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a special manner.

Next, as shown in Fig. 20-12 (7) to Fig. 20-13 (9), during the period from 1.4 seconds after the CPU 103 starts the varying display of the second special symbol to 2.1 seconds after (the period from T3 to T4 shown in Fig. 20-11), the performance control CPU 120 executes a uniform speed pseudo-variation performance (third unit pseudo-variation), and executes a pseudo-variation of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. As shown in Fig. 20-13 (9), when the third decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a special manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-13 (10) to (13), during the period from 2.1 seconds after the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol to 2.8 seconds after (the period from T4 to T5 shown in FIG. 20-6), the performance control CPU 120 ends the uniform speed pseudo-variation performance, ends the pseudo-variation of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, executes the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and stops (stop display, fixed stop) the confirmed third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "145") that results in a "miss". At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "145") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the third decorative pattern in a special manner when the third decorative pattern stops (stop display, confirmed stop), based on the fact that the third decorative pattern is actually being displayed to notify the display result of the change display, not a pseudo change.

[Direct hit]
In this embodiment, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or more and the result of the change display of the second special symbol is a "jackpot" in the a time-saving state (i.e., "ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH") or b time-saving state (i.e., "invincible RUSH"), the change pattern of "direct jackpot" is executed.

The "straight big win" variation pattern is one in which the decorative symbols are hidden after the variation display starts, and the variation display ends with the decorative symbols remaining hidden. In this variation pattern, when the variation display ends, the combination of small symbols that indicates that the variation display result is a "big win" is fixed and stopped (see Figure 20-14).

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is equipped with a light emitting device, and when a jackpot occurrence count value is 3 and a jackpot occurs based on the variable display result of the second special pattern being a "jackpot" in the a time-saving state (i.e., "ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH") or b time-saving state (i.e., "invincible RUSH"), the special variable winning ball device 7 can be made to emit light at a timing controlled to the jackpot game state.

＜Example of a direct hit＞
An example of the presentation when the fluctuation pattern is a "straight big hit" will be explained using Figure 20-14.

Figure 20-14 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation image for each presentation related to the variation pattern of "straight big hit."

First, as shown in FIG. 20-14 (1), the performance control CPU 120 displays the confirmed third decorative pattern combination (in this example, "245") of the variable display executed immediately before in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small pattern combination (in this example, "245") is displayed in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display various performance images corresponding to the performance mode being [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] (see Figure 20-28 described later).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-14 (2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the next second special pattern (the variable display corresponding to the first of the four reserved memories), the performance control CPU 120 erases the third decorative pattern from the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small patterns is started in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-14 (3), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received a symbol determination command, stops and determines the combination of small symbols (in this example, "777") that indicates a "jackpot" display result in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5 with the third decorative symbol erased (i.e., the symbol matching performance is not executed for the third decorative symbol). At this time, the active display 02TM03 corresponding to the currently executing variable display is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-14 (4), when the CPU 103 starts a round game (first round) in the jackpot game state, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a jackpot round game start image. This jackpot round game start image is an image that includes a round display (in this example, the characters "Round 1") indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot round game, a jackpot right-hit promotion image including the characters "Aim for the attacker!!" and an arrow image indicating a right hit to enter the jackpot winning hole, and an ally character. At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the special variable winning ball device 7 to emit light.

In this embodiment, when the time-saving state is controlled, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed frequently, and there are many situations in which a big win occurs when the display result is judged to be a "small win." However, when the time-saving state is controlled, if the display result is judged to be a "big win," the player feels disappointed that they would have been better off winning in the normal state.

When such a situation occurs, the display result is judged to be a "jackpot", and thus information indicating that a jackpot has occurred (the words "Aim for the attacker!!" (or the words "Aim for the V!!" in the case of a jackpot via a small jackpot)) is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is illuminated to direct the player's attention from the image display device 5 to the big winning hole, thereby reducing the disappointment felt by the player at the occurrence of a jackpot due to the display result being judged to be a "jackpot".

<Fluctuating patterns with normal reach>
In this embodiment, a fluctuation pattern accompanying a normal reach (such as "high-speed normal reach miss" or "high-speed normal reach time-saving small hit") is one in which, after the reach state is established, the final display result is confirmed and stopped without the super reach performance (challenge performance, fall performance, etc.) described below being executed.

In this embodiment, among the variation patterns involving normal reach when the variation display result is "miss", the variation display period is 3000 ms when it is determined to be a "high-speed normal reach miss" variation pattern.

In addition, among the fluctuation patterns with normal reach when the fluctuation display result is "time-saving small hit", if it is determined to be a "high-speed normal reach time-saving small hit" fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation display period is 7000 ms.

<Fluctuating patterns with super reach>
In this embodiment, in a fluctuation pattern involving a super reach ("Super reach A miss", "Super reach B miss", "Super reach C miss", "Super reach A time-saving small hit", "Super reach A big hit", "Super reach B normal small hit", "Super reach C time-saving small hit"), the final display result is confirmed and stopped by executing a super reach performance that notifies whether a "big hit", "time-saving small hit", or "normal small hit" has been won.

(Super Reach A (challenge performance))
In this embodiment, in the variation patterns of "Super Reach A Miss", "Super Reach A Time-saving Small Win" and "Super Reach A Big Win" among the variation patterns accompanying the Super Reach, the reach state is established with the start of the variation display, and the Super Reach A performance (hereinafter referred to as "challenge performance") is executed, which notifies whether or not the "time-saving small win" or "big win" has been won by the ally character performing the action of throwing a bomb at the rock. Here, if the final display result is "miss", a performance in which the ally character fails the challenge (failure performance) is executed. In the failure performance, a miss pattern is stopped and displayed in the pattern display area. On the other hand, if the final display result is "time-saving small win" or "big win", a performance in which the ally character succeeds in the challenge (success performance) is executed (see FIG. 20-58). In the failure performance, a big win pattern is stopped and displayed in the pattern display area (pattern alignment performance is executed).

(Super Reach B (Fall-inducing performance))
In this embodiment, in the variation patterns of "Super Reach B Miss" and "Super Reach B Normal Small Win" among the variation patterns accompanying the Super Reach, when the variation display starts, a fall suggestion display (in this example, an image including a triangular object containing "!" and the word "WARNING") is displayed, and then the reach state is established, and a Super Reach B effect (hereinafter referred to as "fall encouraging effect" as appropriate) is executed, which notifies whether or not a "normal small win" has been won by operating the push button 31B for the special pattern (the special pattern of the word "END" indicating that the time-saving state is ending) provisionally stopped in the pattern display area 5C. Here, if the final display result is "miss", the provisionally stopped special pattern is successfully destroyed, and an effect (fall avoidance effect) in which a miss pattern is definitely stopped in the pattern display area 5C is executed. On the other hand, if the final display result is a "normal small win," the temporarily stopped special symbol fails to be destroyed, and an effect (confirmed fall effect) is executed in which the special symbol is confirmed to stop in the symbol display area 5C (see Figure 20-61).

(Super Reach C (instant hit on button))
In this embodiment, among the variation patterns involving a super reach, in the variation patterns of "Super reach C miss" and "Super reach C time-saving small win", the reach is not established after the variation display has started, and an operation prompting display imitating the push button 31B and a time bar to notify the remaining period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid are displayed in each region of the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and each time the push button 31B is operated once, a decorative pattern is displayed stationary in each pattern display area (for example, the pattern display areas 5R → 5L → 5C are displayed in that order), and by operating the push button 31B a total of three times, a combination of decorative patterns is displayed stationary in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby executing a super reach C performance (hereinafter referred to as "button immediate win performance" as appropriate).

If the final display result is a "miss", an effect (miss pattern effect) is executed in which a decorative pattern combination (miss pattern) that results in a "miss" final display result is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. On the other hand, if the final display result is a "small time-saving win", an effect (matching pattern effect) is executed in which a decorative pattern combination (odd number 7 pattern "777") that results in a "small time-saving win" final display result is displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (not shown).

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which Super Reach A to Super Reach C were provided as types of Super Reach, but this is not limited to the above, and types of Super Reach other than Super Reach A to Super Reach C may also be provided as types of Super Reach.

For example, a super reach D is provided as a super reach. In the variation patterns of "super reach D miss", "super reach D small time-saving hit" and "super reach D big hit" among the variation patterns accompanying the super reach, a reach state is established with the start of the variation display, and a super reach D performance (hereinafter referred to as "battle performance" as appropriate) is executed to notify whether or not the "small time-saving hit" or "big hit" has been won by the ally character battling the enemy character. Here, if the final display result is a "miss", a performance (defeat performance) in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed. On the other hand, if the final display result is a "small time-saving hit" or a "big hit", a performance (victory performance) in which the ally character wins against the enemy character is executed. The ally character appearing in this battle performance is associated with the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 described later.

Here, we will explain the fluctuation pattern determination during Dream RUSH, ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH, and Invincible RUSH (see Figure 20-25) described later. Specifically, the following fluctuation pattern determination tables are prepared in advance: a fluctuation pattern determination table for "miss" which is used when it is pre-determined that the fluctuation display result will be "miss", a fluctuation pattern determination table for "jackpot" which is used when it is pre-determined that the fluctuation display result will be "jackpot", a fluctuation pattern determination table for "time-saving small hit" which is used when it is pre-determined that the fluctuation display result will be "time-saving small hit", and a fluctuation pattern determination table for "normal small hit" which is used when it is pre-determined that the fluctuation display result will be "normal small hit".

[For misses] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned as the determination value for each of the fluctuation patterns: "long fluctuation miss", "high-speed miss", "high-speed normal reach miss", "super reach A miss", "super reach B miss", "ultra-high-speed miss", "super reach C miss", and "entry fluctuation miss".

[For jackpots] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value for each of the fluctuation patterns of "Super Reach A jackpot", "Entry fluctuation jackpot", and "Direct jackpot".

[For time-saving small hits] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned as a determination value for each of the fluctuation patterns: "high-speed time-saving small hit", "high-speed normal reach time-saving small hit", "super reach A time-saving small hit", "entering fluctuation time-saving small hit", "ultra-high-speed time-saving small hit", and "super reach C time-saving small hit".

[For normal small hits] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value for each of the fluctuation patterns of "Super reach B normal small hit", "Entry fluctuation normal small hit", and "High-speed normal small hit".

In this embodiment, the jackpot includes a pattern jackpot that occurs directly based on the variable display of the first or second special pattern, and a small jackpot via small jackpot that occurs by V entry via a small jackpot based on the variable display of the first or second special pattern, so different variable patterns are used when the display result is a "jackpot" and when the display result is a "small jackpot." However, this is not limited to this form, and a common variable pattern may be used when the display result is a "jackpot" and when the display result is a "small jackpot."

<[For a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2)], [For 0 reserved items] Fluctuation pattern judgment table>
20-15(1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [0 reserved balls] in [a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2)] in this embodiment. Also, in this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2 in the a time-saving state, the performance mode is controlled to "Dream Rush" (see FIG. 20-25). That is, FIG. 20-15(1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [0 reserved balls] in [a time-saving state (Dream Rush)] in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 20-15 (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern judgment table, of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 700 are assigned to the "long fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern, 701 to 800 to the "high-speed miss" fluctuation pattern, 801 to 900 to the "high-speed normal reach miss" fluctuation pattern, 901 to 950 to the "super reach A miss" fluctuation pattern, and 951 to 997 to the "super reach B miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-15 (2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the "Super Reach A Jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-15 (3), in the [Time-saving small win] fluctuation pattern judgment table, of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 300 are assigned to the "high-speed time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, 301 to 500 are assigned to the "high-speed normal reach time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, and 501 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach A time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-15 (4), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [normal small hits], of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach B normal small hit."

<[For a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2)], [for reserved 1 to 4] fluctuation pattern judgment table>
20-16(1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [reserved 1 to 4 balls] in [a time-saving state (big hit occurrence count value = 1, 2)] in this embodiment. That is, FIG. 20-16(1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [reserved 1 to 4 balls] in [a time-saving state (Dream RUSH)] in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 20-16 (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern judgment table, of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 800 are assigned to the "high-speed miss" fluctuation pattern, 801 to 900 to the "high-speed normal reach miss" fluctuation pattern, 901 to 950 to the "super reach A miss" fluctuation pattern, and 951 to 997 to the "super reach B miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-16 (2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the "Super Reach A Jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-16 (3), in the [Time-saving small win] fluctuation pattern judgment table, of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 300 are assigned to the "high-speed time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, 301 to 500 are assigned to the "high-speed normal reach time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, and 501 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach A time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-16 (4), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [normal small hits], of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach B normal small hit."

<[For [a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3)], [1st fluctuation] fluctuation pattern judgment table>
20-17(1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the first fluctuation in the a time-saving state (big win occurrence count value = 3) in this embodiment. Also, in this example, when the big win occurrence count value = 3 in the a time-saving state, the performance mode is controlled to "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH" (see FIG. 20-25). That is, FIG. 20-17(1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the first fluctuation in the a time-saving state (ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH) controlled for the first time after the first win in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 20-17 (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern judgment table, of the range of judgment values for MR3 from 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the "entry fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-17 (2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the "entering fluctuation jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-17 (3), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [time-saving small win], of the MR3 determination value range of 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the "entering fluctuation time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-17 (4), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [normal small hit], of the range of MR3 determination values from 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "entering fluctuation normal small hit".

<[a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10,000), [0 reserved]] fluctuation pattern judgment table>
20-18(1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [0 reserved balls] in [a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10000)] in this embodiment. Note that when the jackpot occurrence count value = 3, the first fluctuation is excluded. Also, in this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10000 in the a time-saving state, the presentation mode is controlled to "ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH" (see FIG. 20-25). That is, FIG. 20-18(1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [0 reserved balls] in [a time-saving state (ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH)] in this embodiment (when the jackpot occurrence count value = 3, the first fluctuation is excluded).

As shown in Figure 20-18 (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern judgment table, of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 700 are assigned to the "pseudo fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern, 701 to 900 are assigned to the "ultra-fast miss" fluctuation pattern, 901 to 950 are assigned to the "super reach C miss" fluctuation pattern, and 951 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach B miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-18 (2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the "direct jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-18 (3), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table for [time-saving small wins], of the MR3 judgment value range of 1 to 997, 1 to 700 are assigned to the "ultra-fast time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, and 701 to 997 are assigned to the "super-reach C time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-18 (4), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [normal small hits], of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach B normal small hit."

<[a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10000), [reserved 1 to 4]] fluctuation pattern judgment table>
20-19(1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [reserved 1 to 4 balls] in [a time-saving state (jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10000)] in this embodiment. Note that when the jackpot occurrence count value = 3, the first fluctuation is excluded. Also, in this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value = 3 to 10000 in the a time-saving state, the presentation mode is controlled to "ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH" (see FIG. 20-25). That is, FIG. 20-19(1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for [reserved 1 to 4 balls] in [a time-saving state (ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH)] in this embodiment (when the jackpot occurrence count value = 3, the first fluctuation is excluded).

As shown in Figure 20-19 (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern judgment table, of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 900 are assigned to the "ultra-fast miss" fluctuation pattern, 901 to 975 are assigned to the "super reach C miss" fluctuation pattern, and 976 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach B miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-19 (2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the "direct jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-19 (3), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table for [time-saving small wins], of the MR3 judgment value range of 1 to 997, 1 to 700 are assigned to the "ultra-fast time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern, and 701 to 997 are assigned to the "super-reach C time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-19 (4), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [normal small hits], of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach B normal small hit."

<[b time-saving state] fluctuation pattern determination table>
20-20(1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the b time-saving state in this embodiment. In this example, when the b time-saving state is selected, the performance mode is controlled to "invincible RUSH" (see FIG. 20-25). That is, FIG. 20-20(1) to (4) are specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table for the b time-saving state (invincible RUSH) in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 20-20 (1), in the [miss] fluctuation pattern judgment table, of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the "fast miss" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-20 (2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the "direct jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-20 (3), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for [time-saving small wins], of the range of MR3 determination values from 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the "high-speed time-saving small win" fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 20-20 (4), in the [normal small hit] fluctuation pattern determination table, of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 997 is assigned to the "high-speed normal small hit" fluctuation pattern.

In this way, during the period when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state a, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 to 10,000 (above the mode switching judgment value), the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed non-reach miss" fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation display period shorter than 1000 ms is executed is approximately 80%. On the other hand, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 or 2 (below the mode switching judgment value), the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed non-reach miss" fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation display period shorter than 1000 ms is executed is 0%. Therefore, when the jackpot occurrence count value is equal to or greater than the mode switching judgment value of "3", the rate at which the fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation display period shorter than 1000 ms is executed is higher than when the jackpot occurrence count value is less than the mode switching judgment value of "3".

[Control table after winning by game state]
FIG. 20-21 is an explanatory diagram showing a control table after a win according to each game state in this embodiment. FIG. 20-21 (1) shows the game state controlled after a win when the display result is "big win" when the game state is in the normal state, according to each display result (big win type). Also, FIG. 20-21 (2) shows the game state controlled after a win when the display result is "small win" when the game state is in the a time-saving state, according to each display result (small win type) and the occurrence of V winning. Also, FIG. 20-21 (3) shows the game state controlled after a win when the display result is "small win" when the game state is in the b time-saving state, according to each display result (small win type) and the occurrence of V winning.

As shown in FIG. 20-21(1), when the game state is in the normal state,
(No. 1-1) If the display result is "3R normal jackpot", it will be controlled to the normal state after the jackpot.
(No. 1-2) If the display result is "Pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot", it will be controlled to the a time-saving state after the jackpot,
(No. 1-3) If the display result is "Pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot," the reel will be controlled to the b time-saving state after the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 20-21(2), when the game state is in the time-saving state a,
(No. 2-1) If the display result is "normal small hit" and no V winning occurs during the small hit, it will be controlled to the normal state after the small hit.
(No. 2-2) If the display result is "normal small hit" and a V entry occurs during the small hit, it will be controlled to the normal state after the big hit via the small hit.
(No. 2-3) If the display result is "Time-limited small win" and no V-winning occurs during the small win, the game will be controlled to the normal state after the small win.
(No. 2-4) If the display result is a "time-saving small hit" and a V win occurs during the small hit, the reel will be controlled to a time-saving state after a big hit via the small hit.

As shown in FIG. 20-21 (3), when the game state is in the b time-saving state,
(No. 3-1) If the display result is "normal small hit" and no V winning occurs during the small hit, the game is controlled to the b time reduction state after the small hit.
(No. 3-2) If the display result is "normal small hit" and a V entry occurs during the small hit, it will be controlled to the normal state after the big hit via the small hit.
(No. 3-3) If the display result is "Time-limited small win" and no V-winning occurs during the small win, the game will be controlled to the normal state after the small win.
(No. 3-4) If the display result is a "time-saving small hit" and a V win occurs during the small hit, the reel will be controlled to a time-saving state after a big hit via the small hit.

In this way, when the game state is in the a time-saving state, (No. 2-1) the display result becomes "normal small win", and if no V win occurs during the small win, the game is controlled to the normal state after the small win, whereas when the game state is in the b time-saving state, (No. 3-1) the display result becomes "normal small win", and if no V win occurs during the small win, the game is controlled to the b time-saving state after the small win.

[Special symbol stop processing]
FIG. 20-22 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop processing (S113) in the special symbol process processing.

First, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot flag is on (step S02TM1010).

In this embodiment, the jackpot flag is provided in a specified area of the RAM 102, and is set to the ON state based on a decision in the normal special symbol processing (S110) of FIG. 16 to control the variable display result of the special symbol game to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". On the other hand, it is cleared to the OFF state based on the jackpot symbol being displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game.

If the jackpot flag is on (YES in step S02TM1010), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start presentation waiting time (step S02TM1020) and proceeds to step S02TM1030. In the processing of step S02TM1020, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the jackpot start presentation waiting time is set in a game control process timer provided in a specified area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a jackpot start command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step S02TM1030), clears the jackpot flag to the off state (step S02TM1040), and proceeds to step S02TM1050.

In this embodiment, the jackpot start designation command is a command (jackpot fanfare command) that designates the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a jackpot game state, and is included in the presentation control command supplied from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12. In the jackpot start designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variable display result and the result of determining the jackpot type. In the processing of step S02TM1030, setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the jackpot start designation command table prepared in advance for sending the jackpot start designation command is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer.

Next, the CPU 103 updates the jackpot occurrence count value, which is a predetermined numerical data, by adding 1 (step S02TM1050), updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing (S114) (step S02TM1060), and ends the process.

In this embodiment, the jackpot occurrence count value as the predetermined numerical data is the stored value of the jackpot occurrence counter. The jackpot occurrence counter is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and counts the number of times that it has been determined to control to a jackpot in the game state, including the first jackpot that triggered the control to the jackpot game state, in a manner that allows identification.

In this example, the jackpot occurrence counter is set to an initial count value of "0" as the initial state, and is updated by adding "1" to the jackpot occurrence count value, which is a stored value, each time it is decided to control to a jackpot, including the first jackpot that triggered control to the jackpot game state. Then, when the number of times it is decided to control to a jackpot, including the first jackpot that triggered control to the jackpot game state, reaches a limit value (10,000 times in this embodiment) as a predetermined upper limit value (when limit is reached: jackpot occurrence count value = 10,000), the jackpot occurrence counter is cleared and the jackpot occurrence count value is initialized to "0". After that, the jackpot occurrence count value is added by "1" each time it is decided to control to a jackpot, including the first jackpot, until the limit value is reached again.

In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the jackpot occurrence count value is updated by adding 1, but this is not limited to the above, and the jackpot occurrence count value may be updated by subtracting 1.

For example, the jackpot occurrence counter is set to an initial count value of "10000" as the initial state, and is updated by subtracting "1" from the stored jackpot occurrence count value each time it is determined that a jackpot should be controlled, including the first jackpot that triggered control to the jackpot game state. Then, when the number of times it is determined that a jackpot should be controlled, including the first jackpot that triggered control to the jackpot game state, reaches a limit value (10000 times in this embodiment) as a predetermined upper limit (when limit is reached: jackpot occurrence count value = 0), the jackpot occurrence counter is cleared and the jackpot occurrence count value is initialized to "10000". After that, the jackpot occurrence count value is subtracted "1" each time it is determined that a jackpot should be controlled, including the first jackpot, until the limit value is reached again.

Also, if the big win flag is off in step S02TM1010 (NO in step S02TM1010), the CPU 103 determines whether the small win flag is on (step S02TM1110).

In this embodiment, the small win flag is provided in a specified area of RAM 102, and is set to the ON state based on a decision in the normal special pattern processing (S110) of FIG. 16 to control the variable display result of the special pattern game to a small win game state as a "small win." On the other hand, it is cleared to the OFF state based on the small win pattern being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special pattern game.

If the small win flag is off (NO in step S02TM1110), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (S110) (step S02TM1210), and ends the processing.

If the small win flag is on (YES in step S02TM1110), the CPU 103 sets the small win start presentation wait time (step S02TM1120) and proceeds to step S02TM1130. In the processing of step S02TM1120, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the small win start presentation wait time is set in a game control process timer provided in a specified area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a small win start designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step S02TM1130), clears the small win flag to the off state (step S02TM1140), updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the small win release pre-processing (S118) (step S02TM1150), and ends the processing.

In this embodiment, the small win start designation command is a command (small win fanfare command) that designates the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a small win game state, and is included in the presentation control command supplied from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12. In the small win start designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variable display result and the determination result of the small win type. In the processing of step S02TM1130, setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the small win start designation command table prepared in advance for sending the small win start designation command is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer.

[Jackpot end processing]
FIG. 20-23 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing (S117) in the special pattern process.

First, the CPU 103 determines whether the waiting time for the end of the jackpot performance has elapsed (step S02TM2010).

In this embodiment, when the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7" in the post-jackpot release processing (S116) in FIG. 16, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the jackpot end presentation waiting time is set in the game control process timer. In the processing of step S02TM2010, the game control process timer value, which is the stored value of the game control process timer, is updated by subtracting 1, and whether or not the jackpot end presentation waiting time has elapsed is determined depending on whether or not the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapse judgment value ("0" in this embodiment).

If the waiting time for the jackpot end effect has not elapsed (NO in step S02TM2010), the CPU 103 ends the process.

If the waiting time for the jackpot end presentation has elapsed (YES in step S02TM2010), the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value has reached a limit reaching determination value (in this example, "10,000"), which is a specific value that is predetermined in correspondence with the limit value (in this example, 10,000 times) as a predetermined upper limit value (step S02TM2020).

If the jackpot occurrence count value has reached the limit reaching judgment value (in this example, "10,000") (YES in step S02TM2020), the CPU 103 clears the jackpot occurrence counter, initializes the stored jackpot occurrence count value to "0" (step S02TM2030), and proceeds to step S02TM2110.

If the jackpot occurrence count value has not reached the limit reaching judgment value (in this example, "10,000") (NO in step S02TM2020), the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot type of the jackpot is a jackpot via a small jackpot (step S02TM2040).

In the processing of step S02TM2040, data indicating the type of jackpot stored in the jackpot type buffer in RAM 102 is referenced to determine whether the jackpot type is a jackpot via a small jackpot. In this example, it is determined whether the jackpot type is either a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a normal small jackpot" or a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a time-saving small jackpot."

If, in the processing of step S02TM2040, the type of the jackpot in question is a jackpot via a small jackpot (YES in step S02TM2040), the CPU 103 determines whether the type of small jackpot corresponding to the jackpot in question is a "normal small jackpot" (step S02TM2050).

If the type of small win corresponding to the big win is a "normal small win" (YES in step S02TM2050), the CPU 103 clears the big win occurrence counter, initializes the big win occurrence count value to "0" (step S02TM2100), and proceeds to step S02TM2110.

If the type of small win corresponding to the big win is not a "normal small win" (NO in step S02TM2050), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S02TM2060.

If, in the processing of step S02TM2040, the type of the jackpot is not a jackpot via a small jackpot (NO in step S02TM2040), the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot type is a "3R pattern normal jackpot" (step S02TM2080).

If the jackpot type is a "3R regular jackpot" (YES in step S02TM2080), the CPU 103 clears the jackpot occurrence counter, initializes the jackpot occurrence count value to "0" (step S02TM2090), and proceeds to step S02TM2110.

If the jackpot type is not a "3R regular jackpot" (NO in step S02TM2080), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S02TM2060.

If step S02TM2050 returns NO, or if step S02TM2080 returns NO, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag corresponding to the type of jackpot in question (step S02TM2060), sets the time-saving count counter to "10000" as the initial count value (step S02TM2070), and proceeds to step S02TM2110.

In this embodiment, if any of the conditions for control to the time-saving state is met, the time-saving flag can be set. There are two types of time-saving flag: time-saving flag A and time-saving flag B. In the following explanation, erasing (or clearing) the flag may be described as resetting the flag.

The a time-saving flag is set when the machine is in the a time-saving state after a jackpot that occurs during the normal state: a "10Ra time-saving jackpot" during the a time-saving state, a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a time-saving small jackpot" during the a time-saving state, or a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via a time-saving small jackpot" during the b time-saving state. This a time-saving flag is set when the jackpot game state ends, and is cleared when the a time-saving state ends (when a jackpot occurs during the a time-saving state, when the time-saving control ends for the specified number of times (10,000 times) and the machine is controlled to the normal state, etc.).

The b time-saving flag is set when the game is controlled to the b time-saving state after a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" that occurs during the normal state. This b time-saving flag is set when the jackpot game state ends, and is cleared when the b time-saving state ends (when a jackpot occurs during the b time-saving state, when the time-saving control ends for the specified number of times (10,000 times) and the game is controlled to the normal state, etc.).

After processing step S02TM2030, after processing step S02TM2070, after processing step S02TM2090, or after processing step S02TM2100, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (S110) (step S02TM2110), and ends the processing.

In this way, even in the irregular case where a V win occurs during a "normal small win" and control is exercised over to the big win gaming state, by determining YES in step S02TM2050 during the big win end processing and skipping the process of setting the time-saving flag (step S02TM2060), it is possible to exercise control over to the normal state without being exercised over to the time-saving state after the big win gaming state.

Also, if step S02TM2080 is judged as YES and a process (step S02TM2090) is executed to clear the jackpot occurrence counter, when a "3R pattern normal jackpot" occurs during normal state, control is returned to normal state after the jackpot ends, so the jackpot occurrence count value is initialized when the jackpot ends. Also, if step S02TM2050 is judged as YES and a process (step S02TM2100) is executed to clear the jackpot occurrence counter, when a "10Ra jackpot via normal small jackpot" occurs, control is returned to normal state after the jackpot ends, so the jackpot occurrence count value is initialized when the jackpot ends.

[Small hit end processing]
Figure 20-24 is a flowchart showing the small win end processing (S120) in the special pattern process.

First, the CPU 103 updates the V winning validity period timer by subtracting 1 (step S02TM3010), and checks whether the V winning validity period timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (step S02TM3020).

If the V winning validity period timer has not timed out (NO in step S02TM3020), the CPU 103 determines whether the V winning flag, which is set when a V winning is detected, has already been set (step S02TM3030).

If the V prize flag is set (YES in step S02TM3030), the CPU 103 ends the processing.

On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set (NO in step S02TM3030), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the V winning switch 87a is in the ON state (step S02TM3040) to determine whether or not a V winning has been detected, which occurs when a gaming ball enters the V winning area 870 during the valid V winning period.

If the V winning switch is not on (NO in step S02TM3040), the CPU 103 ends the process.

On the other hand, if the V winning switch is in the ON state (YES in step S02TM3040), the CPU 103 sets the V winning flag indicating that a V winning has been detected during the valid V winning period (step S02TM3050).

Then, the CPU 103 performs processing to send a V winning designation command (step S02TM3060) and ends the processing. This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that a V winning has occurred.

If the V winning validity period timer has timed out in step S02TM3020, the CPU 103 performs processing to send a small win end command (step S02TM3070). This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that the small win has ended.

Next, the CPU 103 changes the state of the solenoid 22 to open the opening/closing member and return the V winning area 870 (V winning opening) to an open state (step S02TM3080).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the V winning flag is set (step S02TM3090).

If the V prize flag is set (YES in step S02TM3090), the CPU 103 determines that a jackpot has occurred and sets the jackpot flag (step S02TM3100).

Next, the CPU 103 officially stores the data indicating the type of jackpot via a small jackpot stored in the jackpot type buffer in S81 in response to the determination that a legitimate jackpot has occurred due to the occurrence of a V win in the jackpot type buffer (step S02TM3110).

Next, the CPU 103 updates the jackpot occurrence count value, which is a predetermined numerical data, by adding 1 (step S02TM3120), and resets the time-saving flag that was set at that time (step S02TM3130).

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which, in the small win end process executed at the timing when the small win game state ends, if a V win has occurred, a process is executed to update the jackpot occurrence count value as a predetermined numerical data by adding 1 (step S02TM3120). However, this is not limited to this form, and in the small win open process executed when controlled in the small win game state, if a V win has occurred, a process may be executed to update the jackpot occurrence count value as a predetermined numerical data by adding 1.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the jackpot occurrence count value was updated by adding 1, but this is not limited to the above, and the jackpot occurrence count value may be updated by subtracting 1. This can be achieved by the same method as that shown in step S02TM1050, so a description will be omitted.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in step S02TM3110 (step S02TM3140). This allows the presentation control CPU 120 to recognize that the jackpot game state is about to start.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot control timer to a value equivalent to the jackpot display time (e.g., the time at which the image display device 5 notifies the user that a jackpot has occurred) (step S02TM3150).

Then, the CPU 103 refers to the jackpot opening pattern data stored in the ROM 101, and sets opening pattern data indicating the opening mode such as the number of openings (e.g., 3 times, 10 times, etc.), opening time (e.g., 29 seconds), and interval time (time the jackpot opening is closed between rounds) according to the type of jackpot in a predetermined memory area formed in the RAM 102 (step S02TM3160). Of this data, the data on the number of openings is set in an opening count counter for counting the number of openings.

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-jackpot release process (S114) (step S02TM3170), and ends the process. As a result, when a V win occurs in the small jackpot game state, the game transitions to the jackpot game state.

If the V prize flag is not set in step S02TM3090 (NO in step S02TM3090), the CPU 103 determines whether the b time-saving flag is set among the time-saving flags (step S02TM3180).

If the b time-saving flag is not set (NO in step S02TM3180), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S02TM3200. As a result, if the b time-saving flag is not set, that is, if a V win has not occurred from a small hit that occurred during the a time-saving state or normal state, the processing from step S02TM3200 onwards will be executed.

On the other hand, if the b time-saving flag is set (YES in step S02TM3180), the CPU 103 determines whether the small hit type of the small hit is a "normal small hit" (step S02TM3190).

If the type of the small hit is a "normal small hit" (YES in step S02TM3190), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S02TM3200. As a result, if the b time-saving flag is set and a V prize has not occurred in a small hit whose type is a "time-saving small hit", that is, if a V prize has not occurred in a time-saving small hit that occurred during the b time-saving state, the processing from step S02TM3200 onwards will be executed.

If step S02TM3180 returns NO, or if step S02TM3190 returns NO, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving flag that was set at that time (step S02TM3200), clears the time-saving count counter, and initializes the time-saving count value to "0" (S02TM3210), clears the jackpot occurrence counter, and initializes the jackpot occurrence count value to "0" (step S02TM3220), and proceeds to step S02TM3230.

If step S02TM3190 is judged as YES, or after processing step S02TM3220, the CPU 103 erases the data indicating the type of jackpot via a small jackpot stored in the jackpot type buffer in S81 (step S02TM3230), updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing (S110) (step S02TM3240), and ends the processing. As a result, if no V win occurs in the small jackpot gaming state, the game does not transition to the jackpot gaming state.

In this way, if the V winning flag is not set, the b time-saving flag is set, and the small win type is a "normal small win" (YES in step S02TM3180 → YES in step S02TM3190), i.e., if a normal small win that occurs during the b time-saving state does not result in a V winning, by skipping the series of processes from step S02TM3200 to step S02TM3210 that resets the time-saving flag and clears the time-saving count counter, it becomes possible to continue controlling the b time-saving state, without being controlled (falling) into the normal state, even if a normal small win occurs during the b time-saving state.

[Game flow]
Next, the game flow in this embodiment will be described. In this example, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), the presentation mode when the first flag, the second flag, and the third flag described later are not set is set to [normal mode], the game state is controlled to either the a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) or the normal state (low probability/low base state), the presentation mode when the first flag described later is set is set to [Dream RUSH], the game state is controlled to either the b time-saving state (low probability/high base state) or the normal state (low probability/low base state), the presentation mode when the second flag described later is set is set to [Invincible RUSH], the game state is controlled to either the a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) or the normal state (low probability/low base state), the presentation mode when the third flag described later is set is set to [Super high speed HYPER RUSH] (see FIG. 20-25).

In the example game flow shown in Figure 20-25, when a jackpot occurs when the presentation mode is [normal mode], after the jackpot game state ends, the game is controlled to either the normal state, the a time-saving state, or the b time-saving state. If it is controlled to the normal state, it transitions to [normal mode], if it is controlled to the a time-saving state, it transitions to [Dream RUSH], and if it is controlled to the b time-saving state, it transitions to [Invincible RUSH].

In this game flow, explanations of irregular situations during a game are omitted. Examples of irregular situations during a game are as follows:
・A situation where a big hit or small hit occurs on special chart 2 during normal state ・A situation where a small hit occurs during normal state and a V is awarded ・A situation where a big hit or small hit occurs on special chart 1 during time-saving state ・A situation where a V is awarded with a normal small hit ・A situation where a V is not awarded with a time-saving small hit ・A situation where the display result is "miss" in all variable displays of 10,000 time-saving times ・A situation where the number of big hits occurs is 10,000 times, etc. These specific examples of irregular situations are only examples, and other situations not listed here are also included.

(1) <Normal>
The presentation control CPU 120 sets the presentation mode to "normal mode" when the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state) and none of the first flag, second flag, and third flag are set.

(2) ＜First Hit＞
In the above-mentioned state (1), when the variable display that results in a "jackpot" is executed, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. In this embodiment, the jackpot types of the first special symbol include (2A) "3R normal jackpot", (2B) "3Ra time-saving jackpot", and (2C) "10Rb time-saving jackpot".

(2A) → (1)
When the jackpot type is "3R normal jackpot", when the jackpot ends, the state is controlled to (1).

(2B) → (3)
When the jackpot type is a "pattern 3Ra time-limited jackpot" and the jackpot ends, the device is controlled to state (3).

(2C) → (4)
When the jackpot type is a "pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot" and the jackpot ends, the device is controlled to state (4).

(3) <a time reduction 10,000 times>
The presentation control CPU 120 controls the game state to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state), the first flag is set, and the presentation mode is set to [Dream RUSH] when 10,000 variable displays are executed.

(4) <b Time Reduction 10,000 Times>
The presentation control CPU 120 controls the game state to the b time-saving state (low probability/high base state), the second flag is set, and the presentation mode is set to [Invincible RUSH] when 10,000 variable displays are executed.

(5) <Jackpot>
In the above-mentioned (3) or (4), or the below-mentioned (7), when the display result in any of the variable displays becomes "jackpot" or "time-saving small win", the game is controlled to a jackpot game state (including a jackpot game state via a small win). In this embodiment, when the display result becomes "jackpot", the jackpot type of the second special pattern is "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot", and when the display result becomes "time-saving small win", the jackpot type via the small win of the second special pattern is "time-saving small win via 10Ra time-saving jackpot".

(5) → (3)
When the number of jackpot occurrences is "2", and the jackpot ends, the state is controlled to (3).

(5) → (7)
When the number of jackpot occurrences is "3" or more ("3" to "10,000"), when the jackpot ends, the state is controlled to (7).

(7) <a time reduction 10,000 times>
The CPU 120 for controlling presentation controls the game state to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state), the third flag is set, and the presentation mode when 10,000 variable displays are executed is set to [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH].

(6) ＜Falling Small Hit＞
In the above-mentioned state (3) or (7), when the display result in any of the variable displays becomes "normal small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state. In this embodiment, in a small win game in which the display result becomes "normal big win", the opening pattern of the V-determination winning device 87 is the first opening pattern, and it is extremely difficult to make the game ball win the V-determination winning device 87, and it is substantially impossible to generate a big win.

(6) → (1)
If the small hit type is a "normal small hit" and the small hit ends without a V winning occurring, it will be controlled to state (1).

[First flag, second flag, third flag]
Next, the first flag, the second flag, and the third flag in this embodiment will be described.

<First flag>
It is assumed that a type of jackpot that is controlled to the a-time shortening state after the jackpot ends (such as "pattern 10Ra time shortening jackpot", "a-time shortening jackpot via time shortening small jackpot", etc.) occurs, and the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. It is also assumed that the jackpot occurrence count value at this time is 1 or 2. After the jackpot game state ends, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 or 2 and the game state is controlled to the a-time shortening state, the performance control CPU 120 sets the first flag.

If a jackpot (including a jackpot via a small jackpot) occurs in any of the variable displays between the time when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state a and the end of the 10,000th variable display in which the display result is "miss", and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 resets (deletes) the first flag.

In addition, when the 10,000th variable display in which the display result becomes "miss" after the game state is controlled to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) ends, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state). A variable display based on the reserved memory (variable display whose execution is reserved (maximum of four in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred during the period until the end of the 10,000th variable display is executed, and a jackpot (including a jackpot via a small jackpot) occurs in any of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (maximum of four in this example) for that period, and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, or the display result becomes "miss" in all of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (maximum of four in this example) for that period, the performance control CPU 120 resets the first flag.

<Second Flag>
It is assumed that a type of jackpot that is controlled to the b time-saving state after the jackpot has ended (such as a "10Rb time-saving jackpot") has occurred and the game state has been controlled to the jackpot game state. When the game state is controlled to the b time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, the performance control CPU 120 sets the second flag.

If a jackpot (including a jackpot via a small jackpot) occurs in any of the variable displays between the time when the game state is controlled to the b time-saving state and the end of the 10,000th variable display in which the display result is "miss", and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 resets (deletes) the second flag.

In addition, when the 10,000th variable display in which the display result is "miss" after the game state is controlled to the b time-saving state ends, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state). A variable display based on the reserved memory (variable display whose execution is reserved (maximum of four in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred during the period until the 10,000th variable display ends is executed, and a jackpot (including a jackpot via a small jackpot) occurs in any of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (maximum of four in this example) for that period, and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, or the display result is "miss" in all of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (maximum of four in this example) for that period, the performance control CPU 120 resets the second flag.

<Third Flag>
It is assumed that a type of jackpot that is controlled to the a-time shortening state after the jackpot has ended (such as "a-time shortening jackpot via a-time shortening small jackpot") has occurred, and the game state has been controlled to the jackpot game state. It is also assumed that the jackpot occurrence count value at this time is 3 or more. After the jackpot game state has ended, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or more and the game state is controlled to the a-time shortening state, the performance control CPU 120 sets the third flag.

If a jackpot (including a jackpot via a small jackpot) occurs in any of the variable displays between the time when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state a and the end of the 10,000th variable display in which the display result is "miss", and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 resets (deletes) the third flag.

In addition, when the 10,000th variable display in which the display result becomes "miss" after the game state is controlled to the time-saving state a (low probability/high base state) ends, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state). A variable display based on the reserved memory (variable display whose execution is reserved (maximum of four in this example)) corresponding to the start winning that occurred during the period until the end of the 10,000th variable display is executed, and a jackpot (including a jackpot via a small jackpot) occurs in any of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (maximum of four in this example) for that period, and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, or the display result becomes "miss" in all of the variable displays based on the reserved memory (maximum of four in this example) for that period, the performance control CPU 120 resets the third flag.

[Direction mode]
As shown in Fig. 20-25, in this example, the presentation modes are [Normal Mode], [Dream Rush], [Invincible Rush], and [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH]. Among the presentation modes in this embodiment, presentation examples of [Dream Rush], [Invincible Rush], and [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] will be described below.

<Dream RUSH>
In this embodiment, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state a or the normal state, and the presentation mode when the first flag is set is [Dream RUSH] (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as the [Dream RUSH] mode) (see FIG. 20-25(3)). FIG. 20-26 is an explanatory diagram showing a presentation image displayed on the image display device 5 when the presentation mode is [Dream RUSH].

As shown in Figures 20-26 (1) to (4), the performance control CPU 120 displays the first logo display (in this example, the letters "Dream Rush") in the upper center of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the fact that the performance mode is "Dream Rush". The performance control CPU 120 also displays a constant right-hit promotion image in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. This constant right-hit promotion image is an image that includes the letters "right hit" and an arrow image that instructs a right hit to win in the second start winning port.

(Display of changing decorative symbols in [Dream Rush])
In this embodiment, the decorative symbols when the performance mode is [Dream Rush] are composed of number symbols indicating numbers, etc., and are composed of blue even number symbols (number symbols corresponding to the numbers "2", "4", and "6"), red odd number symbols excluding the number "7" (number symbols corresponding to the numbers "1", "3", and "5"), and a gold odd number symbol of the number "7" (number symbol corresponding to the number "7"). Hereinafter, the decorative symbols when the performance mode is [Dream Rush] are appropriately referred to as "first decorative symbols". The first decorative symbols may be composed of number symbols and a pedestal symbol described later.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the presentation mode is [Dream Rush], the first decorative pattern is displayed in a varying manner such that the first decorative pattern scrolls vertically in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A vertical scroll display is a scroll display from the top of the screen to the bottom of the screen. When this scroll display is being performed, the visibility of the decorative pattern is significantly reduced, and in this example, it is essentially impossible to see the decorative pattern.

In addition, when the display of the first decorative pattern is changed in the [Dream Rush] mode, the size of the first decorative pattern will not change between the start and end of the change.

(Example of the changing display of decorative symbols in [Dream Rush])
As shown in Fig. 20-26 (1), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the combination of the first decoration symbols (in this example, "245") of the variable display executed immediately before in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "245") is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays one second pending display 02TM02 in the normal mode in the second pending display area 02TM02E, and does not display the active display 02TM03 in the active display area 02TM03E, since no variable display is currently being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-26 (2), when the CPU 103 starts the varying display of the second special pattern, which results in a "miss", the performance control CPU 120 starts the varying display of the first decorative pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 based on the varying pattern specified by the varying pattern specification command.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 also displays a new normal mode active display 02TM03 corresponding to the currently active variable display in the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-26 (3), at the timing when the first decorative pattern in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the first decorative pattern combination (in this example, "412") that results in a "miss" display result in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small patterns is being performed in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-26 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined first decorative symbol combination (in this example, "412") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "412") in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, it erases the active display 02TM03 from the active display area 02TM03E.

(First logo display in [Dream Rush])
In this embodiment, a first logo cyclical change effect can be executed in which the first logo display is changed at a predetermined cycle to emphasize the name of the currently controlled presentation mode. The first logo cyclical change effect is an effect in which the first logo display changes in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 20-27(A), when the performance control CPU 120 executes the first logo cycle change performance, it causes the first logo display (the letters "Dream Rush") to emit light from the left end to the right end of the first logo display at a predetermined cycle. The change cycle of the first logo cycle change performance is set to 5 seconds. In this way, by causing the first logo display to emit light from the left end to the right end, it increases the interest of the performance during [Dream Rush] and suggests a right hit to win at the second start winning slot.

(First system display in [Dream Rush])
In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which a right-hit promotion image (the letters "right hit" and an arrow image) is constantly displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second start winning port when controlled in [Dream RUSH], but the invention is not limited to this form, and an image other than the right-hit promotion image may be constantly displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second start winning port when controlled in [Dream RUSH].

For example, when controlled by [Dream Rush], the first system display may be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second start winning hole. The first system display is a moving image including the characters "Hit Right" and an arrow image for winning the second start winning hole, and is a moving image that periodically moves left and right. The periodic interval of the operation of the first system display is set to, for example, 3 seconds.

(First rotation display in [Dream Rush])
In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which, when controlled by [Dream RUSH], the second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory number and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed are displayed as still images of round objects, but this is not limited to the above form, and when controlled by [Dream RUSH], the second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory number and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be displayed in a display form other than the still image of a round object.

For example, when controlled by [Dream Rush], a second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory count and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be displayed as moving images of round objects performing a rotating motion. The second pending display and active display performing the rotating motion at this time are referred to as a first rotation corresponding display. The rotation period of this first rotation corresponding display is set to, for example, 3 seconds.

＜Invincible RUSH＞
In this embodiment, the game state is controlled to the b time-saving state or the normal state, and the presentation mode when the second flag is set is [Invincible RUSH] (hereinafter referred to as “Invincible RUSH mode” as appropriate) (see Figure 20-25 (4)).

The performance control CPU 120, based on the fact that the performance mode is [Invincible RUSH], displays a caption including the word "Congratulations" in the upper right and lower left parts of the screen of the image display device 5 (background image of [Invincible RUSH]). The performance control CPU 120 also displays a constant right-hit promotion image in the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5. This constant right-hit promotion image is an image that includes the word "Right Hit" and an arrow image that instructs a right hit to win in the second start winning port.

(Display of decorative patterns in [Muteki RUSH])
In this embodiment, the decorative symbols when the presentation mode is [Invincible RUSH] are composed of the same number symbols as the decorative symbols when the presentation mode is [Dream RUSH]. However, the decorative symbols when the presentation mode is [Invincible RUSH] are displayed in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2 in a smaller size than the decorative symbols when the presentation mode is [Dream RUSH] (see Figs. 20-55 and 20-56). Hereinafter, the decorative symbols when the presentation mode is [Invincible RUSH] will be referred to as the "second decorative symbols" as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the presentation mode is [Invincible RUSH], the second decorative symbol is displayed by scrolling vertically in the second symbol display area 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 in the same manner as the first decorative symbol is displayed by changing the presentation mode when the presentation mode is [Dream RUSH]. Note that when the presentation mode is [Invincible RUSH], the second decorative symbol may be updated or transformed or enlarged/reduced in the second symbol display area 5L2, 5C2, 5R2.

<Ultra high speed HYPER RUSH>
In this embodiment, the game state is controlled to the a time-saving state or the normal state, and the presentation mode when the third flag is set is [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as the [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] mode) (see FIG. 20-25 (7)). FIG. 20-28 is an explanatory diagram showing a presentation image displayed on the image display device 5 when the presentation mode is [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH].

As shown in Figures 20-28 (1) to (4), the performance control CPU 120 displays a second logo display (in this example, the words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH") in the upper center of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the fact that the performance mode is "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH". The performance control CPU 120 also displays a constant right-hit promotion image in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. This constant right-hit promotion image is an image that includes the words "Right Hit" and an arrow image that instructs a right hit to win in the second start winning hole.

(Display of decorative patterns in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH])
In this embodiment, the decorative symbols when the presentation mode is [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] are composed of a number symbol showing numbers and the like, and a base symbol corresponding to the shape of this number symbol. Furthermore, of the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbol in the center (symbol display area 5C) displays a light ray effect display from between the base symbol and the number symbol (in this example, behind the center of the number symbol) to the screen frame. The light ray effect display is an image with a higher display priority than the base symbol. Furthermore, the number symbol is an image with a higher display priority than the light ray effect display. Therefore, to the player, it appears as if the number symbol, the light ray effect display, and the base symbol are displayed in this order. Below, when the presentation mode is [Super High Speed HYPER
The decorative pattern in the case of [RUSH] is appropriately referred to as the “third decorative pattern”.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the presentation mode is [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], the variable display of the third decorative pattern is enlarged/reduced in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this embodiment, the variable display (enlargement/reduction) of the third decorative pattern is executed in the following order: (1) → (2) → (3).

(1) When the variable display starts, the third decorative pattern that has been confirmed and stopped in accordance with the display result of the variable display executed immediately before is enlarged and displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (hereinafter, the third decorative pattern at this time is appropriately referred to as the "third decorative pattern (size: large)"). At this time, the visibility of the third decorative pattern is reduced and the light effect display is erased. In this example, when the third decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed, the display color (blue, red, gold) of the third decorative pattern is changed to white to reduce the visibility of the third decorative pattern. Note that a configuration capable of changing the transmittance of the third decorative pattern may be adopted, and the visibility of the third decorative pattern may be reduced by setting the layer transmittance to a value other than 0% when the third decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed.

(2) Next, the third decorative pattern that was enlarged just before is displayed in a reduced size in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (hereinafter, the third decorative pattern at this time is appropriately referred to as the "third decorative pattern (size: small)"). The combination of the third decorative patterns at this time is the combination of the third decorative patterns corresponding to the display result of the variable display. Also, similar to the case of the enlarged display of the third decorative patterns, the visibility of the third decorative patterns is reduced and the light effect display is erased. In this example, when the third decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size, the visibility of the third decorative pattern is reduced by changing the display color (blue, red, gold) of the third decorative pattern to white and reducing the size of the third decorative pattern. By reducing the visibility of the third decorative pattern in this way, even if the combination of the third decorative patterns corresponding to the display result of the variable display is displayed in the state (2), it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the display result of the variable display at this timing.

(3) Next, the third decorative pattern that was previously displayed in a reduced size is displayed frozen in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (hereinafter, the third decorative pattern at this time will be referred to as the "third decorative pattern (size: medium)" as appropriate). At this time, the visibility of the third decorative pattern is improved and a light effect display is displayed. In this example, when the third decorative pattern is frozen, the display color of the third decorative pattern is changed from white to each color (blue, red, gold), thereby improving the visibility of the third decorative pattern.

In this example, when the enlarged/reduced display is being performed, the visibility of the decorative pattern decreases in terms of its display size and color, but it is still possible to view it.

(Example of the display of changing decorative symbols in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH])
As shown in Fig. 20-28 (1), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the combination of the third decoration symbols (in this example, "245") of the previously executed variable display in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "245") is displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays one second pending display 02TM02 in the normal mode in the second pending display area 02TM02E, and does not display the active display 02TM03 in the active display area 02TM03E, since no variable display is currently being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-28 (2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special pattern whose display result is "miss", the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the third decorative pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 based on the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command, and enlarges and displays the third decorative pattern. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 changes the display color (blue, red, gold) of the third decorative pattern to white, and erases the light effect display. The combination of the third decorative pattern at this time is the combination of the third decorative pattern (in this example, "245") that corresponds to the display result of the variable display executed immediately before (in this example, "miss").

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 also displays a new normal mode active display 02TM03 corresponding to the currently active variable display in the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-28 (3), the performance control CPU 120 reduces and displays the third decorative patterns in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative patterns at this time is the combination of third decorative patterns (in this example, "412") that corresponds to the display result of the variable display (in this example, "miss").

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-28 (4), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "412") that results in a "miss" display result in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is being performed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-28 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "412") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "412") in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, it erases the active display 02TM03 from the active display area 02TM03E.

As shown in Figure 20-26 (2), when the variable display of decorative symbols is executed in [Dream Rush], there are times when the decorative symbols become invisible during the period from when the variable display starts to when it ends. On the other hand, as shown in Figures 20-28 (2) to (5), when the variable display of decorative symbols is executed in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], there are no times when the decorative symbols become invisible during the period from when the variable display starts to when it ends, and they can be seen at any time.

(The second logo displayed in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH])
In this embodiment, a second logo cyclical change effect can be executed in which the second logo display is changed at a predetermined cycle to emphasize the name of the currently controlled presentation mode. The second logo cyclical change effect is an effect in which the second logo display changes in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 20-27(B), when the performance control CPU 120 executes the second logo cyclical change performance, it causes the second logo display (the characters "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH") to emit light from the left end to the right end of the second logo display at a predetermined cycle. The change cycle of the second logo cyclical change performance is set to 0.5 seconds. In this way, by causing the second logo display to emit light from the left end to the right end, the entertainment value of the performance is increased during the [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], and a right hit is suggested to win at the second start winning slot.

(Second system display in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH])
In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which a right-hit promotion image (the letters "right hit" and an arrow image) is constantly displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second start winning port when controlled in [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH], but the present invention is not limited to this form. When controlled in [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH], an image other than the constant right-hit promotion image may be constantly displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second start winning port.

For example, when controlled in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], the second system display may be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second start winning hole. The second system display is a moving image including the characters "Hit Right" and an arrow image for winning the second start winning hole, and is a moving image that periodically moves left and right. The periodic interval of the operation of the second system display is set to, for example, 0.3 seconds.

(2nd rotation display in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH])
In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which, when controlled in [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], the second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory number and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed are displayed as still images of round objects, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and, when controlled in [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], the second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory number and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be displayed in a display form different from the still image of a round object.

For example, when controlled in [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], a second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory count and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be displayed as moving images of round objects performing a rotating motion. The second pending display and active display performing the rotating motion in this case are referred to as a second rotation-compatible display. The rotation period of this second rotation-compatible display is set to, for example, 0.3 seconds.

[Featured]
In this embodiment, a movable body 02TM100, which is a role-playing object, is provided near (above) the image display device 5. The movable body 02TM100 operates between an initial position, an intermediate performance position (where a part of the movable body is exposed), and a maximum performance position (where the entire movable body is exposed) according to the control of the performance control board 12. Hereinafter, the intermediate performance position and the maximum performance position will be appropriately referred to as "performance positions".

For example, the movable body 02TM100 may move from the initial position to the intermediate performance position to the initial position, from the initial position to the maximum performance position to the initial position, from the initial position to the intermediate performance position to the maximum performance position to the initial position, or from the maximum performance position to the intermediate performance position to the initial position.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20-29, when the movable body 02TM100 is in the initial position, the movable body 02TM100 is not positioned in front of the image display device 5. In other words, in this embodiment, when the movable body 02TM100 is in the initial position, it does not overlap the area of the image display device 5 and is configured not to affect the visibility of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in the process of the movable body 02TM100 moving from the initial position to the performance position (intermediate performance position, maximum performance position) or when the movable body 02TM100 is in the performance position, the movable body 02TM100 is positioned in front of the image display device 5. That is, in this embodiment, in the process of the movable body 02TM100 moving from the initial position to the performance position or when the movable body 02TM100 is in the performance position, it overlaps with the area of the image display device 5, affecting the visibility of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In this example, when the first change performance described later is executed, the movable body 02TM100 moves to the intermediate performance position, and when the second change performance described later is executed, the movable body 02TM100 moves to the maximum performance position. In the following, the performance in which the movable body 02TM100 moves from the initial position → intermediate performance position → initial position will be referred to as an "intermediate performance" as appropriate, and the performance in which the movable body 02TM100 moves from the initial position → maximum performance position → initial position will be referred to as an "maximum performance" as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the movable body 02TM100 has a regular hexagonal shape that includes a design that resembles an ally character. The ally character of this movable body 02TM100 is a character that is the same as the ally character that appears in the super reach performance (in this example, the super reach A performance).

The movable body 02TM100 may be provided with a movable body LED, and a light-emitting effect may be performed in which the movable body LED emits white light when moving from the initial position to the performance position, or at a predetermined timing when the movable body is in the performance position (e.g., when the push button 31B is operated). A number of different light-emitting performance modes may also be provided. For example, in addition to a performance mode in which the movable body LED provided on the movable body 02TM100 emits white light, there may also be a performance mode in which the movable body LED emits red light.

[Logo Panel]
In this embodiment, a logo panel 02TM110 is provided near (above) the image display device 5. The letters "XXX" (such as the name of this gaming machine) are displayed on this logo panel, and the letter portion of the logo panel "XXX" is illuminated.

<Positional relationship between props and logo panel>
In this embodiment, the logo panel 02TM110 is disposed in front of the movable body 02TM100 (toward the player). As shown in FIG. 20-29(1), when the movable body 02TM100 is in the initial position, the movable body 02TM100 is located behind the logo panel 02TM110 (toward the gaming machine), and therefore the visibility of the movable body 02TM100 from the player is reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-29 (2A), when the movable body 02TM100 is in the intermediate performance position, a part of the movable body 02TM100 (in this example, about the bottom 2/3 of the movable body) is located below the area where the logo panel 02TM110 is located, and is therefore visible to the player. Also, as shown in FIG. 20-29 (2B), when the movable body 02TM100 is in the maximum performance position, the entire movable body 02TM100 (in this example, the entire movable body) is located below the area where the logo panel 02TM110 is located, and is therefore visible to the player.

In this way, when the movable body 02TM100 is in the intermediate presentation position, only a portion of the ally character in the movable body is visible to the player. On the other hand, when the movable body 02TM100 is in the maximum presentation position, all of the ally character in the movable body is visible to the player.

[Change Production]
In this embodiment, a change effect can be executed based on the result of the judgment at the time of the start winning. The change effect is an example of a preview effect in which the corresponding display (pending display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that was the subject of the judgment at the time of the start winning is displayed in either a blue state (in this example, a blue round display) or a red state (in this example, a red round display) different from the normal state (in this example, a white round display).

Specifically, among the change effects, the pending change effect, which displays the display mode of the pending display in a display mode different from the normal mode (either a blue mode or a red mode), is a pre-reading notice effect that suggests the display result of the pending memory whose execution is pending. Also, among the change effects, the active change effect, which displays the display mode of the active display in a display mode different from the normal mode (either a blue mode or a red mode), is a changing notice effect that suggests the display result of the variable display that is being executed. The timing at which the change effects are executed and the change patterns of the pending display will be explained in detail in Figures 20-39 (B1) to 20-40 (B4) described later. Also, in this embodiment, the first change effect, the second change effect, and the third change effect, which have different presentation modes, can be executed as change effects.

<First transformation performance>
The first change performance is a series of performances consisting of (1A) to (1D) shown below.
(1A) A change precursor effect in which a wavy effect display (hereinafter referred to as "wavy effect display" as appropriate) is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5. (1B) An intermediate action effect in which the movable body 02TM100 moves in the order of initial position → intermediate performance position → initial position. (1C) A character appearance effect in which a character related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. (1D) A first action change effect in which an ally character changes the display mode of a corresponding display (active display, pending display) by throwing a bomb at the corresponding display.

In (1D), the effect in which an ally character throws a bomb at a corresponding display (active display, pending display) is referred to as the "first action effect," and the effect in which the display mode of the corresponding display onto which the bomb has been thrown changes is referred to as the "first corresponding display change effect."

In this embodiment, as shown in step S02TM4060 of the start winning presentation determination process (see FIG. 20-38) described below and the presentation mode determination table for the change presentation (see FIG. 20-41) described below, a configuration is adopted in which the first change presentation can be executed when a change display corresponding to the first special pattern is executed, but the first change presentation cannot be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed.

In this embodiment, the variation patterns selected in the time-saving state (time-saving state a, time-saving state b) in which the variable display of the second special pattern is mainly executed tend to have shorter variable display periods than the variation patterns selected in the normal state in which the variable display of the first special pattern is mainly executed, and since it is difficult to secure a period for executing the first variable performance in the time-saving state, a configuration is adopted in which the first variable performance cannot be executed when the variable display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed.

However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. A configuration in which the first change performance cannot be executed when a change display corresponding to the first special pattern is executed may be adopted, and a configuration in which the first change performance can be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed may be adopted. For example, if a configuration in which the first change performance can be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed is adopted, the first change performance may be executed over multiple change displays in order to ensure a period for executing the first change performance.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which after a change precursor effect is executed, an intermediate action effect, a character appearance effect, and a first action change effect are executed at a rate of 100%, and the display mode of the corresponding display changes, but this is not limited to the above. After a change precursor effect is executed, an intermediate action effect, a character appearance effect, and a first action change effect are executed at a rate different from 100%, and there may be cases in which the display mode of the corresponding display does not change.

For example, when the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode (YES in step S02TM4040), a process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a false change premonition effect in which only the change premonition effect is executed and the effects subsequent to the intermediate action effect of the first change premonition effect are not executed. At this time, a decision is made to execute the false change premonition effect 3% of the time, and a decision is made not to execute the false change premonition effect 97% of the time.

(Example of the first transformation)
20-30 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the performance images of each performance related to the first change performance. In this example, an example is shown in which the first change performance is executed when the first special pattern is being displayed in a normal state.

First, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (2), one second after the CPU 103 starts the varying display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 executes the (1A) change precursor performance of the first change performance, and displays the wave effect display 02TM200 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 positions the movable body 02TM100 in the initial position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (3), the performance control CPU 120 ends the (1A) change precursor performance of the first change performance, erases the wave effect display 02TM200 from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and executes the (1B) intermediate action performance of the first change performance, causing the blackout display 02TM200B to be displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body 02TM100 from the initial position to the intermediate performance position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (4), the performance control CPU 120 ends the (1B) intermediate action performance of the first change performance, erases the blackout display 02TM200B from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and executes the (1C) character appearance performance of the first change performance, displaying an ally character 02TM30B (in this example, an ally character similar to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body 02TM100 from the intermediate performance position to the initial position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (5), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the (1C) character appearance presentation of the first change presentation, erases the ally character 02TM30B from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and executes the (1D) first action change presentation of the first change presentation, displaying the ally character 02TM30C throwing a bomb at the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-30 (6), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the (1D) first action change presentation of the first change presentation, causing the ally character 02TM30C to disappear from the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and causing the first action effect display 02TM211 to be displayed in the active display area 02TM03E. This first action effect display is an image that is larger than the active display 02TM03, and has a higher display priority than the active display 02TM03. Therefore, it appears to the player that only the first action effect display is being displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-31 (7), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the (1D) first action change presentation of the first change presentation, displays the ally character 02TM30A in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, erases the first action effect display 02TM211 from the active display area 02TM03E, and changes the normal mode active display 02TM03 to the blue mode active display 02TM03B.

<Second transformation performance>
The second change effect is a series of effects consisting of (2A) to (2D) shown below.
(2A) A change precursor effect in which a wavy effect display (hereinafter referred to as "wavy effect display" as appropriate) is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5. (2B) A maximum movement effect in which the movable body 02TM100 moves in the order of initial position → maximum movement position → initial position. (2C) A character appearance effect in which a character related to the allied character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. (2D) A second action change effect in which an allied character changes the display mode of a corresponding display (active display, pending display) by throwing three bombs at the corresponding display.

In (2D), the effect in which an ally character throws three bombs at a corresponding display (active display, pending display) is called the "second action effect," and the effect in which the display mode of the corresponding display onto which the three bombs have been thrown changes is called the "second corresponding display change effect."

In this embodiment, as shown in step S02TM4060 of the start winning presentation determination process (see FIG. 20-38) described below and the presentation mode determination table for the change presentation (see FIG. 20-41) described below, a configuration is adopted in which the second change presentation can be executed when a change display corresponding to the first special pattern is executed, but the second change presentation cannot be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed.

In this embodiment, the variation patterns selected in the time-saving state (time-saving state a, time-saving state b) in which the variable display of the second special pattern is mainly executed tend to have shorter variable display periods than the variation patterns selected in the normal state in which the variable display of the first special pattern is mainly executed, and since it is difficult to secure a period for executing the second variable performance in the time-saving state, a configuration is adopted in which the second variable performance cannot be executed when the variable display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed.

However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. A configuration in which the second change performance cannot be executed when a change display corresponding to the first special pattern is executed may be adopted, and a configuration in which the second change performance can be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed may be adopted. For example, if a configuration in which the second change performance can be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed is adopted, the second change performance may be executed over multiple change displays in order to ensure a period for executing the second change performance.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which after a change precursor effect is executed, a maximum action effect, a character appearance effect, and a second action change effect are executed at a rate of 100%, and the display mode of the corresponding display changes, but this is not limited to the above. After a change precursor effect is executed, a maximum action effect, a character appearance effect, and a second action change effect are executed at a rate different from 100%, and there may be cases in which the display mode of the corresponding display does not change.

For example, when the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode (YES in step S02TM4040), a process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a false change premonition effect in which only the change premonition effect is executed and the maximum movement effect and subsequent effects of the second change premonition effect are not executed. At this time, it is decided to execute the false change premonition effect 3% of the time, and it is decided not to execute the false change premonition effect 97% of the time.

(Example of the second transformation)
20-32 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance image of each performance related to the second change performance. In this example, an example in which the second change performance is executed when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed in the normal state is shown.

First, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (1), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (2), one second after the CPU 103 starts the varying display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 executes the (2A) change precursor performance of the first change performance, and displays the wave effect display 02TM200 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 positions the movable body 02TM100 in the initial position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (3), the performance control CPU 120 ends the (2A) change precursor performance of the second change performance, erases the wave effect display 02TM200 from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and executes the (2B) maximum movement performance of the second change performance, displaying the blackout display 02TM200B on the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body 02TM100 from the initial position to the maximum performance position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (4), the performance control CPU 120 ends the (2B) maximum movement performance of the second transformation performance, erases the blackout display 02TM200B from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and executes the (2C) character appearance performance of the second transformation performance, displaying an ally character 02TM30B (in this example, an ally character similar to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body 02TM100 from the maximum performance position to the initial position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (5), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the (2C) character appearance presentation of the second transformation presentation, erases the ally character 02TM30B from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and executes the (2D) second action transformation presentation of the first transformation presentation, displaying the ally character 02TM30C throwing three bombs at the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (6), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the (2D) second action change presentation of the second change presentation, causing the ally character 02TM30C to disappear from the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and causing the second action effect display 02TM212 to be displayed in the active display area 02TM03E. This second action effect display is an image that is larger than the active display 02TM03, and has a higher display priority than the active display 02TM03. Therefore, to the player, it appears as if only the second action effect display is being displayed. Also, the second action effect display is an image that is larger than the first action effect display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-33 (7), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the (2D) second action change presentation of the second change presentation, displays the ally character 02TM30A in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, erases the second action effect display 02TM212 from the active display area 02TM03E, and changes the normal mode active display 02TM03 to the red mode active display 02TM03R.

In this way, the (2D) second action change presentation of the second change presentation is executed in a more emphasized manner than the (1D) first action change presentation of the first change presentation in terms of the number of bombs thrown by the friendly character and the size of the action effect display shown in the active display area.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the second transformation performance was emphasized more than the first transformation performance in terms of the number of bombs thrown by the ally character and the size of the action effect display in the active display area, but this is not limited to the above, and the second transformation performance may be emphasized more than the first transformation performance by other methods.

For example, the first transformation performance may be performed with a white background image when the performance is performed, and the second transformation performance may be performed with a red background image when the performance is performed, so that the second transformation performance may be emphasized more than the first transformation performance in terms of the background image (red > white).

In addition, by adopting a configuration in which an ally character (small) is displayed when the first transformation performance is performed, and an ally character (large) that is larger in display size than the ally character (small) when the second transformation performance is performed, the second transformation performance may be emphasized more than the first transformation performance in terms of the display size of the ally character (ally character (large) > ally character (small)).

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the corresponding display (pending display or active display) can be displayed in two different display modes, a blue mode or a red mode, different from the normal mode, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the corresponding display can be displayed in less than two different display modes different from the normal mode, or can be displayed in three or more different display modes different from the normal mode.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the corresponding display can be displayed in three or more display modes different from the normal mode, the corresponding display may be displayed in four display modes different from the normal mode: blue mode, red mode, green mode, or gold mode. In this case, the probability of winning increases in the order of blue mode < green mode < red mode < gold mode.

<Third transformation performance>
The third change presentation is a presentation in which the corresponding display (pending display or active display) corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning is displayed in a manner different from the normal manner at: (i) the timing when the nth pending display corresponding to the start winning is displayed in the pending display area (the timing at the time of the start winning), (ii) the timing when the pending display corresponding to the start winning shifts to a higher position in the variable ranking in the pending display area (towards the active display area) (when n is greater than or equal to 2), and (iii) the timing when the pending display corresponding to the start winning shifts to the active display area (the timing when the active display corresponding to the start winning is displayed).

The third change effect includes (i) an effect in which, at the timing of the start winning, the pending display corresponding to the start winning is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode, and an effect in which the display mode of the pending display is changed at the shift timing of (ii) or (iii). Furthermore, the third change effect does not include an effect (hereinafter referred to as an "action effect") in which, like the first and second change effects, the display mode is changed by acting on the corresponding display (for example, an ally character throws a bomb) while the special pattern (the corresponding decorative pattern) is being displayed in a changing manner.

In this embodiment, as shown in step S02TM4060 of the start winning presentation determination process (see FIG. 20-38) described below and the presentation mode determination table for the change presentation (see FIG. 20-41) described below, a configuration is adopted in which the third change presentation can be executed whether the change presentation corresponding to the first special pattern is executed or the change presentation corresponding to the second special pattern is executed.

In this embodiment, the change patterns selected in the time-saving state (time-saving state a, time-saving state b) in which the change display of the second special pattern is mainly executed tend to have extremely short change display periods, and it is difficult to secure a period for executing a change display accompanied by an action display (first change display, second change display) in the time-saving state. However, it is easy to secure a period for executing a third change display without an action display in the time-saving state. Therefore, a configuration is adopted in which the third change display can be executed in either the case where the change display corresponding to the first special pattern is executed or the case where the change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed.

However, this is not limited to the above configuration. A configuration in which the third change presentation cannot be executed when a change display corresponding to the first special pattern is executed may be adopted, and a configuration in which the third change presentation cannot be executed when a change display corresponding to the second special pattern is executed may be adopted.

[Preview preview]
In this embodiment, a preview performance that predicts the jackpot expectation rate is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The preview performance includes a preview performance that predicts the jackpot expectation rate in the variable display being executed, and a pre-read preview performance that predicts the jackpot expectation rate in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, in addition to the above-mentioned reserved change performance, a first pre-read performance and a second pre-read performance can be executed.

<First look ahead performance>
In this embodiment, the first pre-reading effect can be executed based on the result of the judgment at the time of the start winning. The first pre-reading effect is a type of pre-reading notice effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display that was the subject of the judgment at the time of the start winning is a "time-saving small win" by using the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

The first pre-reading effect is a series of effects consisting of (A) and (B) shown below.
(A) In the <variable display where the first look-ahead counter = 2>, a fixed icon (in this example, an icon containing the letters "HOLD") is superimposed on the decorative pattern displayed in the pattern display area 5L, and this decorative pattern is fixed (the numerical pattern is not updated), a first look-ahead A performance. (B) In the <variable display where the first look-ahead counter = 1>, a fixed icon (in this example, an icon containing the letters "HOLD") is superimposed on the decorative patterns displayed in the pattern display areas 5L and 5C, and these decorative patterns are fixed (the numerical pattern is not updated), a first look-ahead B performance. The first look-ahead counter will be described in more detail later in Figure 20-38.

In this embodiment, the decorative symbols fixed in the first look-ahead A performance and the decorative symbols fixed in the first look-ahead B performance are decorative symbols that include a common number symbol. Therefore, when the variable display that is the subject of the forecast is executed, the variable display is configured to start in a state where a reach state is established in the symbol display areas 5L and 5C.

When it is decided to execute this first look-ahead effect in the start winning effect determination process (see Figure 20-38), a decorative pattern of the same type as the decorative pattern fixed in the first look-ahead A effect is determined as the confirmed decorative pattern to be stopped in the pattern display areas 5L and 5C in the variable display executed when the first look-ahead counter = 1. By doing this, the decorative pattern types fixed in the first look-ahead A effect and the first look-ahead B effect become the same, and a reach state can be achieved in the variable display that is the subject of the preview.

In addition, if the display result of the variable display that is the subject of the forecast is judged to be a "small time-saving hit," a decorative pattern of the same type as the decorative pattern fixed in the first pre-reading performance in the variable display that is the subject of the forecast is determined as the confirmed decorative pattern to be stopped in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By doing this, the decorative pattern fixed in the first pre-reading performance and the decorative pattern that is finally confirmed and stopped in the variable display that is the subject of the forecast can be a decorative pattern of the same type, and appropriate performance control as a pre-reading forecast performance using decorative patterns can be realized.

In addition, if the display result of the variable display that is the subject of the forecast is judged to be a "miss," a decorative pattern of the same type as the decorative pattern fixed in the first pre-reading performance in the variable display that is the subject of the forecast will be determined as the confirmed decorative pattern to be stopped in the pattern display area 5L, 5C, and a decorative pattern of a different type from the decorative pattern fixed in the first pre-reading performance will be determined as the confirmed decorative pattern to be stopped in the pattern display area 5R.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the first pre-reading performance was executed as a pre-reading preview performance using the decorative pattern in the pattern display area, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and a performance different from the first pre-reading performance may be executed as a pre-reading preview performance using the decorative pattern in the pattern display area.

For example, as a pre-reading preview effect using the decorative symbols in the symbol display area, a symbol enlargement effect in which the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are enlarged may be executed to indicate whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol that is the subject of the preview is a "small time-saving hit."

As a pre-reading preview effect using the decorative symbols in the symbol display area, a symbol destruction effect is executed in which the decorative symbols in symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are destroyed (torn apart), which may indicate whether the display result of the variable display of the special symbol that is the subject of the preview is a "small time-saving hit."

(Example of the first look-ahead performance)
Figures 20-34 and 20-35 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of presentation images of each presentation related to the first pre-reading presentation.

In this example, when the presentation mode is [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] (big win occurrence count value = 3 or more, a time-saving state), the number of second reserved memories is 4, and four second reserved displays are displayed. In addition, the display result of the reserved memory that is in the third position in the change order among these four reserved memories is determined to be a "time-saving small win," and when a start winning occurs corresponding to this reserved memory, in the start winning presentation decision process (see Figure 20-38), it is decided to execute the first look-ahead presentation, and the first look-ahead counter is set to 3.

First, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (1), the performance control CPU 120 displays the confirmed third decorative pattern combination (in this example, "721") of the variable display executed immediately before in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small pattern combination (in this example, "721") is displayed in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays four second hold displays 02TM02 in the normal mode in the second hold display area 02TM02E.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display various performance images corresponding to the performance mode being [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] (see Figure 20-28).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (first look-ahead counter = 2) based on the next reserved memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and enlarges and displays the third decorative symbol. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute the first look-ahead performance, and based on the fact that the value of the first look-ahead counter is set to 2, executes the first look-ahead A performance of the first look-ahead performance, and displays the fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on the third decorative pattern (in this example, "7") in the pattern display area 5L of the image display device 5.

At this time, since the second hold memory count has reached 3, the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode in the active display area 02TM03E, and shifts the second hold displays 02TM02 in the normal mode that were displayed in the second hold display area 02TM02E one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (3), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative patterns in reduced size in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative patterns at this time is a combination of third decorative patterns (in this example, "772") that indicates that the display result will be a "miss."

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the first look-ahead A performance of the first look-ahead performance, and displays the fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on the third decorative pattern (in this example, "7") in the pattern display area 5L of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (4), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "772") that results in a "miss" display result in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is being performed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the first look-ahead A performance of the first look-ahead performance, and displays the fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on the third decorative pattern (in this example, "7") in the pattern display area 5L of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "772") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "772") in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, it erases the active display 02TM03 from the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the first look-ahead A performance of the first look-ahead performance, and displays the fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on the third decorative pattern (in this example, "7") in the pattern display area 5L of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (6), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (first look-ahead counter = 1) based on the next reserved memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and enlarges and displays the third decorative symbol. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute the first look-ahead performance, and based on the fact that the value of the first look-ahead counter is set to 1, executes the first look-ahead B performance of the first look-ahead performance, and displays fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on each of the third decorative patterns (in this example, "7" and "7") in the pattern display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5.

At this time, since the second hold memory count has reached 2, the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode in the active display area 02TM03E, and shifts the second hold displays 02TM02 in the normal mode that were displayed in the second hold display area 02TM02E one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (7), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative patterns in reduced size in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative patterns at this time is a combination of third decorative patterns (in this example, "771") that indicates that the display result will be a "miss."

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the first look-ahead B performance of the first look-ahead performance, and displays fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on each of the third decorative patterns (in this example, "7" and "7") in the pattern display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-34 (8), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "771") that results in a "miss" display result in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is being performed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the first look-ahead B performance of the first look-ahead performance, and displays fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on each of the third decorative patterns (in this example, "7" and "7") in the pattern display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (9), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "771") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "771") is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the first look-ahead B performance of the first look-ahead performance, and displays fixed icon 02TM41 superimposed on each of the third decorative patterns (in this example, "7" and "7") in the pattern display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (10), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (first look-ahead counter = 0) based on the next reserved memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and enlarges and displays the third decorative symbol. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 ends the first look-ahead B performance of the first look-ahead performance, which is a look-ahead preview performance, and erases the fixed icon 02TM41 from each of the third decorative patterns (in this example, "7" and "7") in the pattern display areas 5L and 5C of the image display device 5.

At this time, since the second hold memory count has become 1, the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode in the active display area 02TM03E, and shifts the second hold displays 02TM02 in the normal mode that were displayed in the second hold display area 02TM02E one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (11), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative symbols in reduced size in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative symbols at this time is a combination of third decorative symbols (in this example, "777") that indicates that the display result will be a "small time-saving win."

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (12), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be displayed in a static state, the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777"), which indicates that the display result will be a "small time-saving win," in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is being performed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (13), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "777") in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, it erases the active display 02TM03 from the active display area 02TM03E.

<Second prediction performance>
In this embodiment, the second look-ahead performance can be executed based on the result of the judgment at the time of the start winning. The second look-ahead performance is a type of look-ahead notice performance that suggests that the display result of the variable display that was the subject of the judgment at the time of the start winning is a "time-saving small win" without using the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the second look-ahead performance, the second look-ahead image is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, suggesting that the display result of the variable display that is the subject of the forecast will be a "small time-saving win". In this example, the second look-ahead image is an image that includes a part of an image (in this example, "777") that imitates a combination of third decorative symbols that indicates that the display result of the stopped display will be a "small time-saving win" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Below, the image that imitates the third decorative symbol included in this second look-ahead image will be referred to as a "pseudo third decorative symbol" as appropriate. However, this pseudo third decorative symbol is a different image from the third decorative symbol because it does not correspond to the variable display that is being executed.

In this embodiment, the pseudo third decorative pattern is an image that includes a number pattern and a base pattern, but does not include a light effect display. However, the pseudo third decorative pattern is not limited to this form, and may be a decorative pattern that includes at least one of a number pattern, a base pattern, and a light effect display.

In the above embodiment, an example of an image including a portion of the pseudo third decorative pattern is shown as the second preview image, but the second preview image is not limited to this form, and other images may be used as the second preview image.

For example, the second pre-reading image may be an image including the letter "V" to suggest that the display result will be a "time-saving small win" or an image including the letter "FEVER." It may also be an image including an ally character related to the success or victory effects in a super reach.

In this embodiment, the second look-ahead performance is executed in the variable display when the value of the second look-ahead counter, which is set when it is decided to execute the second look-ahead performance in the start winning performance determination process, becomes 1 or 2. However, this is not limited to this form, and the second look-ahead performance may be executed in the variable display when the second look-ahead counter has any value of 1, 2, 3, or 4. The second look-ahead counter will be described in detail later in FIG. 20-38.

In this embodiment, when the second look-ahead image is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5, the second look-ahead image has a lower display priority than the other effect images (the third decorative pattern, the words "Super High Speed HYPER RUSH" at the top of the screen, etc.). Therefore, to the player, it appears as if the other effect images and the second look-ahead image are displayed in that order.

However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and the second preview image may be configured to have a higher display priority (display layer) than other performance images. In this case, by making the second preview image a transparent image, the second image is displayed in front of other performance images, but since the second preview image is transparent, it is possible to view performance images (other performance images, etc.) related to the currently executed variable display.

In this embodiment, when the performance mode is [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], the second look-ahead performance is executed, and the second look-ahead image is displayed on the image display device 5. In this embodiment, the visibility of the second look-ahead image changes depending on the display mode (enlarged/reduced) of the third decorative pattern. When the third decorative pattern is enlarged, the visibility of the second look-ahead image decreases. That is, when the third decorative pattern is enlarged, the visibility of the pseudo-third decorative pattern included in the second look-ahead image decreases. Also, when the third decorative pattern is reduced, the visibility of the second look-ahead image increases. That is, when the third decorative pattern is reduced, the visibility of the pseudo-third decorative pattern included in the second look-ahead image increases.

(Example of the second look-ahead performance)
Figures 20-36 and 20-37 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of presentation images of each presentation related to the second pre-reading presentation.

In this example, when the presentation mode is [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] (big win occurrence count value = 3 or more, a time-saving state), the number of second reserved memories is 4, and four second reserved displays are displayed. In addition, the display result of the reserved memory that is in the third position in the change order among these four reserved memories is determined to be a "time-saving small win," and when a start winning occurs corresponding to this reserved memory, in the start winning time presentation decision process (see Figure 20-38), it is decided to execute the second look-ahead presentation, and the second look-ahead counter is set to 3.

First, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (1), the performance control CPU 120 displays the confirmed third decorative pattern combination (in this example, "721") of the variable display executed immediately before in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the small pattern combination (in this example, "721") in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays four second hold displays 02TM02 in the normal mode in the second hold display area 02TM02E.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display various performance images corresponding to the performance mode being [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH] (see Figure 20-28).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (2), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (second look-ahead counter = 2) based on the next reserved memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and enlarges and displays the third decorative symbol. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute the second look-ahead performance, and based on the fact that the value of the second look-ahead counter is set to 2, executes the second look-ahead performance and displays the second look-ahead image 02TM42 on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, since the second hold memory count has reached 3, the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode in the active display area 02TM03E, and shifts the second hold displays 02TM02 in the normal mode that were displayed in the second hold display area 02TM02E one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (3), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative patterns in reduced size in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative patterns at this time is a combination of third decorative patterns (in this example, "415") that indicates that the display result will be a "miss."

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the second look-ahead performance, causing the second look-ahead image 02TM42 to be displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (4), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "415") that results in a "miss" display result in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is being performed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 ends the second look-ahead performance and erases the second look-ahead image 02TM42 from the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "415") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "415") in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, it erases the active display 02TM03 from the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (6), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (second look-ahead counter = 1) based on the next reserved memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and enlarges and displays the third decorative symbol. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute the second look-ahead performance, and based on the fact that the value of the second look-ahead counter is set to 1, executes the second look-ahead performance and displays the second look-ahead image 02TM42 on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, since the second hold memory count has reached 2, the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode in the active display area 02TM03E, and shifts the second hold displays 02TM02 in the normal mode that were displayed in the second hold display area 02TM02E one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (7), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative patterns in reduced size in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative patterns at this time is a combination of third decorative patterns (in this example, "342") that indicates that the display result will be a "miss."

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the second look-ahead performance, causing the second look-ahead image 02TM42 to be displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-36 (8), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "342") that results in a "miss" display result in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is being performed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 ends the second look-ahead performance and erases the second look-ahead image 02TM42 from the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-37 (9), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "342") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "342") in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, it erases the active display 02TM03 from the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-37 (10), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (second look-ahead counter = 0) based on the next reserved memory, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the third decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and enlarges and displays the third decorative symbol. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

At this time, since the second hold memory count has become 1, the performance control CPU 120 displays the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode in the active display area 02TM03E, and shifts the second hold displays 02TM02 in the normal mode that were displayed in the second hold display area 02TM02E one by one toward the active display area 02TM03E.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-37 (11), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third decorative symbols in reduced size in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of third decorative symbols at this time is a combination of third decorative symbols (in this example, "777") that indicates that the display result will be a "small time-saving win."

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-37 (12), at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed, the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777"), which indicates that the display result will be a "small time-saving win," in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is being performed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-37 (13), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined third decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "777") in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, it erases the active display 02TM03 from the active display area 02TM03E.

[Start-up winning performance determination process]
When a start winning occurs, the CPU 103 transmits to the performance control CPU 120 the result of the judgment at the time of winning, which is whether or not a jackpot will be awarded, and a pattern designation command indicating the result of the judgment of the type of jackpot, a variable category command indicating the result of the judgment of the variable pattern, which is the result of the judgment at the time of winning, and a reserved memory number addition designation command (first reserved memory number addition designation command or second reserved memory number addition designation command) specifying that the reserved memory number has increased by 1.

Figure 20-38 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the presentation when the start win is made. The presentation control CP 120 executes the process of determining the presentation when the start win is made in the advance notice setting process (step S161) of the presentation control process shown in Figure 18.

In the start winning presentation decision process, the presentation control CPU 120 first checks whether a set of start winning commands (e.g., a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a first reserved memory count increment designation command or a second reserved memory count increment designation command) based on the occurrence of a start winning at the start winning port has been newly received (step S02TM4010).

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether a set of pattern designation commands, variable category designation commands, and reserved memory count addition designation commands (first reserved memory count addition designation command or second reserved memory count addition designation command) have been newly stored in the start winning command storage area. If a set of start winning commands has not been newly received (NO in step S02TM4010), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If a new command for a set of start winnings has been received (YES in step S02TM4010), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the display result of the variable display different from the variable display of the start winning is either a "big win" or a "time-saving small win" (step S02TM4015).

The variable display different from the variable display of the start winning is the variable display currently being executed and the variable display of reserved memory other than the reserved memory corresponding to the start winning. Therefore, in the processing of step S02TM4015, at the time of the start winning, it is determined whether the display result of the variable display currently being executed and the variable display of reserved memory other than the reserved memory corresponding to the start winning is a "big win" or a "time-saving small win".

If the display result of the variable display different from the variable display of the starting winning is either "big win" or "time-saving small win" (YES in step S02TM4015), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the display result of the variable display different from the variable display of the start winning is neither a "big win" nor a "time-saving small win" (NO in step S02TM4015), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the change pre-reading prohibition flag described below is set (step S02TM4020). If the change pre-reading prohibition flag is set (YES in step S02TM4020), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM4090.

In this embodiment, the change pre-read prohibition flag is a type of flag that is set based on the decision that at least one change effect (pending change effect, active change effect) will be executed. When the change pre-read prohibition flag is set, the processing of steps S02TM4030 to S02TM4080 is skipped, so that it is possible to restrict the execution of a change effect that changes the pending display or active display for a variable display corresponding to a new start winning when it has been decided to execute a change effect on a pending memory whose execution is pending or a currently executing active display. This change pre-read prohibition flag is erased when the variable display corresponding to the start winning effect determination processing when the change pre-read prohibition flag was set ends.

If the change pre-read prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S02TM4020), the performance control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display based on the final display mode determination table for the active display (see Figure 20-39 (A)) (step S02TM4030).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode (step S02TM4040). If the final display mode of the active display is the normal mode (YES in step S02TM4040), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM4090.

If the final display mode of the active display is not the normal mode (NO in step S02TM4040), the performance control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the pending display and active display based on the change pattern determination table (see Figures 20-39 (B1) to 20-40 (B4)) (step S02TM4050).

Here, if the final display mode of the active display is not the normal mode (NO in step S02TM4040), it means that the final display mode of the active display is either the blue mode or the red mode. If the final display mode of the active display is either the blue mode or the red mode, a change performance is performed on the pending display or active display, and it is displayed in a mode other than the normal mode. In other words, since at least one change performance is executed, if the final display mode of the active display is not the normal mode (NO in step S02TM4040), it is necessary to determine which change pattern to use to change the pending display or active display. Therefore, if NO in step S02TM4040, the change pattern of the pending display and active display is determined in the processing of step S02TM4050 based on the change pattern determination table.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance mode of the change performance based on the change performance mode determination table (see Figures 20-41 (1) and (2)) (step S02TM4060).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the change read-ahead counter (step S02TM4070) and sets the change read-ahead prohibition flag (step S02TM1080).

In this embodiment, a look-ahead counter is set to indicate the number of times the change display will occur before the change display that is the target of the look-ahead preview performance is executed. In this example, the look-ahead counter that indicates the number of times the change display will occur before the change display that is the target of the change performance in the look-ahead preview performance is executed is called the "change look-ahead counter", the look-ahead counter that indicates the number of times the change display will occur before the change display that is the target of the first look-ahead performance in the look-ahead preview performance is executed is called the "first look-ahead counter", and the look-ahead counter that indicates the number of times the change display will occur before the change display that is the target of the second look-ahead performance in the look-ahead preview performance is executed is called the "second look-ahead counter".

If step S02TM4020 is YES, if step S02TM4040 is YES, or after step S02TM4080, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or more (step S02TM4090). If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 3 or more, that is, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 or 2 (step S02TM4090 is NO), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or more, i.e., if the jackpot occurrence count value is between 3 and 10,000 (YES in step S02TM4090), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the value of the second reserved memory number is 3 or more (step S02TM4100). If the value of the second reserved memory number is not 3 or more (NO in step S02TM4100), i.e., if the value of the second reserved memory number is between 0 and 2, the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the value of the second reserved memory count is 3 or more (YES in step S02TM4100), that is, if the value of the second reserved memory count is 3 or 4, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the display result specified by the pattern designation command is either a "miss" or a "small time-saving win" (step S02TM4110). If the display result specified by the pattern designation command is neither a "miss" nor a "small time-saving win" (NO in step S02TM4110), that is, if the display result specified by the pattern designation command is either a "big win" or a "normal small win", it judges whether the first pre-reading prohibition flag described later is set (step S02TM4120). If the first pre-reading prohibition flag is set (YES in step S02TM4120), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM4170.

In this embodiment, the first read-ahead prohibition flag is a type of flag that is set based on the decision to execute the first read-ahead performance. When the first read-ahead prohibition flag is set, the processing of steps S02TM4130 to S02TM4160 is skipped, so that the execution of the first read-ahead performance can be restricted for the variable display corresponding to a new start winning in a state where it has been decided to execute the first read-ahead performance for a pending memory whose execution is pending. This first read-ahead prohibition flag is erased when the variable display corresponding to the start winning performance determination processing when the first read-ahead prohibition flag was set ends.

If the first pre-reading prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S02TM4120), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the first pre-reading performance based on the execution/non-execution decision table for the first pre-reading performance (see FIG. 20-39 (B1)) (step S02TM4130).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the first look-ahead performance (step S02TM4140). If it has not been decided to execute the first look-ahead performance (NO in step S02TM4140), the performance control CPU 120 proceeds to step S02TM4170.

If it has been decided to execute the first look-ahead performance (YES in step S02TM4140), the performance control CPU 120 sets the first look-ahead counter (step S02TM4150), sets the first look-ahead prohibition flag (step S02TM4160), and proceeds to step S02TM4170.

If step S02TM4120 is YES, if step S02TM4140 is NO, or after step S02TM4160, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a second pre-reading prohibition flag, which will be described later, is set (step S02TM4170). If the second pre-reading prohibition flag is set (step S02TM4170 is YES), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

In this embodiment, the second read-ahead prohibition flag is a type of flag that is set based on the decision to execute the second read-ahead performance. When the second read-ahead prohibition flag is set, the processing of steps S02TM4180 to S02TM4210 is skipped, so that the execution of the second read-ahead performance can be restricted for the variable display corresponding to a new start winning when it has been decided to execute the second read-ahead performance for the pending memory whose execution is pending. This second read-ahead prohibition flag is erased when the variable display corresponding to the start winning performance determination processing when the second read-ahead prohibition flag was set ends.

If the second pre-reading prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S02TM4170), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the second pre-reading performance based on the execution/non-execution decision table for the second pre-reading performance (see FIG. 20-39 (B2)) (step S02TM4180).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the second look-ahead performance (step S02TM4190). If it has not been decided to execute the second look-ahead performance (NO in step S02TM4190), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If it has been decided to execute the second look-ahead performance (YES in step S02TM4190), the performance control CPU 120 sets the second look-ahead counter (step S02TM4200), sets the second look-ahead prohibition flag (step S02TM4210), and ends the processing.

In this way, in the processing of step S02TM4015, if the display result of the variable display different from the variable display of the start winning is neither a "jackpot" nor a "small time-saving win", the processing for determining whether or not to execute a change performance for the corresponding display (reserved display, active display) (steps S02TM4020 to S02TM4080) and the processing for determining whether or not to execute the first look-ahead performance or the second look-ahead performance (steps S02TM4090 to S02TM4210) are skipped, thereby preventing the execution of inappropriate performance control that determines to execute a look-ahead preview performance in the variable display corresponding to a new start winning when there is a variable display that has already been determined to be a "jackpot" or a "small time-saving win".

[Tables referenced in the start winning performance determination process]
20-39 to 20-42 are specific examples of tables referenced in any of the processes of the start winning performance determination process. FIG. 20-39 (A) is an example of a final display mode determination table for active display referenced when determining the final display mode of the active display in step S02TM4030. FIG. 20-39 (B1) to FIG. 20-40 (B4) are examples of change pattern determination tables referenced when determining the change pattern of the pending display and active display in step S02TM4050. FIG. 20-41 is an example of a performance mode determination table for change performance referenced when determining the performance mode of the change performance in step S02TM4060. FIG. 20-42 (1) is an example of a first look-ahead performance execution/non-execution determination table referenced when determining whether or not to execute the first look-ahead performance in step S02TM4130. Figure 20-42 (2) is an example of a decision table for determining whether or not to execute the second pre-reading performance, which is referenced when determining whether or not to execute the second pre-reading performance in step S02TM4180.

<Active display final display mode determination table>
Fig. 20-39(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a final display mode determination table for active display. As shown in Fig. 20-39(A), in this embodiment, the final display mode of active display can be determined to be one of "normal mode", "blue mode", and "red mode", and a judgment value is assigned to each of these modes.

As shown in FIG. 20-39(A), when the judgment result at the time of the initial winning is "miss" (i.e. when the judgment result specified by the pattern designation command is "miss"), the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on the initial winning (new reserved memory) will be the normal mode (white circle display) 90% of the time, the blue mode (blue circle display) 8% of the time, and the red mode (red circle display) 2% of the time.

On the other hand, if the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "jackpot" (i.e. the judgment result specified by the pattern specification command is "jackpot"), the final display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display based on that start winning (new reserved memory) will be the normal mode 75% of the time, the blue mode 15% of the time, and the red mode 10% of the time.

<Change Pattern Determination Table>
20-39 (B1) and (B2), and 20-40 (B3) and (B4) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the change pattern determination table of the reserved display and the active display. When the reserved memory number becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning, (i) the timing when the nth reserved display corresponding to the start winning is displayed in the reserved display area (the timing of the start winning), (ii) the timing when the reserved display corresponding to the start winning shifts to a higher position (active display area side) in the variable ranking in the reserved display area (in the case of n ≧ 2), and (iii) the timing when the reserved display corresponding to the start winning shifts to the active display area (the timing when the active display corresponding to the start winning is displayed), the display information (reserved display or active display) corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning may be displayed in a manner different from the normal manner.

In the explanation of Figures 20-39 (B1) and (B2) and Figures 20-40 (B3) and (B4), active shift refers to the pending display shifting from the pending display area to the active display area (as a result, the active display corresponding to the variable display that was the subject of judgment at the time of the initial winning is displayed).

In this embodiment, a hold change effect can be executed in which the display information (hold display) corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning is displayed in a different manner from the normal manner at any of the timings (i) to (iii) described above. In this example, this hold change effect includes (i) a performance in which the mode of the hold display corresponding to the start winning is displayed in a different manner from the normal manner at the timing of the start winning, and a performance in which the display mode of the hold display is changed at the shift timing of (ii) or (iii). It should be noted that the hold change effect is not limited to this form, and may also include a performance in which the display mode is changed by acting on the hold display (for example, by piercing an arrow into the hold display) during the variable display of the special pattern (the decorative pattern corresponding to it).

Figures 20-39 (B1) and (B2), as well as Figures 20-40 (B3) and (B4) show the display form of the display information (pending display or active display) corresponding to the variable display at each of the timings (i) to (iii) for each change pattern. In the change patterns shown in the figures, "normal" indicates the normal form in which a white circle is displayed, "blue" indicates the blue form in which a blue circle is displayed, and "red" indicates the red form in which a red circle is displayed.

([For 1 reserved item] Change pattern determination table)
When the reserved memory number stored in the reserved memory number storage area is "1", the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for one reserved item shown in Fig. 20-39 (B1). A judgment value is assigned to one of the change patterns 101 to 105 according to the final display mode of the determined active display.

Change pattern 101 is a change pattern in which the pending display of the predicted target is displayed in a normal manner at the time of the start winning, and then the pending display of the predicted target remains in the normal manner at the timing of the active shift, i.e., a normal → normal change pattern.

Following this, similarly, change pattern 102 is normal → blue, change pattern 103 is blue → blue, change pattern 104 is blue → red, and change pattern 105 is red → red.

Here, regardless of the judgment result at the time of the initial winning (the display result specified by the pattern specification command, i.e., "miss", "big win", or "small win"), in the case where the final display mode of the determined active display is the blue mode, the judgment values are allocated so that the probability of determining change pattern 101 is 5%, change pattern 102 is 5%, and change pattern 103 is 90%.

When the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the judgment values are allocated so that change pattern 101 is determined at a rate of 10%, change pattern 102 at 2%, change pattern 103 at 10%, change pattern 104 at 8%, and change pattern 105 at 70%.

([For 2 reserved items] Change pattern determination table)
When the reserved memory number stored in the reserved memory number storage area is "2", the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for two reserved items shown in Fig. 20-39 (B2). A judgment value is assigned to one of the change patterns 201 to 208 according to the final display mode of the determined active display.

Change pattern 201 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the predicted target is displayed in a normal state at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the predicted target remains in the normal state at the timing of the first hold shift, and the hold display of the predicted target remains in the normal state at the timing of the active shift, i.e., a change pattern of normal → normal → normal.

Similarly, change pattern 202 is normal → normal → blue, change pattern 203 is normal → blue → blue, change pattern 204 is blue → blue → blue, change pattern 205 is normal → blue-red, change pattern 206 is blue → blue → red, change pattern 207 is blue → red → red, and change pattern 208 is red → red → red.

Here, regardless of the judgment result at the time of the initial winning (the display result specified by the pattern specification command, i.e., "miss", "big win", or "small win"), in the case where the final display mode of the determined active display is the blue mode, the judgment values are allocated so that the probability of determining change pattern 201 is 10%, change pattern 202 is 5%, change pattern 203 is 5%, and change pattern 204 is 80%.

In addition, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the judgment values are allocated so that the following proportions are determined: change pattern 201 is 10%, change pattern 202 is 2%, change pattern 203 is 2%, change pattern 204 is 10%, change pattern 205 is 1%, change pattern 206 is 8%, change pattern 207 is 8%, and change pattern 208 is 60%.

([3 reserved items] Change pattern determination table)
When the reserved memory number stored in the reserved memory number storage area is "3", the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for three reserved items shown in Fig. 20-40 (B3). A judgment value is assigned to one of the change patterns 301 to 308 according to the final display mode of the determined active display.

Change pattern 301 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the predicted target is displayed in a normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the predicted target remains in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, the hold display of the predicted target remains in the normal mode at the timing of the second hold shift, and the hold display of the predicted target remains in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift, i.e., a change pattern of normal → normal → normal → normal.

Similarly, change pattern 302 is normal → normal → blue → blue, change pattern 303 is normal → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 304 is blue → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 305 is normal → blue → red → red, change pattern 306 is blue → blue → red → red, change pattern 307 is blue → red → red → red, and change pattern 308 is red → red → red → red.

Here, regardless of the judgment result at the time of the initial winning (the display result specified by the pattern specification command, i.e., "miss", "big win", or "small win"), in the case where the final display mode of the determined active display is the blue mode, the judgment values are allocated so that the probability of determining change pattern 301 is 6%, change pattern 302 is 2%, change pattern 303 is 2%, and change pattern 304 is 90%.

In addition, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the judgment values are allocated so that the following proportions are determined: change pattern 301 is 10%, change pattern 302 is 2%, change pattern 303 is 2%, change pattern 304 is 10%, change pattern 305 is 1%, change pattern 306 is 8%, change pattern 307 is 8%, and change pattern 308 is 60%.

([4 reserved items] Change pattern determination table)
When the reserved memory number stored in the reserved memory number storage area is "4", the performance control CPU 120 selects the change pattern determination table for four reserved items shown in Fig. 20-40 (B4). A judgment value is assigned to one of the change patterns 401 to 412 according to the final display mode of the determined active display.

Change pattern 401 is a change pattern in which the hold display of the predicted target is displayed in a normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display of the predicted target is not changed to the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, the hold display of the predicted target is not changed to the normal mode at the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display of the predicted target is not changed to the normal mode at the timing of the third hold shift, and the hold display of the predicted target is not changed to the normal mode at the timing of the active shift, that is, a change pattern of normal → normal → normal → normal → normal.

Similarly, change pattern 402 is normal → normal → normal → blue → blue, change pattern 403 is normal → normal → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 404 is normal → blue → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 405 is blue → blue → blue → blue → blue, change pattern 406 is normal → normal → blue → red → red, change pattern 407 is normal → blue → blue → red → red, change pattern 408 is normal → blue → red → red → red, change pattern 409 is blue → blue → blue → red → red, change pattern 410 is blue → blue → red → red → red, change pattern 411 is blue → red → red → red → red, and change pattern 412 is red → red → red → red → red.

Here, regardless of the judgment result at the time of the initial winning (the display result specified by the symbol specification command, either "miss" or "jackpot"), in the case where the final display mode of the determined active display is the blue mode, the judgment values are allocated so that the rate of determination is 10% for change pattern 401, 10% for change pattern 402, 10% for change pattern 403, 10% for change pattern 404, and 60% for change pattern 405.

In addition, when the final display mode of the determined active display is the red mode, the judgment values are allocated so that the following proportions are determined: change pattern 401 is 20%, change pattern 402 is 5%, change pattern 403 is 5%, change pattern 404 is 5%, change pattern 405 is 20%, change pattern 406 is 2%, change pattern 407 is 2%, change pattern 408 is 2%, change pattern 409 is 7%, change pattern 410 is 6%, change pattern 411 is 6%, and change pattern 412 is 20%.

<Determination table for change effect mode>
20-41(1) and (2) are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of a presentation mode determination table for a change presentation. As shown in FIG. 20-41(1) and (2), in this embodiment, a judgment value is allocated so that the determination ratio of the presentation mode of the change presentation differs depending on the change timing in the change pattern.

Figure 20-41 (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode determination table for the change presentation for the [first special symbol].

When the timing of the change in the change pattern is "normal → blue", it is decided to execute the first change performance 20% of the time, the second change performance 0% of the time, and the third change performance 80% of the time.

When the timing of the change in the change pattern is "normal → red," it is decided to execute the first change performance 15% of the time, the second change performance 80% of the time, and the third change performance 5% of the time.

When the timing of the change in the change pattern is "blue → red," it is decided that the first change performance will be executed 40% of the time, the second change performance will be executed 50% of the time, and the third change performance will be executed 10% of the time.

Figure 20-41 (2) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode determination table for the change presentation for the [second special symbol].

When the timing of the change in the change pattern is "normal → blue", it is decided that the third change performance will be executed with a probability of 100%.

When the timing of the change in the change pattern is "normal → red", it is decided to execute the third change performance with a probability of 100%.

When the timing of the change in the change pattern is "blue → red," it is decided that the third change effect will be executed with a probability of 100%.

<First look-ahead effect presentation mode determination table>
Fig. 20-42(1) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to execute the first look-ahead effect. As shown in Fig. 20-42(1), in this embodiment, a judgment value is allocated so that the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the first look-ahead effect varies depending on the display result specified by the symbol designation command.

If the display result is a "miss," there is a 90% chance that it will be decided not to execute the first look-ahead performance, and a 10% chance that it will be decided to execute the first look-ahead performance.

In addition, if the display result is a "small time-saving hit," there is a 70% chance that the first pre-reading effect will not be executed, and there is a 30% chance that the first pre-reading effect will be executed.

<Table for determining the presentation mode of the second pre-reading presentation>
Fig. 20-42(2) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to execute the second look-ahead performance. As shown in Fig. 20-42(2), in this embodiment, a judgment value is allocated so that the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the second look-ahead performance varies depending on the display result specified by the symbol designation command.

If the display result is a "miss," there is a 95% chance that it will be decided not to execute the second look-ahead performance, and a 5% chance that it will be decided to execute the second look-ahead performance.

In addition, if the display result is a "small time-saving hit," there is an 80% chance that the first pre-reading effect will not be executed, and there is a 20% chance that the first pre-reading effect will be executed.

In this way, if the display result is a "miss," the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is 10%, and the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect is 5%. Also, if the display result is a "small time-saving hit," the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is 30%, and the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect is 20%. In this way, the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is higher than that of the second look-ahead effect.

Furthermore, among the look-ahead preview effects, the giant symbol effect may be set to have a higher execution rate than the reserved look-ahead preview effect.Furthermore, the combined execution rate of the first look-ahead effect and the giant symbol effect may be set to be higher than the combined execution rate of the second look-ahead effect and the reserved look-ahead preview effect.

[Jackpot count display]
In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the presentation mode during the time-saving state a is switched when the count value of the jackpot occurrence counter (hereinafter referred to as the ``jackpot occurrence count value'' as appropriate) is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (hereinafter referred to as the ``mode switching determination value'' as appropriate).

In this example, the mode switching judgment value is set to "3." When the number of jackpot occurrences, counting from the first jackpot, is 1 to 2 (i.e., when the jackpot occurrence count value is < mode switching judgment value), the presentation mode for the time-saving state a can be controlled to [Dream RUSH], and when the number of jackpot occurrences, counting from the first jackpot, is 3 or more (i.e., when the jackpot occurrence count value is >= mode switching judgment value), the presentation mode for the time-saving state a can be controlled to "Super-high-speed HYPER RUSH."

In this embodiment, when the jackpot occurrence count value is equal to or less than the mode switching judgment value, a jackpot count display can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 for a predetermined period of time. The jackpot count display can notify the number of jackpot occurrences counted from the first jackpot (jackpot occurrence count value), and can also notify the remaining number of jackpots required until the mode switching judgment value is reached (mode switching judgment value - jackpot occurrence count value). Therefore, the jackpot count display can appropriately show the player how many jackpots remain to occur before transitioning to [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], which has a high rate of execution of a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation display period (fast fluctuation speed).

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a required number of jackpots notification effect that notifies the remaining number of jackpots required to reach the mode switching judgment value without using a jackpot count display during the ending period of the jackpot. The required number of jackpots notification effect displays the required number of jackpots related to the remaining number of jackpots required to reach the mode switching judgment value on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The required number of jackpots display includes the text "n more jackpots until the super high-speed HYPER RUSH" (n = 1, 2) (see Figure 20-51 (8) and Figure 20-56 (23)).

In this example, when a jackpot occurrence count value = 1 occurs, two more jackpots are required to reach the mode switching judgment value, so the required number of jackpots notification effect executed when a jackpot occurrence count value = 1 occurs is appropriately referred to as the "required number of jackpots notification effect [2 times]". Also, when a jackpot occurrence count value = 2 occurs, one more jackpot is required to reach the mode switching judgment value, so the required number of jackpots notification effect executed when a jackpot occurrence count value = 2 occurs is appropriately referred to as the "required number of jackpots notification effect [1 time]".

In this embodiment, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (i.e., when the jackpot occurrence count value is 1, 2, or 3), during the round period of a specific type of jackpot game state (in this example, "10Ra time-saving jackpot", "10Rb time-saving jackpot", "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot") or during the small jackpot game period of a specific type of small jackpot game state (in this example, "time-saving small jackpot"), the jackpot count display is displayed on the left or center of the screen of the image display device 5. Also, during the period when the presentation mode during the a time-saving state is controlled to [Dream RUSH] (waiting period for variable display start, variable display period), the jackpot count display is displayed on the left of the screen of the image display device 5.

The jackpot count display is made up of four parts, from the bottom to the top of the screen: a first count section, a second count section, a third count section, and a reach section. The letters "V" and "WIN" are displayed in the first count section, the second count section, and the third count section of the jackpot count display. The letters "PREMIUM FEVER" are displayed in the reach section of the jackpot count display. Below, the first count section of the jackpot count display will be referred to as the "jackpot count display (first count section)" or the "first count section" as appropriate. The same applies to the second count section, the third count section, and the reach section of the jackpot count display. At least one of the first count section, the second count section, and the third count section of the jackpot count display will be referred to as the "count section" as appropriate.

<Display mode of jackpot count display>
In this embodiment, the display size of the arrival section of the jackpot count display is larger than that of any of the count sections. In addition, the display size of the third count section of the jackpot count display is larger than that of the first and second count sections, and the display size of the second count section is larger than that of the first count section. That is, the display sizes are larger in the order of the first count section, the second count section, the third count section, and the arrival section. Therefore, the display sizes of the information displayed in the count section (such as the character "V" and the character "WIN") are larger (highlighted) in the order of the information displayed in the first count section, the information displayed in the second count section, and the information displayed in the third count section. In addition, the display size of the information displayed in the arrival section (the character "PREMIUM FEVER") is larger (highlighted) than that of any of the count sections (such as the character "V" and the character "WIN").

In the above embodiment, an example was given of a method of varying the degree of emphasis of each part of the jackpot count display by varying the display size, but the method is not limited to this and other methods may be used to vary the degree of emphasis of each part of the jackpot count display.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which each part of the jackpot count display can emit light, the degree of emphasis of each part of the jackpot count display can be varied by increasing the light emission brightness in the order of the first count section, the second count section, the third count section, and the arrival section.

In addition, if a configuration is adopted in which each section of the jackpot count display can flash, the degree of emphasis of each section of the jackpot count display can be varied by shortening the flashing intervals in the order of the first count section, the second count section, the third count section, and the arrival section.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the degree of emphasis was varied by varying the display mode of each part of the jackpot count display, but this is not limited to the above, and the degree of emphasis may be varied by varying the display mode of the entire jackpot count display.

For example, in a configuration in which the transparency of the jackpot count display can be set to any value, when a jackpot count display corresponding to a jackpot occurrence count value of 1 is displayed, the entire jackpot count display may be displayed in a display mode with a transparency of 90%, when a jackpot count display corresponding to a jackpot occurrence count value of 2 is displayed, the entire jackpot count display may be displayed in a display mode with a transparency of 50%, and when a jackpot count display corresponding to a jackpot occurrence count value of 3 is displayed, the entire jackpot count display may be displayed in a display mode with a transparency of 0%.

In this embodiment, the counting sections (first counting section, second counting section, third counting section) of the jackpot count display can be displayed in three different display modes: an initial mode, a first change mode, and a second change mode. In this embodiment, the effect of changing the counting section from the initial mode to the first change mode is called a V change effect, and the effect of changing the counting section from the first change mode to the second change mode is called a WIN change effect.

The series of V-change effects and WIN-change effects executed on the first count section will be referred to as the "first stage effects" as appropriate, the series of V-change effects and WIN-change effects executed on the second count section will be referred to as the "second stage effects" as appropriate, and the series of V-change effects and WIN-change effects executed on the third count section will be referred to as the "third stage effects" as appropriate.

When the count section is displayed in the initial state, the information displayed on the count section is the white letter "V", when the count section is displayed in the first change state, the information displayed on the count section is the red letter "V", and when the count section is displayed in the second change state, the information displayed on the count section is the red letter "WIN".

In this embodiment, when a V-change effect is performed on the count section, the jackpot occurrence display (in this example, the red letter "V" shown in FIG. 20-51 (5)) related to the occurrence of a jackpot displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 acts on the white letter "V" displayed on the count section in the initial state, and changes to the red letter "V" displayed on the count section in the first change state.

The arrival section of the jackpot count display can be displayed in two different display modes: an initial mode and a change mode. In this embodiment, the effect of changing the arrival section from the initial mode to the change mode is called the arrival section change effect.

When the destination is displayed in its initial state, the information displayed in the destination is "PREMIUM FEVER" in white letters, and when the destination is displayed in its variable state, the information displayed in the destination is "PREMIUM FEVER" in red letters.

<[When hitting a jackpot] Timing of the jackpot count display and change>
In this embodiment, when it is decided in the jackpot performance decision process (see Figure 20-43) to display a jackpot count display, the jackpot count display can be displayed in the jackpot game state every time a jackpot occurs with a jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2, 3, and the display mode of each count section corresponding to the jackpot occurrence count value is changed in the order of from the initial mode to the first change mode and then the second change mode.

In this embodiment, a jackpot with a jackpot occurrence count value of 2 or more is a jackpot that occurs when the time-saving state (a time-saving state, b time-saving state) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed is controlled. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the time-saving state, the probability of a jackpot via a small jackpot occurring when the display result becomes a "small jackpot" and a jackpot via a V prize is higher than a jackpot occurring when the display result becomes a "jackpot" (see FIG. 20-2 (B2)). Therefore, in this example, when explaining the occurrence of a jackpot occurrence count value of 2 or more, an example of a jackpot via a small jackpot is used to explain the occurrence, but the same applies to a jackpot occurring when the display result becomes a "jackpot", so an explanation is omitted.

(1) <When the jackpot count value = 1 occurs>
(1-1) During the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the end of the right-hit notification of the first round to the end of the second round), the jackpot count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, each count section and the arrival section are both displayed in the initial state (see FIG. 20-51(5)).

(1-2) Next, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from when the third round starts to when the first predetermined period has elapsed), the jackpot count display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, a V-change effect is executed on the first count section, and the first count section changes from the initial state to the first change state. In addition, the second count section, the third count section, and the arrival section all continue to be displayed in the initial state (see FIG. 20-51 (6)).

(1-3) Next, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from when the third round starts and the first specified period has elapsed to when the second specified period has elapsed), the jackpot count display continues to be displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, a WIN change effect is executed on the first count section, and the first count section changes from the first change state to the second change state. In addition, the second count section, the third count section, and the arrival section all continue to be displayed in their initial states (see FIG. 20-51 (7)).

(2) <When the jackpot count value is 2>
(2-1) During the small win game period in the small win game state and the big win round period in the big win game state (in this example, the period from the timing of the V winning in the small win game period to the end of the second round of the big win round period), the big win count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the first count section is continuously displayed in the second change mode, and the second count section, the third count section, and the arrival section are all continuously displayed in the initial mode (see FIG. 20-56 (20)).

(2-2) Next, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the start of the third round to the elapse of the first predetermined period), the jackpot count display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, a V-change effect is executed on the second count section, and the second count section changes from the initial state to the first change state. In addition, the first count section continues to be displayed in the second change state, and the third count section and the arrival section both continue to be displayed in the initial state (see FIG. 20-56 (21)).

(2-3) Next, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from when the third round starts and the first predetermined period has elapsed to when the second predetermined period has elapsed), the jackpot count display continues to be displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, a WIN change effect is executed on the second count section, and the second count section changes from the first change state to the second change state. Also, the first count section continues to be displayed in the second change state, and the third count section and the arrival section both continue to be displayed in their initial states (see FIG. 20-56 (22)).

(3) <When the jackpot count value is 3>
(3-1) During the small win game period in the small win game state and the big win round period in the big win game state (in this example, the period from the timing of the V winning in the small win game period to the end of the second round of the big win round period), the big win count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the first count section and the second count section are continuously displayed in the second change mode, and the third count section and the arrival section are both continuously displayed in the initial mode (see FIG. 20-59 (11)).

(3-2) Next, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the timing when the third round starts to the timing when the first predetermined period has elapsed), the jackpot count display is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, a V-change effect is executed on the third count section, and the third count section changes from the initial state to the first change state. In addition, the first count section and the second count section continue to be displayed in the second change state, and the arrival section continues to be displayed in the initial state (see FIG. 20-59 (12)).

(3-3) Next, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from when the third round starts and the first predetermined period has elapsed to when the second predetermined period has elapsed), the jackpot count display continues to be displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the second change performance is executed for the third count section, and the third count section changes from the first change state to the second change state. The first and second count sections continue to be displayed in the second change state, and the arrival section continues to be displayed in the initial state (see FIG. 20-59 (13)).

(3-4) Next, during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state (in this example, the period from the timing when the third round starts and the first and second predetermined periods have elapsed to the timing when the third predetermined period has elapsed), the jackpot count display continues to be displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, a reaching part change performance is executed for the reaching part, and the reaching part changes from the initial state to the changing state. The first count part, the second count part, and the third count part continue to be displayed in the second changing state (see FIG. 20-59 (14)).

<Timing of the jackpot count display during time-saving mode>
In this embodiment, in the a time-saving state, which is controlled after the occurrence of a jackpot, with the jackpot occurrence count value = 1 or 2, a jackpot count display can be displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5.

In this example, in the time-saving state a = [Dream Rush], which is controlled after the occurrence of a jackpot with a jackpot occurrence count value of 1 or 2, the jackpot count display can be displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 during the waiting period for the start of the variable display and the variable display period based on the fact that the jackpot count display flag described below is set (see Figures 20-58 (1) and (2), and Figures 20-61 (1) to (3)).

However, in the time-saving state [Dream Rush] that is controlled after the occurrence of a jackpot with a jackpot occurrence count value of 1 or 2, even during the variable display period when the jackpot count display flag is set, the jackpot count display is erased from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 and is not displayed during the period when the super reach performance is being executed (see Figures 20-58 (3) and (8), and Figures 20-61 (4) to (7)). When it develops into a super reach performance, the display result is a "time-saving small win" (via a small win) and a performance is performed to notify whether or not a jackpot will occur, or the display result is a "normal small win" and a performance is performed to notify whether or not the state will fall back to normal. The information (jackpot count display) that notifies the player of the current number of jackpot occurrences (jackpot occurrence count value) has a lower priority for the player than information related to the Super Reach performance that notifies the display results of the variable display currently in progress (the performance image of the Super Reach performance), so the jackpot count display is not displayed when the Super Reach performance is progressing.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the jackpot count display is not displayed when the super reach performance is progressing, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the jackpot count display may be displayed even when the super reach performance is progressing.

<Display mode of the jackpot count display during time-saving mode>
In this embodiment, in the a time-saving state which is controlled after the occurrence of a jackpot with a jackpot occurrence count value of 1 or 2, the jackpot count display displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in the same display manner as the display manner immediately before it was erased when it was displayed during the jackpot before being controlled to the a time-saving state.

In this example, in the a time-saving state = [Dream Rush] that is controlled after the occurrence of a jackpot with a jackpot occurrence count value = 1, the jackpot count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 in the same display mode as the jackpot count display immediately before it is erased when it was displayed during a jackpot (jackpot count = 1) (the first count section is displayed in the second change mode, and the second count section, third count section, and arrival section are all displayed in the initial mode (see Figure 20-51 (7))).

In addition, in the a time-saving state = [Dream RUSH] that is controlled after the occurrence of a jackpot with a jackpot occurrence count value of 2, the jackpot count display is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 in the same display mode as the jackpot count display immediately before it was erased when it was displayed during a jackpot (jackpot count = 2) (the first and second count sections are displayed in the second change mode, and the third count section and the arrival section are displayed in the initial mode (see Figure 20-56 (22))).

[Jackpot performance determination process]
Fig. 20-43 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process executed during a jackpot. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect determination process shown in Fig. 20-43 in the effect control process during a jackpot (step S176) of the effect control process shown in Fig. 18. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command, it determines the effect to be executed during a jackpot (and the effect not to be executed) by the effect determination process shown in Fig. 20-43.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the type of the jackpot in question is a "3R regular jackpot" (step S02TM5010).

If the type of the jackpot is a "3R pattern normal jackpot" (YES in step S02TM5010), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the jackpot type of the jackpot is not a "3R pattern normal jackpot" (NO in step S02TM5010), that is, if the jackpot type is any of the "10Ra pattern time-saving jackpot", "10Rb pattern time-saving jackpot", "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot", etc., the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (step S02TM5020).

If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 3 or less (NO in step S02TM5020), that is, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 4 or more (4 to 10,000), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (YES in step S02TM5020), i.e., if the jackpot occurrence count value is any value between 1 and 3, the presentation control CPU 120 decides to display the jackpot count display (step S02TM5030) and sets the jackpot count display flag (step S02TM5040).

The jackpot count display flag is a type of flag that is set when it is decided that the jackpot count display will be displayed at the start of a jackpot or when a V win occurs during a small jackpot. This jackpot count display flag is a flag that indicates that the jackpot count display will be displayed in the jackpot game state, small jackpot game state, or time-saving state, and is erased at the same timing as when the first flag or second flag described above is erased (reset).

After processing step S02TM5040, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 (step S02TM5050).

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 (YES in step S02TM5050), the presentation control CPU 120 decides to execute the first stage presentation (V change presentation, WIN change presentation) for the first count section of the jackpot count display (step S02TM5060), decides to execute the required number of jackpots notification presentation [2 times] (step S02TM5070), and ends the process.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 1 (NO in step S02TM5050), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 (step S02TM5080).

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 (YES in step S02TM5080), the presentation control CPU 120 decides to execute the second stage presentation (V change presentation, WIN change presentation) for the second count section of the jackpot count display (step S02TM5090), decides to execute the required number of jackpots notification presentation [1 time] (step S02TM5100), and ends the process.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 2 (NO in step S02TM5080), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 (step S02TM5110). If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 3 (NO in step S02TM5110), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 (YES in step S02TM5110), the presentation control CPU 120 decides to execute a third stage presentation (V change presentation, WIN change presentation) for the third count section of the jackpot count display (step S02TM5120), decides to execute a reach section change presentation (step S02TM5130), and ends the process.

[Small hit performance decision processing]
Fig. 20-44 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed during a small win. The effect control CPU 120 executes the small win effect determination process shown in Fig. 20-44 in the small win effect process (step S174) of the effect control process shown in Fig. 18. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a small win start designation command, it determines the effect to be executed during a small win (and the effect not to be executed) by the small win effect determination process shown in Fig. 20-44.

In this example, during the small win open process that is executed when the game is controlled to a small win game state, if a V win occurs, a process is executed to update the big win occurrence count value, which is a predetermined numerical data, by adding 1.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the V winning flag is set (step S02TM6010). If the V winning flag is not set (NO in step S02TM6010), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the V winning flag is set (YES in step S02TM6010), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (step S02TM6020).

If the jackpot occurrence count value is not 3 or less (NO in step S02TM6020), that is, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 4 or more (4 to 10,000), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the jackpot occurrence count value is 3 or less (YES in step S02TM6020), that is, if the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 to 3 (a jackpot via a small jackpot at the first jackpot (jackpot occurrence count value = 1) is irregular), the presentation control CPU 120 decides to display the jackpot count display (step S02TM6030), sets the jackpot count display flag (step S02TM6040), and ends the process.

[Processing for determining effects when waiting for fluctuation start]
Fig. 20-45 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process executed during the waiting period for the start of the variable display. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect determination process shown in Fig. 20-45 during the waiting period for the start of the variable display (step S170) of the effect control process shown in Fig. 18. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demo command, it determines the effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the waiting period for the start of the variable display by the effect determination process shown in Fig. 20-45.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot count display flag is set (step S02TM7010). If the jackpot count display flag is not set (NO in step S02TM7010), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the jackpot count display flag is set (YES in step S02TM7010), the presentation control CPU 120 decides to display the jackpot count display (step S02TM7020) and ends the process.

[Processing for determining effects at the start of fluctuation]
When the CPU 103 starts the varying display of the special pattern, it transmits a display result designation command that specifies the display result, a variation pattern designation command that specifies the variation pattern, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) to the performance control CPU 120.

When the display of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) begins, the presentation control CPU 120 is able to determine that the display of the special pattern will be performed and that the display time of the special pattern and the presentation content (reach, pseudo-consecutive, etc.) will be determined based on receiving from the game control microcomputer 00 a set of commands: a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the reserved memory number has been subtracted; a display result designation command that specifies the display result (jackpot, or miss, the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, etc.); and a change pattern designation command that specifies the change time of the special pattern and the presentation content (reach, pseudo-consecutive, etc.).

In addition, when the variable display of the special pattern has ended and the display result has been determined, the performance control CPU 120 is able to determine that the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) has ended and the display result has been derived based on receiving a pattern determination command from the game control microcomputer 100.

Figure 20-46 is a flowchart showing the effect judgment process executed at the start of the change. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect judgment process at the start of the change shown in Figure 20-46 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in Figure 18. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above set of commands accompanying the start of the variable display of the special pattern, it sets a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) for executing the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern based on the display result designation command and the variable pattern designation command, and determines the effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the designated variable pattern by the effect judgment process at the start of the change shown in Figure 20-46.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot count display flag is set (step S02TM8010). If the jackpot count display flag is not set (NO in step S02TM8010), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the jackpot count display flag is set (YES in step S02TM8010), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to display the jackpot count display (step S02TM8020).

In this way, this process for determining the effect at the start of fluctuation determines whether or not the jackpot count display that was determined to be displayed in the process for determining the effect while waiting for the start of fluctuation (see Figure 20-45) should continue to be displayed at the start of fluctuation.

[Fluctuation performance judgment processing]
Fig. 20-47 is a flowchart showing the effect judgment process executed during the execution period of the variable display. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect judgment process shown in Fig. 20-47 in the effect processing during variable display (step S172) of the effect control process shown in Fig. 18. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the execution period of the variable display by the effect judgment process shown in Fig. 20-47.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot count display flag is set (step S02TM9010). If the jackpot count display flag is not set (NO in step S02TM9010), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the jackpot count display flag is set (YES in step S02TM9010), the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the jackpot count display (step S02TM8020) and determines whether it is time for the fluctuation pattern to develop into a super reach (step S02TM9030).

The CPU 103 can obtain information regarding the elapsed time of the currently being executed variable display in the special symbol variable processing (S112) of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 16, which includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol started to vary and a process of determining whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol variable time corresponding to the variable pattern. Then, in step S02TM9030, the performance control CPU 120 determines, based on that information, whether the current variable time is the timing to develop into a super reach in the variable pattern.

If it is not time for the variation pattern to develop into a Super Reach (NO in step S02TM9030), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If it is time for the fluctuation pattern to develop into a Super Reach (YES in step S02TM9030), the performance control CPU 120 erases the jackpot count display (step S02TM9040) and ends the process.

In this way, this process of determining the effects during fluctuation determines whether the jackpot count display that was determined to be displayed in the process of determining the effects when waiting for the fluctuation to start (see Figure 20-45) should be continued to be displayed during fluctuation, or whether it should be erased during fluctuation, etc.

[Example of the first hit being a "3R regular jackpot"]
An example of the presentation when the initial hit of the "3R normal jackpot" occurs while the machine is controlled in the "normal mode" will be explained using Figures 20-48 to 20-49.

Figure 20-48 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each of the effects associated with the first hit of the "3R pattern normal jackpot" occurring when controlled in [normal mode], and Figure 20-49 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image associated with the first hit of the "3R pattern normal jackpot" occurring when controlled in [normal mode].

In this example, when the presentation mode is controlled to [normal mode], a variable display of the first special pattern is executed, which results in a "jackpot" ("3R pattern normal jackpot"), and then the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, after which the presentation mode is controlled to [normal mode].

First, as shown in FIG. 20-49 (1), when the presentation mode is controlled to the [normal mode], at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (timing T1 shown in FIG. 20-48), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received a symbol determination command, determines and stops the combination of determined decorative symbols (in this example, "222") that results in a "jackpot" (3R pattern normal jackpot) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it determines and stops the combination of small symbols (in this example, "222") in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, it erases the active display 02TM03 from the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the jackpot occurrence count value is updated to 1 during the special pattern stop processing (see Figure 20-22).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-49 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the jackpot game state (timing T2 shown in FIG. 20-48), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the jackpot start designation command, ends the control that sets the presentation mode to [normal mode], and displays a jackpot start image (in this example, the word "FEVER") on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-49 (3), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts a round game (first round) in the jackpot game state (timing T3 shown in FIG. 20-48), the presentation control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a jackpot round game image. This jackpot round game image is an image that includes a round display (in this example, the characters "Round 1") showing the number of rounds in the jackpot round game, and a prize ball number display (in this example, the characters "TOTAL 00000") showing the total number of prize balls awarded.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a constant right-hit promotion image in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. This constant right-hit promotion image includes the words "right hit" and an arrow image that instructs a right hit to win a prize at the second start prize opening or the large prize opening (here, the large prize opening).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-49 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the round play in the jackpot play state (timing T4 shown in FIG. 20-48), the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation receives the jackpot end designation command and displays a jackpot end image (in this example, a total prize ball count display (the letters "TOTAL 00450") showing the total number of prize balls awarded, and ally characters) on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the jackpot occurrence counter is cleared during the jackpot end process (see Figure 20-23).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-49 (5), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the jackpot game state (timing T5 shown in FIG. 20-48), the presentation control CPU 120 controls the presentation mode to [normal mode], and displays in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is common to the combination of fixed decorative symbols that was fixed and stopped in the variable display executed immediately before (in this example, "222"). At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, a combination of small symbols (in this example, "222") is displayed. At this time, a background image corresponding to [normal mode] (in this example, a clear background image including the sun and mountains) is displayed as the background image.

[Example of the first hit being a "10Ra time-limited jackpot"]
An example of the presentation when the initial hit of the "Pattern 10Ra Time-saving Jackpot" occurs while the reel is controlled in the "Normal Mode" will be explained using Figures 20-50 to 20-52.

Figure 20-50 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each related effect when the first "Pattern 10Ra Time-Shortening Big Hit" occurs when controlled in [Normal Mode], and Figures 20-51 and 20-52 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images related to the first "Pattern 10Ra Time-Shortening Big Hit" occurring when controlled in [Normal Mode].

In this example, when the presentation mode is controlled to [Normal Mode], the display results in a variable display of the first special symbol, which is a "jackpot" ("Pattern 10Ra time-limited jackpot"), and then the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, after which the presentation mode is controlled to [Dream RUSH].

First, as shown in FIG. 20-51 (1), when the presentation mode is controlled to [normal mode], at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (timing T1 shown in FIG. 20-50), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received a symbol determination command, determines and stops the combination of determined decorative symbols (in this example, "555") that results in a "jackpot" (pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "555") is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the jackpot occurrence count value is updated to 1 during the special pattern stop processing (see Figure 20-22).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-51 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the jackpot game state (timing T2 shown in FIG. 20-50), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the jackpot start command, ends the control that sets the presentation mode to [normal mode], and displays the jackpot start image (in this example, the words "Dream Fever") on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-51 (3), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts a round game (first round) in the jackpot game state (timing T3 shown in FIG. 20-48), the performance control CPU 120 displays a constant right-hit promotion image in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as described in FIG. 20-49 (3), and displays an emphasized right-hit promotion image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. This emphasized right-hit promotion image is an image that includes the word "right hit" and an arrow image that instructs a right hit to enter the jackpot, and the letters and arrow image are emphasized more than in the constant right-hit promotion image.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the jackpot round play start image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. However, this jackpot round play start image has a lower display priority than the highlighted right hit promotion image. Therefore, to the player, it appears as if the highlighted right hit promotion image and the jackpot round play start image are displayed in that order. However, in this example, since the display area for the jackpot round play start image and the highlighted right hit promotion image are shared (the entire screen of the image display device 5), only the highlighted right hit promotion image is visible to the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-51 (4), the performance control CPU 120 erases the highlighted right-hit promotion image from the entire screen of the image display device 5 (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 20-50). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the jackpot round play start image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. This jackpot round play start image is an image that includes a round display (in this example, the letters "Round 1") indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot round play, a jackpot right-hit promotion image including the letters "Aim for the attacker!!" and an arrow image indicating a right hit to enter the jackpot winning hole, and an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-51 (5), the presentation control CPU 120 erases the jackpot round play start image from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays the initial state of the jackpot count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 (timing T5 shown in FIG. 20-50).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a jackpot occurrence indication (in this example, a red "V") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-51 (6), the presentation control CPU 120 moves the jackpot count display 02TM300 to the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and executes a V-change presentation on the first count section, changing the first count section from its initial state (white letter "V") to its first change state (red letter "V") (timing T6 shown in FIG. 20-50).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played round (in this example, the characters "Round 3") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the characters "TOTAL 00300") in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-51 (7), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a WIN change presentation for the first count section, changing the first count section from the first change state (white letter "V") to the second change state (red letter "V") (timing T7 shown in FIG. 20-50).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a round display (in this example, the characters "Round 3") corresponding to the currently being played round in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a prize ball count display (in this example, the characters "TOTAL 00330") corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-51 (8), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the round play in the jackpot game state (timing T8 shown in FIG. 20-50), the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation receives the jackpot end designation command and executes the required number of jackpots notification presentation, and displays on the entire screen of the image display device 5 the required number of jackpots (the text "2 more jackpots until ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH") related to the remaining number of jackpots required until the mode switching judgment value is reached.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-52 (9), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the required number of jackpots notification presentation, erases the required number of jackpots display from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays a presentation mode entry image (in this example, an image including the words "Dream Rush") on the entire screen of the image display device 5 (at the timing of T9 shown in FIG. 20-50).

[Example of the first hit being a "10Rb time-saving jackpot"]
An example of the presentation when a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" is initially hit when controlled in [normal mode], and then a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot" is hit when controlled in [invincible RUSH], will be described using Figures 20-53 to 20-56.

Figure 20-53 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each of the related effects when the first hit of the "10Rb pattern time-saving jackpot" occurs when controlled in [normal mode], and then when controlled in [invincible RUSH], a jackpot of the "10Rb time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit" occurs. Figures 20-54 to 20-56 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the related effect images when the first hit of the "10Rb pattern time-saving jackpot" occurs when controlled in [normal mode], and then when controlled in [invincible RUSH], a jackpot of the "10Rb time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit" occurs.

In this example, when the presentation mode is controlled to [Normal Mode], the display of the first special pattern, which results in a "jackpot" ("Pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot"), is executed, and then the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, after which the presentation mode is controlled to [Invincible Rush], and during this [Invincible Rush], the display of the second special pattern, which results in a "time-saving small win", is executed, a V win occurs in the small win, and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

First, as shown in FIG. 20-54 (1), when the presentation mode is controlled to the [normal mode], at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (timing T1 shown in FIG. 20-53), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received a symbol determination command, determines and stops the combination of determined decorative symbols (in this example, "777") that results in a "jackpot" (pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "777") is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 is erased from the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the jackpot occurrence count value is updated to 1 during the special pattern stop processing (see Figure 20-22).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-54 (2), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the jackpot game state (timing T2 shown in FIG. 20-53), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the jackpot start command, ends the control that sets the presentation mode to [normal mode], executes the first part of the 3000 notification presentation, and displays the words "Dream Fever" on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-54 (3), the presentation control CPU 120 executes the second part of the 3000 notification presentation, and while the word "Dream FEVER" is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5, a cracked image is superimposed across the entire screen of the image display device 5, making the screen appear cracked (timing T3 shown in FIG. 20-53). The cracked image has a higher display priority than the word "Dream FEVER". Therefore, to the player, it appears as if the cracked image and the word "Dream FEVER" are displayed in that order.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-54 (4), the performance control CPU 120 executes the third part of the 3000 notification performance, erases the letters "Dream FEVER" and the crack image from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays the blackout display 02TM200B on the entire screen of the image display device 5 (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 20-53).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-54 (5), the performance control CPU 120 executes the fourth part of the 3000 notification performance, erases the blackout display 02TM200B from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays the letters "3000" at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 (timing T5 shown in FIG. 20-53).

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the reel does not move when the 3000 notification performance is executed, but this is not limited to the above, and the reel may move when the 3000 notification performance is executed. For example, when the fourth part of the 3000 notification performance is executed, the movable body 02TM100 may be moved from the initial position to the maximum performance position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-54 (6), the performance control CPU 120 executes the fifth part of the 3000 notification performance and displays the words "3000FEVER" on the entire screen of the image display device 5 (at the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 20-53).

In this way, in this embodiment, when a "10Rb pattern time-saving jackpot" occurs, the 3000 notification presentation consisting of parts 1 to 5 is executed, thereby notifying the player that a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded, consisting of the 10 rounds of prize balls (1500 balls) for the first jackpot and the 10 rounds of prize balls (1500 balls) for the jackpot that is essentially confirmed to be the next jackpot.

Next, the contents shown in Figures 20-54 (7) to 20-55 (11) are similar to the contents shown in Figures 20-51 (3) to (7) described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-55 (12), the presentation control CPU 120 erases the jackpot count display 02TM300 from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, executes a special notification presentation to notify the player that the game state will be controlled to the b time-saving state ([Invincible RUSH]) after the jackpot game state ends, displays the words "3000 FEVER" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a caption including the word "Congratulations" in the upper right and lower left parts of the screen of the image display device 5 (timing T12 shown in FIG. 20-53).

This caption display is the same image as the caption display displayed when the presentation mode is [Invincible RUSH], and by displaying the caption display during the jackpot round period before control is switched to [Invincible RUSH], it is possible to notify the player that control will be switched to the b time-saving state ([Invincible RUSH]) after the end of the jackpot game state.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played round (in this example, the characters "Round 4") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the characters "TOTAL 00450").

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-55 (13), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the big win game state and starts the b time-saving state (timing T13 shown in FIG. 20-53), the presentation control CPU 120 controls the presentation mode to [Invincible RUSH] and displays a combination of fixed second decorative symbols (in this example, "777") of the same type as the combination of fixed decorative symbols that was fixed and stopped in the variable display executed immediately before in the second symbol display area 5L2, 5C2, 5R2. At this time, a combination of small symbols (in this example, "777") is displayed in the small symbol display area 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a right-hit promotion image at the start of the time-saving mode in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. This right-hit promotion image at the start of the time-saving mode is an image that includes the characters "right hit" and an arrow image that instructs right hitting to win the second start winning hole.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120, based on being controlled by [Invincible Rush], displays a caption including the word "Congratulations" in the upper right and lower left corners of the screen of the image display device 5.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the period controlled by [Invincible RUSH], a prize ball count display (corresponding to the number of prize balls awarded in the previous jackpot) (in this example, the characters "TOTAL 01500") is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the b time-saving state controlled after the "pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot", the next jackpot is essentially confirmed, so by continuing to display the prize ball count display corresponding to the number of prize balls awarded in the previous jackpot even after the jackpot, the special feeling of the b time-saving state is enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-55 (14), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special pattern that results in a "miss" display based on the occurrence of a new start winning at the second start winning port (timing T14 shown in FIG. 20-53), the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the second decorative pattern in the second pattern display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2 of the image display device 5 based on the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the small pattern in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-55 (15), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T14 shown in FIG. 20-53), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined second decorative symbol combination (in this example, "142") indicating that the display result is a "miss" in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "142") in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

After this, the variable display is executed m (m ≥ 1) times, and all display results are assumed to be "misses." Then, as shown in Figure 20-55 (16) and onwards, in the next variable display, the display result is assumed to be "small time-saving win."

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-55 (16), when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol whose display result is a "small time-saving win" (timing T16 shown in FIG. 20-53), the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol in the second symbol display area 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the image display device 5 based on the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-56 (17), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T17 shown in FIG. 20-53), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined second decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") indicating that the display result is a "small time-saving win" in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "777") in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-56 (18), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the small win game state (timing T18 shown in FIG. 20-53), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the small win start designation command, displays an emphasized right-hit promotion image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. This emphasized right-hit promotion image is an image that includes the words "right hit" and an arrow image that instructs a right hit to enter the V winning hole.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the emphasized right-hit promotion image in a jackpot game state is displayed during the jackpot round game period after the jackpot fanfare period has ended, and the emphasized right-hit promotion image in a small-hit game state is displayed during the small-hit fanfare period, but this is not limited to the above form. The emphasized right-hit promotion image in a jackpot game state may be displayed during the jackpot fanfare period, and the emphasized right-hit promotion image in a small-hit game state may be displayed during the small-hit fanfare period.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-56 (19), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the small win game period (timing T19 shown in FIG. 20-53), the presentation control CPU 120 erases the highlighted right hit promotion image from the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a small win game start image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. This small win game start image is an image that includes a small win right hit promotion image including the text "Aim for the V!!" to win a V and an arrow image indicating a right hit, and an ally character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-56 (20), when the operating port of the V-determining winning device 87 is opened during a small win game, at the timing when the game ball enters the V winning area 870 and is detected by the V winning switch 87a during a specified valid period (timing T20 shown in FIG. 20-53), the presentation control CPU 120 displays a big win occurrence indication (in this example, the letter "V") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the jackpot count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the jackpot count display has the first count section in the second change state, and the second count section, third count section, and arrival section in the initial state.

When the CPU 103 ends the small win game state, the big win occurrence count value is updated from 1 to 2 in the small win end process (see Figure 20-24).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-56 (21), at the timing after the CPU 103 ends the small win game state and starts the big win game state (timing T21 shown in FIG. 20-53), the presentation control CPU 120 moves the big win count display 02TM300 to the center of the screen of the image display device 5 and executes a V change presentation for the second count section, changing the second count section from the initial state (white letter "V") to the first change state (red letter "V").

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a round display (in this example, the characters "Round 3") corresponding to the currently being played in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a prize ball count display (in this example, the characters "TOTAL 01800") corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-56 (22), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a WIN change presentation for the second counting section, changing the second counting section from the first change state (red letter "V") to the second change state (red letter "WIN") (timing T22 shown in FIG. 20-53).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played round (in this example, the characters "Round 3") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the characters "TOTAL 01830").

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-56 (23), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the round play in the jackpot game state (timing T23 shown in FIG. 20-53), the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation receives the jackpot end designation command and executes the required number of jackpots notification presentation, and displays on the entire screen of the image display device 5 the required number of jackpots (the text "One more jackpot until the super high-speed HYPER RUSH") related to the remaining number of jackpots required until the mode switching judgment value is reached.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-56 (24), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the required number of jackpots notification presentation, erases the required number of jackpots display from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and displays a presentation mode entry image (in this example, an image including the words "Dream Rush") on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

In this way, if a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs at the time of the first hit, the first stage effect is executed for the first count section of the jackpot count display during the [first jackpot], and a special notification effect is executed to notify players that they will be controlled to the b time-saving state ([Invincible RUSH]) after the jackpot game state ends, and during the [second jackpot] (10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit) that occurs during the b time-saving state controlled after the first jackpot, the second stage effect (V change effect, WIN effect) is executed for the second count section of the jackpot count display.

By executing the special notification effect at the [first jackpot], it is possible to notify the player that the second stage of the jackpot count display will be executed, i.e., that it is virtually certain that there will be 1 remaining before the jackpot occurrence count value reaches the mode switching determination value, giving the player a sense of specialness about the "10Rb pattern time-saving jackpot".

In this way, if a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs on the first hit, the player will be able to clear the majority (2/3) of the value they should aim for on the jackpot count display (the mode switching determination value of 3), making the "10Rb time-saving jackpot" feel more special than other types of jackpots on the first hit.

In the above embodiment, when a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs at the time of the first hit, the first stage effect (V change effect, WIN effect) is executed on the first count section of the jackpot count display during the [first jackpot], and the second stage effect (V change effect, WIN effect) is executed on the second count section of the jackpot count display during the [second jackpot] (10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small hit) that occurs during the b time-saving state controlled after the first jackpot.

However, it is not limited to this form, and during the [first jackpot], a first stage effect is executed for the first count section of the jackpot count display, and a second stage effect (V change effect, WIN effect) may be executed for the second count section of the jackpot count display at a different timing from during the [second jackpot] (10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot) that occurs during the b time-saving state controlled after the first jackpot.

As examples of the execution timing at which the second stage presentation is executed in response to the jackpot count display, (1) to (3) are shown below.
(1) The jackpot round period during the [first jackpot] (for example, the timing immediately after the first stage performance)
(2) The jackpot ending period during the [first jackpot]. (3) The period controlled to the b time-saving state after the [first jackpot] (for example, the first fluctuation of the b time-saving state).

For example, in the case of (1) above, if a "10Rb pattern time-saving jackpot" occurs at the time of the first jackpot, during the [first jackpot], a first stage presentation may be executed for the first count section of the jackpot count display, and then a second stage presentation may be executed for the second count section of the jackpot count display.

In other words, if a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs, which is controlled to the b time-saving state after a jackpot, the next jackpot is essentially confirmed, so even though a "second jackpot" has not actually occurred, at the time of the "first jackpot," a second stage presentation may be executed along with the first stage presentation for the jackpot count display.

[Example of a performance when a jackpot occurs with a jackpot occurrence count value of 3]
When the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and the [Dream Rush] is in control, an example of the presentation when a jackpot occurs that is a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot" with the jackpot occurrence count value being 3 will be explained using Figures 20-57 to 20-59.

Figure 20-57 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each of the effects associated with the occurrence of a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot" with a jackpot occurrence count value of 3 when controlled by [Dream RUSH] with the jackpot occurrence count value = 2, and Figures 20-58 and 20-59 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images associated with the occurrence of a "10Ra time-saving jackpot via time-saving small jackpot" with a jackpot occurrence count value of 3 when controlled by [Dream RUSH] with the jackpot occurrence count value = 2.

In this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and the presentation mode is controlled to [Dream RUSH], the display result is a "time-saving small win" ("10Ra time-saving small win via time-saving small win"), and the second special pattern variation display is executed with a variation pattern of "Super Reach A time-saving small win", a V win occurs in the small win, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, and in this jackpot game state the jackpot occurrence count value becomes 3 (mode switching judgment value). Also, the jackpot count display corresponding to the state of jackpot occurrence count value = 2 is displayed.

First, as shown in FIG. 20-58(1), when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and the presentation mode is controlled to [Dream RUSH], at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T1 shown in FIG. 20-57), the presentation control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the jackpot count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the jackpot count display has the first count section and the second count section in the second change state, and the third count section and the arrival section in the initial state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-58 (2), at the timing when the reach state in the variable pattern should be established (timing T2 shown in FIG. 20-57), the performance control CPU 120 brings about the reach state by displaying the first decorative pattern (in this example, "7") in a frozen state in the pattern display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to display the small patterns in a frozen state. That is, the small patterns are continuously displayed in the small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the first decorative pattern is frozen, and in the small pattern display area 5r corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the first decorative pattern is frozen, without being displayed in a frozen state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-58 (3), at the timing when the variation pattern should develop into a Super Reach (timing T3 shown in FIG. 20-57), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a challenge presentation, and displays the words "BOMB Challenge" and an image resembling a rock on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 causes the display of a reduced first decorative pattern, which is a reduced version of the display of the first decorative pattern that was being displayed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, to be displayed in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 erases the jackpot count display 02TM300 from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the fact that it has been determined in the during-variation presentation determination process (see FIG. 20-47) that the jackpot count display should be erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-58 (4), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the challenge presentation, and displays the words "Explode the rock and get the jackpot!!" and an image resembling a rock on the entire screen of the image display device 5 (timing T4 shown in FIG. 20-57).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-58 (5), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the challenge presentation, and displays an ally character performing the action of throwing a bomb across the entire screen of the image display device 5 (timing T5 shown in FIG. 20-57).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-58 (6), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the challenge presentation, and displays an image simulating a bomb exploding across the entire screen of the image display device 5 (at the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 20-57).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-58 (7), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a successful presentation of the challenge presentation, and displays an image indicating that the ally character has succeeded in the challenge (in this example, the word "SUCCESS" and the ally character making a peace sign) across the entire screen of the image display device 5 (timing T7 shown in FIG. 20-57).

Next, at the timing when the decorative symbols in the variable pattern should be statically displayed (timing T8 shown in FIG. 20-57), the performance control CPU 120 statically displays the first decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") indicating that the display result will be a "small time-saving win" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, while displaying an image indicating that the ally character has succeeded in the challenge across the entire screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of small symbols continues to be executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-58 (8), when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol, the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined first decorative symbol combination (in this example, "777") indicating that the display result is a "small time-saving win" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the small symbol combination (in this example, "777") is determined and stopped in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, the contents shown in Figures 20-59 (9) and (10) are similar to the contents shown in Figures 20-56 (18) and (19) described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-59 (11), when the operating port of the V-determining winning device 87 during a small win game is opened, the performance control CPU 120 displays a big win occurrence display (in this example, the letter "V") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 at the timing when the game ball enters the V winning area 870 and is detected by the V winning switch 87a during a specified valid period (timing T11 shown in FIG. 20-57). At this time, based on the fact that the CPU 103 has updated the big win occurrence count value from 2 to 3 in the small win end process (see FIG. 20-24), the performance control CPU 120 displays the letters "3 consecutive wins!!" in the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the jackpot count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the jackpot count display has the first count section and the second count section in the second change state, and the third count section and the arrival section in the initial state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-59 (12), at the timing after the CPU 103 ends the small win game state and starts the big win game state (timing T12 shown in FIG. 20-57), the presentation control CPU 120 moves the big win count display 02TM300 to the center of the screen of the image display device 5 and executes a V change presentation for the third count section, changing the third count section from the initial state (white letter "V") to the first change state (red letter "V").

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played round (in this example, the characters "Round 3") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the characters "TOTAL 03300") in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-59 (13), the presentation control CPU 120 executes a WIN change presentation for the third count section, changing the third count section from the first change state (red letter "V") to the second change state (red letter "WIN") (timing T13 shown in FIG. 20-57).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a round display (in this example, the characters "Round 3") corresponding to the currently being played round in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a prize ball count display (in this example, the characters "TOTAL 03330") corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-59 (14), the performance control CPU 120 executes a reaching section change performance for the reaching section, changing the reaching section from its initial state (white letters "PREMIUM FEVER") to a changed state (red letters "PREMIUM FEVER") (timing T14 shown in FIG. 20-57). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays two types of ally characters on the left and right sides of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played round (in this example, the characters "Round 3") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the characters "TOTAL 03360").

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-59 (15), the presentation control CPU 120 erases the jackpot count display 02TM300 (at the timing of T15 shown in FIG. 20-57). At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 displays, on the entire screen of the image display device 5, an reached jackpot display (in this example, the words "PREMIUM FEVER") notifying that the jackpot occurrence count value is equal to or greater than the mode switching determination value (3).

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a round display corresponding to the currently being played round (in this example, the characters "Round 4") in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a prize ball count display corresponding to the current number of prize balls awarded (in this example, the characters "TOTAL 03450").

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-56 (16), when the CPU 103 ends the round play in the jackpot play state (timing T16 shown in FIG. 20-57), the CPU 120 for performance control receives the jackpot end command and displays the word "READY" on the entire screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the "ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH" is about to start (the "entry fluctuation" is about to start).

[Example of a normal small win]
When the big win occurrence count value is 2 and the [Dream RUSH] is in control, a small win of a "normal small win" occurs, and a V win cannot be achieved with this small win. An example of the presentation will be explained using Figures 20-60 to 20-62.

Figure 20-60 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to a case where a "normal small hit" occurs when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and control is in [Dream RUSH], and a V cannot be won with this small hit, and Figures 20-61 and 20-62 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images related to a case where a "normal small hit" occurs when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and control is in [Dream RUSH], and a V cannot be won with this small hit.

In this example, when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and the presentation mode is controlled to [Dream Rush], the display result is a "normal small win" and the variation pattern is a "Super Reach B normal small win", and the second special pattern variation display is executed, and no V win occurs in the small win, and it is controlled to the normal state. Also, it is assumed that the jackpot count display corresponding to the jackpot occurrence count value = 2 is displayed.

First, as shown in FIG. 20-61 (1), when the jackpot occurrence count value is 2 and the presentation mode is controlled to [Dream RUSH], at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T1 shown in FIG. 20-60), the presentation control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the active display 02TM03 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 02TM03E.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the jackpot count display 02TM300 on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the jackpot count display has the first count section and the second count section in the second change state, and the third count section and the arrival section in the initial state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-61 (2), the performance control CPU 120 displays a fall suggestion display 02TM400 (in this example, an image including a triangular object containing an "!" and the word "WARNING") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 (timing T2 shown in FIG. 20-60).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-61 (3), at the timing when the reach state in the variable pattern should be established (timing T3 shown in FIG. 20-60), the performance control CPU 120 erases the fall suggestion display 02TM400 from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and brings about the reach state by displaying the first decorative pattern (in this example, "2") in a frozen state in the pattern display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to display the small patterns in a frozen state. That is, the small patterns are continuously displayed in the small pattern display area 5l corresponding to the pattern display area 5L in which the first decorative pattern is frozen, and in the small pattern display area 5r corresponding to the pattern display area 5R in which the first decorative pattern is frozen, without being displayed in a frozen state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-61 (4), at the timing when the variation pattern should develop into a super reach (timing T4 shown in FIG. 20-60), the performance control CPU 120 executes a fall-inducing performance, and when a reach state is established in the pattern display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5, it temporarily stops a special pattern (in this example, a decorative pattern of the letters "END") in the pattern display area 5C. At this time, the special pattern is displayed in a display mode with high transparency (for example, 50% transparency), which is a display mode that suggests that it has been temporarily stopped.

At this time, the presentation control CPU 120 erases the jackpot count display 02TM300 from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 based on the determination made in the during-variation presentation determination process (see FIG. 20-47) that the jackpot count display should be erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-61 (5), the performance control CPU 120 displays the words "Destroy it!" and an operation prompt display 02TM31B prompting the user to operate the push button 31B in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 (at the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 20-60).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-61 (6), when the player operates the push button 31B (timing T6 shown in FIG. 20-60), the presentation control CPU 120 stops and displays a special symbol in the symbol display area 5C, indicating that the display result will be a "normal small win." At this time, the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r continue to display the small symbols in a variable manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-61 (7), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the second special symbol (timing T7 shown in FIG. 20-60), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol determination command, determines and stops the determined first decorative symbol combination (in this example, "2 [END] 2") indicating that the display result is a "normal small win" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, it determines and stops the small symbol combination (in this example, "222") in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-61 (8), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the small win game state (timing T8 shown in FIG. 20-60), the presentation control CPU 120, which has received the small win start command, displays a result image on the entire screen of the image display device 5. This result image is an image that includes an indication of the total number of awarded winning balls (in this example, "TOTAL 03000") and an ally character.

In this small win game state, the operating port of the V-judging winning device 87 opens in the first opening pattern, which opens once and has an opening time of 0.04 seconds, making it extremely difficult to win a V, and in this example, the small win game state ends without a V win occurring.

Next, the contents shown in FIG. 20-62 (9) are similar to those shown in FIG. 20-49 (5), so the explanation will be omitted.

[Fire interval and hold consumption speed]
In this embodiment, the player operates the ball-hitting operation handle 30, which allows the game ball to be launched from the ball launching device and hit into the game area. Then, when the game ball hit into this game area enters (wins) the start winning hole, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and determining the display result and the variation pattern is executed based on the extracted random number value. In addition, after the reserved information and the number of reserved memories are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of reserved memories, and the predictive judgment.

Therefore, the more game balls that are launched from the ball launching device and hit into the game area per hour, the more opportunities there are for the game ball to enter the starting winning hole, and the more opportunities there are for a lottery to be held to determine whether or not there will be a big win (small win), providing an even more advantageous playing environment for the player.

However, in pachinko machines, it is prohibited to launch more than 101 game balls from the ball launcher in 60 seconds. In other words, it is possible to launch up to 100 game balls from the ball launcher in 60 seconds. To maximize the number of game balls that are shot into the play area, a configuration is adopted in which 100 game balls are launched from the ball launcher in 60 seconds. When this configuration is adopted, the interval between launches of game balls is 0.6 seconds per game ball (seconds/ball).

In order to generate a start winning by hitting a game ball into the game area, the game ball must enter the start winning hole. This pachinko game machine is configured with a winning ball device (e.g., a variable winning ball device) that forms a start winning hole (e.g., a second starting winning hole) that can be changed between a closed state and an open state, so when a game ball is made to enter the second starting winning hole, the following steps (1) to (3) must be taken.
(1) Pass through the passing gate → drawing of normal symbols (2) Display result of normal symbols is “normal hit” → variable winning ball device is opened (3) Enter into the variable winning ball device that is now in the open state Furthermore, (X) the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills and numerous obstacle nails that change the direction and speed of the game ball flow, and (Y) if the game ball does not enter any of the winning holes, it is taken into the outlet located at the bottom of the game area, so it is virtually impossible for all of the game balls launched to clear steps (1) to (3) and enter the starting winning hole.

Therefore, if the launch interval per game ball is 0.6 seconds, taking into account the above-mentioned (X) and (Y) and steps (1) to (4), the interval between game balls entering the starting winning hole (hereinafter referred to as the "winning interval") will be 0.6 + α (α > 0) seconds.

Also, in this embodiment, if there is a reserved memory of a special pattern (a variable display whose execution is reserved (up to four in this example)) that corresponds to the start winning that occurred during the period until the currently executed variable display ends, the variable display of the next reserved memory will start when the period during which the variable display of the special pattern is executed (variable display period) and the pattern determination period corresponding to this variable display have elapsed. Hereinafter, this period, which is the combination of the variable display period and the pattern determination period, until the next reserved memory starts will be referred to as the "reserved consumption period" as appropriate.

<Table showing the relationship between launch interval and hold period>
FIG. 20-63 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship table between the firing interval and the reserved consumption period in this embodiment. FIG. 20-63 shows the relationship between the firing interval, the winning interval (hereinafter referred to as [Int01] as appropriate), the variable display period, the pattern determination period, the reserved consumption period (hereinafter referred to as [Int02] as appropriate), and the relationship between [Int01] and [Int02]. In this example, a case will be described in which a player operates the ball-hitting operation handle 30, causing 100 game balls to be fired from the ball-hitting device in 60 seconds and struck into the right game area, and one of the fired game balls wins the second start winning hole.

((A) When the variable display period is less than 0.2 seconds)
As shown in Fig. 20-63(A), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if a configuration is adopted in which a variable display pattern (variable display period: 0.05 seconds) with an extremely short variable display period (shorter than 0.2 seconds) is mainly selected, the firing interval is 0.6 seconds, the [Int01] winning interval is 0.6+α seconds, the variable display period is 0.05 seconds, the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds, and the [Int02] reserved consumption period is 0.55 seconds. Also, the relationship between [Int01] and [Int02] is [Int01]>[Int02].

(Time chart showing the number of reserved memories in case (A))
Figure 20-64 is a time chart showing the relationship between the winning interval [Int01], the reserved consumption period [Int02], and the number of reserved memories in the case of (A).

In this example, the value of "α" in the winning interval of 0.6+α seconds is a unique value for each winning interval. For example, the value of α for the winning interval corresponding to the first start winning shown in Figure 20-64 is 0.5 seconds, and the value of α for the winning interval corresponding to the next start winning is 1.3 seconds. The same applies to Figures 20-65 and 20-66.

As shown in Figure 20-64, in the case of (A), i.e., when [Int01] > [Int02], the reserved consumption period (0.55 seconds) is shorter than the winning interval (0.6 + α seconds), so the reserved consumption period ends before a new start winning occurs. Therefore, the second reserved memory count becomes "1" only when a start winning occurs, but is "0" at other times.

((B) When the variable display period is 0.2 seconds)
As shown in FIG. 20-63(B), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if a configuration is adopted in which a variable display pattern with a moderately short variable display period (variable display period: 0.2 seconds) is mainly selected, the firing interval is 0.6 seconds, the [Int01] winning interval is 0.6+α seconds, the variable display period is 0.2 seconds, the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds, and the [Int02] reserved consumption period is 0.7 seconds. Also, the relationship between [Int01] and [Int02] is [Int01]≦[Int02].

(Time chart showing the number of reserved memories in case (B))
Figure 20-65 is a time chart showing the relationship between the winning interval [Int01], the reserved consumption period [Int02], and the number of reserved memories in the case of (B).

As shown in Figure 20-65, in the case of (B), that is, when [Int01] ≦ [Int02], the winning interval (0.6 + α seconds) is shorter than the reserved consumption period (0.55 seconds), so a new initial winning occurs before the reserved consumption period ends. Therefore, the second reserved memory count increases over time (the second reserved memory count is a maximum of "4").

(C) When the variable display period is greater than 0.2 seconds
When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if a configuration is adopted in which a variable display pattern with a long variable display period (longer than 0.2 seconds) (variable display period: 1 second) is mainly selected, the firing interval is 0.6 seconds, the [Int01] winning interval is 0.6+α seconds, the variable display period is 1 second, the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds, and the [Int02] reserved consumption period is 1.5 seconds. Also, the relationship between [Int01] and [Int02] is [Int01]<[Int02].

(Time chart showing the number of reserved memories in case (C))
Figure 20-66 is a time chart showing the relationship between the winning interval [Int01], the reserved consumption period [Int02], and the number of reserved memories in the case of (C).

As shown in Figure 20-66, in the case of (C), i.e., when [Int01] < [Int02], the winning interval (0.6 + α seconds) is shorter than the reserved consumption period (1.5 seconds), so a new initial winning occurs before the reserved consumption period ends. Therefore, the second reserved memory count increases over time (the second reserved memory count is a maximum of "4").

As shown in Figure 20-64, if a configuration is adopted in which a variable display pattern (variable display period: 0.05 seconds) with an extremely short variable display period (shorter than 0.2 seconds) is mainly selected, a pachinko game machine with a fast speed of depleting reserved memory can be realized, but since the second reserved memory cannot be stored, it is not possible to execute a pre-reading preview performance that predicts the expected probability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is pending), which leads to a decrease in interest in the pre-reading preview performance.

In addition, as shown in Figure 20-66, if a configuration is adopted in which a variable pattern with a long variable display period (variable display period: 1 second) is mainly selected, it is possible to accumulate the second reserved memory, making it possible to execute a pre-execution preview performance in the variable display, but it is not possible to realize a pachinko game machine that quickly consumes the reserved memory, which leads to a decrease in interest in terms of the speed at which the reserved memory is consumed.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 20-65, if a configuration is adopted in which a variable pattern with a moderately short variable display period (variable display period: 0.2 seconds) is mainly selected, it is possible to realize a pachinko game machine that quickly consumes the reserved memory while accumulating the second reserved memory, so that it is possible to execute a look-ahead preview performance in the variable display before execution, etc., and it is possible to increase interest in terms of the look-ahead preview performance and the speed at which the reserved memory is consumed.

In this way, in a pachinko gaming machine capable of firing up to 100 gaming balls from a ball firing device in 60 seconds, by adopting a configuration in which the "ultra-high speed miss" variable pattern, in which the variable display period is 0.2 seconds and the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds, is executed at a high rate when controlled in [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH] as in this embodiment, it is possible to realize a pachinko gaming machine that quickly consumes reserved memory while also realizing a pachinko gaming machine that is capable of executing pre-reading preview performances and the like in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is pending).

(Effect 02-1)
As shown in Figures 20-15 and 20-16, and Figures 20-18 and 20-19, in the time-saving state, when the jackpot occurrence count value reaches the mode switching judgment value (jackpot occurrence count value = 3), the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" fluctuation pattern, in which the fluctuation display period is shorter than the pattern determination stop period of 0.5 seconds, is executed is higher than the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" fluctuation pattern, in which the fluctuation display period is shorter than the pattern determination stop period of 0.5 seconds, is executed when the jackpot occurrence count value has not reached the mode switching judgment value (jackpot occurrence count value = 1, 2).

In addition, as shown in Figures 20-51, 20-55, 20-56, 20-58, and 20-59, the jackpot count display 02TM300 relating to the relationship between the jackpot occurrence count value and the mode switching determination value, and the required number of jackpots display ("X more times until ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH") are displayed on the image display device 5.

According to such a gaming machine, when the jackpot occurrence count value reaches the mode switching judgment value, the variable display period is more likely to be shorter than the predetermined period (0.5 seconds for the pattern determination stop period) than when the mode switching judgment value has not been reached, so the frequency with which the variable display is executed in the time-saving state is increased, which is more advantageous for the player. Therefore, when controlled to the time-saving state, the player will be highly interested in how many times the jackpot game state is controlled, and will play with a desire to make the jackpot game state continuous. In addition, assuming that such variable display control is performed, the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots display related to the relationship between the jackpot occurrence count value and the mode switching judgment value are displayed, providing performance information that is in line with the player's interests, which can further increase the interest when controlled to the time-saving state.

(Effect 02-2)
As shown in Figures 20-1 (1) and 20-3 (A1), when the display result of the decorative pattern changing display executed when controlled in the normal state is an even number pattern and controlled to a "pattern 3R normal jackpot", the game state is controlled to a low base state without transitioning to a time-saving state after the 3R jackpot game state ends; when the display result of the decorative pattern changing display executed when controlled in the normal state is an odd number pattern other than 7 and controlled to a "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot", the game state is controlled to a time-saving state after the 10R jackpot game state ends; when the display result of the decorative pattern changing display executed when controlled in the normal state is an odd number pattern other than 7 and controlled to a "pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot", the game state is controlled to a time-saving state after the 10R jackpot game state ends; and when the display result of the decorative pattern changing display executed when controlled in the normal state is an odd number pattern 7 and controlled to a "pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot", the game state is controlled to a time-saving state after the 10R jackpot game state ends.

With this type of gaming machine, there are cases where the machine is not controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state and cases where it is controlled to the time-saving state, based on the variable display executed when controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, when controlled to the time-saving state, there are cases where it is controlled to the time-saving state a and cases where it is controlled to the time-saving state b, so that the player can be drawn to the display result of the variable display executed in the normal state.

(Effect 02-3)
As shown in Figures 20-51 to 20-52 and Figures 20-54 to 20-56, when the display result of the decorative pattern variation display executed while controlled in the normal state becomes an odd number pattern (such as "555" or "777") and a 10R jackpot is controlled, the manner of the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots display is changed by at least one step.

With this type of gaming machine, the jackpot occurrence count value is related to the appearance of the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots display, so the player will pay attention to the appearance of the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots display, and since the appearance of the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots display changes based on the display results of the variable display executed in the normal state, the player's interest in the variable display executed in the normal state can be increased.

(Effect 02-4)
As shown in Figures 20-54 to 20-56, when a 10R jackpot is controlled based on the display result of the decorative pattern variable display executed when controlled in the normal state becoming an odd number 7 ("777"), the manner of the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots display is changed by one step, and is changed by another step during the next jackpot game state based on the variable display executed in the b time-saving state.

With this type of gaming machine, the player's advantage after the end of the jackpot game state is associated with the number of stages at which the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots display change, further increasing interest in the changes in the jackpot count display 02TM300 and the required number of jackpots display.

(Effect 02-5)
As shown in Figures 20-54 to 20-56, when the display result of the decorative pattern changing display executed while controlled in the normal state becomes an odd number 7 ("777"), and the 10R jackpot is controlled based on this, a 3000 notification effect is executed, which suggests that a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded, including the prize balls for 10 rounds of the first jackpot (1500 balls) and the prize balls for 10 rounds of the next jackpot that is essentially confirmed (1500 balls).

With this type of gaming machine, when the machine is controlled to the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display executed in the normal state, it is suggested that a total of 3000 prize balls will be awarded, consisting of the 1500 prize balls awarded in the jackpot gaming state and the 1500 prize balls awarded in the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display executed in the b time-saving state controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so the player's sense of anticipation can be increased before the machine is controlled to the b time-saving state.

(Effect 02-6)
As shown in Figure 20-4 (A1), when controlled to a 10R jackpot based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern executed while controlled to the normal state being a line-up of odd numbers of 7 ("pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot"), when controlled to a 3R jackpot game state based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed in response to the variable display of the first special pattern executed in the b time-saving state [Invincible RUSH] after the jackpot game state being a line-up of odd numbers other than 7 ("333", etc.) ("pattern 3Rb time-saving jackpot"), the b time-saving state [Invincible RUSH] is continued after the end of the jackpot game state.

With such a gaming machine, even if the game has been controlled to the b time-saving state, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, which prevents the b time-saving state from ending, and prevents dissatisfaction among the player. In particular, when an irregular situation occurs in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed despite the game being controlled to the b time-saving state, and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state based on this, by making it possible to control to the b time-saving state, it is possible to ensure the expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state regardless of the type of special symbol.

(Effect 02-7)
As shown in Figure 20-4 (A1), when controlled to a 10R jackpot based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern executed while controlled to the normal state being "Pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot," when controlled to a 10R jackpot game state based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed in response to the variable display of the first special pattern executed in the b time-saving state [Invincible RUSH] after the jackpot game state being a line-up of odd numbers of 7 (such as "777") ("Pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot"), it is controlled to the a time-saving state [Dream RUSH] which is controlled to the normal state when a normal small jackpot occurs and no V is won.

With this type of gaming machine, when an irregular situation occurs in which the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner despite being controlled to the b time-saving state, and the machine is controlled to the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that a "pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot" has been reached, the machine is controlled to the a time-saving state, thereby ensuring the expectation of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state regardless of the type of special symbol. Furthermore, by at least not being controlled to the b time-saving state when such a situation occurs, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage.

(Effect 02-8)
As shown in Fig. 20-55 to Fig. 20-56, depending on the jackpot occurrence count value, the information displayed in the second count section (letter "V", letter "WIN") is displayed larger and more emphasized in the order of information displayed in the first count section (letter "V", letter "WIN"). Also, depending on the jackpot occurrence count value, it is possible to increase the luminance of the light emitted in the order of the second count section > the first count section, and it is also possible to shorten the blinking interval (not shown).

With this type of gaming machine, the manner in which the jackpot count display shows the number of times remaining until the jackpot occurrence count value reaches the mode switching determination value, thereby increasing the player's interest in the jackpot count display.

(Effect 02-9)
As shown in Fig. 20-18 and Fig. 20-19, when it is controlled to the time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], it is possible to execute a variable display of a "ultra-high-speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable display pattern in which the display result is a "miss" (missing pattern), and the variable display period is shorter than the pattern determination stop period of 0.5 seconds.

As shown in Figure 20-19, among the variable displays that are executed when controlled in the time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] and that result in a "miss" display, if the number of reserved memories is at least 1, the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variable patterns.

With this type of gaming machine, during the period controlled to the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a "jackpot" (including a jackpot via a small jackpot).

(Effect 02-10)
As shown in Figures 20-15 and 20-16, the fluctuation pattern table referenced when the time-saving state [Dream RUSH] is controlled, does not contain a random number corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)".

With this type of gaming machine, it is possible to distinguish between the time-saving state "Dream Rush" and "Super-high-speed Hyper Rush" by the difference in the variable display period, which allows the player to emphasize the continuous occurrence of the jackpot gaming state and to experience the uniqueness of the time-saving state "Super-high-speed Hyper Rush".

(Effect 02-11)
As shown in FIG. 20-17 (1), in the first variable display when the time-saving state [ultra-high-speed RUSH] is controlled for the first time, if the display result is a “miss,” a variable display of a “entry variable miss (entry performance + ultra-high-speed miss)” variable display pattern with a variable display period of 30.2 seconds is executed.

As shown in Figure 20-18 (1) and Figure 20-19 (1), the fluctuation pattern (30.2 seconds) of "entry fluctuation miss (entry effect + super-high speed miss)" is a fluctuation display period longer than any of the fluctuation patterns executed when the display result is "miss" in the fluctuation display when continuously controlled to the time-saving state a [super-high speed RUSH] (any of the fluctuation patterns of "pseudo fluctuation miss" (2.8 seconds), "super-high speed miss" (0.2 seconds), "Super reach C miss" (10 seconds), and "Super reach B miss" (20 seconds)).

As shown in Figures 20-7 to 20-10, in the variation display of the variation pattern of "entry variation miss (entry effect + ultra-high speed miss)," an accelerated pseudo variation effect and a mode start indication effect are executed.

With this type of gaming machine, the "entry fluctuation miss" (30.2 seconds), which has a longer fluctuation display period than the "ultra-high speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern, can indicate to the player that they have entered the a time-saving state [ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-12)
As shown in Figures 20-17 (1), 20-18 (1), and 20-19 (1), the fluctuation pattern of the "entry fluctuation miss" (30.2 seconds) is such that in the first period from the start of the fluctuation until 30 seconds have elapsed, an accelerated pseudo fluctuation effect and a mode start indication effect are executed, and in the second period from this first period until 0.7 seconds have elapsed, a decorative pattern fluctuation display period (0.2 seconds) and a pattern determination stop period (0.5 seconds) are provided to actually notify the display result.

In addition, as shown in Figures 20-28 (2) to (5) and Figures 20-9 (18) to 20-10 (21), the display of the decorative patterns to notify the actual display results during the second period has a presentation style common to the "ultra-fast miss" (0.2 seconds) change pattern.

With this type of gaming machine, the "entry fluctuation miss" fluctuation pattern suggests to the player that he or she has entered the a-time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], and even though the actual fluctuation display period is not as short as the "ultra-high-speed miss" fluctuation pattern, the player can feel that the fluctuation display period has become extremely short since the first fluctuation display upon entering the a-time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-13)
As shown in Figure 20-6, an accelerated pseudo-fluctuation performance is executed in which the unit pseudo-fluctuation display period is gradually shortened to 7.5 seconds, 3.5 seconds, 2 seconds, 1 second, 0.7 seconds, 0.5 seconds, and 0.3 seconds, and as shown in Figures 20-7 to 20-10, in the fluctuation pattern of "entry fluctuation miss" (30.2 seconds), in the first period from the start of the fluctuation to the passage of 30 seconds, a mode start notification performance is executed after the execution of an accelerated pseudo-fluctuation performance.

According to such a gaming machine, the first period from the start of the fluctuation pattern of the "entry fluctuation miss" (30.2 seconds) to the lapse of 30 seconds is effectively utilized to enter the a time-saving state [ultra-high speed HYPER
The variable display period will be shortened when the time-saving state [hyper-high speed HYPER RUSH] is entered, and the user will be informed of the transition to a presentation mode corresponding to the time-saving state [hyper-high speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-14)
As shown in Figures 20-34 and 20-35, in the central area of the screen including the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a first pre-reading performance is being executed using a decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display being executed (a fixed icon including the word "HOLD" is superimposed on a decorative pattern that has not been fixed and stopped).

Also, as shown in Figures 20-36 and 20-37, a second pre-reading effect is executed to display a second pre-reading image (an image including a part of a combination of pseudo third decorative symbols (in this example, "777") indicating that the display result displayed when stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 will be a "small time-saving win").

As shown in Figures 20-42 (1) and (2), when the display result is a "miss," the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is 10%, and the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect is 5%. Also, when the display result is a "small time-saving hit," the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is 30%, and the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect is 20%. In this way, the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is higher than that of the second look-ahead effect.

According to such a gaming machine, during the period controlled to the a time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," the extremely short variable display period is selected with a high probability, so the player can play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a "jackpot" (jackpot via small win). In addition, the first suggestive effect, which is executed with a relatively high probability, is an effect using decorative symbols and is executed in a symbol display area that is easy for the player to notice, so that the player can feel the shortness of the variable display period in the a time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] while increasing the sense of expectation of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

(Effect 02-15)
Among the look-ahead notice effects, the symbol giant effect has a higher execution rate than the reserved look-ahead notice effect (not shown). Also, the combined value (ratio) of the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect and the symbol giant effect is higher than the combined value of the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect and the reserved look-ahead notice effect (not shown). With such a gaming machine, the player can feel the shortness of the variable display period in the time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-16)
As shown in FIG. 20-28, in the time-saving state [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH], the third decorative pattern is scrolled from the back of the screen to the front (the third decorative pattern is enlarged and then reduced) unlike the vertical scroll of the screen, and when the "miss" variable display is executed continuously,
(1) The third decorative pattern is displayed (enlarged) in a manner that is larger in size and has a higher transparency than the third decorative pattern that was stopped in response to the previously executed variable display,
(2) It is displayed (reduced display) in a smaller size and with a higher transparency than the third decorative pattern that was stopped in response to the previously executed changing display, and (3) it is displayed in a manner that is the same size and with the same transparency as the third decorative pattern that was stopped in response to the previously executed changing display (stopped display).

With this type of gaming machine, when variable displays that result in a "miss" are executed consecutively, the period during which the third decorative symbol is displayed within the range the player is focusing on can be lengthened, and the transparency of the third decorative symbol changes within the range the player is focusing on, so the high speed of the variable display in the a time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] can be more strongly felt.

(Effect 02-17)
As shown in FIG. 20-28, in the time-saving state [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH], the variable display of the third decorative symbol is different from the mode of scrolling up and down on the screen, but is a mode from the back of the screen to the front (the third decorative symbol is enlarged and then reduced). When the variable display that becomes a "miss" is executed continuously, the combination of the third decorative symbol is as follows:
In the above-mentioned (1), the combination of the third decorative pattern corresponding to the immediately preceding variable display,
In the above-mentioned (2), the combination of the third decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display,
In the above-mentioned (3), the combination of the third decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display,
is displayed.

According to such a gaming machine, during the period controlled to the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," the extremely short variable display period is selected with a high probability, so the player can play comfortably without feeling frustrated that a variable display that does not result in a "jackpot" (a big hit via a small hit) is being executed. In addition, at least a part of the third decorative pattern used in the variable display of the previously executed "ultra-high-speed miss" is also used in the variable display of the later executed "ultra-high-speed miss," allowing the player to feel the sense of speed from the variable display of the "ultra-high-speed miss," while preventing the player from feeling overwhelmed by the excessive presentation information presented with the variable display of the "ultra-high-speed miss."

(Effect 02-18)
As shown in Fig. 20-28, when the game is controlled to the time-saving state [Super High Speed HYPER RUSH], the third decorative pattern displayed in the pattern display area is composed of a number pattern, a base pattern that is added to the background side of the number pattern and corresponds to the outline of the number pattern, and a radial light effect display that is added to the background side of the number pattern and in front of the base pattern and displayed on the entire screen. On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 20-26, when the game is controlled to the time-saving state [Dream RUSH], the first decorative pattern is composed of only a number pattern.

With this type of gaming machine, the decorative symbols are emphasized in the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], making it easier to recognize the decorative symbols when the period of time for the variable display is short, and emphasizing the sense of speed when the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

(Effect 02-19)
As shown in FIG. 20-18(1), when the time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is being controlled and the number of reserved memories is 0, it is possible to select a "pseudo-fluctuation miss" (2.8 seconds) fluctuation pattern, which has a longer fluctuation display period than the "ultra-high-speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern.

In addition, as shown in Figure 20-11, Figure 20-12 and Figure 20-13, when the change display of the change pattern of "pseudo change miss" (2.8 seconds) is executed, a uniform speed pseudo change performance is executed in which a unit pseudo change (temporary stop and re-change of decorative patterns) is executed four times with a period of [change display equivalent period 0.2 seconds + pattern confirmation stop equivalent period 0.5 seconds = 0.7 seconds].

According to such a gaming machine, during the period controlled in the a time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," the extremely short variable display period is selected with a high probability, so the player can play comfortably without feeling frustrated that a variable display that does not result in a "jackpot" (a big hit via a small hit) is being executed. Also, when the number of reserved memories is 0, a variable display of a "pseudo variable miss" variable display pattern with a long variable display period is executed, thereby avoiding a situation where a variable display is not being executed as much as possible, and by making the player see as if multiple variable displays are being executed, the sense of speed in the a time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is not lost.

(Effect 02-20)
As shown in FIG. 20-18(1), when the time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is selected and the number of reserved memories is 0, the rate at which the “pseudo fluctuation miss” (2.8 seconds) fluctuation pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other fluctuation pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other fluctuation patterns.

With this type of gaming machine, it is possible to minimize the loss of frequency of the variable display and the sense of speed in the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-21)
As shown in FIG. 20-15, when the time-saving state [Dream Rush] is controlled and the number of reserved memories is 0, the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo fluctuation miss" (2.8 seconds) is not selected, and the fluctuation pattern of "long fluctuation miss" (10 seconds) can be selected.

This type of gaming machine makes it possible to clearly identify the characteristics of the "pseudo fluctuation miss" (2.8 seconds) fluctuation pattern in the a time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], and also makes it possible to avoid situations where the fluctuation display is not being executed as much as possible, even when controlled in the a time-saving state [Dream RUSH].

(Effect 02-22)
As shown in Figures 20-27, a first logo cycle change performance that changes the first logo display and a second logo cycle change performance that changes the second logo display can be executed, and the change period (0.5 s) in the second logo cycle change performance is shorter than the change period (5 s) in the first logo cycle change performance.

According to such a gaming machine, during the period controlled in the a-time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," the extremely short variable display period is selected with a high probability, allowing the player to play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a "jackpot" (jackpot via small win). Also, in the a-time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], where the variable display of the "ultra-high-speed miss" variable pattern is executed with a high probability, the manner in which the second logo display changes is frequent, emphasizing the shortness of the variable display period in the a-time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-23)
As shown in Figures 20-27, a first logo cyclical change performance that changes the first logo display and a second logo cyclical change performance that changes the second logo display can be executed, and the light emission mode changes periodically from the left end to the right end of the first logo display, and the light emission mode changes periodically from the left end to the right end of the second logo display.

With this type of gaming machine, the first logo display can inform the player that the machine is in the a-time-saving state [Dream Rush] and that the area into which the player should launch the gaming ball is the right gaming area, while the second logo display can inform the player that the machine is in the a-time-saving state [Super-high-speed Hyper Rush] and that the area into which the player should launch the gaming ball is the right gaming area.

(Effect 02-24)
When the time-saving state [Dream Rush] is controlled, the first system display can be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second start winning hole. The first system display is a moving image including the characters "Hit to the right" and an arrow image for winning the second start winning hole, and is a moving image that periodically moves left and right.

In addition, when controlled to the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], a second system display can be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 as a promotion image for winning the second start winning hole. The second system display is a moving image that includes the characters "Right hit" and an arrow image for winning the second start winning hole, and is a moving image that periodically moves left and right.

The arrow movement period in the second system display is 0.3 seconds, and the arrow movement period in the first system display is 3 seconds (not shown).

With this type of gaming machine, the first and second system displays can inform the player of the area into which the gaming ball should be launched, and can further emphasize the shortness of the variable display period in the time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH].

(Effect 02-25)
When controlled in the time-saving state [Dream RUSH], a second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory number and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed can be displayed, along with a first rotation corresponding display as a moving image of a round object performing a rotating motion.

In addition, when controlled in the time-saving state [Ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], a second pending display corresponding to the second pending memory count and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed can be displayed as a second rotation-compatible display as a moving image of a round object performing a rotating motion.

The rotation period of the second rotation-compatible display is set to 0.3 seconds, and the rotation period of the first rotation-compatible display is set to 3 seconds (not shown).

With this type of gaming machine, the corresponding display (hold display, active display) rotates to let the player know that it is being controlled to the a time-saving state, and when it is controlled to the a time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], the corresponding display rotates faster than when it is controlled to the a time-saving state [Dream RUSH], further emphasizing the shortness of the variable display period.

(Effect 02-26)
As shown in FIG. 20-14, in the time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], when the display result shows a "jackpot" and the display pattern of the "direct jackpot" is changed, the jackpot round play associated with the start of the jackpot play state is started without executing the symbol alignment performance.

According to such a gaming machine, during the period controlled to the a time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," the extremely short variable display period is selected with a high probability, so the player can play comfortably without feeling frustrated that a variable display that does not result in a "jackpot" (jackpot via small win) is being executed. Also, in the a time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], it is possible not to stop displaying the decorative symbols when controlled to the jackpot gaming state, so the flow of play from the variable display to the jackpot gaming state is not interrupted, and the sense of speed of the variable display that triggers the jackpot gaming state is emphasized, giving the impression that the game has been suddenly controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

(Effect 02-27)
As shown in FIG. 20-5, in the time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], when a variable display that results in a "time-saving small win" is executed, a symbol alignment effect is executed, and a combination of third decorative symbols that indicates the display result of the "time-saving small win" is displayed/confirmed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 20-14, when a variable display is executed in the time-saving state [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH] that results in a "Big Win" (not including a Big Win via a Small Win), the symbol alignment effect is not executed, and the third decorative symbol combination is not displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

According to such a gaming machine, during the period controlled by the time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the display result is a "miss," the extremely short variable display period is selected with a high probability, so the player can play comfortably without feeling frustrated that a variable display that does not result in a "big win" (including a big win via a small win) is being executed. Also, in the time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], when a variable display that results in a "time-saving small win" is executed, the third decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the pattern display area, clarifying the flow of the game and directing the player's attention to playing so that the game ball passes through the V winning area 870. On the other hand, when a variable display that results in a "jackpot" is executed, the third decorative pattern is not stopped, so that the flow of play from the variable display to the jackpot game state is not interrupted, and the sense of speed of the variable display that triggers the jackpot game state is emphasized, giving the impression that the player has been suddenly controlled into the jackpot game state.

(Effect 02-28)
As shown in Figures 20-15 (2) and 20-16 (2), in the a time-saving state [Dream RUSH], when the display result becomes a "jackpot," a changing display of the changing pattern of the "Super Reach A Jackpot" is executed, and based on the display result becoming a "jackpot," a success effect including a pattern matching effect is executed, and the combination of first decorative patterns indicating that the display result will be a "time-saving small hit" is displayed/confirmed in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

With this type of gaming machine, the difference between the a-time-saving state [Dream Rush] and the a-time-saving state [Ultra-high-speed Hyper Rush] can be clarified by the difference in the display of the decorative symbols, creating a special feeling when the display result becomes a "jackpot" in the a-time-saving state [Ultra-high-speed Hyper Rush].

(Effect 02-29)
In both cases, when a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the a-time-saving state [Dream Rush] and when a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the a-time-saving state [Super-high-speed Hyper Rush], the execution period of the fanfare effect (0.1 seconds) is shorter than the pattern determination period (0.5 seconds) of the jackpot pattern (not shown).

With this type of gaming machine, the period from when the jackpot game state starts until the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the open state can be made even shorter when controlled to the time-saving state a [Dream RUSH] and when controlled to the time-saving state a [Super-high-speed HYPER RUSH], preventing the player from having to wait until the prize balls are awarded after the display result is announced. In particular, in the time-saving state a [Super-high-speed HYPER RUSH], control is executed to shorten the variable display period, so that the special variable winning ball device 7 can be controlled to the open state immediately after the variable display ends, allowing the player to see a continuous flow from the start of the fluctuation to the transition to the jackpot round game.

(Effect 02-30)
The special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is equipped with a light emitting device, and when a jackpot occurs based on the result of the variable display of the second special pattern being a "jackpot" in the a time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] or the b time-saving state [invincible RUSH], it is possible to cause the special variable winning ball device 7 to emit light at a timing controlled to the jackpot game state (not shown).

When controlled to the time-saving state, the second special symbol is displayed with high frequency, and the display result is often judged as a "small win," resulting in a big win. However, when controlled to the time-saving state, if the display result is judged as a "big win," players are left feeling disappointed that they would have been better off winning in the normal state.

When such a situation occurs, the display result is judged to be a "jackpot," and information indicating that a jackpot has occurred (the words "Aim for the attacker!!") is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is illuminated to direct the player's attention from the image display device 5 to the big winning hole, thereby reducing the disappointment felt by the player at the occurrence of a jackpot due to the display result being judged to be a "jackpot."

(Effect 02-31)
As shown in Figures 20-32 and 20-33, a series of second change effects are executed, which include: (2A) a change precursor effect in which a wave-like effect display is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5; (2B) a maximum action effect in which the movable body 02TM100 moves from the initial position → maximum action position → initial position; (2C) a character appearance effect in which an ally character 02TM30B associated with the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5; and (2D) a second corresponding display change effect (second action change effect) in which a second action effect is executed in which an ally character throws three bombs at a corresponding display (active display, pending display), thereby changing the display mode of the corresponding display (normal mode → red mode).

In this type of gaming machine, the second action effect of the second action change effect and the second corresponding display change effect of the second action change effect are executed by linking the movable body 02TM100, an image (ally character 02TM30B) related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100, and the corresponding display (pending display, active display), thereby increasing the interest when the corresponding display changes compared to when only a display that simply acts on the corresponding display or a display that changes the corresponding display is executed.

(Effect 02-32)
As shown in Figures 20-29 to 20-31 and 20-58, the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character appearing in the super reach A performance (challenge performance) are the same character. That is, the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character who succeeds in a challenge in the success performance in the challenge performance are the same character. Also, the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character appearing in the super reach D performance (battle performance) are the same character. That is, the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character who defeats an enemy character in the victory performance in the battle performance are the same character (not shown).

With such a gaming machine, the association between the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character displayed on the image display device 5 can create a sense of unity in the series of presentations, while also making the player realize that the ally character is an important character to the player, leading to the player developing a strong interest in and familiarity with the ally character.

(Effect 02-33)
As shown in Figure 20-41 (1), when the changing display of the first special pattern is being executed, the percentage (95%, 90%) of the first or second change performance being executed when the display state of the corresponding display (pending display, active display) changes to a red state is higher than the percentage (20%) of the first or second change performance being executed when the display state of the corresponding display changes to a blue state.

As shown in Figures 20-30 and 20-31, a series of first change effects are executed, which are comprised of: (1A) a change precursor effect in which a wave-like effect display is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5; (1B) an intermediate action effect in which the movable body 02TM100 moves from the initial position to the intermediate action position to the initial position; (1C) a character appearance effect in which an ally character 02TM30B associated with the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5; and (1D) a first corresponding display change effect (first action change effect) in which a first action effect is executed in which an ally character throws a bomb at a corresponding display, thereby changing the display mode of the corresponding display.

With such a gaming machine, it is possible to diversify the presentation that changes the display mode of the corresponding display, and it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the first action presentation to be executed when the movable body 02TM100 is operated.

(Effect 02-34)
As shown in Fig. 20-30 and Fig. 20-31, in the first change presentation, a first corresponding display change presentation (first action change presentation) is executed to change the display mode of the corresponding display by executing a (1D) first action presentation. Also, as shown in Fig. 20-32 and Fig. 20-33, in the second change presentation, a second corresponding display change presentation (second action change presentation) is executed to change the display mode of the corresponding display by executing a (2D) second action presentation.

As shown in FIG. 20-41 (1), when the display state of the corresponding display (pending display, active display) changes to a red state while the variable display of the first special pattern is being executed, the rate at which the second change performance is executed (50% to 80%) is higher than the rate at which the first change performance is executed (15% to 40%).

This type of gaming machine can diversify the action effects in which an ally character throws a bomb at a corresponding display, and can draw attention to the characters that appear in the action effects. In addition, by executing an action effect in which a highly visible ally character throws a bomb at a corresponding display, it is possible to create a sense of expectation that the corresponding display will change to a more promising form.

(Effect 02-35)
As shown in Figure 20-30 (4), when the movable body 02TM100 is moved from the intermediate performance position to the initial position, the first change performance (1C) character appearance performance is executed, and an ally character 02TM30B (in this example, an ally character similar to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

Also, as shown in FIG. 20-32 (4), when the movable body 02TM100 is moved from the maximum presentation position to the initial position, the second transformation presentation (2C) character appearance presentation is executed, and an ally character 02TM30B (in this example, an ally character similar to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) related to the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

With this type of gaming machine, the relationship between the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character 02TM30B can be emphasized, and the coordination between the movable body 02TM100 and the ally character 02TM30B can accentuate the presentation effect of the ally character.

(Effect 02-36)
As shown in Figures 20-30 and 20-31, (1A) a change precursor effect is executed in which a wave-like effect display is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5, (1B) an intermediate action effect is executed in which the movable body 02TM100 moves from the initial position → intermediate effect position → initial position in that order, (1C) a character appearance effect is executed in which an ally character 02TM30B associated with the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then (1D) a first corresponding display change effect (first action change effect) is executed in which a first action effect is executed in which the ally character throws a bomb at the corresponding display, thereby changing the display mode of the corresponding display.

As shown in Figures 20-32 and 20-33, (2A) a change precursor effect is executed in which a wave-like effect display is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5, (2B) a maximum movement effect is executed in which the movable body 02TM100 moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position to the initial position, (2C) a character appearance effect is executed in which an ally character 02TM30B associated with the ally character of the movable body 02TM100 is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then (2D) a second corresponding display change effect (second action change effect) is executed in which a second action effect is executed in which the ally character throws three bombs at the corresponding display, thereby changing the display mode of the corresponding display.

With such a gaming machine, the change precursor effect can make the player look forward to the movement of the movable body 02TM100 and the appearance of an ally character. It can also make the player interested in whether the first or second action effect will be executed.

[Other Modifications]
(1) In the above embodiment, (i) the display result of the variable display is "jackpot", based on which the display result is "jackpot", and (ii) the display result of the variable display is "small hit", based on which the display result is "small hit", based on which the display state is controlled to a small hit, and based on which the game medium can enter the V winning area in the V winning device, based on which the game medium enters the V winning area, based on which the game state is controlled to a jackpot. That is, the gaming machine in the above embodiment is a gaming machine having a pattern of "1 type + 2 type mixed machine" having a pattern of "1 type jackpot" and "2 type jackpot" as a pattern for controlling to a jackpot gaming state (i + ii), but it is not limited to such a form, and various effects shown in the above embodiment may be applied to gaming machines having different playability.

For example, the presentation shown in the above embodiment may be applied to a gaming machine having the gameplay characteristics of a [V-type high probability machine]. In a [V-type high probability machine], a normal state, which is a low probability state, and a high probability state (a gaming state in which high probability control is executed) are provided. In addition, high probability state A and high probability state B are provided. As jackpot types, a "normal jackpot" in which high probability control is not executed, an "a high probability jackpot" in which high probability control is executed, and a "b high probability jackpot" in which high probability control is executed are provided. Different tables are referenced when determining the jackpot type depending on the type of high probability state.

In the a probability change state, the next jackpot is confirmed, but there is a 75% chance that it will be a "probability change jackpot" and a 25% chance that it will be a "normal jackpot." On the other hand, in the b probability change state, the next jackpot is confirmed, and there is a 100% chance that it will be a "probability change jackpot." For example, in the a probability change state, there is a 75% chance that it will be a "10R probability change jackpot" and a 25% chance that it will be a "normal jackpot with no balls," and in the b probability change state, there is a 100% chance that it will be a "10R probability change jackpot." In other words, in the a time-saving state, the next jackpot is confirmed, but there is a 75% chance that prize balls are actually awarded and the time-saving state continues after the jackpot, while in the b time-saving state, the next jackpot is confirmed, there is a 100% chance that prize balls are actually awarded and the time-saving state continues after the jackpot.

For example, the following types of jackpots are provided as types of jackpots based on the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal state. Each type of jackpot has different contents regarding whether or not time-saving control is performed after the end of the jackpot game state and whether or not special variable control (a special variable control, b special variable control) is performed.
(X1) "3R normal jackpot" (40%)
The time-saving control is not executed, and the probability of winning is not executed either (X2) "10Ra probability of winning" (40%)
Time-saving control is executed, and a-variable control is also executed (X3) "10Rb variable jackpot" (20%)
Time-saving control is executed, and b-variable control is also executed.

a. The following types of jackpots are provided as jackpot types based on the changing display of the second special pattern in the special state.
(Y1) "Normal jackpot without balls" (25%)
The time-saving control is not executed, and the probability of winning is not executed either (Y2) "10Ra probability of winning" (75%)
Time-saving control is executed, and a-variable control is also executed.

b. The types of jackpots based on the changing display of the second special pattern in the special state are as follows:
(Z1) "10Ra special jackpot" (100%)
Time-saving control is executed, and a-variable control is also executed.

In such a [V-type variable-type] gaming machine, the various effects shown in the above embodiments may be applied.

(2) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the jackpot count display was displayed during a specified period during the jackpot game state or the time-saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the jackpot count display may be displayed during a period different from the specified period during the jackpot game state or the time-saving state.

For example, the jackpot count display may be displayed during the fanfare period or ending period of the jackpot game state, or during the period after the game develops into a super reach in the time-saving state.

(3) In the above embodiment, when the display result is a "normal small win" while controlled to the b time-saving state, an example is shown in which a variation display of a "high-speed normal small win" variation pattern, which has a common presentation mode with the variation pattern of a "high-speed miss", is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and when the display result is a "normal small win" while controlled to the b time-saving state, a variation display of a variation pattern of a presentation mode different from the variation pattern of a "high-speed miss" may be executed.

For example, when the display result is a "normal small win" while controlled in the b time-saving state, a "long normal small win" variation pattern may be set. The "long normal small win" variation pattern may have a variation display period of 10,000 ms, and may notify the occurrence of a "normal small win" in the b time-saving state by displaying a special pattern S (a decorative pattern including the letters "SAFE") stationarily in the pattern display area 5C of the image display device 5. By notifying the occurrence of a normal small win in the b time-saving state, it is possible to give the player a sense of gain that the game state in which the normal small win occurred was better off being the b time-saving state rather than the a time-saving state, which would fall into the normal state, and the special feeling of the b time-saving state can be further enhanced.

(4) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which when the display state of the corresponding display (active display, pending display) is changed to the blue state or the red state, either the first change presentation or the second change presentation can be used. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and a configuration may be adopted in which when the display state of the corresponding display is changed to the blue state or the red state, either the first change presentation or the second change presentation can be used.

For example, when the first change performance is executed, the corresponding display may be changed to a blue state at a rate of 100%, and when the second change performance is executed, the corresponding display may be changed to a red state at a rate of 100%. Also, even when the first change performance is executed, the corresponding display may not be changed, and even when the second change performance is executed, the corresponding display may not be changed.

(5) In the above embodiment, when the time-saving state is controlled, if the display result is a "normal small win", an example is shown in which a small win game state is configured so that a V win is extremely difficult, and the game state is dropped to the normal state without being controlled to the big win game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this form. When the time-saving state is controlled, if the display result is a "normal small win", a small win game state may be configured so that a V win is easy, and the game state may be controlled to the big win game state and then dropped to the normal state.

For example, even in the case of a "normal small win", the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is configured to open in the second opening pattern, generating a big win and awarding 10 rounds' worth of prize balls (1,500 balls). However, in this case of a "normal small win", the game is controlled to the normal state after the big win game state ends. With this configuration, prize balls can be awarded even in the case of a normal small win, reducing the disappointment felt by the player when the game is controlled to the normal state after the big win game state.

(6) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which, if a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs at the time of the first hit, 1500 prize balls are awarded at the time of the first hit, and 1500 prize balls are also awarded for a jackpot that occurs during the b time-saving state, but this is not limited to the above. If a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs at the time of the first hit, 1500 prize balls may be awarded at the time of the first hit, and fewer than 1500 prize balls may be awarded for a jackpot that occurs during the b time-saving state.

For example, if a "10Rb time-saving jackpot" occurs at the time of the first hit, 1500 prize balls will be awarded at the time of the first hit, and 1000 prize balls will be awarded for any jackpot that occurs during the b time-saving state. In this case, a 2500 notification may be executed at the time of the first hit to notify the player that a total of 2500 (1500 + 1000) prize balls will be awarded.

(7) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the speed of the unit pseudo-fluctuation increases when the display size of the third decorative pattern is a common display size in the accelerated pseudo-fluctuation performance, but the present invention is not limited to this form. In the accelerated pseudo-fluctuation performance, the display size of the third decorative pattern may be a different display size and the speed of the unit pseudo-fluctuation may be increased.

For example, in an accelerated pseudo-fluctuation presentation, as the speed of the unit pseudo-fluctuation increases, the display size of the third decorative pattern may become larger, or the display size of the third decorative pattern may become smaller.

(8) In the above embodiment, when the variable display of the "straight big hit" variable pattern is being executed, the third decorative pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R is hidden, while the small patterns in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r are displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this form. When the variable display of the "straight big hit" variable pattern is being executed, the third decorative pattern in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R may be hidden, and the small patterns in the small pattern display areas 5l, 5c, 5r may also be hidden.

(9) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the "ultra-high-speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern is displayed only when controlled to [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], but the present invention is not limited to this example, and the "ultra-high-speed miss" fluctuation pattern may be displayed when controlled to a presentation mode other than [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH].

For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the variation display of the "ultra-fast miss" variation pattern can be executed when controlled by [Dream Rush]. In this case, the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss" variation pattern is selected when controlled by [Dream Rush] is lower than the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss" variation pattern is selected when controlled by [ultra-fast Hyper Rush].

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which during a specified period when controlled by [Dream Rush], the display of fluctuations in the "ultra-fast miss" fluctuation pattern can be executed, and during a period different from the specified period when controlled by [Dream Rush], the display of fluctuations in the "ultra-fast miss" fluctuation pattern cannot be executed.

For example, during the period from the 1st to the 50th fluctuation when controlled by [Dream Rush], it is possible to display the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-fast miss", but during the period from the 51st fluctuation onwards when controlled by [Dream Rush], it is not possible to display the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-fast miss".

(10) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the mode switching determination value was set to 3, but this is not limited to the above, and the mode switching determination value may be set to a value other than 3.

For example, the mode switching determination value may be set to 5, which is greater than 3, or the mode switching determination value may be set to 2, which is less than 3.

(11) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the execution period of the fanfare effect (0.1 seconds) is shorter than the pattern determination period of the jackpot pattern (0.5 seconds) in both cases where a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the time-saving state a [Dream Rush] and where a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the time-saving state a [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH], but the present invention is not limited to this form. In both cases where a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the time-saving state a [Dream Rush] and where a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the time-saving state a [Super High-Speed HYPER RUSH], the execution period of the fanfare effect may be longer than the pattern determination period of the jackpot pattern.

For example, in both cases where a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the a time-saving state [Dream Rush] and where a jackpot occurs based on the variable display executed in the a time-saving state [Super high-speed Hyper Rush], the period during which the jackpot symbol is determined is set to 0.5 seconds and the period during which the fanfare effect is executed is set to 1.0 seconds, so that the period during which the fanfare effect is executed is longer than the period during which the jackpot symbol is determined.

(12) In the above embodiment, when the time-saving state [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH] is controlled, the number of reserved memories is at least 1 and the display result is determined to be a "miss," the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern is selected is about 90% (900/997), and the rate at which any other fluctuation pattern is selected is about 10% (97/997), so that the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern is selected is much higher than the rate at which any other fluctuation pattern is selected. However, this is not limiting, and the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern is selected does not have to be much higher than the rate at which any other fluctuation pattern is selected.

For example, when controlled in time-saving state a [ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH], if the number of reserved memories is at least 1 or more and the display result is determined to be a "miss," the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed miss" (0.2 seconds) fluctuation pattern is selected is 25%, and the rates at which fluctuation patterns A to D are selected as other fluctuation patterns are each around 20% and may be less than 25% (totaling 100%).

The characteristic part 02TM described above includes the following configurations:

The gaming machine according to the first embodiment includes:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to a player than the normal state;
A variable display means (a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing a performance;
A display means (image display device 5),
In the special state (time-saving state), when the number of times that the number of times that the number of times that the number of times that the number of times that the number of times that the number of times that the number of times that the number of times that the number of times that the number of times that the number of times that the number of times that the number of times that the number of times that the time that the number of times that the time that the number of times that the time that the time that the time that the time is that the time ... is that the time that the time that the time that the time that the time that the time is that the time that the time that the time that the time that the time that the time is that the time that the time that the time that the time that the time that the time is that the time that the time that the time that the time that the time is that the time that the time that the time that the time that the time that the time is that the time that the
The performance execution means is capable of displaying on the display means, when the number of times in the special state does not exceed the predetermined number of times, a specific display (jackpot count display 02TM300, "X more times until ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH") regarding the number of times of control of the advantageous state until the number of times exceeds the predetermined number of times.

With such a gaming machine, when the number of times the game is continuously controlled to the advantageous state exceeds a predetermined number, the variable display period becomes shorter than the predetermined period at a higher rate than when the number of times does not exceed the predetermined number, so the frequency with which the variable display is executed in the special state is increased, resulting in a more advantageous state for the player. Therefore, when the game machine is controlled to a special state, the player will have a high interest in how many times the game machine is controlled to the advantageous state, and will play with a strong desire to maintain the advantageous state. In addition, assuming that such control of the variable display is performed, a specific display is displayed regarding the number of times the game machine is continuously controlled to the advantageous state until the number of times the game machine is controlled to the advantageous state exceeds the predetermined number, thereby providing performance information that is in line with the player's interests, and making the game even more exciting when the game machine is controlled to the special state.

The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention is
A gaming machine according to the first embodiment,
The special states (time-saving states) include a first special state (a time-saving state) and a second special state (b time-saving state: invincible RUSH) which is more advantageous to the player than the first special state.
As the variable display means, a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern) on the display means is included,
When the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information becomes a specific display result (a combination of decoration patterns that becomes a jackpot pattern), the display can be controlled to the advantageous state,
The specific display results include a first specific display result (a combination of even number symbols), a second specific display result different from the first specific display result (a combination of odd number symbols excluding 7), and a third specific display result different from both the first specific display result and the second specific display result (a combination of 7 symbols),
The state control means includes:
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state (3R pattern normal jackpot) based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed while the game is controlled to the normal state becoming the first specific display result, the game is not controlled to the special state after the advantageous state ends (the game is controlled to the low base state without transitioning to the time-saving state after the 3R jackpot game state ends),
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state (pattern 10Ra time-saving jackpot) based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed while the game is controlled to the normal state becoming the second specific display result, the game can be controlled to the first special state after the advantageous state ends (the game can be controlled to the a time-saving state after the 10R jackpot game state ends),
When the game is controlled to the advantageous state (pattern 10Rb time-saving jackpot) based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed while the game is controlled to the normal state becoming the third specific display result, the game can be controlled to the second special state after the advantageous state ends (the game can be controlled to the b time-saving state after the 10R jackpot game state ends).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, there are cases where the machine is not controlled to a special state after the advantageous state ends and cases where it is controlled to a special state, based on the variable display executed when controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, when controlled to a special state, there are cases where it is controlled to a first special state and cases where it is controlled to a second special state, so that the player can be drawn to the display result of the variable display executed in the normal state.

The gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the present invention,
The specific display can be displayed on the display means in the special state (a time-saving state, b time-saving state) and the advantageous state,
The performance execution means includes:
When the number of times is updated, the mode of the specific display can be changed in stages (the jackpot count display 02TM300 can be updated in stages from the first stage to the third stage, and the remaining number of times of "X times left until the super-high speed HYPER RUSH" can be updated).
A gaming machine characterized in that when the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information executed while controlled to the normal state becomes the second specific display result or the third specific display result (a combination of odd-numbered symbols), the mode of the specific display can be changed at least a predetermined level (one level) when the game machine is controlled to the advantageous state (10R jackpot).

With this type of gaming machine, the number of times the game has been controlled to a consecutive advantageous state is related to the state of the specific display, so the player will pay attention to the state of the specific display, and because the state of the specific display changes based on the display results of the variable display executed in the normal state, the player's interest in the variable display executed in the normal state can be increased.

The gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention,
When the advantageous state is controlled based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed when controlled to the normal state being the third specific display result (7 symbols), the proportion of being controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display executed in the special state (b time-saving state: invincible RUSH) after the advantageous state is higher than when the advantageous state is controlled based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed when controlled to the normal state being the second specific display result (odd number symbols excluding 7) (in the a time-saving state, the normal state is controlled when a normal small win occurs and no V win is made, but in the b time-saving state, the normal state is not controlled even when a normal small win occurs and no V win is made, so the next big win is almost certain).
When the effect execution means is controlled to the advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information executed while controlled to the normal state becoming the third specific display result (7 symbols line-up), the effect execution means is capable of changing the mode of the specific display by more steps than the predetermined steps (updating by one step during a jackpot game state due to the 7 symbols line-up, and updating by another step during the next jackpot game state based on the variable display executed in the b time-saving state).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the degree of advantage the player has after the advantageous state ends is associated with the number of stages at which the specific display changes, further increasing the player's interest in the changes in the specific display.

The gaming machine according to the fifth aspect of the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 4,
When the advantageous state (10R jackpot) is controlled based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed while controlled to the normal state becoming the third specific display result (7 symbols lined up), it is possible to award a predetermined game value (1500 prize balls based on winning at the large prize opening) in the advantageous state, and when the advantageous state (10R jackpot) is controlled based on the variable display executed in the special state (b time-saving state: invincible rush) after the advantageous state, it is possible to award the predetermined game value (1500 prize balls based on winning at the large prize opening) in the advantageous state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the effect execution means is capable of executing a grant effect (a 3000 notification effect displaying the letters "3000 FEVER") suggesting that the specified game value will be awarded multiple times (1500 x 2 times) when controlled to the advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display of decorative identification information executed while controlled to the normal state becoming the third specific display result.

This type of gaming machine suggests that when the game machine is controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display executed in the normal state, the game value to be awarded will include the predetermined game value to be awarded in that advantageous state and the predetermined game value to be awarded in the advantageous state based on the variable display executed in the special state controlled after the advantageous state ends, so that the player's anticipation can be increased before the game machine is controlled to the special state.

The gaming machine according to the sixth aspect of the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 5,
The variable display means includes a special identification information variable display means (first special pattern display device 4A, second special pattern display device 4B) capable of variable display of special identification information (special pattern), and a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern),
The ornamental identification information variably displaying means is capable of variably displaying the ornamental identification information on the display means (image display device 5) in response to the variably displaying of the special identification information,
As the special identification information, there are a first special identification information (first special pattern) and a second special identification information (second special pattern),
When controlled to the normal state, the start condition for the variable display of the first special identification information is more likely to be satisfied than the start condition for the variable display of the second special identification information (in the normal state (low base state), the start condition for the first special pattern is more likely to be satisfied than the start condition for the second special pattern),
When controlled to the special state, the start condition for the variable display of the second special identification information is more likely to be satisfied than the start condition for the variable display of the first special identification information (in the time-saving state (high base state), the start condition for the second special pattern is more likely to be satisfied than the start condition for the first special pattern),
When the state control means is controlled to the advantageous state (10R jackpot) based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed while controlled to the normal state becoming the third specific display result (7 symbols line-up), when the state control means is controlled to the advantageous state (3R jackpot game state) based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed in response to the variable display of the first special identification information executed in the second special state (b time-saving state: invincible RUSH) after the advantageous state becoming the second specific display result (odd number symbols line-up other than 7), the state control means is capable of controlling to the second special state after the advantageous state ends (the b time-saving state (invincible RUSH) can be continued).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With such a gaming machine, even if the special state has been controlled, it is possible to prevent the special state from ending due to the execution of the variable display of the first special identification information, thereby preventing dissatisfaction among the player. In particular, when an irregular situation occurs in which the variable display of the first special identification information is executed despite the control being controlled to the second special state, and the game is controlled to an advantageous state based on this, by making it possible to control to the second special state, it is possible to ensure a sense of expectation that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state regardless of the type of special identification information.

The gaming machine according to the seventh aspect of the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 6,
The variable display means includes a special identification information variable display means (first special pattern display device 4A, second special pattern display device 4B) capable of variable display of special identification information (special pattern), and a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern),
The ornamental identification information variably displaying means is capable of variably displaying the ornamental identification information on the display means (image display device 5) in response to the variably displaying of the special identification information,
As the special identification information, there are a first special identification information (first special pattern) and a second special identification information (second special pattern),
When controlled to the normal state, the start condition for the variable display of the first special identification information is more likely to be satisfied than the start condition for the variable display of the second special identification information (in the normal state (low base state), the start condition for the first special pattern is more likely to be satisfied than the start condition for the second special pattern),
When controlled to the special state, the start condition for the variable display of the second special identification information is more likely to be satisfied than the start condition for the variable display of the first special identification information (in the time-saving state (high base state), the start condition for the second special pattern is more likely to be satisfied than the start condition for the first special pattern),
a state control means for controlling the game machine to the advantageous state (10R jackpot) based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed while controlled to the normal state becoming the third specific display result (7 symbols line-up), and when the state control means is controlled to the advantageous state (10R jackpot game state) based on the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information executed in response to the variable display of the first special identification information executed in the second special state (b time-saving state: invincible rush) after the advantageous state becoming the second specific display result or the third specific display result (7 odd symbols line-up), after the advantageous state ends, the game machine is characterized in that the state control means is capable of controlling the game machine to the first special state (a time-saving state: time-saving state which is controlled to the normal state when a normal small win occurs and no V is won) after the advantageous state ends.

With such a gaming machine, when an irregular situation occurs in which the first special identification information is variable displayed despite being controlled to the second special state, and the player is controlled to an advantageous state based on the second or third specific display result, by making it possible to control to at least the first special state, it is possible to ensure the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state regardless of the type of special identification information. Furthermore, by not controlling to at least the second special state when such a situation occurs, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage.

The gaming machine of the eighth means comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventh aspects,
The specific display (jackpot count display) can be displayed on the display means in a first emphasis mode (a mode in which only the first count portion is emphasized) and a second emphasis mode (a mode in which the first count portion and the second count portion are emphasized) that is emphasized more than the first emphasis mode (having higher visibility than the first emphasis mode),
If the number of times does not exceed the predetermined number of times (2),
When the number of times does not exceed a first number of times (1) (when the jackpot occurrence count value = 1), the specific display can be displayed on the display means in the first highlighted manner,
When the number of times exceeds the first number of times (1) (when the jackpot occurrence count value = 2), the specific display can be displayed on the display means in the second emphasis mode.

With this type of gaming machine, the appearance of the special display can indicate the number of times remaining until the number of times the game has been controlled to be in an advantageous state in succession exceeds a predetermined number, thereby increasing the player's interest in the special display.

The gaming machine of the 9th means comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to a player than the normal state;
A variable display means (a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols),
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (a big win pattern), the display can be controlled to the advantageous state.
When controlled to the special state (time-saving state a of ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), a variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result (losing pattern) different from the specific display result, and a special variable display in which the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of an "ultra-high-speed losing (0.2 seconds)" variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds) can be executed;
Among the variable displays whose display result executed when controlled to the special state is the predetermined display result, the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (when the number of reserved memories is at least 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variable patterns).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, during the period controlled to the special state, if the display result is a specified display result, there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected, so the player can play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a specific display result.

The gaming machine of the means 10 includes:
The gaming machine according to the 9th aspect of the present invention,
The state control means is capable of controlling the state to a predetermined state (a time-saving state in the Dream RUSH mode) after the advantageous state ends,
The state control means is capable of controlling the special state (a time-saving state of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) when the number of times the advantageous state has been continuously controlled exceeds a predetermined number (2),
In the predetermined state (when the jackpot occurrence count value is 1 or 2: in the time-saving state of the Dream RUSH mode), the special variable display is not executed (the random number corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" is not included in the fluctuation pattern determination table for miss).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, it is possible to distinguish between a predetermined state and a special state by the difference in the variable display period, allowing the player to place emphasis on the consecutive occurrence of advantageous states and to experience the uniqueness of the special state.

The gaming machine of means 11 comprises:
A gaming machine according to the method of claim 10,
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing a performance is provided.
The state control means is configured to control the special state (jackpot occurrence count value=3-10000: ultra-high speed HYPER) after the end of the advantageous state based on the variable display executed when the predetermined state (jackpot occurrence count value=1-2: a time-saving state of the Dream RUSH mode) is ended.
It can be controlled to a time-saving state in RUSH mode,
When the variable display means is controlled to the special state based on the variable display executed when it is controlled to the predetermined state, it is capable of executing a special variable display (a variable display of a variable display pattern of "entry variable miss (entry performance + ultra-high speed miss)" having a variable display period longer than that of the special variable display, as a first variable display whose display result becomes the predetermined display result (missing pattern) and having a variable display period of 30.2 seconds,
The variable display period of the special variable display is longer than the variable display period (any of the variable patterns of pseudo-variable miss (2.8 seconds), ultra-high-speed miss (0.2 seconds), Super Reach C miss (10 seconds), and Super Reach B miss (20 seconds)) of the first variable display executed when the player is again controlled to the special state after the end of the advantageous state based on the variable display executed while the player is controlled to the special state (when the time-saving state of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode a continues) and the display result becomes the predetermined display result (miss pattern);
The effect execution means is capable of executing a suggestion effect (accelerated pseudo-variation effect, mode start suggestion effect) that suggests that the game will be controlled to the special state in response to the special variable display (missed entry variation (30.2 seconds)).

With this type of gaming machine, the special variable display, which has a longer variable display period than the special variable display, can indicate to the player that a special state has been entered.

The gaming machine of means 12 includes:
The gaming machine according to the means 11,
The effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect during a first period (from the start of variation to 30 seconds from the start of variation) of a period including the variable display period of the special variable display (variable display period of 30.2 seconds) and the fixed period from the end of the special variable display to the start of the next variable display (pattern fixing period of 0.5 seconds), and is capable of displaying the predetermined display result (losing pattern) in a manner common to the special variable display (variably displaying decorative patterns in a manner common to the variable pattern of an ultra-high-speed losing pattern (0.2 seconds)) during a second period (30 seconds from the start of variation to 30.2 seconds from the start of variation (remaining variable display period of 0.2 seconds) + pattern fixing period of 0.5 seconds) after the first period.

With this type of gaming machine, the special variable display indicates to the player that a special state has been entered, and even though the actual variable display period is not as short as the special variable display, the player can feel that the variable display period has become extremely short since the first variable display after entering the special state.

The gaming machine of means 13 comprises:
A gaming machine according to the means 12,
A display means (image display device 5) is provided,
As the variable display means, a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern) on the display means is included,
The ornament identification information variable display means is
During the variable display period of the decoration identification information, a re-variable display (unit pseudo-variation) can be executed in which the decoration identification information is temporarily stopped and then variably displayed,
In the first period, it is possible to execute a plurality of re-variable displays (unit pseudo-variations), and it is possible to make the variable display period of the subsequent re-variable display shorter than the variable display period of the previous re-variable display (it is possible to execute an accelerated pseudo-variable performance in which the variable display equivalent period is gradually shortened to 7.5 seconds, 3.5 seconds, 2 seconds, 1 second, 0.7 seconds, 0.5 seconds, and 0.3 seconds);
The performance execution means notifies the user that a performance mode corresponding to the special state will be entered during the first period (from the start of fluctuation to 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation) (the mode start notification performance can be executed after the execution of the accelerated pseudo-fluctuation performance).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the first period can be effectively used to let the player know that the variable display period will become shorter when a special state is entered, and to notify the player that a transition to a presentation mode corresponding to the special state will occur.

The gaming machine of means 14 comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to a player than the normal state;
A variable display means (a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
A reserved storage means (RAM 102) for storing information on variable display that is not being executed as reserved storage;
A determination means (CPU 103 that executes a jackpot determination at the time of starting winning) that determines whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state before the variable display is executed;
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing a performance;
A display means (image display device 5),
As the variable display means, a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern) on the display means is included,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (a big win pattern), the display can be controlled to the advantageous state.
When controlled to the special state (time-saving state a of ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), a variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result (losing pattern) different from the specific display result, and a special variable display in which the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of an "ultra-high-speed losing (0.2 seconds)" variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds) can be executed;
Among the variable displays whose display result is the predetermined display result and which are executed when controlled to the special state, the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (at least when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variable patterns);
The display area of the display means includes a first display area (a central area of the screen including the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of decorative patterns) and a second display area (an area on the screen edge side excluding the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R) which is closer to the periphery of the screen than the first display area and is narrower than the first display area;
The performance execution means is capable of executing, on the display means, a suggestion performance (a first look-ahead performance, a second look-ahead performance) that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, with the reserved memory as the target, during a variable display prior to the reserved memory;
The suggestive performance includes a first suggestive performance (a first pre-reading performance in which a fixed icon including the character "HOLD" is superimposed on a decorative pattern that is not fixed and stopped) that is executed in the first display area and uses decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display being executed, and a second suggestive performance that is different from the first suggestive performance and is executed in the second display area (a second pre-reading performance in which a second pre-reading image including an image of seven patterns aligned is displayed);
The execution rate of the first suggestion effect is higher than the execution rate of the second suggestion effect (the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect is higher than the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With such a gaming machine, during the period controlled to the special state, if the display result is a predetermined display result, there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected, so the player can play comfortably without feeling frustrated that a variable display that does not result in a specific display result is being executed. In addition, the first suggestion effect, which is executed at a relatively high rate, is an effect that uses decorative identification information and is executed in the first display area that is likely to attract the player's attention, so that the player can feel the shortness of the variable display period in the special state while increasing the sense of expectation that the control will be in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 15 comprises:
A gaming machine according to a means 14,
There are multiple types of the first suggestion performance (first look-ahead performance, giant pattern performance), and there are multiple types of the second suggestion performance (second look-ahead performance, reserved look-ahead performance),
A gaming machine characterized in that the sum of the execution rates of all types of the first suggestive effects (the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect + the execution rate of the giant symbol effect) is higher than the sum of the execution rates of all types of the second suggestive effects (the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect + the execution rate of the reserved look-ahead effect), or the execution rate of any type of the first suggestive effect (the execution rate of the first look-ahead effect) is higher than the execution rate of any type of the second suggestive effect (the execution rate of the second look-ahead effect, the execution rate of the reserved look-ahead effect).

This type of gaming machine allows players to experience the shortness of the variable display period in a special state.

The gaming machine of means 16 includes:
The gaming machine according to the first or second aspect of the present invention,
In the special state (super-fast HYPER RUSH mode a time-saving state),
The variable display of the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) is different from the manner in which the decoration identification information scrolls up and down on the screen, and is a manner in which the decoration identification information moves from the back of the screen to the front (a manner in which the decorative pattern expands suddenly),
A gaming machine characterized in that, when variable displays resulting in the specified display result (losing pattern) are executed consecutively, decorative identification information corresponding to a subsequent variable display is displayed in a larger size and with a higher transparency than the decorative identification information stopped corresponding to a previous variable display, and then the size of the decorative identification information becomes smaller.

With this type of gaming machine, when variable displays that result in a predetermined display result are executed in succession, the period during which the decorative identification information is displayed within the range the player is focusing on can be extended, and the transparency of the decorative identification information changes within the range the player is focusing on, making the high speed of the variable display in a special state more apparent.

The gaming machine of means 17 comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to a player than the normal state;
A variable display means (a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
A display means (image display device 5),
As the variable display means, a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern) on the display means is included,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (a big win pattern), the display can be controlled to the advantageous state.
When controlled to the special state (time-saving state a of ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), a variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result (losing pattern) different from the specific display result, and a special variable display in which the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of an "ultra-high-speed losing (0.2 seconds)" variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds) can be executed;
Among the variable displays whose display result is the predetermined display result and which are executed when controlled to the special state, the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (at least when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variable patterns);
When the special variable display is executed continuously (when the "ultra-high-speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is continuous), it is possible to execute the special variable display using the decoration identification information used for the previous special variable display and the decoration identification information which becomes the display result of the special variable display (the combination of decorative patterns which is fixed and stopped in the previous ultra-high-speed miss variation expands once as it is and becomes more transparent when the subsequent ultra-high-speed miss variation starts, and then when the combination of decorative patterns shrinks, the combination of decorative patterns changes to the combination of decorative patterns which is fixed and stopped in the ultra-high-speed miss variation).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, when the display result is a predetermined display result during the period controlled to the special state, an extremely short variable display period is selected with a high probability, so the player can play comfortably without feeling frustrated that a variable display that does not result in a specific display result is being executed. In addition, the decoration identification information used for a special variable display executed earlier is also used for a special variable display executed later, allowing the player to experience a sense of speed through the special variable display while preventing the player from feeling overwhelmed by the excessive presentation information presented with the special variable display.

The gaming machine of means 18 comprises:
The gaming machine according to the seventeenth embodiment,
When the performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) is controlled to the special state (time-saving state a of ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), it is capable of displaying, in response to the stopped decoration identification information (decorative pattern), first additional information (in the third decorative pattern, a base pattern that is added to the background side of the number pattern and corresponds to the contour of the number pattern) that is added to the background side of the decoration identification information, and second additional information (in the third decorative pattern, a radial light effect display that is added to the background side of the number pattern and in front of the base pattern and is displayed on the entire screen) that emphasizes the decoration identification information and is displayed outside the area of the first additional information,
When the game is controlled to a predetermined state (time-saving state a in the Dream RUSH mode) different from the special state, at least the second additional information is not displayed in response to the stopped decoration identification information (neither the pedestal pattern nor the light ray effect display is displayed, or the pedestal pattern is displayed while the light ray effect display is not displayed).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the decorative identification information is more emphasized in the special state, making it easier to recognize the decorative identification information when the variable display period is short, and emphasizing the sense of speed when the decorative identification information is variably displayed.

The gaming machine of means 19 comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to a player than the normal state;
A variable display means (a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
a reserved memory means (RAM 102) for storing the number of variable displays for which a starting condition (a winning entry into a starting winning hole) has been established but a starting condition (the variable display of a special symbol has not been executed and the game is not controlled to either a big win game state or a small win game state) has not been established as a reserved memory number;
A display means (image display device 5),
As the variable display means, a decoration identification information variable display means (performance control CPU 120) capable of variable display of decoration identification information (decorative pattern) on the display means is included,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (a big win pattern), the display can be controlled to the advantageous state.
A variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result (losing pattern) different from the specific display result when the device is controlled to the special state (time-saving state a in the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) and the reserved memory number is not 0, and a special variable display in which the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of an "ultra-high-speed losing (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds) can be executed;
Among the variable displays whose display result is the predetermined display result and which are executed when the number of reserved memories is not 0 under the control of the special state, the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (when the number of reserved memories is at least 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variable patterns);
When the device is controlled to the special state and the number of reserved memories is 0, a special variable display having a longer variable display period than the special variable display can be executed as a variable display whose display result becomes the predetermined display result (when the number of reserved memories is 0, it is possible to select a "pseudo variable miss (2.8 seconds)" variable pattern having a longer variable display period than the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern);
This gaming machine is characterized in that in the special variable display, special control (constant speed pseudo-variable presentation) is possible in which variable display of decorative identification information (temporary stopping and re-variation of decorative patterns) is executed multiple times, the variable display period being the same as the variable display period of the decorative identification information when the special variable display is executed (a period of [variable display equivalent period 0.2 seconds + pattern confirmation stop equivalent period 0.5 seconds = 0.7 seconds]).

In this type of gaming machine, when the display result is a predetermined display result during the period controlled to the special state, an extremely short variable display period is selected with a high probability, so the player can play comfortably without feeling frustrated that a variable display that does not result in a specific display result is being executed. Also, when the number of reserved memories is 0, a special variable display with a long variable display period is executed, thereby avoiding as much as possible a situation in which a variable display is not being executed, and by making it appear to the player as if multiple special variable displays are being executed, the sense of speed in the special state is not lost.

The gaming machine of the means 20 includes:
The gaming machine of means 19,
Among the variable displays whose display result becomes the predetermined display result and which are executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 under the control of the special state (time-saving state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), the special variable display is executed at the highest rate (when the number of reserved memories is 0, the rate at which the "pseudo-variable miss (2.8 seconds)" variation pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variation pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variation patterns).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, it is possible to minimize the loss of frequency and speed of variable display in special states.

The gaming machine of means 21 comprises:
A gaming machine according to the invention as defined in claim 19 or 20,
When the reserved memory number is 0 and the special control is controlled to a predetermined state (a time-saving state in the Dream RUSH mode) different from the special state, the special control is not executed, and a predetermined variable display having a longer variable display period than the special variable display can be executed (the "pseudo variable miss (2.8 seconds)" variable pattern is not selected, and the "long variable miss (10 seconds)" variable pattern can be selected).
A gaming machine characterized by:

This type of gaming machine makes it possible to clarify the characteristics of the special variable display in a special state, and also to avoid situations where the variable display is not being executed as much as possible, even when the machine is controlled to a specified state.

The gaming machine of means 22 includes:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to a player than the normal state;
A variable display means (a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
A display means (image display device 5),
The special states include a first special state (a time-saving state in the Dream Rush mode) and a second special state (a time-saving state in the ultra-high-speed Hyper Rush mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the first special state.
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (a big win pattern), the display can be controlled to the advantageous state.
When controlled to the second special state, a variable display in which a display result is a predetermined display result (losing pattern) different from the specific display result, and a special variable display in which a variable display period is shorter than a fixed period from the end of a variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of a "super high-speed losing (0.2 seconds)" variable display pattern in which a variable display period is shorter than a pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds) can be executed;
Among the variable displays whose display result executed when controlled to the second special state is the predetermined display result, the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (at least when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-fast miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variable patterns),
a rate at which a variable display period during which the display result when the display is controlled to the second special state is the predetermined display result and is shorter than a predetermined period (1 second) is higher than a rate at which a variable display period during which the display result when the display is controlled to the first special state is the predetermined display result and is shorter than the predetermined period (1 second);
The performance execution means includes:
When the vehicle is controlled to the first special state, a first special display (a first logo display) that notifies the driver that the vehicle is controlled to the first special state can be displayed on the display means,
A first specific change effect (a first logo periodic change effect) that changes the mode of the first special display can be executed,
When the vehicle is controlled to the second special state, a second special display (second logo display) that notifies the driver that the vehicle is controlled to the second special state can be displayed on the display means,
A second specific change effect (a second logo periodic change effect) that changes the mode of the second special display can be executed,
The period during which the state of the second special display changes in the second specific change performance is shorter than the period during which the state of the first special display changes in the first specific change performance (the period during which the state of the second special display changes in the second logo cycle change performance (0.5 s) is shorter than the period during which the state of the first special display changes in the first logo cycle change performance (5 s)).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With such a gaming machine, the period controlled to the special state has a high probability of selecting an extremely short variable display period when the display result is a predetermined display result, so the player can play comfortably without feeling frustrated by the execution of a variable display that does not result in a specific display result. Also, in the second special state, in which the special variable display is executed with a high probability, the cycle in which the state of the second special display changes is short, so that the shortness of the variable display period in the second special state can be emphasized.

The gaming machine of means 23 comprises:
A gaming machine according to the means 22,
A game area (2) into which a game medium is shot,
The game area includes a first game area (left game area) and a second game area (right game area),
When the game is controlled to the normal state (low base state), it is more advantageous for the player to launch the game medium into the first game area than into the second game area (the start condition for the special symbol variation display is more likely to be satisfied),
When the special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state) is controlled, it is more advantageous for the player to launch the game medium into the second game area than into the first game area (the start condition for the special symbol variation display is more likely to be established),
In the first specific change performance, the state of the first special display changes from the first game area to the second game area (the light emission state changes periodically from the left end to the right end of the first logo display),
In the second specific change performance, the state of the second special display changes from the first game area to the second game area (the light emission state changes periodically from the left end to the right end of the second logo display).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With such a gaming machine, the first special display can notify the player that the machine is in the first special state and that the area into which the player should launch the gaming medium ball is the second gaming area, and the second special display can notify the player that the machine is in the second special state and that the area into which the player should launch the gaming medium is the second gaming area.

The gaming machine of means 24 includes:
A gaming machine according to the means 22 or 23,
A game area (2) into which a game medium is shot,
The game area includes a first game area (left game area) and a second game area (right game area),
When the special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state) is controlled, an instruction display (a first system display and a second system display including the characters "right hit" and a rightward arrow) instructing the player to launch the game medium into the second game area can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5);
The manner of the instruction display changes from the first game area to the second game area (the right-facing arrow periodically moves from left to right),
The rate of change of the state of the instruction display in the second special state (time-saving state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) is greater than the rate of change of the state of the instruction display in the first special state (time-saving state a of the DREAM RUSH mode) (the movement period of the arrow in the second system display is 0.3 seconds, and the movement period of the arrow in the first system display is 3 seconds).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the instruction display notifies the player of the area into which the gaming medium should be fired, and further emphasizes the shortness of the variable display period in the second special state.

The gaming machine of means 25 comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 22 to 24,
a storage means (RAM 102) for storing information (reserved information) regarding a variable display for which a start condition is satisfied but a start condition is not satisfied, and information (information regarding a variable display being executed) regarding a variable display for which a start condition is satisfied;
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing a performance,
The performance execution means includes:
A corresponding display (a reserved display, an active display) corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5),
When the special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state) is controlled, it is possible to rotate the corresponding display,
When controlled in the second special state (time-saving state a of ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), the rotation speed of the corresponding display is faster than when controlled in the first special state (time-saving state a of DREAM RUSH mode) (the rotation period of the second rotation corresponding display is 0.3 seconds, and the rotation period of the first rotation corresponding display is 3 seconds).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the corresponding display rotates to let the player know that it is being controlled to a special state, and when it is controlled to the second special state, the corresponding display rotates faster than when it is controlled to the first special state, further emphasizing the shortness of the variable display period.

The gaming machine of means 26 includes:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to a player than the normal state;
A variable display means (a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing a performance,
When the display result of the variable display (variable display of special symbols) becomes a specific display result (a jackpot symbol), the game can be controlled to the advantageous state.
When controlled to the special state (time-saving state a of ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), a variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result different from the specific display result, and a special variable display in which the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of a "ultra-high-speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds) can be executed;
Among the variable displays whose display results executed when controlled in the special state (time-saving state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) are the predetermined display results, the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (when the number of reserved memories is at least 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variable patterns);
The performance execution means includes:
When a variable display (variable display of special symbols) is executed, the display result of which becomes the specific display result (jackpot symbol), it is possible to stop displaying the decoration identification information (a "symbol matching performance" can be executed in which a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed when common decorative symbols are aligned),
In the special state (time-saving state of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), when a variable display (variable display of special symbols) is executed in which the display result becomes the specific display result (jackpot symbol), it is possible not to stop displaying the decorative identification information (in the case of a symbol jackpot, it is possible to start a round display accompanying the start of the jackpot game state without executing the "symbol matching performance").
A gaming machine characterized by:

With such a gaming machine, during the period controlled to the special state, if the display result is a predetermined display result, there is a high probability that an extremely short variable display period will be selected, so the player can play comfortably without feeling frustrated that a variable display that does not result in a specific display result is being executed. Also, in the special state, it is possible not to stop displaying the decorative identification information when controlled to an advantageous state, so that the flow of play from the variable display to the advantageous state is not interrupted, and the sense of speed of the variable display that triggers the advantageous state is emphasized, giving the impression that the player has been suddenly controlled to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 27 comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (CPU 103) capable of controlling a normal state (low base state) and a special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state) which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to a player than the normal state;
A variable display means (a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a performance control CPU 120) for executing variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols);
A performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) for executing a performance,
When the display result of the variable display (variable display of special symbols) becomes a specific display result (a jackpot symbol), the game can be controlled to the advantageous state.
When the display result of the variable display (variable display of the special pattern) becomes a special display result (small winning pattern), it is possible to control to a special state (small winning game state) different from the advantageous state,
The game medium can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the game medium passes through a specific area (V winning area 870) when the game medium is controlled to the special state,
When controlled to the special state (time-saving state a of ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), a variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result different from the specific display result, and a special variable display in which the variable display period is shorter than the fixed period from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display (a variable display of a "ultra-high-speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the pattern fixed period of 0.5 seconds) can be executed;
Among the variable displays whose display results are the predetermined display results and which are executed when controlled in the special state (time-saving state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), the rate at which the special variable display is executed is higher than the rate at which a variable display different from the special variable display is executed (when the number of reserved memories is at least 1 or more, the rate at which the "ultra-high-speed miss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern is selected is higher than the rate at which any other variable pattern is selected and is higher than the total selection rate of all other variable patterns);
The performance execution means includes:
When a variable display (variable display of special symbols) is executed, the display result of which becomes the specific display result (jackpot symbol), it is possible to stop displaying the decoration identification information (a "symbol matching performance" can be executed in which a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed when common decorative symbols are aligned),
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the special state (time-saving state of ultra-high speed HYPER RUSH mode a), when a variable display (variable display of special symbols) is executed in which the display result becomes the special display result (small win symbol), it is possible to statically display decorative identification information (in the case of a big win via a small win, it is possible to execute a "pattern alignment presentation"), and when a variable display (variable display of special symbols) is executed in which the display result becomes the specific display result (jackpot symbol), it is possible to not statically display decorative identification information (in the case of a big win symbol, it is possible to start a round display accompanying the start of the big win game state without executing a "pattern alignment presentation").

According to such a gaming machine, when the display result is a predetermined display result, during the period controlled to the special state, an extremely short variable display period is selected with a high probability, so the player can play comfortably without feeling frustrated that a variable display that does not result in a specific display result is being executed. Also, in the special state, when a variable display whose display result is a special display result is executed, the decorative identification information is frozen to clarify the flow of the game and to direct the player's attention to playing the game so that the gaming medium passes through the specific area. On the other hand, when a variable display whose display result is a specific display result is executed, the decorative identification information is not frozen to not interrupt the flow of the game from the variable display to the advantageous state, and the sense of speed of the variable display that is the trigger for the advantageous state is emphasized, giving the impression that the advantageous state has been suddenly controlled.

The gaming machine of means 28 comprises:
The gaming machine according to the means 26 or 27,
The state control means is capable of controlling the state to a predetermined state (a time-saving state in the Dream RUSH mode) different from the special state (a time-saving state in the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode),
In the predetermined state, when a variable display (variable display of special symbols) is executed in which the display result becomes the specific display result (jackpot symbol), it is possible to stop displaying the decorative identification information (it is possible to execute a "symbol matching performance" when the symbol jackpot occurs).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this type of gaming machine, the difference between the specified state and the special state can be clarified by the difference in the display of the decorative identification information, creating a sense of exclusivity when the display result in the special state becomes a specific display result.

The gaming machine of means 29 includes:
29. A gaming machine according to claim 28,
The device has a special variable means (special variable winning ball device 7) that is controlled to a first state (closed state) and a second state (open state) that is more advantageous to a player than the first state,
The execution rate of a variable display executed in the special state (time-saving state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode) in which the display result is the predetermined display result (losing pattern) and in which the variable display period is shorter than the predetermined period (variable display of an "ultra-high-speed loss (0.2 seconds)" variable pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than the pattern determination period of 0.5 seconds) is higher than the execution rate of a variable display executed in the predetermined state (time-saving state a of the DREAM RUSH mode) in which the display result is the predetermined display result (losing pattern) and in which the variable display period is shorter than the predetermined period;
After the start performance corresponding to the start of the advantageous state ends, the special variable means is controlled to the second state (the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the open state after the fanfare performance ends),
When the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display executed in the predetermined state and when the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display executed in the special state, the execution period of the start effect is shorter than the determination period of the specific display result (when a jackpot occurs based on a variable display executed in the time-saving state a of the Dream RUSH mode and when a jackpot occurs based on a variable display executed in the time-saving state a of the ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode, in either case, the execution period of the fanfare effect is shorter than the pattern determination period of the jackpot pattern).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With such a gaming machine, the period from when the advantageous state begins until the special variable means is controlled to the second state can be made even shorter when controlled to a predetermined state and when controlled to a special state, preventing the player from having to wait until the game value is awarded after the display result is notified. In particular, in the special state, control is executed to shorten the variable display period, so that the special variable means can be controlled to the second state immediately after the variable display ends, allowing the player to see a continuous flow from when the variable display begins until the game value is awarded in the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the means 30 includes:
29. A gaming machine according to any one of means 26 to 29,
a special variable means (special variable winning ball device 7) that is controlled to a first state (closed state) and a second state (open state) that is more advantageous to a player than the first state;
A special light emitting means (a light emitting device provided around the special variable winning ball device 7 or at the opening and closing part) is provided corresponding to the position of the special variable means,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a special display result (small winning pattern), it is possible to control to a special state (small winning game state) different from the advantageous state,
The game medium can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the fact that the game medium passes through a specific area (V winning area 870) when the game medium is controlled to the special state,
When the vehicle is controlled to the special state (high base state (time-saving state): a time-saving state, b time-saving state), the vehicle is controlled to the special state more frequently than when the vehicle is controlled to the normal state (low base state),
The performance execution means includes:
When controlled to the special state (time-saving state a in ultra-high-speed HYPER RUSH mode), the special light-emitting means is caused to emit light (the light-emitting device of the special variable winning ball device 7 is caused to emit light) when the display result of the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific display result (when a symbol jackpot occurs) and when the display result is controlled to the advantageous state based on the game medium passing through the specific area while controlled to the special state (when a jackpot via small jackpot occurs), and when the display result of the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific display result, in response to the special variable means being controlled to the second state, an instruction display (an indication of "Aim at the attacker!!") that instructs the special variable means to fire the game medium can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5).

With such a gaming machine, when controlled to a special state, the special light emitting means emits light and the instruction display is displayed in either the case where the machine is controlled to an advantageous state based on a special state or the case where the machine is controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result, so that the player is unlikely to notice that the machine has been controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result. In other words, even though the machine is controlled to a special state and is in a situation where it is easy to be controlled to an advantageous state via a special state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disappointed that an advantageous state based on a specific display result, which can occur with the same probability even in a normal state, has occurred.

The gaming machine of means 31 includes:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 30,
Movable parts (movable body 02TM100),
A display means (image display device 5);
A storage means (RAM 102) for storing information related to variable display;
A determination means (CPU 103) for determining whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
Corresponding information corresponding to the variable display (a reserved display corresponding to a variable display (reserved memory) that is not being executed, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed) can be displayed on the display means (image display device 5);
The display modes of the corresponding display include a first mode (normal mode) and a second mode (red mode) having a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first mode,
The performance execution means includes:
A state change effect is executed in which the corresponding display is changed from the first state to the second state based on a determination result of the determination means,
It is possible to execute a movable role performance (maximum movement performance) in which the movable role is moved from a first position (initial position) to a second position (maximum performance position);
After the movable role performance is performed, a related display (the same ally character 02TM30B as the ally character of the movable body 02TM100) related to the movable role can be displayed on the display means in response to moving the movable role from the second position to the first position;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is capable of executing an action effect in which the related display acts on the corresponding display (a second action change effect in which the ally character 02TM30C throws three bombs at a pending display or an active display), and also executing a behavior change effect targeting the corresponding display that is the target of the action effect (a second corresponding display change effect in which a pending display or an active display that is hit by a bomb changes from a normal behavior to a red behavior).

With this type of gaming machine, the action effects and state change effects are executed by linking the movable role, the related display associated with the movable role, and the corresponding display, which can increase the interest when the corresponding display changes compared to when only effects that act on the corresponding display or effects that change the corresponding display are executed.

The gaming machine of the means 32 includes:
A gaming machine according to the means 31,
The movable part (movable body 02TM100) has a shape that imitates a specific character (ally character),
The related display (ally character 02TM30B) includes an image of the specific character,
The performance execution means includes:
A battle performance in which the specific character fights (a battle performance in which a friendly character fights an enemy character) can be executed on the display means (image display device 5);
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the battle presentation is executed, a victory presentation in which the specific character wins (a victory presentation in which a friendly character wins against an enemy character) can be executed when the advantageous state is controlled.

With this type of gaming machine, the association between the movable parts and the specific character displayed on the display means can create a sense of unity in the series of performances, and the player can be made to recognize that the specific character is an important character, leading to the player developing a strong interest in and familiarity with the specific character.

The gaming machine of means 33 includes:
A gaming machine according to the means 31 or 32,
As a display mode of the corresponding display (pending display, active display), there is a predetermined mode (blue mode) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first mode (normal mode) and a lower expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second mode (red mode),
The performance execution means is capable of executing, as the performance change performance, a first performance change performance (a change from a normal performance to a blue performance) in which the corresponding display is changed from the first performance to the predetermined performance, and a second performance change performance (a change from a normal performance to a red performance) in which the corresponding display is changed from the first performance to the second performance,
the rate at which the action effect (the first action effect or the second action effect in which an ally character throws a bomb toward a pending display or an active display) targeted at the corresponding display that is the target of the second aspect change effect is executed when the second aspect change effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the action effect targeted at the corresponding display that is the target of the first aspect change effect is executed when the first aspect change effect is executed;
The performance execution means includes:
The movable part (movable body 02TM100) can be moved from the first position (initial position) to a predetermined position (intermediate performance position) between the first position and the second position (maximum performance position),
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to display the related display (ally character 02TM30B) in response to moving the movable role object from the specified position to the first position, execute the action effect in which the related display acts on the corresponding display, and execute the first state change effect targeting the corresponding display that is the subject of the action effect.

This type of gaming machine can diversify the appearance change effects, and can create a sense of anticipation for the action effects to be performed when the movable parts are activated.

The gaming machine of means 34 includes:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 31 to 33,
The effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) is capable of executing, as the effect, a first effect (a first effect in which an ally character throws one bomb toward a pending display or an active display) and a second effect having higher visibility than the first effect (a second effect in which an ally character throws three bombs toward a pending display or an active display);
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the second mode change performance is executed, the rate at which the second action performance is executed targeting the corresponding display that is the target of the second mode change performance is higher than the rate at which the second action performance is executed targeting the corresponding display that is the target of the first mode change performance is executed when the first mode change performance is executed.

This type of gaming machine can diversify the action effects and draw attention to the characters that appear in the action effects. In addition, by executing an action effect with high visibility, it is possible to create a sense of expectation that the corresponding display will change to a more promising state.

The gaming machine of means 35 includes:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 31 to 34,
The movable part (movable body 02TM100) has a shape imitating the face of the specific character (the ally character of the movable body 02TM100),
The related display (ally character 02TM30B) includes an image of the face of the specific character,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the performance execution means (performance control CPU 120) is capable of continuously displaying the related display (ally character 02TM30B) on the display means (image display device 5) when the movable reel is moving from the second position (maximum performance position) to the first position (initial position) after the movable reel performance is executed, and when the movable reel has moved to the first position (initial position).

This type of gaming machine can emphasize the relationship between the movable parts and the related displays, and by linking the movable parts with the related displays, it is possible to highlight the dramatic effects of specific characters.

The gaming machine of means 36 includes:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 31 to 35,
The performance execution means (performance control CPU 120)
As the action effect, a first action effect (an effect in which an ally character throws one bomb toward a reserved display or an active display) and a second action effect (an effect in which an ally character throws three bombs toward a reserved display or an active display) having higher visibility than the first action effect can be executed,
After executing a suggestion performance (change precursor performance) that suggests that the action performance will be executed, the movable role performance (intermediate action performance) is executed, and the first action performance can be executed.
The gaming machine is characterized in that, after executing the suggestion performance, the movable role performance (maximum movement performance) is executed, and the second action performance is executed.

With this type of gaming machine, the suggestive effects can make the player look forward to the movement of the movable role piece and the appearance of a specific character. It can also make the player interested in whether the first or second action effect will be executed.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 9 Game effect lamp 11 Main board 12 Performance control board 31B Push button 31B
32 Movable body 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position,
The game control means includes:
It is possible to determine whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state based on the entry of the game medium into the starting area,
A variable display of the specific identification information is possible,
Based on the result of the judgment, it is possible to determine one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command can be transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command can be transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command can be transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command can be transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means includes:
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state will be controlled in a first reach,
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state will be controlled in a second reach,
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The execution time of the title display corresponding to the first reach is different from the execution time of the title display corresponding to the second reach,
The title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach are
A first part from when a title display corresponding to the first reach or a title display corresponding to the second reach starts to when the title display is displayed in a specific area;
A second part in which a title display corresponding to the first reach or a title display corresponding to the second reach is displayed in the specific area;
and a third part that ends the display of a title display corresponding to the first reach or a title display corresponding to the second reach,
The display means is
displaying a title display corresponding to the first reach such that the second part is longer than the first part and the third part, and the first part is longer than the third part;
displaying a title display corresponding to the second reach such that the second part is longer than the first part and the third part, and the first part is longer than the third part,
The development pattern to the first reach includes a first pattern in which the movable body develops by moving, and a second pattern in which the movable body develops without moving,
The development pattern to the second reach includes the first pattern and the second pattern,
In the first reach of the first pattern, the movable body moves from the first position to the second position before a title display corresponding to the first reach starts, and after the movable body located at the second position moves to the first position, the title display corresponding to the first reach is displayed;
In the second reach of the first pattern, the movable body moves from the first position to the second position before a title display corresponding to the second reach starts, and after the movable body located at the second position moves to the first position, a title display corresponding to the second reach is displayed;
The second reach has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach,
the display means displays the title display corresponding to the second reach in a larger font size than the title display corresponding to the first reach,
In the first reach and the second reach, a light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table configured with brightness data,
When the title display corresponding to the first reach is executed, a title display brightness data table corresponding to the first reach is used;
In the introductory part after the title display corresponding to the first reach, a brightness data table for the first reach introductory part is used,
When the title display corresponding to the second reach is executed, a title display brightness data table corresponding to the second reach is used;
In the introductory part after the title display corresponding to the second reach, a luminance data table for the second reach introductory part is used,
a state control means for controlling a normal state and a special state which is different from the advantageous state and is more advantageous to a player than the normal state;
The special states include a first special state and a second special state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special state;
The performance control means includes:
When the vehicle is controlled to the first special state, a first special display indicating the name of the first special state can be displayed on the display means,
A first specific change performance that changes the mode of the first special display can be executed,
When the vehicle is controlled to the second special state, a second special display indicating the name of the second special state can be displayed on the display means.
A second specific change performance that changes the mode of the second special display can be executed,
A gaming machine , wherein the period during which the appearance of the second special display changes in the second specific change presentation is shorter than the period during which the appearance of the first special display changes in the first specific change presentation .

Images